1030 Manualc

Aurora 1030 Combustion
TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual
151 Graham Road · P.O. Box 9010 · College Station, Texas 77842-9010
Telephone (979) 690-1711 · FAX (979) 690-0440 · www.oico.com · oimail@oico.com
Notice
The information contained in this document may be revised without notice.
OI Analytical shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
material.
No part of this document may be reproduced, photocopied, or translated to another

language without the prior written consent of OI Analytical.
Rev. 5.0 — August 2016
Ascarite is a registered trademark of Arthur H. Thomas Company.

Drierite is a registered trademark of W.A. Hammond Drierite Company Ltd.
Lexan is a registered trademark of General Electric Corporation.
Luer-Lok is a registered trademark of Becton-Dickinson Corporation.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
PEEK is a registered trademark of Victrex PLC.
Slo-Blo is a registered trademark of Littlefuse Corporation.
Snoop is a registered trademark of Nupro Company.
Swagelok is a registered trademark of Crawford Fittings Company.
Teflon, Tefzel, and Viton are registered trademarks of E.I. DuPont de Nemours, Inc.
Texwipe is a registered trademark of Texwipe Corporation.
Tygon is a registered trademark of Saint-Goban Performance Plastics
OI Analytical Part Number 322704
Publication 21580816
Copyright 2016 OI Analytical
ii
Limited Warranty
OI Analytical warrants each OI Analytical manufactured product against defects in
materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one year.
Equipment installed by OI Analytical is warranted from the installation date; all other
equipment is warranted from the ship date. If purchaser schedules or delays installation
more than 90 days after delivery, then the warranty period starts on the 91st day from
date of shipment. This warranty extends only to the original purchaser. OI Analytical
will, at its option, repair or replace equipment that proves to be defective during the
warranty period, provided the equipment is returned to OI Analytical at the expense of
the purchaser.
Consumables, expendables, and parts are warranted for 30 days and are not covered
under extended warranties or service contracts.
OI Analytical warrants for a period of one year from the date of delivery: (i) the
Software, when installed and used with an OI Analytical-recommended hardware
configuration, will perform in substantial conformance with the documentation
supplied with the Software; and (ii) the physical media on which the Software is
furnished will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use.
• This warranty shall not apply to defects originating from, but not limited to, the
following:
• Improper maintenance or operation by the purchaser;
• Purchaser-supplied accessories or consumables;
• Modification or misuse by the purchaser;
• Operation outside the product’s environmental and electrical specifications;
• Software, interfacing, parts, or supplies not supplied by OI Analytical;
• A computer not meeting the minimum specifications recommended by
OI Analytical;
• Improper or inadequate site preparation;
• Purchaser-induced contamination or leaks.
THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS, OR ADEQUACY FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE. OI ANALYTICAL SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
Any service requests or questions should be directed to the OI Analytical Customer

Support Center at (800) 336-1911 or (979) 690-1711.
iii
iv
Chapter 1 Introduction
OI Analytical’s Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer (Aurora) is a totally automated system
for analyzing aqueous samples for total organic carbon (TOC) and total inorganic
carbon (TIC). The Aurora uses combustion technology to analyze samples containing
100 ppb to 30,000 ppm of organic carbon. The Aurora supports USEPA-approved
methods, Standard Methods, ASTM, DIN/ISO/CEN, and EU methods. The Aurora
may analyze up to 300 samples per 24-hour period, with a single Aurora capable of
analyzing in excess of 100,000 samples per year.
System Design
All OI Analytical Aurora TOC Analyzers are available as a stand-alone system with an
integral Microsoft® Windows® CE computer with touchscreen control and include
basic security and auditing features for Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 21 Part 11
data control requirements. Additionally, Auroras can be controlled from a Windows PC
using the data gathering system (DGS) and PC workstation software. Further, the
optional ATOC reporting and security and auditing software used in conjunction with the
DGS software provide advanced security and auditing features compliant with CFR 21
Part 11 data control requirements.
This manual describes Aurora operation using the Windows CE computer and
touchscreen controls. As such, references to on-screen operations are seen as Press.
When using a unit connected to a Windows PC, these instructions should be read as
Click.
Features
The Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer offers these features:
• Determines TOC quantitatively in water, wastewater, chemical solutions, reagents,

acids, and caustics.
• Generates calibration standards from a single stock standard with up to
12 calibration points available.
• Automated syringe pump delivers samples and reagents quickly and accurately, as
required by the analysis.
• Adds priority samples to a current sequence.
• Appends samples to a current sequence.
• Lets operators select multiple-range operation to prevent over- or under-ranging.
• Analyzes samples with suspended solids (up to 500-µm diameter) without filtration
prior to analysis. The method allows quantitative oxidation of particulates for a
more accurate TOC value.
• Allows operators to add known carbon mass spikes to samples for standard
addition verification of TOC recovery in difficult samples such as acids, caustics,
brines, and chemical reagents.
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 1

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
• Sample-wetted parts consist entirely of inert materials to minimize carbon

contamination and carryover during sample introduction, digestion, and purging.
• Provides sample path parts that are chemically compatible with most solvents,
acids, and bases.
• Design allows for easy maintenance and service by employing:
• Removable instrument covers for electronic and mechanical components.
• Field-serviceable components.
• Compartmentalized pneumatic and electrical components.
• Power status indicator lamps for valves, heaters, and other components for easy
troubleshooting.
• Analysis results directly display in the results screen or on a printer as ppm C,
ppb C, and µg C for TC, TOC, NPOC, and TIC analysis.
• Retains analysis conditions in memory, including blank values and the calibration
constant, without using external power.
• Allows operators to select analysis conditions or use default conditions.
• Displays on-screen analysis conditions including times, temperatures, and volumes.
• Takes samples automatically from a bottle, vial, or flowing stream to allow
programmed sampling of process streams and unattended replicate sampling in the
laboratory.
• Built-in timer samples and analyzes at specified time intervals, up to once every
24 hours.
• Increments the sample ID number for each successive sample. The counter may be
reset.
• Handles difficult sample analyses with user-specified TC, TOC, and TIC sample
reaction and detection times. Low and high concentration TC, TOC, and TIC alarm
set points may be entered, displayed on the screen, and integrated with external
devices.
• Parallel reactor chamber option available for high throughput sample processing.
• At-line configurations available for process and continuous monitoring.
Specifications
The Aurora complies with these standards:
• ASTM D7573 DIN/ISO8425/CEN EN 1484

• Standard Method 5310B
• USEPA 415.1
• USEPA 415.3
• USEPA 9060, (D/DBPR)
Principal Applications
• Industrial process water
• Groundwater
• Drinking water
• Cooling water
• Seawater
• Wastewater

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
General Specifications
Table 1.1 lists the general specifications for the Aurora 1030C.
Table 1.1. General Specifications for Aurora 1030C
Specification Description
Dimensions 43 cm (17 in) H x 46 cm (18 in) W x 61 cm (24 in)

Weight 17.2 kg (38 lbs)
Alarm Relay 10 A/240 VAC
Contacts 8 A/24 VDC
Communications Ethernet/LAN
Serial communications (RS-232C) for optional printer
only
Auxiliary output for optional equipment
Optional analog signal and discrete alarms
Environment Indoor use only
Temperature: 10 – 45 °C
Relative Humidity: 80% max up to 31 °C, 50% max 32 -
40 °C
Altitude: <2000m
Performance Specifications
Table 1.2 lists the performance specifications for the Aurora 1030C.
Table 1.2. Performance Specifications for the Aurora 1030C
Analysis Modes NPOC internal

NPOC external
TC, TIC, TOC (TC-TIC), TIC&NPOC
Range* 100 ppb–30,000 ppm C
*Sample introduction, cleanliness of sample containers,
gas purity, and operator skill affect analysis range and
precision.
Precision* Greater of 3% RSD or ±2 ppb, whichever is greater.
*Sample introduction, cleanliness of sample containers,
gas purity, and operator skill affect analysis range and
precision.
Linearity ±2% FS or 2% relative, whichever is greater

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Table 1.2. Performance Specifications for the Aurora 1030C (Continued)
Analysis Time TOC and TIC: from 3–9 minutes; analysis time depends
on the mode of operation.
Sample Introduction Manual (Sipper), On-line, Vial autosampler.
Sample Size 10 µL–1.8 mL.
Power and Gas Requirements

Table 1.3 lists the power and gas requirements for the Aurora 1030C.
Table 1.3. Power and Gas Requirements for Aurora 1030CW
Requirement Description
Power 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz

230 VAC, 50/60 Hz (optional)
Fuse rating: 6.3A 250VAC GDC
Maximum 1000VA (1030C)
Maximum 430VA (1030W)
Gas Oxygen: 99.99% purity or better, 345–415 kPa (50–60 psig)
Air: CO2-free, 345–415 kPa (50–60 psig)
Consumption: <700 mL per minute in normal operation*
* Purge gas consumption with the new Solid State NDIR detector is minimal and
should not result in an increase in day-to-day operation.
Computer Requirements
Table 1.4 lists the computer requirements for the Aurora 1030C.
Table 1.4. Computer Requirements for Aurora 1030C
Parameter Minimum Spec Recommended Spec
Computer type any Windows compatible Business-class workstation

Processor speed 1 GHz 2 GHz
Memory (RAM) 512 MB 2 GB
Disk space 100 MB free 60 GB drive
Optical drive Any CD-ROM compatible Any read-write optical drive

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Table 1.4. Computer Requirements for Aurora 1030C (Continued)
Parameter Minimum Spec Recommended Spec
Operating system * Windows 2000 Pro or Windows XP Pro or

XP Pro Windows 7 Business (See
Note 1)
Graphics SVGA XGA
Network 10-Base-T Ethernet 10/100/1000-Base-T
Communications Ethernet (see Note 2)
Serial One RS-232 or USB One RS-232 or USB (see
communications Note 3)
Printer Any Windows compatible Any Windows compatible
NOTE 1: OI does not recommend the use of any Home version of Microsoft Windows;
e.g., Windows XP Home, Windows Vista Home, or Windows 7 Home.
NOTE 2: TOC 1030 Aurora units feature a 10-Base-T Ethernet port; therefore, the PC
must have a 10-Base-T compatible NIC for direct connections, or the Aurora
may be connected to a 10-Base-T compatible hub, switch, or router.
A second NIC may be utilized to connect a 1030 TOC to the PC while

keeping the TOC unit segregated from a corporate network.
NOTE 3: If no RS-232 port is available, a USB-to-serial adapter may be used if

required (DA 3500, CN 3100, and FS IV systems require serial
communications).
Options
The following options are available for the Aurora 1030C:
• 1088 Rotary Autosampler

• 1096+ XYZ Autosampler
• Electronic Flow Control (EFC)
• Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module
• External Expansion I/O Module
• TNb (total bound nitrogen) Module
• Serial inkjet printer (PN 322722)
These components are discussed in detail in Chapter 6, “Aurora 1030C Optional

EquipmentAurora 1030W Optional Equipment” on page 213.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Safety Information
The Aurora 1030 meets the European Union directives for emissions and safety as
noted in the Declaration of Conformity for this instrument as tested and documented by
a certified independent laboratory.
OI Analytical designed and tested the Aurora in accordance with recognized safety
standards for indoor use. Using the instrument in a manner not specified by the
manufacturer may impair the instrument’s safety protection. Whenever the safety
protection of the Aurora has been compromised, disconnect the instrument from all
power sources and secure the instrument against unintended operation.
The exposure to personal hazards for the Aurora and the methodology employed are not
precisely defined. Installation and operation instructions in this manual are believed to
lead to thoroughly proper and safe operation. Each laboratory must maintain the Aurora
in a condition suitable for safe use.
Operator Precautions
For operator safety, pay attention to WARNING and CAUTION statements throughout
this manual.
• WARNING indicates a condition or possible situation that could result in physical

injury to the operator.
• CAUTION indicates a condition or possible situation that could damage or destroy

the product or the operator’s work.
Warnings and precautions in this manual or on the instrument must be followed during
operation, service, and repair of the instrument. Failure to follow these warnings and
precautions violates the safety design standards and intended use of the instrument.
OI Analytical is not liable for the operator’s failure to comply to warnings and
precautions.
The Aurora must be connected to the AC power supply mains through a three-
conductor power cord with the third wire firmly connected to an electrical ground at the
power outlet.
Any power cord used shall have the same or greater power rating as the cord supplied
with the instrument. Position the 1030 or 1030/1088 so there is easy access to the power
switch.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Any interruption of the grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective earth

terminal could cause a shock that could result in personal injury.
General Precautions
NOTE: Making any unauthorized modifications or substitutions voids the warranty.
• Disconnect the AC power cord before removing any covers.

• Replace or repair faulty or frayed insulation on power cords.
• Perform periodic leak checks on supply lines, fittings, and pneumatic plumbing.
• Arrange gas lines so they cannot become kinked, punctured, or otherwise damaged,
and will not interfere with foot traffic.
• Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the main power cord before using a
liquid solution to locate leaks.
• Do not restrict airflow on the back or sides of the unit.
• Wear safety glasses to prevent possible eye injury.
• Do not replace blown fuses inside the Aurora. Only trained service personnel
should access the interior right bay of the Aurora.
• Do not perform unauthorized modifications to the instrument.
• Use only original OI Analytical parts on this instrument.
• Verify that all heated areas have cooled before handling or wear adequate hand
protection to prevent burns.
Chemical Precautions
• The toxicity or potential health risk of chemicals used in this method are not
precisely defined. However, treat all chemicals and samples used as a potential
health risk. Minimize exposure to the materials. Each laboratory must maintain
awareness of OSHA regulations regarding safe handling of chemicals and
associated equipment used in this method.
• Hydrochloric acid is a corrosive and toxic material. Handle pure material and
diluted solutions of this compound in a manner consistent with OSHA regulations.
Wear appropriate skin and eye protection when handling any materials containing
this substance.
• Potassium biphthalate and sodium carbonate are chemical irritants to human skin
and eyes. Handle pure materials and stock solutions of these compounds in a
manner consistent with OSHA regulations. Wear appropriate skin and eye
protection when handling any materials containing these substances. Avoid
exposure to fumes or dust.
• Oxygen is an oxidizer. Handle and store this gas and compressed gas cylinder in a
manner consistent with OSHA regulations. Avoid exposing the gas and gas cylinder
to open flames and easily ignited materials. Avoid exposure to the pure gas except
under approved, controlled conditions. Avoid prolonged exposure to high
concentrations of this gas.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Compressed Gas Cylinders Precautions

• Store and handle compressed gases strictly in accordance with relevant safety
codes.
• Fasten all cylinders securely to an immovable structure or permanent wall.
• Store or move cylinders only in a vertical position. Do not move or transport
cylinders with regulators attached.
• Use only approved regulators and tubing connections.
• Connect cylinders to instruments with pressure ratings significantly greater than the
highest outlet pressure from the regulator.
Safety Symbols
The following symbols may be located on the instrument.
Warning/Caution, see accompanying instruction for more

information.
Indicates a hot surface.
Indicates hazardous voltages.
Indicates earth (ground) terminal.
Indicates the OFF position on the power switch.
Indicates the ON position on the power switch.
Operating Parameters
Operating the Aurora requires the user to define three sets of parameters: a hardware
configuration, an analysis method, and a sequence for processing samples.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Hardware Configuration
The hardware configuration defines the hardware options and expected operating
parameters. The configuration also details sample introduction technique, volume of
installed syringe, installed optional equipment, and the default instrument settings,
including temperatures and pressures. See Chapter 5, “Defining and Managing
Configurations” on page 136 for details of configuration options.
Analysis Method
The analysis method defines how the installed hardware is used to perform the analysis.
The calibration, including pass/fail criteria, is subordinate to the method. See Chapter 5,
“Defining and Managing Methods” on page 145 for detailed information on creating a
method to meet analysis needs. See Chapter 13, “TOC Method and Calibration
Definition” on page 438 in this chapter for general guidelines for creating a method.
When creating a method on the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer, there is a wide choice of
modes: TIC only, NPOC only (with internal or external sparging), TIC & NPOC, TC,
and TOC (TC–TIC). “Definitions” on page 9 in this chapter explains the processes
related to these modes to help the operator choose the best mode for each analysis.
Sample Processing Sequence

The sample processing sequence defines the order that calibrations, blanks, and
samples are processed. The sequence also determines which methods, sample types,
and customer IDs are used for individual samples. See Chapter 13, “Sequence
Development” on page 445 in this chapter for general guidelines for creating a
sequence.
Definitions
Figure 1.1 is a breakdown of the Total Carbon (TC) into the various forms present in a
sample. Table 1.1 defines the terms used in the figure and throughout the manual.
Total Carbon (TC)
Total Inorganic Carbon (TIC) Total Organic Carbon (TOC)
Dissolved Bicarbonate Carbonate Nonpurgeable Purgeable

Carbon Ion, HCO3- Ion, CO3- Organic Organic
Dioxide Carbon (NPOC) Carbon (POC)
CO (aq)
2
Dissolved Suspended
Organic Carbon Organic Carbon
(DOC) (SOC)
Figure 1.1. Total Carbon Breakdown

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Table 1.5. Carbon Definitions
TC All water contains carbon. The total amount of carbon (TC) that is
present in a water sample can be defined in several ways. Using the
most precise definition, the total amount of carbon in any water sample
is equal to the sum of all the inorganic carbon (total inorganic carbon
(TIC)) and all of the organic carbon (total organic carbon (TOC))
present (Equation 1.1).
Equation 1.1. TC = TOC + TIC
TIC The inorganic carbon in a water sample is an uncomplicated parameter.

It is the carbon in any carbon-containing compound (Ccpd) that purges
from water that has been acidified (H+). The carbon purges as carbon
dioxide (CO2), as described in Equation 1.2. The Ccpd included as TIC
are metal carbonates (e.g., Na2CO3), metal bicarbonates (e.g.,
NaHCO3), and dissolved CO2, which is usually present in water.
Equation 1.2. 70 °C
H2O + Ccpd → CO2 ↑
H+
DOC Dissolved organic carbon is determined by analyzing aqueous samples

filtered through 0.45 µm filters.
SOC Suspended organic carbon is determined by analyzing particles
captured by filtration of aqueous samples through a 0.45 µm filter.
SOC is sometimes called particulate organic carbon.
POC Purgeable organic carbon is organic carbon purged from solution by a
stream of gas under a specific set of purging conditions. It can be a gas
or insoluble liquid, which is Purgeable (Volatile) and contains organic
carbon.
NPOC Non-purgeable organic carbon is carbon in a sample that is not
converted to CO2 by acidification and remaining in solution after the
sample was acidified and sparged to remove inorganic carbon.
RB Reagent blank is the detector response in area counts generated from an
analysis sequence (with reagents) without introduction of a sample or
standard. The response is due to carbon contamination in the reagents,
gas digestion vessel, or tubing. A standard is any sample with a known
amount of added carbon.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
RW Reagent water blank is the response of the analyzer to the carbon

content of water used to prepare the calibration standards when it is
analyzed.
Note: Deionized water (DI water) is typically used as RW. When the DI
water is used to prepare reagents or standards, it is referred to as RW.
When DI water is processed as a sample, it is referred to as DI water.
Understanding the various components of total carbon allows the user
to select the appropriate measurement to meet the user’s goals. This
understanding combined with an appreciation of the techniques used
by the analyzer for each mode supports the analyst’s choice for the
appropriate analysis mode to obtain usable data for the purpose at hand.
TOC Total organic carbon can be more difficult to define because what is
actually being analyzed and what the researcher should call it can be
confused. Total organic carbon in water is the sum of the amount of
elemental carbon that is chemically present as any organic compound.
These organic compounds physically exist in water as one of the three
general states shown below.
TOC vs. Total organic carbon vs. non-purgeable organic carbon is the method
NPOC employed by an instrument or instrument mode to determine the
fractions being measured. Automated instrumentation using single-
aliquot same-sample analysis to measure for TOC are in fact measuring
the discrete organic carbon fraction defined as NPOC, the organic
carbon in water that cannot be purged from the solution. This is
represented by Equation 1.3.
Equation 1.3. NPOC = DOC + SOC
When compared to TOC, NPOC is missing the organic carbon in water

that can be purged from the solution, as represented in Equation 1.4.
Equation 1.4. TOC = POC + NPOC
Mode State
POC Gas or insoluble liquid

DOC Miscible/dissolved
SOC Particulate (solid)
When relating these parameters to the analysis performed by the

Aurora, remember that, by definition, the value labeled as TOC by the
instrument is actually NPOC. When the POC fraction in the water is
zero, then Equation 1.5 is true.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Equation 1.5. TOC  NPOC
When the POC fraction is very small, then Equation 1.6 is true.
Equation 1.6. TOC  NPOC
Equation 1.5 and Equation 1.6 are indicative of most waters.
Analytical Procedures
The following analytical procedures are employed by the Aurora 1030C TOC
Analyzer: total inorganic carbon, total inorganic carbon plus non-purgeable organic
carbon, non-purgeable organic carbon, total carbon, and total organic carbon by
subtraction (generated from total carbon minus total inorganic carbon). Table 1.6
defines these procedures.
Table 1.6. Analytical Procedures
Procedure Description
Inorganic A syringe introduces the sample into the reaction chamber. A metered
Carbon amount of hydrochloric acid is added, typically 2–5% of the sample
(TIC) volume. When the sample reaches a pH of less than 2, inorganic carbon
is released. After a preset react time, the reaction chamber is placed in
line with the CO2-specific NDIR detector and purged by an inert gas to
desorb the CO2. The mass of CO2 is directly determined by the mass of
carbon in the sample and is reported at the proper concentration.
TIC + After the TIC procedure completes, the TIC-free sample is reclaimed
NPOC and injected into the furnace. The organic carbon is combusted into
CO2 and intermediaries. Final conversion of intermediaries occurs as
the gases contact the catalyst. The reaction chamber is placed in line
with the CO2-specific NDIR detector. The mass of CO2 is directly
determined by the mass of carbon in the sample and is reported at the
proper concentration.
This method is useful because of its high sample throughput (only one
dose of sample for two measurements), good overall precision, and
excellent precision for samples containing high amounts of IC.
Unfortunately, all POC is lost in this process.
NPOC When the operator is only interested in the NPOC concentration, TIC is
purged from the sample to an outside vent or is sparged externally. An
external sparge means the unit dispenses acid into the sample, allowing
it to react and purge on its own outside of the unit, before inserting the
sample into the reaction chamber. As with the TIC + NPOC mode, all
POC is lost, but precision is not sacrificed. After sparging the sample,
the NPOC is processed as explained above.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
TC To measure total carbon with no differentiation between inorganic and

organic carbon, a similar procedure is followed. The combustion
process converts both inorganic and organic carbon into CO2 at once.
The reaction chamber is heated to 680 °C and is placed in line with the
CO2-specific NDIR detector. The mass of CO2 is directly determined
by the mass of carbon in the sample and is reported at the proper
concentration.
This mode is used for applications where a general overall
concentration of carbon is desired with no differentiation between IC
and OC. POC is included in this measurement. This mode can also be
combined with the TIC Only mode to measure TOC, as is shown
below.
TOC An alternative way to measure TOC is TOC by subtraction. A volume
(TC-TIC) of sample is introduced into the reaction chamber and tested for TC as
described previously. After the sequence completes, another equal
volume of sample is again introduced into the reaction chamber and
tested for TIC only, as described previously. The software then
automatically subtracts the TIC from the TC and records the results.
This method is particularly helpful when high amounts of POC are

suspected to be in the sample. However, it has many disadvantages.
This mode has a lower throughput than TIC + NPOC (two analyses for
one TOC result) and lower accuracy compared to NPOC (since TIC is
subtracted from TC, the standard deviation is much larger with high
TIC interference). Because of this, OI Analytical does not recommend
the use of TOC by subtraction for samples containing amounts of IC
more than 50% of the expected TOC level. Below is an example of
how great a difference the TOC by subtraction and TIC + NPOC
methods can have on the results.

Rev. 5.0
Introduction
Example of difference: NPOC and TC–TIC
When using TC–IC, TOC must be determined by subtraction.
Assumption (RSDs are 2%)  (WFI or PW water)
TOC = 50 ppb
TIC = 1,000 ppb
TC = TOC + TIC = 1,050 ppb
TC– TIC = TOC  (should be) 50 ppb
1,050 ppb (±20 ppb) – 1,000 ppb (±20 ppb) = TOC
TOC = 50 ppb ±40 ppb (10 – 90 ppb)
NOTE: The precision on TC and TIC is good. However, because they

are subtracted to find such a low concentration, the TOC
accuracy is compromised.
Using NPOC, TOC is found directly.
RSD = 2%
TOC = 50 ppb ±1 to 2 ppb

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 2 Instrument
Components
This chapter presents information on the Aurora 1030C and its various components,
including various views of the instrument.
Aurora TOC Analyzer

The Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer is a dual-chamber analyzer with flexible architecture
for multiple configurations. This section depicts the front, rear, and side views of the
Aurora and lists many of the features of the unit.
Front View
Figure 2.1 depicts the front view of the Aurora, with callouts for the various elements.
Isolation Loop Electronic Pressure Chamber Selection Electronic Flow Control

Control (EPC) Manifold (EFC) (Optional)
Sample
Handling
Module Touchscreen (LCD)
(Optional)
Condenser Fan Halide Scrubber
Dryer Tube
Syringe Pump
TIC Reaction Chamber

Power LED
Condensation Chamber
Error LED
NDIR Vent Electronics Module

Drain Manifold 1088 Rotary
Autosampler
Figure 2.1. Aurora TOC Analyzer (Front View) with Optional 1088 Rotary Autosampler
CAUTION: Avoid striking or using excessive force on the Aurora’s LCD touchscreen
to prevent damaging the LCD or tearing the touchscreen. OI Analytical
designed the touchscreen for entering commands and settings by lightly

Rev. 5.0
Instrument Components
pressing the stylus to the screen. For best results, OI Analytical

recommends use of the provided stylus to activate the screen.
Table 2.1 lists and describes the various components in the callouts.
Table 2.1. Aurora Components (Front View)
Component Description
1088 Rotary Optional sample introduction device for transferring samples

Autosampler from vials to the Aurora.
Chamber Selection Controls gas flow to the IR detector and vent for both the
Manifold reaction chamber and condensation chamber.
Color-coded tubing Provides easy setup and an measure of safety.
Red: Hydrochloric Acid (HCl)
Yellow: carbon dioxide (CO2)
Blue: sample
Clear: gas, rinse water, reagent water, and reagent purge
lines, sample line from autosampler
Black: drain (waste)
TIC Reaction Contains the sample processing vessel.
Chamber
Condensation Contains collected sample water after combustion products
Chamber cool.
Condenser Fan Provides air flow over the condenser to maximize removal of
moisture.
Drain Manifold Controls the drain processes of the reaction and condensation
chambers.
Dryer Tube Contains an indicating chemical that absorbs moisture for
drying analytical gases. This tube is mainly used as an
indicator of problems with the Nafion® tube, which is a
device used to remove most of the water in the TOC.
Electronic Flow Optional module that provides automatic gas dilution for
Control (EFC) expanded rangeability.
Electronic Pressure Provides electronic control of carrier gas pressures and
Control (EPC) adjusts pressures automatically with method changes.
Electronics Module Houses the electronic components.
Error LED Provides visual notice of error and alarm conditions.
Halide Scrubber Removes halides from the gas stream, minimizing
downstream damage.
Isolation Loop Provides a buffer volume for manipulating samples and
reagent, preventing either from entering the syringe.

Rev. 5.0
Table 2.1. Aurora Components (Front View) (Continued)
NDIR Vent Provides an exit port for measuring flow.

Power LED Provides visual indication of power status.
Sample Handling Houses the pneumatic and plumbing components.
Module
Syringe Pump Provides motive force for manipulating samples and
reagents.
Touchscreen LCD Optional full-color Windows CE-based operator interface for
entering and viewing data and all system parameters and
settings.
Valve Multiport valve directs the movement of all liquids, samples,
and reagents during operation of the analyzer.

Rev. 5.0
Back View
Figure 2.2 depicts the rear of the Aurora, showing the ports and power switch.
LAN Connection Port
RS-485 Ports
COM 2 (Printer Port)
I2C Port
Relay I/O Port B
Relay I/O Port A

Power Switch
Power Receptacle
Fuse Holder
Figure 2.2. Aurora Electronic Connection Ports (Rear View)
Table 2.2 lists and explains the ports on the rear of the Aurora.
Table 2.2. Aurora Electronic Connection Ports (Rear View)
COM 2 (Printer Connects the Aurora to a serial printer via a 9-pin RS-232
Port) connector.
Fuse Holder Contains the main fuses to protect from a short circuit or
voltage spike.
I2C Port Provides communication capabilities for instrument options.
LAN Connection An Ethernet/LAN-based connection port for a LAN or direct
Port connection to a PC.
Power Receptacle Port for the power cord.
Power Switch Powers the unit on and off. Powering on the unit initiates a
self-test.
Relay I/O Port A Screw terminal interconnects for input 1 and 2 and output 1
and 2, allowing for interfacing with external devices.
Relay I/O Port B Connections for input 1 and 2 and output 1 and 2 through a
D-sub 9 connector.

Rev. 5.0
Table 2.2. Aurora Electronic Connection Ports (Rear View) (Continued)
RS-485 Ports RJ-11 connectors used to connect the OI Analytical 1088

Rotary Autosampler or 1096+ XYZ Autosampler.
Aurora Side Views

Figure 2.3 depicts a left side view of the Aurora, while Figure 2.4 depicts a right side
view.
Thermocouple
I/O Board
Syringe Pump
NDIR Detector Controller
(Shown Without
Cover)
Figure 2.3. Aurora Sample Handling Module Interior Components (Left Side View)
Table 2.3 lists and explains some of the components visible from the left side of the
unit.
Table 2.3. Aurora Sample Handling Module Interior Components (Left Side View)
NDIR Detector Quantifies CO2 concentrations in gas streams.

Syringe Pump Provides electronic control for the syringe valve and syringe
Controller operation.

Rev. 5.0
Table 2.3. Aurora Sample Handling Module Interior Components (Left Side View)
Thermocouple I/O Provides an electronic interface to all electronic components

Board on the Sample Handling module.
Power
Filter
Main PIC
Board
WinCE
SOM Power
Board Switch
Power
Supply
Figure 2.4. Aurora Electronics Module Interior Components (Right Side View)
Table 2.4 lists and explains some of the components visible from the right side of the
unit.
Table 2.4. Aurora Electronic Module Interior Components (Right Side View)
Main PIC Board Controls all external connections, along with the valve, fan,
and heater functions.
Power Filter Reduces electronic noise from the incoming AC power.
Power Switch On/Off switch for the unit. Assembly also contains the fuse.
Power Supply Converts incoming AC power to 12 VDC power.
WinCE SOM Board Computer motherboard containing the Windows CE
Operating System, used with the LCD touchscreen.
Interfaces with all other internal and external components.

Rev. 5.0
Combustion Furnace Assembly

The Combustion Furnace Assembly contains the combustion tube assembly and
attaches to the rear of the unit. Figure 2.5 depicts the Combustion Furnace Assembly
attached to the unit. For more information on the Combustion Furnace Assembly, see
Chapter 6, “Combustion Furnace Assembly” on page 282.
Combustion Coil
Combustion Cap
Combustion Tube
Assembly
Figure 2.5. Combustion Furnace Assembly (Top View)
Table 2.5 lists and describes the Combustion Furnace Assembly components.
Table 2.5. Combustion Furnace Assembly Components
Access Lid Covers the Combustion Furnace Assembly, not shown in the
photo.
Combustion Coil A water management tool that condenses steam generated by
the combustion reaction into liquid.
Combustion Tube Reactor that combusts the sample.
Assembly
Combustion Cap Covers the combustion tube and connections the combustor
to the syringe valve.

Rev. 5.0
Optional Components
The following sections list the optional components available for the Aurora 1030C.
Total Bound Nitrogen (TNb) Module

The total bound nitrogen (TNb) module option for the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer
(Aurora), depicted in Figure 2.6, adds the capability of measuring total nitrogen
concentration in water samples. Total nitrogen can be measured simultaneously during
NPOC and TC analysis, or as separate function when operated in the TNb analysis
mode.
Figure 2.6. TNb Module for Aurora 1030C
Determining the amount of pollutants in water samples often involves measuring TNb
present in those solutions. TNb consists of dissolved ammonia, nitrates, nitrites, amines,
and many other substances. TNb can often provide an indicator of the pollution level in
a body of water. This application is often used for wastewater analysis such as sewage
and livestock runoff. TNb concentrations can range from the part-per-billion (ppb) level
for relatively clean water to several hundred parts-per-million (ppm) for raw sewage.
Various analysis methods have been developed to take this measurement. Recently, an
electrochemical method of detection has been introduced that can be used to measure
dissolved nitrogen when used in conjunction with a combustion analyzer. In this
combustion reaction, nitrogen that is bound in chemical compounds is converted into

Rev. 5.0
NOx compounds such as nitrogen trioxide (NO3), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), and nitric
oxide (NO). This combustion reaction is generally performed at temperatures over
700 °C. This is due to the need for the combustion reaction to proceed as a smooth
ignition rather than as an explosive reaction, which can occur below this temperature.
This method is ideal for implementing on a total organic carbon (TOC) combustion
analyzer, due to use of a suitable combustion reactor. It provides the capability of
measuring both nitrogen and carbon content in samples to provide two analysis
techniques in one measurement.
Autosamplers
There are two autosampler options for the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer: the 1088
Rotary Autosampler and the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler. Each of these are introduced in
the following sections and covered in greater detail in Chapter 6, “Aurora 1030C
Optional Equipment” on page 188.
1088 Rotary Autosampler
The 1088 Rotary Autosampler (1088), depicted in Figure 2.7, is a liquid-sample

transfer instrument that automatically transfers sample from a sample vial to the Aurora
1030C, allowing unattended operation.
Figure 2.7. 1088 Rotary Autosampler

Rev. 5.0
The 1088 is designed to be sturdy, reliable, and easy to use. When combined with the
Aurora, the 1088 fully automates the analysis of 88 samples. It can sample from open
vials or via septum piercing using vials capped with septa. The Aurora combined with
the 1088 allows sequential or random sampling, providing user flexibility. The 1088
uses minimal bench space because it easily docks vertically with the Aurora.
1096+ XYZ Autosampler
The 1096+ XYZ Autosampler (1096+), depicted in Figure 2.8, is a liquid sample
transfer instrument that automatically transfers sample from vials to the Aurora 1030C,
allowing unattended operation.
Figure 2.8. 1096+ XYZ Autosampler
The 1096+ is designed to be sturdy, reliable, and easy to use. When combined with the
Aurora, the 1096+ fully automates the analysis of 96 samples, plus 12 calibration
points. It can sample from open vials or via septum piercing using vials capped with
septa. The Aurora combined with the 1096+ allows sequential or random sampling,
providing user flexibility.

Rev. 5.0
Electronic Flow Control (EFC)

The Electronic Flow Control (EFC) module, depicted in Figure 2.9, allows for
electronically controlling the flow of gases throughout the method sequence. This
option is mainly used to automatically add a precise amount of dilution gas to the purge
gas flow to permit expansion of the reportable upper concentration range
(approximately 10-fold) based on method parameters. This option can also be used to
minimize variability between parallel reaction chambers, for divergent sample ranges
(for example, high TIC/low TOC samples).
Figure 2.9. Electronic Flow Control Module
Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module

The Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module is programmable for on-line random
sequencing from multiple streams for continuous monitoring of up to four sample
process streams. The module is also used to perform automatic calibrations of the
method sequences. Figure 2.10 depicts the Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module.
Figure 2.10. Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module

Rev. 5.0
External Expansion I/O Module

The External Expansion I/O Module supports expanded input and output capability for
the 1030C data acquisition using 4-20 mA output analog signals, four additional output
signals and four additional relays for independent programmable alarms. The External
Expansion I/O Module also supports input to Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(SCADA) system software used in many on-line or process applications.
Interfacing an Aurora to a SCADA system allows facilities to adjust chemical usage

and optimize water treatment processes. Figure 2.11 depicts the External Expansion I/O
Module.
Figure 2.11. External Expansion I/O Module with Mounting Bracket

Rev. 5.0
Serial Printer
An optional serial inkjet printer (PN 322722), depicted in Figure 2.12, allows analytical
results to be sent from an Aurora to an external printer when a hard copy is required.
This photo is for illustrative purposes only. The actual make and model of printer may
vary.
Figure 2.12. Serial Inkjet Printer

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 3 Installation
This chapter includes step-by-step procedures for properly installing the Aurora. It lists
materials needed for installation that are not included with the basic instrument. See
OI Analytical document 2324 Aurora 1030 TOC and Autosampler Site Preparation
prior to installing the analyzer. OI Analytical recommends completing the site
requirements checklist and gathering materials before attempting the installation. See
Chapter 2, “Instrument Components” on page 15 for the names and functions of various
components when installing the Aurora.
General Information
After opening the shipping container, unpack the instrument and check the items
against the component list. If any damage is apparent, notify the carrier immediately.
Save all packing materials until verifying proper operation of the analyzer.
NOTE: Ship all instruments to OI Analytical for service or warranty repair in the
instrument’s original OI Analytical box with its packing materials. If
instruments appear damaged due to improper shipping, OI Analytical is
not responsible for repair costs. If access to proper shipping materials is
not available, contact OI Analytical Order Entry Department at
(800)-673-3750 or (979) 690-1711.
Internal and External Options

OI Analytical ships the Aurora with any external options packed in separate boxes and
any internal options generally already installed within the Aurora.
User-Supplied Materials
For a typical installation, the operator must have several items on hand before installing
the Aurora. The following are required materials for installation:
• Double-stage oxygen regulator (0–60 psig), required with bottled gases

• Oxygen (99.99% purity or better, normally used in combustion mode only) or air
(free of CO2, hydrocarbon, and water)
• Appropriate tools for gas connections
• 1/8” O.D. x 1/16” I.D. gas tubing. OI Analytical recommends using Teflon® tubing
for distances under 152.4 cm (60”). If the distance is longer than 152.4 cm (60”),
use cleaned copper tubing with an Ascarite® scrubber at the analyzer.
• Source of high-purity water, TOC 200 ppb C or less
• For low-level analysis, reagent water must contain less than 50 ppb C.

Rev. 5.0
Installation
Reagents
Reagents for the Aurora consist of reagent water and hydrochloric acid. For reagent
water, OI Analytical recommends using distilled or deionized water containing less
than 200 ppb TOC.
WARNING:The toxicity or potential health risk of chemicals used in TOC methods

have not been precisely defined. Treat all chemicals and samples as
potential health risks.Minimize exposure to these materials. Each
laboratory is responsible for maintaining awareness of OSHA regulations
regarding safe handling of chemicals and associated equipment used in
these methods.
WARNING:Mixing acid with water generates a great amount of heat. Take appropriate
precautions.
Hydrochloric acid can be made by carefully mixing together the reagent water and
Hydrogen Chloride (HCl). While stirring, carefully add 166 mL of concentrated HCl
(ACS reagent grade) to approximately 700 mL of reagent water. Allow the solution to
cool to room temperature. Dilute to 1 L with reagent water and mix well.
Installing the Basic Unit

The following procedure outlines the basic installation steps for the Aurora.
NOTE: The maximum gas pressure delivered to the Aurora is 4.137 bar (60 psi).
To prevent instrument damage, ensure regulator pressure does not exceed
4.137 bar (60 psi).
NOTE: The Aurora ships with two plugs in place: one on the vent port on the rear
of the unit and the other on the IR out port on the front panel. If the plugs
are not removed, the Aurora does not function properly.
NOTE: Do not apply power until all accessories are properly installed.
NOTE: If both the Aurora and the autosampler are powered off, either manually or
automatically, the autosampler MUST be powered on first to ensure
proper operation and communication between the Aurora and the
autosampler. The Aurora checks for the presence of an autosampler by
sending a signal to it. If the autosampler is turned off, the Aurora assumes
there is no autosampler connected and reverts to the Default configuration.
NOTE: The waste bottle should be lower than the instrument for proper draining.
1. Open the instrument crate.
2. Remove the startup kit(s) and inspect for completeness.
Component lists are included in the kit(s).

Rev. 5.0
Installation
3. Remove the Aurora from the crate.
4. Place the Aurora near suitable gas and electrical power sources.
The power cord length is 180 cm (72”).
5. Install the reagent bottle tray.
The reagent bottle tray is installed on the left side of the unit, with the open side up.
Use the two screws found in the mounting holes.
6. Connect the gas line to the Aurora.
The gas line is connected to the Vented Ball Valve (PN 325577) , then to the gas
inlet via the brass fittings on the back of the instrument (see Figure 5). Be sure to
orient the arrow on the valve towards the Aurora. (Figures 3.1, 3.2, and 3.3)
Figure 3.1. Pneumatics Module Rear Ports
Arrow shows flow

direction
Figure 3.2. Valve flow direction arrow

Rev. 5.0
Installation
Figure 3.3. Valve connected to Gas Inlet
7. Connect the other end of the gas line to an appropriate gas source.
8. Connect the black drain tubing using the stainless steel fittings on the back of the
Aurora.
9. Place the free end of the black waste tubing from the analyzer tubing bundle into
a waste bottle or receptacle.
Ensure the waste bottle is lower than the instrument. Otherwise, the waste material
may not drain properly.
10. Install any external options before proceeding.
11. Remove the plugs from the vent port on the back and from the IR out port on the
front panel of the Aurora.
Refer to Chapter 2, “Back View” on page 18 and Chapter 2, “Front View” on

page 15.
12. Turn on the gas flow and immediately adjust the regulator pressure to 3.447–
4.137 bar (50–60 psi).
13. Check for supply gas leaks with Snoop® or other suitable leak detector.
Gas is used as a carrier and to purge the reagent lines. The purge gas line exits the
tubing access port at the back of the instrument and is connected to the first splitter,

Rev. 5.0
Installation
as depicted in Figure 3.4.
Acid
Gas Line from
Tubing Port
Purge Line to DI Water
Splitter
Figure 3.4. Purge Gas Splitters
14. Fill the reagent bottles.
See “Reagents” on page 29) for information on reagents.
15. Connect the reagent bottle cap assembly with the red and clear tubing to the
reagent bottle marked “HCl Acid.”
16. Connect the reagent bottle cap assembly with the two clear lines to the reagent
bottle marked “Rinse Water.”
17. Confirm the solutions in the reagent bottles are purging and that the purging line is
not too close to the uptake line, as this may cause bubbles to be drawn into the
Aurora.
18. Place the reagent and DI water bottles into the reagent bottle tray.
Network Installation
The Aurora 1030C can be installed in a stand-alone configuration or connected to a PC
or network. This chapter only covers installation of a stand-alone unit. If the Aurora
will be connected to a PC or network, refer to the Aurora-to-PC/Network Configuration
Guide for installation instructions.
Removing Instrument Covers

As the operator faces the instrument, the right module contains all electronic
components except the NDIR detector and basic control boards. Only trained OI
Analytical technicians should access the right bay of the Aurora.
The left module contains the pneumatic and liquid handling components that contact
the liquid sample. Accessing the left module may be necessary to install some optional
equipment on the Aurora. Access the pneumatic and liquid handling components by
removing the left module cover in the following manner:
CAUTION: Do not apply power until all accessories are properly installed.
WARNING:To prevent electrical shock and possible damage to the Aurora, disconnect
the power cord from the Aurora before opening any panel.

Rev. 5.0
Installation
1. Turn off power and disconnect the Aurora from the power source.
2. Remove the reagent bottles from the tray on the left side of the Aurora.
3. Remove the four retaining screws and lift up the cover.
Optional Components
The Aurora 1030 TOC Analyzer is a flexible tool capable of several different
configurations. There are several optional components available to increase
functionality of the Aurora and increase productivity by automating several tasks.
These components, along with installation instructions, are covered in greater detail in
Chapter 6, “Aurora 1030C Optional Equipment” on page 188.

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 4 Aurora User
Interface
This chapter describes the menus, screens, and commands that control the Aurora
through the Windows CE interface and touchscreen control. Throughout this chapter, as
well as the entire book, instructions are provided from the standpoint of using the
touchscreen interface. When using the ATOC software, read “Press” as “Click”.
Starting the Instrument

The Aurora software loads automatically when power is applied to the instrument. The
system administrator can assign a unique user name and password to each operator, or
the default user name “toc” and password “toc” can be used.
Powering Up and Logging On to the Aurora

The following procedure outlines how to power up and log on to the instrument:
WARNING:Do not use any sharp or pointed instruments on the monitor screen,
including ball point pens, metal instruments, screwdrivers, or similar
items. These will damage the screen. OI Analytical recommends using the
supplied plastic stylus.
1. Turn on the power switch.
The power switch is located on the back of the instrument (see Chapter 2, “Back
View” on page 18). The system loads the splash screen and User Login dialog box,
depicted in Figure 4.1.

Rev. 5.0
Aurora User Interface
Figure 4.1. User Login Dialog Box
2. Enter the User ID and user Password.
The default user name is “toc” and the default password is “toc.” The Aurora
directly displays the Status Monitor screen if the security and auditing mode are
disabled. Operators must change their password after logging on to the system for
the first time.
3. Press OK.
The user is logged on to the Aurora.
Entering Data Using the Virtual Keyboards

The Aurora’s PC control application works the same as any other Windows application.
Use the mouse to set the input focus to whatever option or entry field desired, and then
either click the mouse or use the keyboard to enter the data. However, the Aurora
analyzer with its display and touchscreen does not use a keyboard or mouse. Instead,
navigating among the screens and setting the input focus is accomplished using the
touchscreen and stylus.

Rev. 5.0
Virtual Keyboards
Data is entered using one of two virtual
keyboards: a standard alphanumeric keyboard
when letters with or without numbers is
required, and a number keypad when only
numbers are required. These keyboards appear
when the stylus is tapped in a data entry field,
with the alphanumeric keyboard appearing
when the data field accepts both numbers and
Figure 4.2. Virtual Keyboard
letters and the number keyboard appearing for
data fields that accept numbers only. The
virtual alphanumeric keyboard is depicted in Figure 4.2. The title bar of the
alphanumeric keyboard shows the name of the data field that has focus. Press Exit on
the keyboard to clear it from the screen. Touch the data field again to prompt the
keyboard to re-appear.
Using the Virtual Keyboards

Characters are entered by using the stylus to tap the virtual key for the desired character.
There are two versions of the virtual alphanumeric keyboard: a standard QWERTY
keyboard and an alphabetical keyboard, where the keys are arranged in alphabetical
order. At the bottom of the virtual keyboard is a key to switch between the two types,
labelled as either QWERTY or Alphabetical, dependent upon which keyboard is in use
at the time. Pressing Exit saves the entered data and dismisses the keyboard.
Navigating the User Interface

The user interface for the Aurora touchscreen is nearly identical to the interface when
controlling the instrument via a remote PC. A small number of functions are only
available from the instrument itself in the Advanced Configuration screen (see
“Advanced Configuration Screen” on page 79). The PC application employs common
Windows practices for user interaction, i.e., a standard keyboard and mouse are used to
control the application. The instrument itself uses a touchscreen interface, which
requires using a stylus for best results. Any icon, dialog box, or edit field can be
accessed directly by pressing it on the touchscreen. References made to “clicking,”
“pressing,” or “touching” an icon or other element of the user interface are used
interchangeably throughout this manual to mean pressing the touchscreen or to using a
mouse on the PC.
The Aurora user interface is organized into five sections. A row of icons appears across
the top of each screen, depicted in Figure 4.3. The first five icons from left to right are
used for navigating between sections. Each section contains several screens, organized
with tabbed pages. Press a navigation icon to switch to a section, then press any visible
tab to go to a specific screen. See Table 4.1 for complete section and tab structure for
the Aurora user interface.

Rev. 5.0
The other two icons that appear to the right of the navigation icons are action icons that
perform operational functions. See “Action Icons and Status Indicators” on page 39 for
more information.
Navigation
Icons
Action Icons
Figure 4.3. Navigation and Action Icons (All Screens)
Table 4.1. Navigation Icons
Navigation Tab and Screen

Section Description
Icon Options
Monitor Status Accesses detailed, real-time conditions

Sequence and settings including active method and
Sample sequence information. Additional icons
Result Log located on the lower part of this section
Calibration provide access to additional displays and
Run Log important control functions.
Editor Method Generates new or edits existing methods,
Sequence sequences, and sample IDs.
Sample IDs
Configuration General Defines, saves, and activates instrument

Sample Intro configurations.
Advanced
System

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.1. Navigation Icons (Continued)
Navigation Tab and Screen

Section Description
Icon Options
Maintenance Rotary Autosampler Accesses maintenance functions and

XYZ Autosampler manually controls hardware to aid in
Ext. I/O & At-Line A/S troubleshooting and tuning performance.
Syringe Pump
Heaters, Valves, Fans
System Information
System Counters
Diagnostics Tests
Instrument Log
TNb Module
EPC Calibration
EFC Calibration
Security and Local User Settings Provides administrative functions for
Auditing Local Audit Settings operator access, local audit settings, and
Local Audit Log an audit log for this instrument only.
Sections
There are five sections to the Aurora interface: Monitor, Editor, Configuration,
Maintenance, and Security and Auditing, as listed in Table 4.1. Each of these sections
contain multiple tabs and screen options, each defined in detail in the following
sections.
Monitor Section
The Aurora is controlled and analyses are performed primarily through the Monitor
section. This section provides functions for specifying what samples to process, which
analytical method(s) to use, and contains action icons for starting, stopping, pausing, or
aborting the analysis. The Monitor section also provides real-time status information
about the analyzer’s progress in completing requested tasks.

Rev. 5.0
Upon logging in to the Aurora, the Status Monitor screen is displayed with a complete
snapshot of the instrument status. Notice in Figure 4.4 that “Monitor” is highlighted,
indicating the screens displayed are part of the Monitor section.
Monitor Section
Tabs
Graphic Display
of Current State
Sequence Progress
Indicators
Times Status
Indicators
Gauges
Action Icons and

Status Indicators
Figure 4.4. Status Monitor Screen
Monitor Section Tabs
The Monitor section contains six screens, accessible via tabs located below the
navigation icons:
• Status
• Sequence
• Sample
• Result Log
• Calibration
• Run Log
Each screen is described in detail later in this chapter.
Action Icons and Status Indicators
There are seven action icons: five along the bottom of the screen for the Monitor
section and two at the top right.
Status indicators appear below the Monitor section row of action icons at the bottom.
See “Status Indicators” on page 48.

Rev. 5.0
Monitor Section Action Icons
The action icons for the Monitor section, arrayed along the bottom, are explained in
Table 4.2.
Table 4.2. Monitor Section Action Icons
Action Icon Action Performed Description
Start Begins the current sequence.
Pause or Resume Interrupts the current analysis after the

current sample ends. Pressing again
resumes the run.
CAUTION: Currently, this function
may cause the system to
crash and should not be
used.
Abort Immediately ceases any maintenance
or sample processing step and returns
the instrument to standby.
Show Peak Graph Displays a dialog box that shows a

trace of the signal levels from the IR
detector.
Reset Alarms Clears any alarm condition.
The action icons at the top right are explained in Table 4.3.
Table 4.3. Top Action Icons
Action Icon Action Performed Description
Switch User Changes the user ID of the Aurora

operator.
Exit Shuts down the analyzer and exits the

Aurora software.

Rev. 5.0
Detector Signal Indicator
Adjacent to the bottom action icons is the detector signal

indicator, as depicted in Figure 4.5. It provides a real-time
Figure 4.5. Detector readout of the signal level from the detector currently used,
Signal Indicator e.g., the CO2 or TNb detector. Pressing the indicator toggles
it between the CO2 and TNb detector signals, if both are
installed and configured.
Status Indicators
The global status indicators at the bottom of the screen, depicted in Figure 4.6, provide
a quick visual representation of aspects of the Aurora’s condition and current activity.
At a glance, they show whether any PC users are logged on and connected to the
instrument, what the analyzer’s status and processing states are, which sample
introduction mode is used, and if data can flow to the PC database.
User ID Mode/State Configuration DGS

Status Status Status
Connection Processing Sample Error

Status Status Introduction Status Status
Figure 4.6. Global Status Indicators
Table 4.4 lists and explains the global status indicator icons.
Table 4.4. Status Indicator Icons
Indicator Section Indicator Icon Description
Connection status Indicates the analyzer is operating as a stand-alone unit.
Indicates one or more computers have an active link to

the analyzer.
User ID Displays the full user ID of the operator currently logged
on to this session.
Processing status Indicates the Aurora is in standby and is ready to run an
analysis.
Indicates the Aurora is running an analysis.
Indicates the Aurora is paused.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.4. Status Indicator Icons (Continued)
Indicator Section Indicator Icon Description
Mode/state status Displays the current processing state of the analyzer.
Sample Displays the name of the current sample introduction

introduction status mode.
Configuration Displays the name of the current active configuration.
status
Error status Flashes red if the error LED on the Aurora front panel is
flashing (see Chapter 2, “Front View” on page 15). It
indicates an error condition occurred or provides a
warning that the system is not ready to process samples.
DGS status Indicates the Data Gathering Service (DGS) is
operational.
Indicates the DGS is disabled.
An “X” inside a red circle indicates the Aurora is not

connected to a PC running the data gathering service.
Indicates the DGS is enabled but not connected.
Show Peak Graph
The Show Peak Graph icon opens the Signal Graph dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.7,
for displaying the signal trace from either the CO2 or TNb detector. Use the dialog box
options to adjust the scale and offset of the graph’s y-axis, as well as the time span

Rev. 5.0
displayed on the x-axis. Different colors highlight peaks for each analysis mode, while
a gray trace shows the signal during standby or sample preparation operations.
Figure 4.7. Signal Graph Dialog Box
Alarms
NOTE: Any messages or items that appear in red on the screen or a dialog box
indicates a critical message.
If a system error occurs, a message appears on the Status screen as well as the Run Log.
These errors include: system error, need to recalibrate, and need to add reagents.
Status Monitor Screen
The Status Monitor screen provides visual indications of the analyzer’s current status
and its progress in analyzing samples. Press Monitor  Status to view this screen,

Rev. 5.0
Sequence Progress Current State Status

Status Indicators Indicator
Times Status
Indicator
Gauges
Sequence Progress Status Indicators
The Sequence Progress indicators include bar graphs for Sample and Replicate. The
Sample line shows the sample number within the entire sequence of samples, while the
Replicate line shows the current replicate in the sample. The bar graph fills for each as
the sequence completes each sample and replicate, as depicted in Figure 4.9.
Figure 4.9. Sequence Progress Status Indicators

Rev. 5.0
Times Status Indicator
The Times status indicator, depicted in Figure 4.10, shows the time elapsed and total
expected time for the current processing state.
Figure 4.10. Times Status Indicator
Current State Status Indicator
The Current State status indicator presents a detailed picture of the currently processing
sample, as depicted in Figure 4.11. When configured appropriately, the Aurora can
process samples in parallel, and this section of the Status Monitor screen allows the
operator to directly observe the state of two samples or replicates in process.
The upper portion of this area gives a pictorial representation of the gas and sample
flows for one replicate. Below it is a text description of the state that is considered most
important of the two parallel processing tasks. The bottom portion shows both parallel
tasks in detail. Pressing icons, such as and , toggles the pictorial view between
the two running tasks.
The dark blue area displays the current mode of the analyzer. The bottom area displays
the state of the analyzer. Indicators for chamber (Ch), sample (Spl), and replicate (Rep)
display here. The primary state number, 1 or 2, is highlighted in green. The operator
may toggle to the secondary state by pressing the stylus on the non-highlighted number,
which becomes highlighted green. The Sequence Progress indicator is linked to the
highlighted primary state and graphically displays sample and replicate progress for
that state.

Rev. 5.0
NOTE: The current state display automatically toggles to the primary chamber or
activity as the sample(s) process.
Current State
Sample,
Channel, and
Replicate State
Figure 4.11. Examples of the Current State Status Indicator
Dial Gauges
Three dial gauges are located in the middle of the Status screen, as depicted in
Figure 4.12. Pressing the first and third gauges toggles the display to show a second
parameter. Typically, the left gauge displays the temperature of the TIC reaction
chamber. The center gauge displays the combustion furnace temperature. The right
gauge shows the system carrier gas pressure or carrier gas flow rate.
NOTE: The first gauge toggles to show temperatures for a POC module. At this
time, there is no POC option for the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer.
Pressing the first gauge to the POC position shows ambient temperatures.
The left gauge shows TIC reaction chamber temperature values in degrees Celsius (°C),
with the toggle view reserved for future use. The center gauge shows TC temperatures,
with a toggle view for the 1030S Solids temperature if in use.
When the analyzer is equipped with the 1030S module, the center gauge shows the
current temperature values in degrees Celsius (°C). Pressing the gauge representation
toggles the gauge view between the Solid temperature and TC furnace temperature.
When the analyzer is equipped with the EFC option, the right gauge shows the current
pressure values in pounds per square inch (psi) or flow rate in milliliters per minute
(mL/min). Pressing the gauge representation toggles the gauge view between the
pressure and flow rate.

Rev. 5.0
Primary
Measurements
Secondary
Measurements
Figure 4.12. Temperature and Pressure Gauges
Monitor Sequence Tab
The Sequence tab, depicted in Figure 4.13, displays the currently loaded set of samples
and associated commands set to run through the analyzer. It allows the operator to
review an active sequence and add, insert, and remove samples in the active sequence.
Active Sequence Last Modification

Name Date
Dilution Factor
Autosampler (Dil), as Necessary
Vial Location
Sample Type
Sample ID Name
Active Sequence
Number of Table
Replicates to
Analyze
Method Used
to Analyze
the Sample
Figure 4.13. Monitor Sequence Tab
The Active Sequence Table lists all the sequences in the current set. The table is color-
coded to indicate the status of the sequence:
• Blue - samples that have finished processing.

• Green - in-process samples.
• Yellow - preprocessing next sample.

Rev. 5.0
• White - samples awaiting processing.
Options at the top of the screen load and unload the active sequence. Options at the
bottom of the screen add and remove samples from an active sequence, even while it is
running. Icons for printing the active sequence and providing online help appear at the
bottom of the screen.
Other elements in the Sequence tab are explained in Table 4.5.
Table 4.5. Monitor Screen Sequence Tab Elements
Element Description
Active Sequence Lists the name of the current, active sequence.

Name
Autosampler Vial Lists the location of the vial(s) in the autosampler.
Location
Sample ID Name Lists the ID name of the sample.
Number of Replicates Lists the number of replicates in each sample to be analyzed.
to Analyze
Analysis Method Lists the method used to analyze the sample.
Last Modification Lists the last time the method was modified. This date
Date changes to the current date once the method loads as the
active sequence.
Dilution Factor (Dil) Lists the factor of dilution, as necessary.
Priority Flag When marked with an exclamation point (!), indicates a high
priority sample.
Sample Type Lists the type of sample.
Sample Monitor Screen
The Sample Monitor screen displays results for the most recently analyzed sample.
Results update in real time as analyses are completed. Sample results are only available
for the current sample. Upon completion of the first replicate of another sample, the
previous sample’s data is cleared. Press Monitor  Sample to view this screen,

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.14. Sample Monitor Screen
Choosing Show Peak Graphs… opens a dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.15, for
displaying all peak signal traces for the current sample. If a sample has multiple
replicates, the peak data for each replicate is overlaid. The peaks from any and all
analysis modes currently running are available.
Figure 4.15. Show Peak Graphs Dialog Box
The x-axis indicates time and the y-axis indicates the area or signal.
Result Log Screen
The Result Log screen shows results for the entire sequence of samples as they finish
processing. Data shown include peak area averages, computed concentration, and
% RSD. Data acquisition date and time are included for each sample result. In addition,

Rev. 5.0
if pass/fail criteria are in effect, a pass/fail message displays for each sample. Press
Monitor  Result Log to view this screen, depicted in Figure 4.16.
Figure 4.16. Result Log Screen
Calibration Screen
The Calibration screen provides calibration details for the method of the current or most
recent sample. Display points represent all replicates for each standard in the
calibration. The system draws the best fit line based on the offset and response factor.
The graph displays the mode previously calibrated in the Editor menus where methods
are calibrated.
When a method is created, the calibration is defined as part of the analysis method.
Each method must be calibrated before it can be used to analyze unknown samples.
Some methods support multiple analysis modes. Select the desired mode from the
Mode drop-down menu in the middle of the screen to choose which data to display.
If a single mode is calibrated in the method, the graph displays calibration information
for the mode. If a multiple mode is calibrated in the method, press the Mode drop-down
menu to display a graph of the other mode(s). Possible graphs include NPOC, TIC,
TOC, and TC.

Rev. 5.0
Select Monitor  Calibration to view this screen, depicted in Figure 4.17.
Figure 4.17. Calibration Monitor Screen
During the process of calibrating a method, the Calibration Monitor screen updates as
new data becomes available. The curve plot is redrawn, and all computed values for the
calibration curve become updated and refreshed in real time.
Run Log Screen
The Run Log Monitor screen shows a list of up to 300 system messages, listed in order
from the oldest at the top to the most recent at the bottom. Press Monitor  Run Log
to view this screen, depicted in Figure 4.18.
Color-coded icons indicate each message’s severity. The green “i” represents an
informational message, such as a sequence was loaded or started. The yellow “!”
means a warning message, such as the DTS/DGS failed to connect. The red “x”
indicates an error message, such as a hardware component failed to perform its task
when first asked.
NOTE: A warning or error message does not indicate the task wasn’t completed.
The Aurora can still complete tasks with warnings or errors generated for
them.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.18. Run Log Screen
Press Clear Log near the bottom of this screen to delete the log entries.
Editor Section
The Editor section provides screens for defining, modifying, deleting, and updating the
analyzer’s collection of methods, sequences, and sample IDs. There are three tabs for
this section: Method, Sequence, and Sample IDs. Each of these are explained in detail
in the following sections.
NOTE: The Security and Auditing section controls certain parameter availability.
Once an operator defines and calibrates a method, it cannot be altered
without renaming it.
Editor Method Screen
The Editor Method screen provides access to all specific parameters in an analytical
method. This includes the analytical range of the method as specified via the method’s
calibration, its primary and alternate modes of analysis, and whether to use such
features as sample dilution, preprocessing, outlier removal, and others.
A row of options at the top of the Editor Method screen allows the operator to create
new methods, open existing methods, save and rename methods, and delete methods no
longer in use. The Aurora software allows storage and use of up to 99 methods. See
Chapter 5, “Defining and Managing Methods” on page 126 for a detailed explanation
of the various parameters stored in each method.

Rev. 5.0
Press Editor  Method to view this screen, depicted in Figure 4.19. The various
elements of the screen are defined in Table 4.6.
Figure 4.19. Editor Method Screen
Table 4.6. Editor Method Screen Elements
Element Definition
Name Contains the method name, creation date and time, modification
date and time, and the User ID of the creator.
Sample Info Contains fields for the analysis mode, sparge type and time, pre-
acid volume, and sample volume.
Outlier Removal Contains a field for additional replicates and for the maximum
Criteria % RSD.
EPC Electronic Pressure Control displays the system pressure. A lower
system pressure increases the sensitivity of the Aurora, but requires
an increased drain time.
Drain Time The time, in seconds, required to drain the sample.
Reagent Volumes Lists the volume of acid reagent, in milliliters (mL).
Sample Pre-Processing Allows for selecting the Dilution type and Dilution Factor.
Rinses and Chase Allows for setting the volume of rinses (in mL), per sample and per
replicate, as well as the Chase Volume.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.6. Editor Method Screen Elements (Continued)
Element Definition
React/Detect Times Buttons for displaying the React/Detect Times and Temperatures
and Temperatures for the method. See Figure 4.20 for React/Detect Times and
Figure 4.21 for Temperatures dialog boxes. Reset Defaults button
in Temperatures dialog box resets the system to the factory default
temperatures.
NOTE: These dialog boxes include references to a POC

module. At this time, there is no POC option for the
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer. Any changes made to
POC fields will not affect 1030C operations.
Calibration Button for displaying information on the calibration of the method.
See Figure 4.22 for the Calibration dialog box, and Figure 4.23 for
the Calibration Pass/Fail dialog box.
Figure 4.20. React/Detect Times Dialog Box
Figure 4.21. React/Detect Temperatures Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Pressing Calibration brings up the Method Calibration dialog box, as depicted in

Figure 4.22. This dialog box lists the Primary Analysis Mode and contains areas for
Calibration Results, Mode-Specific Settings, and Calibration Generation.
Figure 4.22. Method Calibration Dialog Box
Press OK to save changes and exit this dialog box to return to the Method screen.
Primary Analysis Mode Section
If multiple analysis modes are selected for a method, then the Primary Analysis Mode
drop-down menu at the top of the dialog box is active, listing all analysis modes for the
method. The Primary Analysis Mode is used for advanced features, such as outlier
removal and pass/fail criteria.
Next to the Primary Analysis Mode drop-down menu is a Use for all CO2 modes
check box. When checked, a message window appears, as depicted in Figure 4.23,
indicating that the Primary Analysis Mode selected in the drop-down menu will be used
for all analysis modes.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.23. Information Message for Use For All Modes Check Box Checked
When the check box is not checked, a different message window appears, as depicted in
Figure 4.24, indicating that each analysis mode requires a separate calibration curve.
Figure 4.24. Information Message for Use For All Modes Check Box Unchecked
At the top of the dialog box is a table for the selected mode. The number of rows
correspond to the number of standards available, with each row listing the
Concentration in ppm, number of replicates, the area in CTS (counts), and the %RSD.
In addition, next to the table are buttons for Expanded/Summary, Graph..., Include,
Exclude, and Remove.
The Expanded/Summary button is a toggle button. Press Expanded to the right of the
chart to display detailed calibration data for the current method. Press Summary to
return the chart display to a summary of Conc (PPM), Reps, Area (cts) and % RSD.

Rev. 5.0
The Graph... button opens the Calibration graph, as depicted in Figure 4.25.
Figure 4.25. Method Calibration Graph
Select either an entire standard (from the Summary view) or individual replicates (from
the Expanded view) and use Include and Exclude to recompute the calibration curve,
accounting for the requested changes. Figure 4.26 depicts the graph after including a
point, while Figure 4.27 depicts the graph with a selected point excluded.
Figure 4.26. Calibration Graph with Included Point Dialog Box
Figure 4.27. Calibration Graph with Excluded Point Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Prior to calibrating the method, press Remove to delete any of the standards.
Remaining Calibration Dialog Box Sections
Table 4.7 explains the options in the Calibration Results, Mode-Specific Settings, and
Calibration Generation sections of this dialog box.
Table 4.7. Method Calibration Dialog Box Settings
Section Description
Calibration Results Displays the following calibration results for the listed mode.
RF (ugC/k-cnt) Instrument response versus carbon
concentration.
R2 Measures how well the curve fits
the data.
QC Blank (cts) Background of reagents plus water
in relation to QC standards.
Offset (area) (cts) The y intercept of the least squares
regression in area counts.
Offset (mass) (ugc) The y intercept of the least squares
regression converted to mass.
Reagent Blank (cts) Background of reagents. Not
available in TIC: only available in
TC or NPOC mode.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.7. Method Calibration Dialog Box Settings (Continued)
Section Description
Mode-Specific Settings These settings apply to the mode specified in the Primary
Analysis Mode drop-down menu at the top of the dialog box.
Use EFC Check box to allow for use of the
optional EFC, if installed, in the
mode.
Total Flow ml/min Indicates the rate of flow through
the EFC. Range: 50-1000 mL/min.
Must be greater than detect flow to
be used.
Check Standards Two options to allow for check
standards: Subtract RW and
Subtract Offset.
Subtract RW removes the Reagent
Water background from the
sample.
Subtract Offset removes the
y intercept from the sample.
Sample Type Two options to subtract
background from samples.
Subtract RB removes the reagents,
gas, tubing, etc, background.
Subtract offset removes the y-
intercept from the sample.
Regression Type Sets the regression type for the
mode. Options are Weighted and
Unweighted.
Weighted - The zero point receives
the greatest weight and diminishes
as the curve extends out. Ideal for
measuring at the lower end of
curve.
Unweighted - Every point receives
equal weight and plots similar to
an Microsoft® Excel® format.
# of Reagent Blanks Field for entering the number of
reagent blanks used in the mode.
Range: 1-15.
Stock Conc for Dil. Field for setting stock
concentration to be used auto-
generating a calibration. Range:
1-10,000 ppm.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.7. Method Calibration Dialog Box Settings (Continued)
Section Description
Calibration Generation Allows for automatically or manually generating a calibration

for the unit.
Auto-generated Select to have the system
automatically generate the
calibration.
# of Stds Field to set the number of
standards. Range: 1–10.
Only available if Auto-generated
is selected.
Dil. Volume mL Amount of dilution added to the
sample, in mL. Range:
0–20.
is selected.
Dil. Factor Level of dilution in relation to the
original sample. Range:
1–10,000.
is selected.
Manual Select to manually generate the
calibration.
Generate Generates the calibration table
based on data entered in # of Stds,
Dil. Volume, and Dil. Factor
fields.
Pass/Fail
Enable Calibration Pass/ Displays the dialog box depicted
Fail for Primary Mode in Figure 4.28
Calibration Generation may be Auto-generated or Manual. Select Auto-generated to

activate the Generate button. Press Generate to display the calibration table.
Processing the sequence generates the actual chemical standards.
NOTE: For help on creating and calibrating a method, see Chapter 5, “Calibrating
the Aurora” on page 143.

Rev. 5.0
Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria Settings
The Pass/Fail Criteria button brings up the Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria dialog box, as
Figure 4.28. Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria Dialog Box
The first section in this screen is Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria and Actions, with several
check boxes for RF, R2, Offset Area, Offset Mass, Reagent Blank, and QC Blank.
By selecting a check box, the fields for entering values for Low, High, and Failure are
enabled. Enter numerical values for Low and High as needed. In the Failure drop-down
menu, select Continue, Prompt, or Abort. Selecting Continue sets the system to
continue processing after failing a calibration, while selecting Prompt sets the system to
prompt for an action when a failure occurs. Selecting Abort sets the system to stop
processing when a calibration failure occurs. Press OK. The system confirms the
choice made, and the Pass/Fail Criteria dialog box disappears.
The Checks, QCs and Actions section displays parameters for Ck Std, QC #1 through
QC #4, and SST. These parameters include are explained in Table 4.8.
Table 4.8. Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria Dialog Box Settings
Parameter Description
Target (PPM) Target value for each type, measured in parts per million.
Range:
Tolerance (+/-%) Acceptable degree of variance from the target, in percent.
1st Failure Sets what the system will do after the first failure to meet the
target. Options are Continue, Prompt, Abort, and Re-run. (*
Note: SST has only a 1st failure so Re-run is not an option.)

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.8. Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria Dialog Box Settings (Continued)
Parameter Description
2nd Failure Sets what the system will do after the second failure to meet
the target. Options are Continue, Prompt, and Abort.
Press OK. The system confirms the choice made, and the Pass/Fail Criteria screen is
closed.
Saving a Method
Once a method is defined, it is saved for later use. The Aurora can store up to 99
methods. A method can be copied by pressing Save As..., which will save the method
and calibration settings under a different name, but not save the calibration results.
Deleting a Method
Methods can be deleted from the Aurora at any time. The following procedure outlines
how to delete a method.
1. Press Editor.
The Editor section appears.
2. Press Method.
The Method screen appears.
3. Press Delete or Open.
There are three scenarios:
• No method is loaded.
• A method is loaded and is the one to delete.
• A method is loaded, but is not the one to delete.
For no method loaded:
a. Press Delete.
A window appears listing all the methods currently stored in the Aurora.
b. Select the desired method.
c. Press OK.
The window listing the methods is closed and a dialog box appears asking the
user to confirm deleting the method.

Rev. 5.0
d. Press Yes.
The selected method is deleted.
If the desired method is loaded:
a. Press Delete.
A dialog box appears asking to confirm the deletion of the method.
b. Press Yes.
If a method is loaded but is not the desired method to delete:
a. Press Open.
A window appears listing all the methods currently stored in the Aurora.
b. Select the desired method.
The window listing the methods is closed and a dialog box appears asking the
user to confirm the deletion of the method.
c. Press Yes.
Editor Sequence Screen
The Editor Sequence screen provides options for creating, deleting, saving, and
renaming sequences. Press Editor  Sequence to view this screen, depicted in

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.29.
Figure 4.29. Editor Sequence Screen
A sequence is an ordered list of samples that the Aurora analyzes when initiated by the
operator. Each row of the sequence table shows a sample ID, quantity of replicates or
repeats for that sample position, desired analytical method for that sample, sample type
(such as sample, QC standard, and calibrant), an optional customer ID, and comments.
Table 4.9 explains the fields and controls on the Editor Sequence screen.
Table 4.9. Editor Sequence Screen Controls and Fields
Field/Control Description
New Creates a new sequence list.

Open Loads an existing sequence list.
Save Saves a current sequence list to the same name.
Save As... Saves a current sequence list to a new name.
Delete Removes a sequence list from the Aurora.
Print Prints the currently selected method.
Help Displays the online help for the Aurora.
Name Name of the current sequence.
Created By User ID of the method’s creator.
Modified Date and time of when the method was last modified.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.9. Editor Sequence Screen Controls and Fields (Continued)
Field/Control Description
Table Displays sample lists.

Add/Insert... Adds or inserts multiple items into the sequence.
Remove Removes one or several sample entries from the sequence.
Import... Imports sample information from a LIMS or similar external
data source.
The table in the Editor Sequence screen lists the Sample ID, Reps, Method, Type,
Customer ID, and a field for Comments. Table 4.10 explains these elements in detail.
Table 4.10. Editor Sequence Table Elements
Element Description
Sample ID The name of the sample in the sequence.

... Selects common sample IDs.
Reps Number of replicates set for that sample.
Method Method used for that sample.
Type Type of sample. Options selected from the drop-down menu
are: Sample, Cal, Cleanup, QC #1-4, QC Blank,
CkStd#1-12, Reagent Blank, and SST.
Cust ID Listing of all available customer IDs.
Comm... Field for entering free-flow comments. Limited to 32
characters.

Rev. 5.0
Selecting Add/Insert... opens the Add/Insert Samples dialog box, depicted in

Figure 4.30. Specifying a quantity of samples greater than one adds several samples at
once.
Figure 4.30. Add/Insert Samples Dialog Box
Editor Sample IDs Screen
Use the Sample IDs Editor screen to name frequently analyzed types of samples such as
QCs, spikes, and check standards. Press Editor  Sample IDs to view this screen,
Figure 4.31. Editor Sample IDs Screen

Rev. 5.0
Entries in the list of sample IDs can be added and removed, as necessary. To add a new
entry, press Add and enter a sample ID and a description using the virtual keyboard. To
remove a sample ID, select the line containing the desired sample ID and press
Remove. The list can be saved at any time by pressing Save, while pressing Refresh
updates the display.
Configuration Section
The Configuration section provides screens for managing multiple configurations of the
analyzer. While only one configuration is active at a time, the Aurora allows the
operator to create up to 15 distinct configurations, each with its own unique name. This
simplifies the process of switching from one sample introduction mode to another
between runs. It also lessens confusion and allows fewer mistakes when experimenting
with tuning or adjusting certain analytical parameters to optimize performance.
General Configuration Screen
The General Configuration screen shows a list of icons that correspond to each separate
named configuration. Press Config  General to view this screen, depicted in
Figure 4.32.
Figure 4.32. General Configuration Screen
OI Analytical provides several preset configurations in the Aurora software. The

default configuration is the Sipper mode of sample introduction. Other configurations
include the 1088 Rotary Autosampler, 1096+ XYZ Autosampler, At-Line, and Manual
Syringe. The operator may use one of these basic configurations, or create and add new
configurations to the system.
Press a configuration icon to activate View/Modify..., Delete, and Make Active. Only
one configuration can be active at any given time and is highlighted in the display. The

Rev. 5.0
active configuration can be switched when the analyzer is in standby. Select the icon for
the desired configuration and press Make Active. To select a different configuration,
press the stylus on that configuration icon and press Make Active.
NOTE: If the analyzer is already running a method configuration, this message

appears: “Failed to activate configuration. Reason(s): Cannot change
active configuration during run operation.” Press OK to close the message
box.
CAUTION: Changing the default settings may affect system performance.
Use Add to create an entirely new configuration, while selecting Delete removes the
selected configuration from the system. View/Modify allows for viewing and changing
settings for the selected configuration.
Viewing or modifying a configuration uses three tabs labeled Basic, Built-In I/O, and
External I/O. The collection of settings on these three pages, including items such as
syringe size and sample introduction mode, constitute the entire configuration. See
Figure 4.33 for a depiction of the Basic tab, Figure 4.34 for the Built-In I/O tab, and
Figure 4.35 for the External I/O tab.
Adding a Configuration
New configurations are easily added to the Aurora database. To enter new
configurations, press Add.... The Config dialog box appears, as depicted in Figure 4.33.
Enter a name for the new configuration in the Name field on the Basic tab. There are
two other tabs: Built-In I/O, depicted in Figure 4.34, and External I/O, depicted in
Figure 4.35.
Figure 4.33. Basic Tab on Configuration Screen

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.34. Built-In I/O Tab on Configuration Screen
Figure 4.35. External I/O Tab on Configuration Screen
Basic Tab
Configuration options on the Basic tab include the following areas: Activate Syringe,
Rinse, Activate Sample Intro Device, Chamber Options, Options, Output Data,
Automatic Repeat of Sequence, and Standby Settings. Each of these areas and
options are explained in the following paragraphs. Table 4.11 lists and defines each
option.

Rev. 5.0
NOTE: This screen includes references to a POC module. At this time, there is no
POC option for the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer. Any changes made to
Table 4.11. Options for Basic Tab on Configuration Screen
Area Option Description
Activate Syringe Syringe Size Selects syringe size: 1.0 mL, 2.5
mL, and 5 mL.
Priming at Start of Run Check if reagent priming is needed.
Rinse Rinse at Start of Run Conducts a rinse of the TIC
chamber of the specified volume at
beginning of run.
Volume (mL) Volume of fluid used for Rinse at
Start of Run option.
Activate Sample Sample Intro Drop-down menu listing all
Intro Device available devices for introducing a
sample.
Options Use POC Module Reserved for possible future use.
Use TNb Module Check to use the optional TNb
module.
Output Data Use Attached Printer Check to use a printer attached to
the Aurora.
Automatic Repeat Enable Auto-Repeat Check to automatically repeat the
of Sequence sequence.
Delay (hh:mm) Enter a delay in hours/minutes
between sequence repeats.
Perform Syringe Prime Check to prime the syringe for the
Auto-Repeat option.
Standby Settings TIC Chmb Temp (°C) Sets the standby temperature of the
TIC chamber.
TC Chmb Temp (°C) Sets the standby temperature of the
TC chamber.
Flowrate (ml/min) Sets the gas flowrate while in
standby mode.
Pressure (psi) Sets the gas pressure while in
standby mode.
POC Reactor Temp (°C) Reserved for possible future use.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.11. Options for Basic Tab on Configuration Screen (Continued)
Area Option Description
Enable User Notices Check to send warning notice(s) to

user(s).
The Output Data section provides the option of sending data to a printer.
When the Aurora is not actively analyzing samples, the instrument enters standby
status. Default standby temperature and pressure settings are set in the Standby Settings
section. The range of the gauges are: TIC Chmb Temp (°C) 1-200,TC Chmb Temp
(°C) 500-950, Flowrate (mL/min) 0-1000, and Pressure (psi) 15-35.
Once all of the desired options and a name are entered for the new configuration, press
Save to save it. A dialog box appears stating the configuration was successfully created.
Press OK to acknowledge the message and dismiss the dialog box.
Built-In I/O
Press Config, General, Add, and Built-In I/O to display the Built-In I/O dialog box,
Figure 4.36. Built-In I/O Tab on Configuration Dialog Box
The Built-In I/O tab on the Configuration dialog box has two sections: Built-In Input
Relays and Built-In Output Relays. Both sections have check boxes for Relay #1 and
Relay #2, with two drop-down menus for each relay. Selecting the check box activates
that relay for the configuration and allows the selection of the Purpose and Input
Frequency/Action options for the relay.

Rev. 5.0
The relay check box for each relay in Built-In Input Relays activates two drop-down
menus: Purpose and Input Frequency. The purpose for each relay can be configured as
Remote Start, Remote Abort, and Reset Alarms/Outputs. Once the relay’s purpose
is selected, the frequency is selected from the Input Frequency drop-down menu: Once
Per Sequence, Once Per Sample, and Once Per Replicate.
When the relay is selected, a message window appears stating “Enabling Input Relays
will cause the system to respond to External Inputs. If Remote Start is used, the system
will wait indefinitely for an external relay closure to trigger the sequence to advance.”
Press OK to acknowledge the message and dismiss the window.
The relay check box for each relay in Built-In Output Relays activates two drop-down
menus, as well. These drop-down menus reveal options for the Purpose of each relay, as
well as the Action performed for each purpose. The Purpose options are System Error,
End of Sequence, End of Sample, End of Replicate, Fail-ck std, and Fail-QC, while
the Action options are Prompt, Abort, and Continue.
For each selected relay, a message window appears stating “Enabling Output Relays
will allow for handshaking with external devices for notification of errors or
completion of samples or sequence.” Press OK to acknowledge the message and close
the window.
When a relay in Built-In Output Relays is selected, the Reset Built-In Alarm After
option is available. This option sets when an alarm is reset and includes User
Acknowledge Only, Start of Next Rep, and Start of Next Sample.
Press Save for the current method or Save As... to create configurations for a new
method.
External I/O
NOTE: This tab is only used with the optional External Expansion I/O Module
(PN 322316). See Chapter 6, “External Expansion I/O Module” on
page 243 for more information on this module.
Press Config, General, Add, and External I/O tab to display the External I/O dialog
box, depicted in Figure 4.37. If an autosampler is not connected, the options on this tab
are grayed out and unavailable.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.37. External I/O Tab on Configuration Dialog Box
The External I/O tab on the Configuration dialog box sets the options for the External
I/O ports, located on the rear of the Aurora. There are three areas: Output Frequency,
Analog Signal Output, and Expansion Output Relays.
The Output Frequency area consists of a drop-down menu, setting how often the
information is sent through the External I/O ports. The options are Once Per Sample
and Once Per Replicate.
The Analog Signal Output area has check boxes for setting parameters for Line #1
through Line #4. When an output line is selected, the Data Format, Range (Min), and
Range (Max) fields are enabled. The Data Format drop-down menu has four options:
Concentration-TOC, Concentration-TIC, Concentration-TC, and Concentration-
TNb. The Range fields are numerical values ranging from 0 - 90,000.
For each line selected, a message window appears stating “Enabling Analog Outputs
requires the External I/O module to be attached.” Press OK to acknowledge the
message and close the window.
The Expansion Output Relays section includes settings for External Relays #3 through
#6. Selecting a check box for a relay enables the other settings: Purpose, Low, High,
and Action. Purpose is a drop-down menu with four options: Concentration-TOC,
Concentration-TIC, Concentration-TC, and Concentration-TNb. Low and High
fields are numerical, with a range of 0 - 90,000 and Action sets what happens when the
option selected under Purpose is outside the ranges set in Low and High. The options
under Action are Prompt, Abort, and Continue.
For each relay check box selected, a message window appears stating “Enabling
Expansion Output Relays requires the External I/O Module to be attached.” Press OK
to acknowledge the message and close the window.

Rev. 5.0
When a relay in Built-In Output Relays is selected, the Reset Expansion Alarm After
option is available. This option sets when an alarm is reset and includes User
Acknowledge Only, Start of Next Rep, and Start of Next Sample.
Press Save for the current method or Save As... to create configurations for a new
method.
Sample Intro Screen

The Sample Intro screen displays icons corresponding to each of the available sample
introduction modes:
• Rotary Autosampler (1088 Autosampler)

• XYZ Autosampler (1096+ Autosampler)
• Sipper
• Manual Syringe
• At-Line Autosampler
• Solids
• Solids/CRDS
Press Config  Sample Intro to view this screen, depicted in Figure 4.38. The default
parameters for each of the sample intro methods are predefined in the Aurora software.
However, these values may be modified as needed through this screen. Each of the
modes are discussed in greater detail in the following sections.
Figure 4.38. Sample Intro Configuration Screen

Rev. 5.0
1088 Rotary Autosampler Configuration
The Rotary Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.39, is used to configure the
Aurora to use the OI Analytical 1088 Rotary Autosampler, sold separately. After
completing all desired settings, press OK to save the selected parameters.
Figure 4.39. Sample Intro Configuration Settings for Rotary Autosampler Dialog Box
NOTE: See the OI Analytical 1088 Rotary Autosampler Operator’s Manual for
more information.
NOTE: Decreasing the needle depth decreases the number of replicates available
from a sample vial unless the depth is gradually increased after each
replicate is drawn.
Table 4.12 lists and defines the settings for the Rotary Autosampler dialog box.
Table 4.12. Rotary Autosampler Dialog Box Settings
Setting Definition
Sample Tray Type Type of tray used in the autosampler. Default sample
tray is 40 mL x 88 vials.
Vial Type Indicates if the vial is open or closed.
Sample Inlet Volume Represents the volume of the needle and sample transfer
line. Range is 0 to 10 mL.
Sample Needle Depth (%) Determines the depth, in percent, the needle descends
into the vial. OI Analytical recommends 98% for clean
waters and 85% for heavily particulated waters.
To maximize sample use, this value can be increased.
However, the needle should not hit the bottom of the
vial.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.12. Rotary Autosampler Dialog Box Settings (Continued)
Setting Definition
Sample Stirring Speed Represents the speed a sample is stirred. Values range
from 0 (off) to 6. Higher viscosity samples or samples
with particulates generally require slower stirring
speeds.
Sample Stirring in A/S Determines whether the stirring motor is enabled in the
autosampler. Note: Not all vials are required to have a
stir bar.
Wash Needle at Start of Determines if needle is washed before each sample.
Sample Range is 1 to 10 washes.
Wash Needle at End of Determines if needle is washed after each sample
Sample sequence is completed. Range is 1 to 10 washes.
1096+ XYZ Autosampler Configuration
The XYZ Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.40, configures the Aurora to
use the OI Analytical 1096+ XYZ Autosampler, sold separately. After completing all
desired settings, press OK to save the selected parameters.
NOTE: See the OI Analytical 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Operator’s Manual for
more information.
NOTE: Decreasing the needle depth decreases the number of replicates available
from a sample vial unless the depth is gradually increased after each
replicate is drawn.
Figure 4.40. Sample Intro Configuration Settings for XYZ Autosampler Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.13 lists and defines the settings for the XYZ Autosampler dialog box.
Table 4.13. XYZ Autosampler Dialog Box Settings
Setting Definition
Sample Tray Type Type of sample tray used in the autosampler. Default
tray size is 4 rows of 24 40 mL vials.
Standard Tray Type Type of standards tray used in the autosampler. Default
tray size is 1 row of 12 40 mL vials.
into the vial. OI Analytical recommends 98% for clean
waters and 85% for heavily particulated water.
vial.
Wash Needle Depth (%) Indicates the depth, in percent, the needle descends in
the wash reservoir. Range is 1 to 100. OI Analytical
recommends a value of 90.
Wash Needle at Start of Determines if needle is washed before each sample. This
Sample value corresponds to the length of time the needle is
washed.
Wash Needle at End of Determines if needle is washed after each sample
Sample sequence is completed. This value corresponds to the
length of time the needle is washed.
Sipper Configuration
The Sipper dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.41, configures the Aurora for drawing
liquids from a reagent bottle or container through a sipper tube. After completing all
desired settings, press OK to save the selected parameters.
Figure 4.41. Sipper Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.14 lists and defines the settings for the Sipper sampling configuration.
Table 4.14. Sipper Dialog Box Settings
Setting Definition
Prompt Check box indicates the Aurora prompts the operator at
the end of each analysis to press Start to begin a new
analysis. When selected, a message window appears
stating the Start button must be pressed between each
sample. Press OK to acknowledge the message and
dismiss the window.
Flush Line with Acid Check box indicates Aurora flushes the sipper line with
acid after completing an analysis to clear any residual
material. Ensure the sipper line is in a waste vial after
completing the last replicate.
Flush Line with Water Check box indicates Aurora flushes the sipper line with
water after completing an analysis to clear any residual
material. Ensure the sipper line is in a waste vial after
completing the last replicate.
Manual Syringe Configuration
The Manual Syringe dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.42, allows for manually injecting
samples. The only setting in this configuration is a check box for Aurora to prompt the
operator to press Start between each sample. When selected, a message window
appears stating the Start button must be pressed between each sample. Press OK to
acknowledge the message and dismiss the window.
Figure 4.42. Manual Syringe Dialog Box
At-Line Autosampler Configuration
The At-Line Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.43, configures the Aurora to
draw sample from an aqueous process line. Enter a time, in minutes and seconds, in the
Delay Prior to Sampling field, and a volume in mL in the Sample Inlet Volume. The

Rev. 5.0
delay time allows the at-line sample to be flushed (refreshed) before sampling. Press
OK to save the configuration parameters.
Figure 4.43. At-Line Autosampler Dialog Box
Solids Configuration
See 1030S Solids Manual for proper configuration.
CRDS Configuration
See iTOC-CRDS Manual for proper configuration.
Advanced Configuration Screen

The Advanced Configuration screen shows icons to view and modify the following
parameters:
• Syringe Pump
• CO2 Detector
• TNb Module
• Heated Zones
• Peak Settings
• Drain Settings
• RW/RB Settings
Each of these are explained in detail in the following sections.
NOTE: OI Analytical predefines system parameters to be sufficient for most

analytical requirements. OI Analytical recommends only an advanced
operator modify these parameters after consulting with the OI Analytical
Customer Support Center.

Rev. 5.0
Press Config  Advanced to view this screen, depicted in Figure 4.44.
Figure 4.44. Advanced Configuration Screen
Syringe Pump Settings
The Syringe Pump dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.45, is used to update previously
existing syringe pump definitions.
Figure 4.45. Syringe Pump Dialog Box
The Syringe Pump dialog box appears unpopulated until the operator selects a syringe
size from the Syringe Size drop-down menu. The system recalls the defined parameters
for the selected syringe size and populates the dialog box for editing, as necessary.
There are two sections to the dialog box: Syringe Definitions and General Syringe
Settings.

Rev. 5.0
NOTE: The Prime Reagent Volumes settings are set to default values. These are
normally sufficient to allow for correct operation of the system and should
not require modification.
The Syringe Definitions section options are explained in Table 4.15.
Table 4.15. Syringe Definitions Settings in Syringe Pump Dialog Box
Setting Definition
Syringe Size Choose from these syringe sizes:

• 1 mL (PN 322790)
• 2.5 mL (PN 322791) (recommended)
• 5 mL (PN 322974)
Aspirate Speed Applies to Sample and Reagent/Rinse options. Choose
optional values of 2, 5, and incrementally by tens up to 100.
Dispense Speed (%) Applies to Sample and Waste/Flush options. Choose optional
values incrementally by tens up to 100.
Syringe Backfill Requires a value of 0 to 10 mL.
Volume
Syringe Loop Requires a value of 1 to 26.
Volume (mL)
Delay after Sets a delay, in seconds, after the Aspirate and/or Dispense
Aspirate/Dispense functions.
(Sec)
Reagent Prime Sets the amount of acid, in mL, used to properly prime the
Volumes system.
Sets the amount of persulfate, in mL, used to properly prime
the system. This option is only applicable to the 1030W and
has no affect on 1030C operations.
Sets the amount of rinse water, in mL, used to properly prime
the system.
Used to ensure accurate prime volume by priming between
replicates.
Syringe Backfill Volume indicates the ability of the syringe to fill the isolation loop
with fresh water after each injection to ensure no residual sample or reagent is left in the
isolation loop. In combustion modes, sample is injected into the combustion furnace,
followed by the specified chase volume, which flushes the remainder of the isolation
loop and the injection line to the furnace. After the sample or reagent is injected into the
reaction vessel, or the sample and chase are injected into the furnace and the lines are
cleared, DI water is pulled directly into the syringe via port H and injected through the
S2 port, which is the backend of the isolation loop. The DI water is then flushed
through the S1 port out to waste.

Rev. 5.0
Generally, the default values set for the syringe backfill volume should be sufficient to
minimize any impact on the sample matrix. However, due to the viscosity of the sample
or other factors, the syringe backfill volume may require a higher setting to verify the
sample matrix is properly flushed out.
The General Syringe Settings section has settings for Bubble Aspirate Motor Steps and
Backlash Steps, which are explained in Table 4.16.
Table 4.16. General Syringe Settings in Syringe Pump Dialog Box
Setting Definition
Bubble Aspirate Minimal amount of motor step necessary to ensure the

Motor Steps correct aspirate bubble size. The aspirate bubble separates
the sample from the de-ionized water in the isolation loop.
The motor steps the necessary amount, defined in this field,
to ensure the appropriate bubble size.
Backlash Steps Minimal amount of motor step necessary to ensure
volumetric accuracy of the syringe when pulling a sample.
The syringe pulls X amount of steps assigned in the backlash
past the defined volume and pushes that amount out to take
out any mechanical issues.
After editing the desired syringe settings, press Save to store the new syringe
parameters into the system. A message box appears stating: “Changing the syringe
settings may have a significant effect on the ability to properly aspirate and dispense
sample.” If syringe pump speed settings are increased beyond the optimal settings, air
may be pulled in with the sample or cavitation of the syringe may occur if the sample is
too viscous. Also, mixing of sample material with water in the sample isolation loop
may not allow the air bubble to stay in place, which is necessary to prevent mixing.
CO2 Detector Settings
The CO2 Detector dialog box displays parameters for the CO2 detector, as depicted in
Figure 4.46 (Old Golay NDIR) and Figure 4.47 (New Solid State NDIR). These values
are coefficients for equations used to linearize the detector from a non-linear state.
CAUTION: The Mantissa and Exponents are coefficients specific to the NDIR
detector. These values are calculated at the factory and, if changed, could
produce unreliable results since the linearity cannot be assured.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.46. Golay NDIR CO2 Detector Dialog Box
Solid State NDIR Detector
NOTE: The Solid State NDIR Detector requires v1.2.3 or later of the 1030
software. Also, if ATOC is in use, v1.2.3 of the ATOC software is also
required. Installation of this software is required BEFORE the SSNDIR
can be installed.
Some instruments contain a new version of the NDIR detector called a Solid State
NDIR (SSNDIR). This type of NDIR detector is indicated by a long grey cylindrical
tube and requires six coefficients instead of four, as noted in Figure 4.47.
Figure 4.47. Solid State NDIR CO2 Detector Dialog Box
These coefficients for either NDIR detector version are preset in the factory and should
not be changed. If the detector settings are changed and OK is pressed, a message
window appears stating “Changing Detector settings may have significant effects on the
performance of the instrument. Consult the User’s Manual for details.” Press OK to
acknowledge and dismiss the message and to save the changes.

Rev. 5.0
TNb Module
The TNb Module dialog box displays parameters for the TNb detector, as depicted in
Figure 4.48.
CAUTION: The Mantissa and Exponents are coefficients specific to the NDIR
detector. These values are calculated at the factory and, if changed, could
produce unreliable results since the linearity cannot be assured.
Figure 4.48. TNb Module Dialog Box
The Exponent values for Coef #0 through Coef #3 should be a numerical value of –50
to 50.
If the detector settings are changed and OK is pressed, a message window appears
stating “Changing Detector settings may have significant effects on the performance of
the instrument. Consult the User’s Manual for details.” Press OK to acknowledge and
dismiss the message and to save the changes.
Heated Zones
The Heated Zones dialog box sets parameters for the thermocouple offset temperature
and the PWM settings, as depicted in Figure 4.49.
NOTE: This dialog box includes references to a POC reactor. At this time, there is
no POC option for the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer. Any changes made
to POC fields will not affect 1030C operations.
NOTE: Changing the PWM Settings may adversely affect system operation and
sample results. Please contact OI Analytical Technical Support before
editing this setting.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.49. Heated Zones Dialog Box
The Thermocouple Offset Temperature section has settings for TIC Chamber, TC
Condensate Chamber, and TC Furnace, as well as one reserved for the future possible
option of a POC Reactor. These parameters range in value from -25 to 25.
The PWM Settings section has settings for the pulse width modulation (PWM) values.
These are default values set at the factory.
Peak Detection Settings
The Peak Detection Settings dialog box is used to select parameters for detecting
sample peaks. The Peak Detection Settings are dependent on the type of NDIR detector
used in the instrument. There are two types of NDIR detector: the older Golay NDIR
and the new Solid State NDIR (SSNDIR), found in some later machines. Figure 4.50
depicts the Peak Detection Settings dialog box for the Golay NDIR, while Figure 4.51

Rev. 5.0
depicts the Peak Detection Settings dialog box for the SSNDIR. See Chapter 13, “Peak
Detection Settings” on page 438 for more information on Peak Detection Settings.
Figure 4.50. Golay NDIR Peak Detection Settings Dialog Box
Figure 4.51. Solid State NDIR Peak Detection Settings Dialog Box
Note that the main difference between the two dialog boxes is that the Use Return-To-
Baseline and Use D1V options in the Peak-End Detection Parameters section are not
used with the SSNDIR.
The Peak Detection Settings dialog box has three sections: Peak-Start Detection
Parameters, Peak-End Detection Parameters, and Peak Rejection Parameters.
Each of these are explained in greater detail in the following paragraphs.

Rev. 5.0
Peak-Start Detection Parameters
Peak-Start parameters are used to specify under what conditions a Peak Start may be
found. To determine Peak Start, three parameters are considered: Peak-Start
Minimum, Peak-Start First Derivative Threshold, and Noise Peak-to-Peak.
Peak-Max parameters are used to bracket the region (in time) in which the Peak Max
will be found. The Window Start and Window End values should be set so that the
Peak Max will always occur within this window.
Peak Max is found by searching for the largest (highest) signal value within the data
window defined by the Window Start and Window End. The search for the Peak Max
does not begin until the Window End value is reached. As such, if the Window End
time is not detected prior to the end of the Max Detect time (as defined in the method),
then the system will automatically trigger on the Max Detect time to start searching for
the Peak Max.
Peak-End Detection Parameters
Peak-End parameters are used to define several possible conditions, which may be
considered when finding the end of the peak. The Peak-End will be considered found
when any one of these conditions has been met.
Peak Rejection Parameters
Peak Rejection parameters identify and quantify analytical peaks to determine if the
detected peak is usable or must be rejected. There are two settings: Signal To Noise
Ratio and Minimum Peak Width. If the signal to noise ratio is too low when the peak
is detected, then the peak is rejected. If the minimum peak width does not exceed the
value set here, then the peak is rejected.
Drain Settings
The Drain dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.52, sets the Drain Pressurizing Time in
seconds and a Drain Acid Chase Volume in µL. Optimal settings are 5 seconds for the
drain time and 400 L.
Figure 4.52. Drain Dialog Box
RW/RB Settings
Reagent Water (RW)/Reagent Blank (RB) Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.53,
is used to determine the analyzer’s response to the ultrapure water used for preparing

Rev. 5.0
standards and for blank samples. These settings help optimize instrument response.
Press OK to save the changes.
Figure 4.53. RW/RB Settings Dialog Box
Reagent Water Weighting Factor
The Reagent Water Weighting Factor is used to constrain or loosen the fit of the
response curve through the Reagent Water (RW) samples when calculating that curve
during a calibration. A larger number in this field constrains the curve fit calculations to
fit a curve directly to through the average of the RW samples. Conversely, a smaller
number allows the curve fit calculations to compute a curve that is less constrained to
the RW samples. This parameter is used as a multiplier to the weight assigned by the
curve fit algorithm for the standard with the next-lowest concentration.
The default value is 50, which fits well where ultrapure water with approximately 20
ppb of organic carbon is used for the RW samples and the next-lowest concentration of
standard is 1 ppm of organic carbon. That is, 20 ppb times 50 equals 1 ppm. This factor
is adjusted to reflect the ratio of carbon in the ultrapure water used for RW samples
versus the concentration of carbon in the next-lowest standard.
Reagent Blank Fixed Volume (mL)
The volume entered indicates how much acid or persulfate to inject into the reaction
vessel when calculating a reagent blank (RB) value. This value must be smaller than the
size of the syringe. The default value is 5 mL. This setting is generally used only for
wet-oxidation processes, not for combustion processes. For combustion processes,
sample and chase is generally used.
System Configuration Screen

The System Configuration screen displays icons to access and customize system
features and options to meet individual requirements. Press Config  System to view

Rev. 5.0
this screen, depicted in Figure 4.54.
Figure 4.54. System Configuration Screen
Configuration settings accessible from this screen include:
• Automatic Startup/Shutdown
• Reminders
• LIMS Settings
• Preferences
• Next Boot Option
• Network Settings
• Power Save Option
• Set Date/Time
• Stylus (only visible on the analyzer interface)
• DTS Settings
• OI Administrative Settings
• EPC/EFC Settings
• Printer Settings
• CSV Settings
Each of these are discussed in detail in the following sections.
Automated Startup / Shutdown Settings
Use the Automated Startup/Shutdown dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.58, to set the
system to automatically start and/or to shut down. Automatically starting the system at
a set time before running any sequences allows for items such as heaters to reach
operating temperature before testing begins.

Rev. 5.0

NOTE: Ensure startup and shutdown times are appropriately set for normal
laboratory operations.
Figure 4.55. Automated Startup/Shutdown Dialog Box
There are two sections to this dialog box: Startup Settings and Shutdown Settings.
Each section has a number of options available, which are explained in Table 4.17.
Table 4.17. Automatic Startup/Shutdown Dialog Box Settings
Setting Function
Startup Settings Check box to activate the Startup Settings section and its
options.
Wakeup Time Set the time for the Aurora to “wake up.”
Occurrence Defines when the startup settings take place. Options are
Weekdays Only, Everyday, and Never.
Reagent Purge Time Time allowed for the Aurora to purge the reagent.
Method Name Defines the method to use.
Actions Run Clean-Up Replicates and Prime Reagents check
boxes set actions for the Aurora to perform when started.
When Run Clean-Up Replicates is selected, the #Reps
per Chamber field is activated. Enter a number between
0 and 20 to set the number of clean-up replicates run per
chamber.
Shutdown Settings Check box to activate the Shutdown Settings section and
its options.

Rev. 5.0
Table 4.17. Automatic Startup/Shutdown Dialog Box Settings (Continued)
Setting Function
Shutdown Time Defines the time the system shuts down. Press the stylus
in the entry field to open the numeric keyboard, enter a
value, and press the Up or Dn keys to select AM or PM.
Inactivity Timeout Check box to allow for shutting down the system due to
inactivity. When selected, the value field is activated.
Enter a numeric value between 1 and 12, in hours.
Default value is 5.
Shutdown Pressure (psig) In shutdown mode, the EPC reduces the operating gas
pressure to the value entered here. This saves
approximately 80% in gas usage with the default setting.
Shutdown EFC (mL/min) Specify the desired EFC pressure when in gas saver
mode, if EFC is installed on TOC. The default setting of
5 mL/min ensures a minimal amount of flow compared
to a typical usage as set in the config, preventing overuse
of gases.
After completing any settings, press OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
Press Cancel to close the dialog box without saving any changes.
Reminders Settings
The Reminders dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.56, sets periodic notices to recalibrate
the system or refresh reagents at specified times.
Figure 4.56. Reminders Dialog Box
To activate a reminder, check Re-Calibration or Fresh Reagents and choose a period

for the desired selection. At the designated time, the Aurora system displays a popup
reminder to perform the designated task. The period choices in the drop-down menus
for Re-Calibration and Fresh Reagents are: Every Day, Every Week, Every 2 Week,
and Every Month. The Last Renewal field shows the date and time for the last
renewal. Once set, a reminder can be cleared only after completing the task.
When reminder parameters are set as desired, press OK to save the settings. At that
time, a message window appears stating “Reminders have been set.” Press OK to

Rev. 5.0
LIMS Settings
The LIMS Settings dialog box sets parameters for importing and exporting data
between an Aurora and a PC. This dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.57, has a LIMS
Output Format drop-down menu and two sections: Sample Data Export to LIMS and
Sample Table Import from LIMS.
Figure 4.57. LIMS Settings Dialog Box
To configure the Aurora to export LIMS data:
1. Select the LIMS Output Format.
Options are Comma Delimited, Space Delimited, and Tab Delimited.
2. Click Enable LIMS Export.
This check box enables the remaining items in the Sample Data Export to LIMS
section and allows for exporting data in the selected format. When checked, a
message window appears stating “LIMS Export has been enabled. Be sure the
LIMS program and PC are properly configured to receive data files.” Press OK to
3. Click Append or Overwrite.
Append will add current information onto any previous information stored in the
selected file.
Overwrite will overwrite the existing file each time the data is exported.
4. Click Include Header to include header information in the file.
5. Enter a Filename.

Rev. 5.0
Filenames follow standard Microsoft® Windows® filename conventions.
6. Click Append Date Time Stamp to Filename to add the date and time of export to
the filename.
7. Select the Frequency for exporting data.
Options include Once Per Replicate, Once Per Sample, and Once Per Sequence.
If Once Per Replicate is chosen, the Include Statistics check box is enabled. Click
this check box to include statistics for the replicate in the exported data.
8. Click OK.
The LIMS Export parameters are saved and the dialog box is closed.
To configure the Aurora to import LIMS data:
1. Click Enable LIMS Import.
This check box enables the remaining items in the Sample Table Import from LIMS
section and allows for importing data. When checked, a message window appears
stating “LIMS Import has been enabled. Be sure the LIMS program and PC are
properly configured to share data files.” Press OK to acknowledge the message and
dismiss the window.
2. Enter a Directory path for the import file.
This is the location of the file on the PC or server.
3. Enter a User Name and Password.
4. Press OK.
The LIMS Import parameters are saved and the dialog box is closed.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.58, provides settings for displaying
information on sequences, number of replicates, and system functionality. There are
five areas: Display / Results, Sequence, Method / Calibration, Run Log, and System
Memory.
The Display / Results section controls how sequence results are presented. Volume
measurements are presented in either mL or L. Concentration settings are ppm or
ppb.

Rev. 5.0
The Sequence section sets the Number of Reps for each sequence, while the Method /
Calibration section sets the Number of Reps for the method or calibration chosen, as
well as the Minimum Sample Volume with Reagents, in mL.
The Run Log section provides a check box to Clear log at start of Sequence, and the
System Memory section sets the amount of free space in memory allocated to the
threshold, in kilobytes.
Figure 4.58. Preferences Dialog Box
Press OK to change the default preferences, at which time a message window appears
stating “Preferences have been changed. New settings will take effect on the next
Sequence to run.” However, the changes in unit settings will not take place until the
next log on.
Next Boot Option
The Next Boot Option dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.59, allows for switching
between Wet Chemical and Combustion oxidation modes on Aurora systems with
both capabilities. When so outfitted, an Aurora can switch between modes the next time
the machine is rebooted.
Figure 4.59. Next Boot Option Dialog Box
Select the desired oxidation mode from the Next Boot Oxidation Mode drop-down
menu and press OK. A message window appears stating “You have changed System
Oxidation Mode. Changes will be effective from next Device session.” Press OK to

Rev. 5.0
Network Settings
The Network Settings dialog box is used by the network administrator, who determines
settings when incorporating the system into the network. This dialog box allows for
network administrators to configure the Aurora for operating on a network.
The dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.60, has two fields and three sections. The
Machine Name is listed at the top of the dialog box, along with an Obtain an IP
address from a DHCP server option.
Figure 4.60. Network Settings Dialog Box
Alternatively, the Specify an IP address option enables the remaining settings in the
first section, allowing an administrator to enter an IP address, a Gateway, and a
Subnet.
NOTE: The default IP address is 100.100.111.100.
The second section allows an administrator to Name Servers, with fields for the WINS
Address and the DNS Address.
The remaining section allows an administrator to enter Port Settings for the Aurora,
with fields for the Command Response and the Lifeline Listener.
Press OK to save these changes and close the dialog box.
Set Date and Time
The date and time can be manually synchronized between the Aurora and the PC or
network on the Set Date/Time dialog box. This ensures the log contains accurate
sample analysis results and other events.
NOTE: Do not change the time zone, as this value is not restored once the system
power is cycled.

Rev. 5.0
Press the left arrow on the calendar to see the previous month. Press the right arrow to
advance the month. Press the stylus on the desired date on the calendar to select. Press
the stylus in the clock field to change the hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM. Ensure
the checkbox for Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving is NOT checked.
Press Apply to save the settings or Cancel to exit without saving any changes. See
Figure 4.61.
Figure 4.61. Date/Time Properties
Stylus
Press Stylus to open the Stylus Properties dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.62. This
allows for calibrating the stylus used on the Aurora touchscreen.
NOTE: This feature is only accessible from the Aurora touchscreen.
Figure 4.62. Stylus Properties Dialog Box
There are two tabs on this dialog box: Double Tap and Calibration. The Double Tap tab
allows for setting how quickly the system expects a second tap from the stylus, with an
area for setting the speed of the second tap. There is also an area for testing the setting,
allowing for quick changes, if necessary, without exiting the dialog box.
The Calibration tab allows for recalibrating the stylus if it is not performing as
expected. Tap Recalibrate to calibrate the stylus.
After all settings are complete, tap OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.

Rev. 5.0
DTS Settings
Set up Data Transfer Service (DTS) from the Aurora using the DTS Settings dialog
box, depicted in Figure 4.63.
Figure 4.63. DTS Settings Dialog Box
There are two sections on this dialog box: Connect using and port settings. To start the
DTS, click the Enable Data Transfer Service check box at the top. This enables the
remainder of the settings on this dialog box.
The Connect using section allows for entering an IP Address or a Name for the
connecting system. The port settings area allows for naming the DGS Port and entering
interval values, in seconds, for Polling Retry Interval, Failed Retry Interval, and File
Check Interval. If an error is encountered, these values set the interval the system
allows for each item before giving up attempting to complete the tasks. The Enable /
Disable Auto-Print Feature allows for printing a summary of the results in a report
format through a PC printer. This feature is not available when the Aurora is in a stand-
alone configuration. Further, if a sample run is aborted, the report will not print.
NOTE: The default IP address is 100.100.110.96.
NOTE: OI Analytical recommends disabling the Auto-Print Feature unless the

1030 is connected to a PC and reports are printed from that PC.

Rev. 5.0
OI Administrative Access
The OI Analytical administrative settings for the Aurora are accessed through the OI
Administrative Access dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.64. An access code is required.
This is used only by OI Analytical technicians.
Figure 4.64. OI Administrative Access Dialog Box
EPC/EFC Settings
Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) and Electronic Flow Control (EFC) are accessed
through the EPC/EFC Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.65. EPC is standard
equipment on the Aurora, while EFC is optional.
Figure 4.65. EPC/EFC Settings Dialog Box
Working parameters for each are controlled within configured methods that use them.
However, three parameters are set here: EPC/EFC Acceptance Criteria in Pct, Check
EFC Delay in Sec, and Minimum EFC High Error Limit (mL/min).
EPC/EFC Acceptance Criteria in Percent sets the tolerance value for the point at which
a run is aborted. For example, if the psi is set to 20 and this value is set to 50, the Aurora
will abort the run if the psi drops below 10 or rises above 30 (±50 percent).
Check EFC Delay in Seconds is the amount of time to allow the EFC to equilibrate
before checking the pass/fail criteria.
Minimum EFC High Error Limit (mL/min) sets the value that the EFC must exceed
before registering as an error with the Aurora. During normal initiation of the EFC, the
rate may spike as high as 150 mL/min. This setting provides for that spike without
triggering a fail situation.
Printer Settings
Select printer settings using the Printer Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.66.

Rev. 5.0
NOTE: These settings are default values for use with the optional printer (OI
Analytical Part Number 322722). To use any other printer, check the
owner’s manual before changing these settings.
Figure 4.66. Printer Settings Dialog Box
There are eight fields: Sleep Value, Baud Rate Value, Data Bits Value, Parity Value,
Stop Bits Value, Flow Control Value, Input Buffer Size, and Output Buffer Size.
Sleep Value determines when the printer is set to sleep after a period of inactivity, in
seconds. The Baud Rate Value determines the connection speed between the Aurora
and the printer, while Data Bits Value, Parity Value, and Stop Bits Value all deal with
the signal sent to the printer.
Input Buffer Size and Output Buffer Size control the amount of memory space
allocated to the printer buffer for incoming data and outgoing data, respectively.
CSV Settings
Data from the Aurora can be saved to a file by selecting CSV Settings. This requires the
Aurora to be connected to a network. If the Aurora is not connected to a network, the
option is greyed out and unavailable. The virtual keyboard is used to enter the path for
the file. When connected and accessed from the ATOC software, click the ellipsis and
enter a path for storing the data.
Maintenance Section
Pressing Maint opens the Maintenance screen, depicted in Figure 4.67, which provides
operator control over analyzer components and accessories for diagnostic support.
Features within the Maintenance screen allow operators to manually control hardware

Rev. 5.0
for troubleshooting purposes. See Chapter 7, “Maintenance” on page 295 for complete
information.
Figure 4.67. Maintenance Screen
Security and Auditing Section

Pressing S & A opens the Security and Auditing screen, depicted in Figure 4.68, which
controls operator access to the analyzer. The Security and Auditing screen provides
access to Local User Settings, Local Audit Settings, and Local Audit Log from either an
Aurora’s touchscreen or from the ATOC PC application software. These settings are
specific to a single Aurora. See Chapter 12, “Local Security and Auditing Details” on
page 431 for more information.
To manage these functions for more than one Aurora, use the Launchpad software,
select the PC Applications tab, and select the S&A program there. This program
provides access to User Manager, Group Manager, Audit Manager, General Settings,
Security Policy, and Audit Log applications. These programs allow for controlling
security and auditing functions for all Auroras connected to the same network as the
PC. See the ATOC Software Operator’s Manual for more information.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 4.68. Security and Auditing Screen
There are three icons on this screen: Local User Settings, Local Audit Settings, and
Local Audit Log. Each of these are explained in the following sections.
Local User Settings
The Local User Settings dialog box provides for creating, editing, and deleting user
profiles. The dialog box identifies preferences and access for operators and supervisors
entered into the system. There are five user levels in the system:
• Admin
• Guest
• Operator
• Sr. User
• User
Only personnel with Admin access may assign user levels to operators, as well as add,
edit, and delete user profiles.
Local Audit Settings
The Local Audit Settings dialog box allows the operator to select the allowed Audit
Policy level: Audit Minimal, Audit Moderate, and Audit Full. Highlight an audit level
and press Make Active. The audit log tracks operators and operations through the
system.

Rev. 5.0
Local Audit Log
The Local Audit Log dialog box, depicted in Figure 4.69, provides access to the Audit
Log, listing all actions taken on the Aurora.
Figure 4.69. Local Audit Log Dialog Box
The dialog box consists of a table with four columns: a one-number-up event number
applied to each event, Date & Time, Operator, and Description. The Operator field lists
the operator logged in when the event occurred, and the Description column provides a
short description of the event.
Switch User Section

The Switch User section allows for switching between operators without restarting the
system. Press Switch User to display the Switch User dialog box, depicted in
Figure 4.70, on an active analyzer.
Figure 4.70. Switch User Dialog Box
To change users, the current user enters a Password and the new user enters the User
ID and Password. Both user passwords are required as a security measure. When
switching users from the Aurora’s touchscreen, the new user also selects the User Type
from the drop-down menu. This field is not available when logging in from the PC
interface.

Rev. 5.0
After switching users, a message window appears stating “Current User has been
switched and permissions adjusted accordingly.” Press OK to acknowledge the
message and dismiss the window.

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 5 Operation
This chapter provides information for operating the Aurora to analyze aqueous
samples. Prior to starting the Aurora, the operator should set up and install the
instrument and all peripherals according to Chapter 3, “Installation” on page 28 and
Chapter 6, “Aurora 1030C Optional Equipment” on page 188, and be familiar with the
user interface presented in Chapter 4, “Aurora User Interface” on page 34. Information
systems (IS) personnel should configure connections for the Aurora linked via a LAN
to a PC. IS personnel can also configure the Aurora connections for Data Transfer
Service (DTS), Data Gathering Service (DGS), and the Laboratory Information
Management System (LIMS) to export information.
Starting the Aurora

Starting the Aurora involves powering on the unit and logging on.
Powering Up and Logging On

Aurora software loads automatically when power is applied. The default user name
“toc” and password “toc” can be used for all operations if advanced security and
auditing functions are not required.
NOTE: User IDs and passwords are case-sensitive.
Set up user IDs and permissions using one of two schemes:
• Local Users - The user IDs and settings only apply to one Aurora and may only be
modified from the instrument itself via the touchscreen. Apply the local users
scheme when not using ATOC software to set up user IDs and permissions for
multiple instruments. Setting up local users and local audit policy is explained in
“Setting Up Local Users and Security Settings” on page 114 in this chapter.
Defining local users can be useful when restricted access to the Aurora’s
capabilities is desired. For example, temporary access to the Aurora might be
required by outside service personnel, but without any access whatsoever to
analytical results or customer data.
• Global Users - Refers to centrally managed users where ATOC software is used to
collect data from one or more Auroras onto a PC. ATOC software includes a Security
and Auditing Manager application, which allows detailed levels of control over

Rev. 5.0
Operation
permissions assigned to users, and the structure defined by the laboratory

administrator is applied uniformly to all Aurora analyzers in the facility. Consult
the ATOC Software Operator’s Manual for details on the Security and Auditing
Manager application.
Follow these steps to power up and use the Aurora:
1. Turn on the power switch located on the back of the instrument (see Chapter 2,
“Back View” on page 18).
The system loads the splash screen and User Login dialog box, depicted in
Figure 5.1.
Figure 5.1. User Login Dialog Box
2. Enter the operator’s User ID and user Password.
The default user name is “toc” and the default password is “toc.” The Aurora
directly displays the Status Monitor screen.
3. Press OK.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Entering Data Using the Virtual Keyboard

Data is entered using one of two virtual
keyboards: a standard alphanumeric keyboard
when letters with or without numbers is
required, and a number keypad when only
numbers are required. These keyboards appear
when the stylus is tapped in a data entry field,
with the alphanumeric keyboard appearing
when the data field accepts both numbers and
Figure 5.2. Virtual Keyboard
letters and the number keyboard appearing for
data fields that accept numbers only. The
virtual alphanumeric keyboard is depicted in Figure 5.2. The title bar of the
alphanumeric keyboard shows the name of the data field that has focus. Press Exit on
the keyboard to clear it from the screen. Touch the data field again to prompt the
keyboard to re-appear.
Monitoring Aurora Operation

A great deal about the status and operation of the Aurora is presented on the screens
that comprise the Monitor section. In particular, the Status Monitor screen and the
status bar at the bottom of all screens convey the most important items about the current
analyzer status. The operator can start, stop, and pause runs, as well as clear alarms and
view the IR detector signal graph via the action icons near the bottom of the screen.
Sequence status is presented through the three progress bars that indicate completion of
samples, replicates, and analytical processing states.
Press Monitor and select the Status tab to view the Status Monitor screen, depicted in
Figure 5.3.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
The Current State status indicator shows which components of the analyzer work
together to accomplish the requested analysis. This section shows the ability of the
Aurora to analyze two samples in parallel when so equipped. The graphical
representation of the flow path indicates the stage of processing for a sample,
displaying the process that is closest to the Peak Detect process and working backwards
in priority.
For example, if the Aurora is in Peak Detect mode for a sample, the graphic would
depict this stage of the process. Once completed, the graphic would change to depict the
sample process that is next closest to the Peak Detect process.
Below this graphic is the parallel processing state. This section indicates which process
is currently depicted by the graphic and the state of a second process, such as sample
preparation, if applicable.
These representations change to depict the process with the highest priority. For
example, Figure 5.4 depicts the unit in Gas Saver mode, with both the graphical
representation and the parallel processing status indicators depicting the Aurora in Gas
Saver Mode. The parallel processing status also depicts a second processing state, such
as sample preparation, when applicable.
TNb Detector CO2 Detector

Sample Vial Reaction Chamber
Combustion Furnace
Syringe
Gray icon means this state is
not shown on the diagram
Green icon means this state is
Parallel Processing Status
shown on the diagram
Figure 5.4. Current State Status Indicator
Sequence Monitor Screen
The Sequence Monitor screen, depicted in Figure 5.5, shows which samples have been
processed (denoted by blue shading), which sample is in process at the current time
(green shading), which sample is being pre-processed (yellow shading), and which
await processing (no shading). The running sequence is easily changed by adding
samples or removing any that have not started processing. See “Adding Priority
Samples” on page 154 of this chapter for more information on this feature. Press

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Monitor  Sequence to view this screen.
Figure 5.5. Sequence Monitor Screen During Sample Processing
Sample Monitor Screen
The Sample Monitor screen, depicted in Figure 5.6, offers a tabular display of
computed results for the current sample. This table updates as each replicate completes
processing. Only aggregate or average results are available for each sample. When
results for the first replicate of a new sample become available, the old results are
removed from this screen. Press Monitor and select Sample to view this screen.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Selecting Show Peaks Graph... displays graphs of all peaks that have finished
processing for the current sample. Figure 5.7 depicts three such graphs. Once a new
sample replicate is analyzed, the peak traces for the previous sample are discarded. The
peaks are drawn in the same colors as the signal traces, with each different analysis
mode having its own characteristic color. Each mode that is present can be individually
turned on or off via the checkboxes on the dialog box.
NOTE: Once the analysis of any sample completes, the only way to view its peak
traces or details of each replicate’s analysis is through ATOC software’s
TOC Reporter, or by using the optional inkjet printer to create a printed
record of the analysis results. However, the inkjet printer can not print a
graphical representation of the peaks.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Peak Graph with TC Selected Peak Graph with TNb Selected
Peak Graph with TIC and

TOC Selected
Peak Graph with TIC

Selected
Peak Graph with TOC

Selected
Figure 5.7. Show Peaks Graph Dialog Box Examples

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Result Log Monitor Screen
Press Monitor and select Result Log to view the Result Log Monitor screen, depicted
in Figure 5.8. This screen provides a tabular display of results for the entire sequence in
progress. The table of results displays until a new sequence starts or the unit is powered
off, at which point the previous results are discarded.
Figure 5.8. Results Log Monitor Screen
Run Log Monitor Screen
Press Monitor and select Run Log to view the Run Log Monitor screen, depicted in
Figure 5.9. This screen displays a tabular view of the most recent 300 messages posted
to the run log. Messages fit into three categories: informational, warning, or error.
Pressing Clear Log and acknowledging the confirmation message permanently clears
the log.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.9. Run Log Monitor Screen
Signal Graph
Pressing the Signal Graph icon from the Sample Monitor screen opens the Signal Graph
dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.10. Real-time display of the signals appears for either
the CO2 detector or TNb detector (if installed). The display can be adjusted so the scale
is large (for larger peaks) or small (to show details of smaller peaks). Selecting
Attenuation (Y-Axis) on the upper left chooses the range of signal levels displayed.
Offset (Y-Axis) at the lower left determines the minimum y-axis value. This setting is
useful for adjusting the display to the current baseline signal. Select the range of the
x-axis via the Time Span (X-Axis) combo box. The signal trace is color-coded as
follows to show when the analyzer is in peak-detect state:
• Magenta (purple)–TNb peak

• Red–TIC
• Green–TC or TOC

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Standalone Versus Networked Operation

Consider several dimensions of the decision whether or not to operate an Aurora
analyzer as a stand-alone unit, i.e., not connected to any PC. These decision criteria
include the following:
• Does the Aurora have a touchscreen and display installed?

• Does the Aurora have an attached inkjet printer?
• Is it important to save the analytical results or audit trail on a server?
• Is it important to connect the analyzer to data systems such as LIMS?
• Is it important to produce hard-copy reports or review results after the analyses
complete?
If the Aurora lacks a display and touchscreen, it must be operated via the PC control
application. The TOC 1030 Aurora-to-PC\Network Configuration Guide, available on
the TOC 1030 Data Server and PC Workstation Install CD, provides details on
installing and setting up the TOC Launchpad application. The Launchpad provides the
capability to create and use connections from the PC to one or several Aurora analyzers.
Aurora analyzers with an installed touchscreen and display do not require any external
PC or network connection. However, without a connection via the Data Gathering
Service (DGS) to a PC database, the optional inkjet printer provides the only permanent
record of analytical results.
The Aurora’s optional inkjet printer prints results for every sample analysis and every
calibration. Note in the example output shown in Figure 5.11 that every time a sequence
starts, the date/time of the run, operator ID, and sample introduction mode are printed.
Also, a space is reserved for the operator to initial that the results are legitimate. Each

Rev. 5.0
Operation
sample’s results include the date and time of the analysis, vial position of the sample,
and full name of the analytical method used.
Figure 5.11. Inkjet Printer Output
Interfacing the Aurora to external data systems requires a network connection and
proper configuration settings. The Aurora can import some of its sequence data from an
external application, such as a LIMS. In addition, the Aurora’s analytical results are
available to LIMS via several mechanisms. For detailed descriptions, see “LIMS
Interfaces” on page 166 of this chapter.
Optional ATOC software includes TOC Reporter. This application provides the sole
means of viewing, reporting, and manipulating Aurora analytical results. TOC Reporter
produces customizable hard-copy reports that can be tailored for individual customers.
TOC Reporter also offers advanced features such as peak and calibration editing. For
more information, consult the ATOC Software Operator’s Manual.
Setting Up Local Users and Security Settings

Local users are those persons who operate the instrument either directly from the
touchscreen or via the PC control application, but who do not install and use ATOC
software. The Aurora analyzer is preconfigured with several user IDs and five user

Rev. 5.0
Operation
groups. Groups are named collections of user permissions, and each user is a member
of exactly one group. Predefined groups include the following:
Guest Has minimal privileges, i.e., nothing other than observing any run
in progress.
Operator Can start and stop the analyzer and add samples to a run, but
cannot define methods or perform advanced diagnostics.
User Has all privileges of the Operator plus access to maintenance
function, but has no access to TOC Reporter.
Sr. User Can perform all analytical and maintenance actions, but has no
access to Local Security and Auditing functions.
Admin Includes administrators and has privileges to perform all Aurora
functions.
NOTE: For more sophisticated schemes of user IDs and permissions, or to

configure a centrally managed system of groups and users for multiple
Auroras, purchase and install ATOC software.
NOTE: If using an Aurora analyzer without a display and touchscreen, modifying

user IDs or audit settings is not possible, nor is viewing the local audit log.
Use “toc” as the default user ID and password for all operations, or
purchase and install ATOC software.
To access the local security and auditing functions, do the following:
1. Press S & A at the top of the display.
This opens the Security and Auditing screen, depicted in Figure 5.12, which
contains icons for managing local users, audit settings, and the local audit log.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.12. Security and Auditing Screen
2. Press Local User Settings.
The Local User Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.13, opens listing the
predefined users.
Figure 5.13. Local Users Settings Dialog Box
3. Select any entry in the list and click Edit User to view or change its details.
The password for any user ID can be changed, and a user with administrative
privileges can disable an account or change a password.
Click Add User to create a new user ID using the Add New User dialog box
depicted in Figure 5.14, or select an entry and click Delete User to permanently
remove a user ID from this analyzer.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.14. Add New User Dialog Box
4. Press Local Audit Settings to open the Local Audit Settings dialog box, depicted
in Figure 5.15.
Choose from three predefined audit levels, ranging from minimal auditing to full
auditing. Select the desired audit level and click Make Active.
Figure 5.15. Local Audit Settings Dialog Box
5. Press Local Audit Log.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
The Local Audit Log dialog box appears, as depicted in Figure 5.16.
Figure 5.16. Local Audit Log Dialog Box
Audit trail entries are inspected in this dialog box and the audit log is permanently
cleared by pressing Clear Log.
For full details on security and auditing, see Chapter 12, “Local Security and Auditing
Details” on page 431.
Switching Users
The Switch User dialog box allows Aurora operators to log on and off without
interrupting any operation(s) in progress, while maintaining the integrity of the audit
trail and data collection process.
This feature eases the process of shift turnover for personnel. Providing one generic
user ID for multiple personnel is not necessary, nor is stopping and restarting the
analysis required at the end of a work period. In addition, if a need arises for a
maintenance task or advanced operation that the current user is not permitted to
perform, then the user ID can be switched temporarily and then restored to its previous
setting.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
1. Press Switch User at the top of the display to open the Switch User dialog box,
Figure 5.17. Switch User Dialog Box
2. Enter the password for the current user.
3. Enter the user ID and password of the new operator.
A confirmation message appears to indicate the success of the operation
Preparing the Aurora for Sample Processing

There are several steps involved in preparing the Aurora for processing samples,
including: Defining and managing configurations, defining and managing
methods, defining and managing sequences, and running cleanup samples. Each of
these are explained in detail in the following sections.
Defining and Managing Configurations

An Aurora configuration includes operator settings for sample introduction, gas flows,
automated startup and shutdown, syringes, detectors, heated zones, peak finding and
integration, and other items. Many settings are changed rarely, if ever, but must be
tuned and saved when a unit is first qualified, or after major changes or repairs.
The Aurora software allows the operator and laboratory administrator to define a large
number of separate configurations and give each one its own name. Only one of the
named configurations is active at any given time.
Keeping a library of named configurations allows for rapidly changing or testing

instrument parameters with a minimum of confusion. For instance, the Aurora analyzer
typically ships with several predefined configurations, which differ primarily in the
sample introduction mode. One is used with a sipper tube, one for the optional 1096+
XYZ Autosampler, one for the optional 1088 Rotary Autosampler, and so forth.
Suppose the Aurora is typically used with the 1096+ Autosampler and its configuration
is active. If the analyzer sits idle for a long period of time, running numerous clean
water samples may be required to clean the system and re-establish its baseline
performance. In this scenario, verify the configuration settings for the reaction
chambers to clean the system and run a sequence containing CleanUp type samples.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
This saves time, as it eliminates the need for the operator to prepare multiple vials of
clean water for loading into the autosampler. Once the cleanup process completes, the
unit can resume normal use, without the need to navigate several levels into the
configuration dialog boxes.
General Configuration Screen
Press Config  General to view the General Configuration screen, depicted in

Figure 5.18. This screen shows a list of icons, one for each named configuration, and
indicates the active configuration.
Active
Configuration
Active Sample Introduction Mode Active Configuration Name
Figure 5.18. General Configuration Screen
If the analyzer is not running samples or performing maintenance actions, the active
configuration is changed by selecting the desired icon and clicking Make Active. The
active configuration is denoted by the text “(Active)” appearing below the
configuration name. In addition, the icon for the active configuration has a yellow circle
and red checkmark, and the name of the active configuration displays in the status bar at
the bottom of the screen.
NOTE: Double-clicking any configuration’s icon is identical to selecting the icon

and clicking View/Modify.
Other operational functions of this screen include:
• Delete to delete any configuration,

• View/Modify to view or modify the parameters of a configuration.
• Add to add a new configuration to the list.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Editing or viewing a configuration opens the Basic Configuration Screen, which lists
the settings that comprise that configuration. The tabs include Basic, Built-In I/O, and
External I/O.
After editing a configuration, choose Save, Save As, or Cancel at the top of the screen.
Basic Configuration Screen
The Basic Configuration screen, depicted in Figure 5.19, contains several fields for the
operator to complete when creating a new configuration or modifying an existing
configuration.
Figure 5.19. Basic Configuration Screen
CAUTION: Choosing a syringe size that does not match the syringe hardware installed
on the Aurora can cause irreparable damage to the syringe drive.
To create a new configuration or modify an existing one:
1. Specify the size of the active syringe.
This is only changed when switching the physical syringe hardware to a different
size. The Aurora supports these syringe sizes:
• 1 mL
• 2.5 mL
• 5 mL

Rev. 5.0
Operation
2. Select Priming at Start of Run if desired.
This can improve the consistency of analytical results.
NOTE: The Rinse at Start of Run option only affects the TIC chamber, not the TC
combustion furnace.
3. Choose Rinse at Start of Run if running high concentration samples.
4. Choose the sample introduction mode.
Options are Sipper, Manual Syringe, XYZ Autosampler, Rotary Autosampler,

or At-Line Autosampler. Each autosampler has its own separate configuration
settings, which are discussed later in this chapter.
5. Select any optional installed modules.
If using a TNb (Total Bound Nitrogen) module, select the Use TNb Module
checkbox. Use POC Module is reserved for possible future use.
For more information, see Chapter 6, “Total Bound Nitrogen (TNb) Module” on
page 256.
6. Select Use Attached Printer to produce hardcopy printouts using the optional
inkjet printer without the optional ATOC software.
7. If the optional Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module is installed and in use,

select Enable Auto-Repeat in Automatic Repeat of Sequence to repeatedly run
the same sequence of samples.
If this option is selected, enter a time delay, in hours and minutes, between
completion of one run and the start of the next.
8. Select Perform Syringe Prime to prime the syringe before each repeated run.
By default, the system always primes the isolation loop.
9. Set the standby settings, as desired.
Standby settings include temperature, gas flow rate, and pressure.
These setpoints are not the same as the settings used during shutdown. Rather, these
setpoints take effect immediately after completion of any sample processing with
no wait time.
Leaving these at the same settings as normal sample processing may be desirable to
speed up the time needed to commence a run. Alternatively, setting these to lower
setpoints conserves carrier and combustion gases and extends the life of the
immersion heater elements.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
10. Select Enable User Notices to ensure confirmation messages appear for all
operator actions that impact analyzer operation.
Disabling user notices simplifies the flow of operator actions.
Built-In I/O Configuration Screen
The Built-In I/O Configuration screen, depicted in Figure 5.20, provides options for
enabling and controlling the two input and two output relays that are standard on all
Aurora analyzers. To access this screen from the General Configuration screen, select a
configuration, press View/Modify..., then press Built-In I/O.
Figure 5.20. Built-In I/O Configuration Screen
Select the checkboxes to enable the desired relays. The input relays can be used to
remotely start, abort, or clear alarms on the Aurora. For starting the Aurora and clearing
alarms, the operator specifies how often to check the relay signals: either once per run
(sequence), on every sample, or on every replicate. The remote abort signal is
monitored continuously. The following procedure outlines how to remotely start the
analyzer.
1. Ensure the active configuration has an input relay set up to monitor for a remote
start signal.
2. Load the desired sequence.
3. Press Start on the Status Monitor screen.
The status display indicates “Waiting for External Start.” The analyzer waits
indefinitely for the input relay to energize before starting.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
The output relays can signal a system error, as well as any of the following:
• End of replicate
• End of sample
• End of sequence
• Failed QC sample
• Failed check standard
• Failed calibration
A system error is defined as any error that prevents further analyses, e.g., low gas
pressure, IR malfunction, or hardware component failure. To use the relays to signal
failed checks or calibrations, set up those parameters as part of the method’s pass/fail
criteria. See “Defining Pass/Fail Criteria” on page 147 in this chapter.
When enabling either of the output relays, there is the option to automatically reset any
alarms that trigger during sample processing. The alarms can be reset before the start of
every replicate, every sample, or only upon operator action (the normal behavior). If not
using the relays, then manual intervention by the operator is required by pressing Reset
Alarms on the bottom of the Status Monitor screen.
External Expansion I/O Configuration Screen
The External I/O Configuration screen, depicted in Figure 5.21, allows the operator to
set up the four analog outputs and four additional output relays available via the
optional External Expansion I/O module (PN 322785). To access this screen from the
General Configuration screen, select a configuration, press View/Modify..., then press
External I/O.
Figure 5.21. External I/O Configuration Screen
The following procedure outlines how to complete the External I/O screen entries.
1. Specify the Output Frequency.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Options include Once Per Sample and Once Per Replicate.
2. Enable each analog output separately by selecting its checkbox.
3. Configure the selected output(s).
a. Choose the analysis mode to which the output(s) should respond.
b. Set the minimum and maximum range of ppm values that correspond to the
full-off and full-on signal values.
c. If desired, configure multiple outputs to signal the same analytical mode, i.e.,
all four outputs might signal TOC concentrations, and each output might indi-
cate a different range of values.
When the computed concentration is below the minimum range specified, the
output signal is driven to its minimum. Likewise, when the computed concentration
is above the maximum range specified, the output signal is driven to its maximum.
At the end of each replicate or sample, the signal level remains at its set value until
another sample or replicate is analyzed. After an entire run finishes, press the Reset
Alarms icon to clear the output signals.
4. Set the expansion output relays.
• The expansion output relays respond to the same concentration results as the
analog outputs. Set them to any desired range from 0.0 to 30,000 ppm. When
enabled, the relays energize if the measured concentration is either above the
maximum or below the minimum specified.
• Select what action to take after any relay is actuated. Options are Abort,
Continue, or Pause the run until the operator responds to an onscreen prompt.
5. Select the Reset Expansion Alarms After option.
This setting allows for resetting the alarms only after acknowledgement of the
alarm from the user, or at the end of the current replication, end of the current
sample, or end of the sequence.
The built-in input handshaking relays are optically isolated inputs, and they activate
when sensing a short to ground. The built-in output handshaking relays are rated at
10 W, 200 VDC maximum, 0.5 A switching level, and 1.2 A carrying capacity. The
output expansion relays are designed to drive alarms and are rated for 12 A AC
maximum load. The analog output drivers are selectable via hardware jumpers for
4–20 mA isolated, 0–1 VDC, or 0–10 VDC.
Defining and Managing Methods

The Method Editor screen provides access to all of the specific parameters in an
analytical method. Press Editor  Method to view this screen, depicted in

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.22.
Figure 5.22. Method Editor Screen
The Method Editor screen shows the analytical range of the method as specified via its
calibration, its primary and alternate modes of analysis, whether to use such features as
sample dilution, preprocessing, outlier removal, and others. Options at the top of the
Method Editor screen allow the operator to create new methods, open existing methods,
save and rename methods, and also delete methods no longer in use. Secondary screens
provide details about the method’s timing, temperature setpoints, and calibration. The
Aurora software allows storage and use of up to 99 methods. The following procedure
outlines how to define a method.
1. Choose the analytical mode.
The Aurora 1030C supports the following modes:
TIC Only Sample is drawn and moved to the TIC chamber, acidified, and
heated. Any released CO2 is swept to the NDIR detector and
measured.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
NPOC Only Sample is drawn, moved to the TIC chamber, acidified, heated,
and sparged for a period of time. The CO2 released during
sparging is vented. After sparging away the purgeable
compounds, the sample is redrawn by the syringe, injected into
the TC furnace, combusted, and the NDIR detector measures the
resulting CO2.
TC Only Sample is drawn, injected into the furnace, and combusted. The
NDIR detector measures the resulting CO2. In this mode, all of
the carbon content in the sample is measured, both organic and
inorganic, purgeable and nonpurgeable, dissolved and particulate
(within the capability of the sampling system).
TIC & NPOC Sample is drawn and moved to the TIC chamber, acidified, and
sparged for a period of time. The CO2 evolved during sparging is
measured as TIC. After sparging, the sample is combusted in the
furnace and the NDIR detector measures the resulting CO2 as
NPOC.
TOC as TC- This mode truly measures TOC by difference. The specified
TIC quantity of replicates in the sequence is run as TC samples. Next,
the same quantity of replicates is run as TIC for the same sample.
Finally, the average TIC and TC values are computed, and TOC
is computed as the difference of the average computed
concentration values.
TNb Only Sample is drawn, injected, and combusted in the furnace. The
resulting gas stream passes through the NDIR detector, to an
NOX converter, then to the TNb detector cell.
• Besides choosing the mode, in some cases choose Additional TNb. This
enables analyzing each sample for total nitrogen in addition to the primary
analysis. This selection is available with most analysis modes. However, it is
not supported when the method’s mode is TIC Only, POC Only, TIC & POC,
and TNb Only.
NOTE: For internal sparging, the pre-acid volume plus the sample volume must
together be less than the volume of the syringe. For external sparging,
enough unfilled volume in the sample vials must be available to allow
addition of acid.
NOTE: POC is not an available option for the 1030C at this time. Any methods
selecting this mode are not operable. An alternate method should be
chosen.
2. Choose the sparging method.
Sparging becomes available when the NPOC only mode is selected. Sparging is
useful for ridding samples of inorganic carbon prior to analysis. The Aurora
supports two types of sparging capabilities. During internal sparging, sample is

Rev. 5.0
Operation
drawn into the TIC chamber and acidified with the amount of acid specified in the
Acid Volume field. Carrier gas flows through the chamber and out to vent for as
long as requested on the Sparge Time field of the method. External sparging is
available with the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler and 1088 Rotary Autosampler.
External sparging involves adding the Pre-Acid Volume to each sample vial and
bubbling carrier gas into the open vial for the time noted in the method.
3. Enter a volume in the Sample Volume field for the amount of sample to draw for
each replicate processed.
4. Specify the acid volume in the Reagent Volumes section for the amount desired for
each replicate.
5. If desired, include sample dilution in the Sample Pre-Processing section.
Automatic dilution is supported with both the 1096+ XYZ and 1088 Rotary
Autosamplers. Leave enough empty vial positions in the sample tray to provide one
for each diluted sample. Manual dilution means the laboratory technician already
diluted the samples before commencing analysis. Whether the dilution operation is
automatic or manual, the input dilution factor is used in all calculations of
concentration and mass of carbon.
NOTE: Automatic and manual dilution can be performed for individual samples.
This will be discussed in setting up a sequence.
6. Enter the rinse volume and desired rinse quantities in the Rinses and Chase
section.
The sample pathway, with the exception of the combustion chamber, can be
automatically rinsed with ultrapure water between each sample or between every
replicate, if desired. Similarly, for combustion TC and TNb analyses, water chases
following each replicate are available by entering a water volume greater than zero
in the Chase Vol field to turn on per-replicate chases. Chases are injected
immediately after the sample injection, in an effort to ensure no sample droplets
remain in the sample pathway. Up to five rinses per sample and five rinses per
replicate may be selected.
Rinses and chases reduce carryover and improve precision and accuracy of
analysis, especially for highly concentrated samples and small sample volumes.
Generally, if the sample volume is 500 µL or less, use 300 µL of chase, or at most
600 µL. Using these chase volumes helps ensure optimal thermal performance of
the combustion furnace. On the other hand, the only drawback of large rinse
volumes and repeated rinsing between samples is the negative impact on sample
throughput and increased consumption of rinse water.
Rinses assist with the TIC chamber only and help to ensure there is little to no
contributing carbon from one replicate to another. Combustion only removes TIC,
so a rinse is necessary to remove any residual TOC from the reaction chamber. The
use of a chase removes the TOC from the combustion furnace.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Table 5.1 lists the modes that include a rinse as a possible function.
Table 5.1. Modes with Rinse Functionality
Mode Rinse Capability
TC, NPOC External, TNb No rinses available. Sample is injected directly from
Only the sample line to the furnace.
NPOC Internal Rinse per sample only. Aliquots are taken from the
sample for all replicates, so no rinsing between
replicates is possible until all replicates are sampled
and the criteria established in the method are met.
TICNPOC, TIC Only, Rinse per sample or per replicate, as necessary to
TC-TIC (TIC only meet the needs of the sample matrix. If sample and
portion) replicate both have a rinse number, then per replicate
overrides the per sample number.
Chases allow for rinsing the line from the injection tube through to the sample tube.
Generally, large sample volumes require less chase volumes, which are inversely
proportional to the sample volume. Thus, a 1.8 mL sample may only require
0.1 mL of chase, whereas a 0.2 mL sample may require 0.4–0.6 mL of chase to
properly sweep the line of residual material. The smaller the sample volume, the
more impact any residual matter will have on the RSDs if the line isn’t properly
cleaned of sample material.
Chase volumes of up to 500 µL and sample volumes of up to 2.0 mL are permitted.

The analyst should bear in mind the relationship between sample concentration,
and sample volume, and chase volume, as depicted in Figure 5.23.
Higher sample Lower sample

concentration volume, which Larger chase volume
dictates using... leads to using...
Concentration Sample Volume Chase Volume
Figure 5.23. Relationship Between Sample Concentration, Sample Volume, and Chase Volume
NOTE: Sample volume plus chase volume makes a large impact on the
combustion tube and heat retention. The larger the total volume, the
greater the impact on heat retention. The total injection volume should be
the minimum amount necessary to get accurate results, with an upper limit
of 1.9 mL.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
7. If desired, enable the analyzer’s outlier removal capability.
Select Outlier Removal Criteria to enable this feature. Specify the maximum
number of additional replicates to run before moving to the next sample in the
Additional Replicates field. Max % RSD is the criterion used for deciding when
to run additional replicates.
Outlier removal automatically checks for anomalies in processing and corrects

them by running additional replicates until the operator-specified criteria are met.
The analyzer only runs additional replicates needed to meet the criteria, but the
operator can place a limit on the number of reruns. The default settings for this
feature is inactive, with four additional replicates and 10% RSD. The RB and RW
settings only read these settings when the feature is not selected, and only the RB
and RW samples are affected. If the outlier removal check box is selected, then all
samples are affected. These values can be changed from 0–5 replicates and
0–100% RSD. To set it so that no RB and RW replicates are affected this setting
and only the RB and RW samples set in the Calibration dialog box are completed,
the check box is checked to activate the feature, the Additional Replicates field is
set to 0 (zero), and the check box unchecked to disable the feature.
As an example of how outlier removal operates, suppose a sample is programmed

to run with three replicates and outlier removal enabled. The method parameters
dictate running up to three additional replicates. If the first three replicates do not
meet the criteria, then one additional replicate is run. The Aurora determines which
three replicates have analytical results grouped closest together. If these three
replicates meet the criteria, outlier removal terminates and the run continues with
the next sample. If these best three of four replicates fail to meet the criteria, a fifth
replicate is processed. Again, the best three of all five replicates are selected and
judged against the criteria, and the run proceeds to the next sample if the criteria are
met. If not, then a sixth and final replicate is run. Having run the last replicate, the
run continues with the next sample whether or not the criteria are met by the best
three of the six. In the Result Log Monitor screen, the rejected three replicates are
highlighted red to indicate they were not included in the best three analyses from
that sample.
8. Specify the desired EPC System Pressure for this method.
Set EPC pressure to vary the sensitivity and dynamic range of the TOC analyzer.
Higher EPC pressures result in higher flow rates through the reactors during the
detect state. This reduces the residence time of the sample in the detector, which
decreases the sensitivity, but increases the dynamic range of carbon mass that can
be analyzed. Conversely, lower EPC pressures result in lower flow rates through
the reactors during the detect state. This increases the residence time of the sample
in the detector, which increases the sensitivity, but decreases the dynamic range.
The default EPC setting is 20 psi, which results in approximately 100 mL/minute of
carrier flow through the reactors during the detect state. However, if developing a
method to analyze high concentration samples, i.e., 100 ppm or greater, then
consider a higher EPC setting, e.g., 25 psi. On the other hand, if developing a

Rev. 5.0
Operation
method for low concentration samples, i.e. 1 ppm or less, then consider a lower
EPC pressure setting, e.g., 15 psi.
Due to flow dynamics within the system, do not set the EPC pressure below 15 psi,
nor above 28 psi. If more sensitivity is desired, consider increasing the sample
volume. If desiring more dynamic range, consider using OI Analytical’s patent-
pending Electronic Flow Control (EFC) option to provide additional downstream
gas dilution for higher concentration samples.
9. Enter the desired Drain Time in seconds.
Set the drain time to ensure the reaction/condensation vessel completely drains at
least two seconds prior to the end of the drain state, so all of the spent sample and
reagent moves beyond the drain valves.
The default drain time of 15 seconds should be sufficient for most methods.
However, if reducing EPC pressure, e.g., 15 psi, and increasing sample volume,
e.g., 8–9 mL, then a longer drain time may be required. If decreasing sample
volume, e.g., 1–2 mL, and increasing EPC pressure, reduce drain time to save time.
In any case, do not reduce drain time below 10 seconds to ensure the system
continues to drain properly.
10. Click Times… to view the React/Detect Times dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.24,
and change the time profiles for the method.
NOTE: This dialog box includes references to a POC module. At this time, there is
Timing parameters for combustion TOC analysis include the react time for TIC and
maximum detect times for each analysis mode. The TIC react time specifies how
long the acid and sample reside together in the TIC reaction chamber. All of the
maximum detect times are used to end the peak detection and integration processes
in the event that no peak is identified in the detector signal. Typically, peaks are
detected and marked automatically, and the peak detect state ends without waiting
for the entire specified time to elapse. All other time parameters may be up to 10
minutes in duration.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Longer TIC react times result in more complete extraction of inorganic and organic
carbon from the sample at the expense of slower throughput. React time
adjustments are typically not necessary. However, longer react times can be helpful
with difficult-to-oxidize sample matrices.
11. Click Temps… to view the Temperatures dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.25, and
change the temperature profiles for the method.
Figure 5.25. Temperatures Dialog Box
Temperature parameters for combustion TOC analysis include the heater setpoints
for the TIC reaction chamber during the react and detect states, as well as the
combustion furnace setpoint for TC and TNb analyses.
Higher TIC react temperatures speed the chemical reaction. Do not set the TIC
react temperature in the reaction vessel above 100 °C, as the sample boils away,
causing erroneous results for most modes. Temperatures above 98 °C in the
reaction vessel may interfere with the drying process of the permeation tube
causing a baseline shift, which results in poor performance.
The TC/TNb detect temperature specifies the combustion furnace setpoint. Typical
settings for this setpoint are 680 °, 900 °, and 950 °C. Furnace temperature settings
vary depending on the analytical method used, regulatory guidelines, sample
matrix, and the type of oxidation catalyst used. Consult the OI Analytical Customer
Support Center for advice on optimizing the combustion furnace for a particular
application.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
12. Click Calibration… to access details of the method’s calibration parameters, as

Figure 5.26. Editor Method Calibration Dialog Box
The Editor Method Calibration dialog box contains information about what
standards are used for calibration, how those standards are generated, carrier gas
flow rates, and whether the optional pass/fail criteria are in effect. In addition, after
the method calibration completes, this dialog box displays details of the analysis of
each standard, as well as detailed statistics on the resulting curve fit that is then
applied to unknown samples to determine their carbon mass and concentration.
For details on setting up or reviewing a calibration, see “Calibrating the Aurora” on

page 139 in this chapter.
Setting Up Calibration of a New Method
A method must be calibrated before use to obtain a carbon mass result. If a method is
not calibrated and unknowns are processed, the computed mass of carbon is reported as
zero. In the Sequence Editor screen, only a single entry with sample type “Cal” is
needed to address the entire calibration sequence, regardless of the number of standards
involved. Later, when the sequence becomes activated in the Sequence Monitor screen,
this single line of the sequence table expands to show all of the individual standards.
Defining and Managing Sequences

The Sequence Editor screen provides access to all of the available sequences. A
sequence is an ordered list of samples for the Aurora to process. The samples can
include calibrants, QC checks, clean-up samples, and unknown samples. The Aurora
software allows storage and use of up to 50 sequences. Press Editor  Sequence to

Rev. 5.0
Operation
view this screen, depicted in Figure 5.27.
Figure 5.27. Sequence Editor Screen
The Sequence Editor screen is used to create a completely new sequence or load an
existing sequence and modify it. Once the sequence is defined and saved, it is ready for
use. To use the sequence for processing samples, switch the display to the Sequence
Monitor screen and press the Load Active Sequence to make the sequence active (see
“Sequence Monitor Screen” on page 107 in this chapter). Load the samples into any
autosampler in use, check the operational status of the analyzer (gas supply, reagent
bottles, etc.), and commence the run.
The Sequence Editor screen is also used to modify an existing sequence. Samples can
be added to the end of a sequence or inserted between other lines of the sequence. The
following sections outline the processes for modifying sequences.
Adding Samples to a Sequence
The following procedure outlines how to add samples to a sequence.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
1. From the Sequence Editor screen, press Add/Insert to open the Add/Insert Sam-
ples dialog box depicted in Figure 5.28.
Figure 5.28. Adding Samples to a Sequence
2. Choose a Sample Type from the list.
The following sample types are available:
• Cal runs the calibration created in the method.
• Clean up runs a pre-programmed cleanup sequence.
• SST loads the system suitability sequence.
• Ckstd runs a sample for a check standard test. The unit calculates the data,
subtracting the value of the RW blank, which includes the reagent blank. The
check standard test compares the sample value to predetermined values.
• QC runs a sample similarly to the Ckstd. It calculates the data subtracting the
value of a QC blank, which includes the reagent blank. A QC blank should be
run with it.
• Reagent blank determines the amount of carbon contributed from the reagents.
This value is subtracted from each sample.
3. Select the quantity of replicates (# Reps) for each new item.
4. Select how many new items to add via the # of Samples field.
5. Select the primary method and up to two alternate methods.
All methods previously created and saved are listed here.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
6. Enter text in the Sample ID field to automatically fill in the field.
7. To create a series of sequential sample IDs, check Use Incrementer and provide
the starting value of the ID number, as depicted in Figure 5.29.
Select Use
Incrementer to
Add Multiple
Lines.
Figure 5.29. Add/Insert Samples Using Incrementer Dialog Box
8. Choose a customer ID if running from the PC, and enter any desired comments.
9. Select the priority, if desired.
Typically, when adding samples to a sequence from the Sequence Editor, priority is
not a consideration, since the samples run in the order they are listed in the
sequence.
10. Select the Mode.
Either append the sample(s) to the end of the lists or insert above a selected line, as
explained in “Inserting Samples in the Middle of an Existing Sequence” on
page 136.
11. Press OK to save and close the dialog box.
Inserting Samples in the Middle of an Existing Sequence
The following procedure outlines how to add samples between other samples of a
sequence.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
1. Select the line of the sequence just after the location for the new samples, as
Figure 5.30. Sequence Editor Screen with Sequence Item Selected
2. Click Add/Insert.
The Add/Insert Samples dialog box is displayed.
3. Input all the needed details, and select Insert above selected line in the Mode
section of the dialog box, as depicted in Figure 5.31.
Select to Add
Item Above
Selected Line.
Figure 5.31. Add/Insert Samples with Insert Above Selected Line Selected

Rev. 5.0
Operation
4. Click OK.
This adds the new items at the location specified.
If entering data field-by-field in the sequence table, consider the following example:
1. Select Sample as the sample type.
2. Enter the desired quantity of replicates.
3. Enter the desired # of samples.
4. Select the method.
5. Enter the sample ID, such as “DI Water.”
Either type in the text manually, or click the ellipsis button to view a list of
predefined sample IDs.
6. If defining this sequence on the PC, choose a defined customer ID from the Cust
ID field.
See the ATOC Software Operator’s Manual for details on customer IDs.
7. Enter any comments desired.
8. Click Save to save the changes.
Finally, add the unknowns and the desired check standards, and then click Save to store
the new sequence.
To save changes to a sequence without overwriting the existing information, press

Save As... and provide a new name for the new sequence. Similarly, press Open... to
display or modify an existing sequence, and press Delete to permanently remove the
sequence that is visible onscreen from the sequence library.
Running Clean-up Samples

The Sequence Editor screen simplifies cleaning up the analyzer after maintenance or an
extended period of downtime. The Aurora includes a pre-defined clean-up sequence.
However, a new clean-up sequence may be defined as needed. The following procedure
outlines how to create a clean-up sequence.
1. Create a new sequence.
2. Press Add/Insert....

Rev. 5.0
Operation
The Add/Insert dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 5.32.
3. Select Clean Up as the sample type.
4. Add the desired number of replicates.
5. Add the desired number of samples.
6. Press OK.
7. Save the sequence.
8. Verify the configuration and sample introduction mode are both set properly.
9. Load the clean up sequence.
10. Press Start.
Calibrating the Aurora

The Aurora requires initial calibrating when first installed, as well as periodic
calibrating during its lifetime. The following sections explain how to calibrate the unit.
Selecting the Primary Analysis Mode

The following procedure outlines how to select the primary analysis mode.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
1. From the Method Editor screen, press Calibration... to access details of the
method’s calibration parameters in the Editor Method Calibration dialog box,
The Calibration dialog box has one tab for each analysis mode.
2. Select the Primary Analysis Mode to start defining the calibration parameters.
If the method supports only one analysis mode, e.g., TC Only, then only one tab
labeled “TC” appears on this dialog box, and only one choice for the Primary
Analysis Mode is available.
For methods supporting multiple analyses, e.g., TIC & NPOC, a Primary Analysis
Mode must be chosen. This mode is used for all decisions related to pass/fail
criteria and outlier removal. For instance, supposing outlier removal is enabled,
with a goal of selecting the three best replicates out of a total of five analyzed for
TC and TIC. To judge which replicates meet the % RSD criteria for successful
outlier removal, the operator must choose either the TC or TIC results as the basis
for determining which are the best replicates.
3. For methods that support more than one analysis, e.g., TIC & NPOC, decide
whether to calibrate each mode separately or to use one set of calibration data for
all modes. Selecting Use for all CO2 modes indicates this method is only
calibrated against one set of carbon standards.
The detector response for those standards is used in the analysis of any sample with
this method, even if the method is used to measure a different mode. For instance, a

Rev. 5.0
Operation
method can be calibrated against NPOC standards, and then used to measure both
TIC and NPOC. When selecting Use for all CO2 modes, then the primary mode’s
tab is the only CO2 mode available to the operator.
If the method’s analytical mode is TNb only, or TNb is an additional analysis, then
it’s necessary to calibrate the TNb response. An additional tab becomes available
for specifying what standards are used to calibrate that detector. If TNb analysis is
possible with a given method, this TNb tab is always available because calibrating
the TNb detector is always required.
Each time the primary analysis mode changes, or the standards table is switched
among modes, all of the fields in the dialog box change their values to correspond
to that mode’s settings. Choosing a tab at the top of the screen triggers a change in
all of the data on the dialog box, corresponding to the settings for that particular
mode.
4. For each mode requiring calibration, enter the concentration for each standard to
be used, one per line of the table.
Up to 15 standards can be entered here.
5. Enter the desired quantity of replicates for each standard.
The RW (reagent water) standard is required with every calibration curve or must
be set to zero replicants if RW is not used. Reagent water is ultrapure water used to
make reagents, such as the phosphoric acid in TIC analysis. Typically, this water
has a very small, but measurable, carbon content. The RW standard is analyzed to
allow the Aurora to properly account for the detector response to that small
contribution of carbon. For example, suppose a solution is prepared as 5 ppm KHP.
A 1 mL sample of that solution nominally contains 5.00 µg C from KHP. However,
if the water used to prepare the solution contains 100 ppb C, then that 1 mL of KHP
has a total carbon concentration of 5.1 ppm. Including RW as its own standard in
the calibration curve properly accounts for this situation.
To delete any line of the table entered erroneously, select the entire line by clicking
the mouse on the line in the Std# column and press Remove.
Setting Flow Rates for Gas Dilution

Decide whether to use gas dilution via the Electronic Flow Control (EFC) option, and
specify the target total flow rate. The flow rate set here is the total flow rate through the
instrument and should not be confused with adding additional flow.
NOTE: The nominal flow rate with nitrogen at 20 psi through the system is
100 mL/minute. The Aurora supports flow rates from 50 mL/minute to
1,000 mL/minute.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
NOTE: If gas dilution via EFC is requested and this method is loaded as part of a
sequence, the system verifies the EFC is installed and is operable. If the
EFC is not available, an error message appears.
Gas dilution allows analysis of higher concentration samples without reducing sample
size. This is accomplished via increased gas flow through the detector cell. This, in
turn, reduces the time that a given quantity of CO2 (or TNb) resides in the detector cell,
resulting in a proportional reduction in detector response. The drawback to gas dilution
is its increased gas consumption. Gas dilution is recommended for analysis of samples
when the total mass of carbon (or TNb) per replicate exceeds the linear range of the
detector. Consult the OI Analytical Customer Support Center for guidelines on when
using gas dilution is appropriate.
Figure 5.34 and Figure 5.35 illustrate the effect of gas dilution on detector response. In
Figure 5.34, the data represent runs for a 125 ppm sample analyzed at a sample volume
of 200 µL, e.g., 25 µg C total. Note that at 20 psig system pressure, the baseline flow in
this configuration is approximately 100 mL/minute with the EFC disabled. The flow
rates tested in this demonstration ranged from 110 to 900 mL/minute. The curve shows
an exponential reduction in detector response as flow increases, with some dependency
on system pressure. Raising the flow rate from 110 to 200 mL/minute, for example,
decreases the area counts by about one-half, and an additional increase in flow to
400 mL/minute reduces the area counts by one-half again. The cyan and yellow curves
depict the effect of lower system pressure on the same scenario, which moves the curve
up along the y-axis, i.e., to increase system sensitivity. Similarly, higher system
pressure moves the curve down on the y-axis, corresponding to less sensitivity. Higher
pressures yield a larger reduction in detector response.
Figure 5.34. Effects of EFC Gas Dilution on Detector Response
Figure 5.35 shows actual peak traces from the above experiment. The change in signal
maxima as the flow rate increases is apparent. Note the broadening of the peak as

Rev. 5.0
Operation
system pressure decreases, and a marked shift in peak timing when system pressure
changes, where the entire peak shifts later in time as the pressure decreases.
Figure 5.35. Peak Traces from the EFC Gas Dilution Experiment
These data leads to the following general recommendations for using gas dilution in the
Aurora:
• As pressure decreases, sample peaks tend to broaden. Eventually, the analyzer is

unable to maintain high flow rates at low pressures, and peaks become difficult to
identify and integrate.
• Use gas dilution by setting 20 or 25 psi for the system pressure. Try using a flow
rate of 300 mL/minute if a flow rate of 110 mL/minute results in too much detector
response. Adjust flow rates as desired, keeping in mind that each flow change of
200 mL/minute at 20 or 25 psi results in approximately 50 percent reduction in
detector response.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
• When system pressure changes, review the method’s Max Detect time settings in
the React/Detect Times dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.36, to be certain the time
windows used by the analyzer capture the entire peak.
• When system pressure changes, review the Peak Detection Settings (see “Peak
Detection Settings” on page 180). Change them if needed to be certain the time
windows used by the analyzer integrate the peak properly.
Configuring Calibration Calculations

The following procedure outlines how to configure calibration calculations.
1. From the Method Editor screen, click Calibration... to open the Editor Method
Calibration dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.37.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
2. Choose how results for check standards are calculated by selecting either Subtract
RW or Subtract Offset in the Check Standards section.
Check standards are used to verify analyzer performance. Samples of known

concentration are prepared and analyzed. The computed results for check standards
are calculated in a slightly different manner from unknown samples. Specifically,
for check standards, the total detector response is computed and a small difference
is subtracted before multiplying by the calibration’s response factor (RF) to
determine the computed carbon mass. The operator decides via this setting which
calculated value to subtract from the computed area for any check standards before
the carbon mass is computed.
Mass C =  Computed area – W   RF
Where:
RF is the response factor of the computed calibration curve.
W is either the offset (y-intercept) of the computed calibration curve OR the

average value of the mass contribution from the RW standard.
3. Choose either Weighted or Unweighted linear regression.
The Aurora provides two methods for calculating the best linear curve fit for the
results of running the standards that comprise the calibration curve. Some
laboratories prefer nonweighted regression as part of their standard operating
procedure. The weighted regression can provide better accuracy for low-level
concentrations because it accounts more accurately for the RW standard and any
reagent blanks that are processed.
4. Specify a quantity of reagent blanks from zero (0) to 15.
Reagent blanks are samples that consist solely of chase water. They are not
applicable to the TIC analysis mode because that mode does not support chases, but
can be added to any other mode’s calibration.
Run reagent blanks to determine the analyzer response to the (minimal) carbon
content of the sample volume plus the chase water. The average system response to
the requested reagent blanks is subtracted from the computed area of all samples
before calculating their carbon mass.
Reagent blanks aid in accurate analysis of low concentration samples by identifying

one source of additional carbon. They are also recommended when running very
high concentration samples. The typically small sample volumes involved in
analyzing high carbon samples increases the analytical impact of even minute
amounts of sample clinging to sample tubing and the like. Chases are very
beneficial in that analytical scenario, and the maximum benefit from chases is
obtained when reagent blanks are run during calibration.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Auto-Generation of Standards
The Aurora, when used with either the 1096+ or 1088 Autosamplers, offers the
capability to auto-generate standards by diluting a stock solution into a series of 40-mL
vials. The following procedure outlines how to have the Aurora auto-generate
standards.
1. From the Method Editor screen, press Calibration... to open the Calibration dialog
2. Provide the concentration of the stock solution in the Stock Conc. for Dil. field.
The allowable range of concentrations is from 1.0 to 10,000.0 ppm.
3. Select Auto-generated in the Calibration Generation section.
4. Specify the quantity of additional standards, besides the stock concentration and
RW.
5. Specify the volume of concentrated solution to start with for each new standard.
6. Specify the dilution factor between successive standards.
7. Press Generate.
The Aurora automatically fills in the standards table with the requested standard
concentrations.
The auto-generation scheme centers on using 40-mL vials. Therefore, entering 40 for
the product of the dilution factor and dilution volume is optimal but not required. The
standards are generated in a serial fashion, with each standard created by diluting the
next higher standard. The volume entered in the Dil Volume field is the amount drawn
from the next higher standard before additional reagent water is added.
Consider the following scenario. The stock concentration is specified at 1,000, and 5
additional standards are set with a 10:1 dilution and 4.0 mL of dilution volume. The
steps for generating the standards are as follows:
1. Draw 4 mL of 1,000-ppm stock from its vial, leaving 36 mL of stock available for
use as a calibration standard.
2. Deposit 4 mL of 1,000-ppm stock into another vial and add 36 mL of reagent water,
creating 40 mL of 100-ppm standard.
3. Draw 4 mL of the new 100-ppm standard from its vial, leaving 36 mL available for
4. Deposit 4 mL of 100-ppm standard into another vial and add 36 mL of reagent

water, creating 40 mL of 10-ppm standard.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
5. Draw 4 mL of the new 10-ppm standard from its vial, leaving 36 mL available for
6. Deposit 4 mL of 10-ppm standard into another vial and add 36 mL of reagent water,
creating 40 mL of 1-ppm standard.
7. Continue until all standards are generated.
At the end, seven standards are created: RW, 0.01 ppm, 0.1 ppm, 1.0 ppm, 10.0 ppm,
100.0 ppm, and 1,000.0 ppm.
Defining Pass/Fail Criteria

As the final step in setting up a new calibration, there is an option to configure pass/fail
criteria.
1. From the Method Editor screen, click Calibration... to open the Calibration dialog
2. Select Enable Calibration Pass/Fail for Primary Mode.
3. Click Pass/Fail Criteria... to review the settings in the Pass/Fail Criteria dialog
Figure 5.38. Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria Dialog Box
The calibration’s pass/fail criteria allow unattended operation of the analyzer in

situations where a run commences with a calibration before unknown samples are
processed. Operations can be halted in the event of anomalies or failures in the
calibration process without needlessly consuming the unknown samples.
In addition, the analyzer can be set to trigger alarms or stop the analysis if any QC
samples or check standards do not perform within operator-specified criteria. The

Rev. 5.0
Operation
initial calibration process and any ongoing quality control checks are automatically
monitored and problems addressed according to decision criteria developed by
laboratory administrators and analysts.
4. Enable the desired calibration pass/fail checks by selecting the corresponding

checkboxes.
All of the calibration pass/fail checks act independently of one another.
5. Enter the low and high ranges of acceptable performance.
6. Choose an action for the analyzer to perform in the event of failure.
The choices include the following:
Continue – The analyzer posts a message in the run log and continues normal
processing.
Prompt – The run stops, a notification message is posted, and the analyzer
waits indefinitely for the operator to acknowledge the message before
processing resumes.
Abort – The run immediately terminates.
Monitoring check standards is always enabled; the default response to a failure is to

rerun and then continue processing upon a second failure. The only criterion
available for check standards is percent recovery.
7. Enter the threshold percentage for success, and change the failure response(s) if
desired.
The choices for the first failure are Re-run, Prompt, Continue, and Abort.
Choices for the second failure are Prompt, Continue, and Abort.
Monitoring of QC and SST performance occurs only when the target concentration
specified is not zero. As with check standards, the only failure criterion is percent
recovery. Again, enter the failure threshold value and choose the analyzer actions for a
first and second failure.
NOTE: SST pass/fail criteria has only a first failure parameter.
Reviewing and Modifying Calibrations

Once a method has been calibrated, the Editor Method Calibration dialog box, depicted
in Figure 5.39, provides a great amount of detail about analytical data and computed

Rev. 5.0
Operation
results. In addition, the Aurora operator can modify the calibration in several ways from
this dialog box.
Toggle between
Summary and
Expanded views
For each calibrated analytical mode, a tab appears at the top of the dialog box. Selecting
among the tabs changes the contents of the rest of the dialog box to match the data
displayed for the selected mode. For a completed calibration, the table near the top of
the dialog box shows the results of processing the specified standards.
The topmost option is labeled either Summary or Expanded. This option toggles the
table view between showing the average results for each standard one-per-line, which is
the summary view, or to show every individual replicate of every standard, which is the
expanded view. The Summary view indicates replicates are excluded by showing either

Rev. 5.0
Operation
yellow or red color coding. Yellow indicates that some replicates of the standard were
excluded. Red indicates that all replicates were excluded.
Figure 5.40. Calibration Summary Table Indicating Some Replicates were Excluded
In the Expanded view, the replicates that are excluded are indicated with red color
coding.
Figure 5.41. Expanded Calibration Table Indicating All Replicates were Excluded

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Pressing Graph... opens the Calibration Graph dialog box that shows the calibration
curve and each standard’s plotted average results, as depicted in Figure 5.42.
Figure 5.42. Calibration Graph Dialog Box
Select either an entire standard (from the Summary view) or individual replicates (from
the Expanded view) and use Include and Exclude to recompute the calibration curve,
accounting for the requested changes. Figure 5.43 depicts the graph after including a
point, while Figure 5.44 depicts the graph with a selected point excluded.
Figure 5.43. Calibration Graph with Included Point Dialog Box
Figure 5.44. Calibration Graph with Excluded Point Dialog Box
Pressing Remove permanently eliminates a standard from the calibration.
The other operator modifications available change the computed values of the average
QC blank and the average reagent blank.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Manual changes to these blank average values should only occur when blanks have not
been included in any recent sequences. When running blanks as part of a sequence,
these averages become updated automatically.
After completing all changes in the Calibration dialog box, press OK and then press
Save. The modified calibration is saved and ready for use.
Processing Samples with the Aurora

The following sections outline how the Aurora is used to process samples.The sequence
of steps could include: loading an active sequence, configuring sample introduction,
controlling a sequence, adding priority samples, monitoring sample results, configuring
data gathering and data transmission, using customer IDs and sample IDs, outlier
removal and alternate methods, alarms, relays, and analog outputs, serial printer
outputs, and LIMS interfaces.
Loading an Active Sequence

After entering information about a sequence using the Sequence Editor screen, loading
that sequence for processing requires the following steps.
1. Press Monitor  Sequence to view the Sequence Monitor screen.
If a run is in progress, stop it, abort it, or wait for it to finish normally.
2. Press Unload Active Sequence to eliminate the old sequence data.
3. Press Load Active Sequence.
The Load Active Sequence dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 5.45.
Figure 5.45. Load Active Sequence Dialog Box
4. Select the desired sequence from the list.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
5. Verify samples are loaded into the vial positions called for in the sequence table
view.
6. Confirm the active configuration matches the sequence.
7. Press Start to being processing.
When activating a sequence by choosing it in the Sequence Monitor screen, the Aurora
automatically determines the necessary loading of vials into any autosampler in use.
The Vial column shows this information to the Aurora operator. The Sequence Monitor
screen includes a Print icon allowing for generating a hard-copy pick list showing the
vial positions for the samples and standards on the autosampler. The list prints on the
attached optional inkjet printer.
Configuring Sample Introduction

Some laboratories operate the Aurora in essentially the same fashion every day. For
these production laboratories, the recommended procedure is to purchase and configure
either the 1088 or 1096+ Autosampler. Fine-tune the configuration that has the same
name as the autosampler in use, and make no changes to the configuration after
validating that the parameters are properly established.
Other laboratories, meanwhile, perform method development or analyze widely varied

types of samples. The analyzer is switched from sipper, to manual syringe, to an
autosampler. These laboratories can choose to set up one configuration, and change that
configuration’s defined sample introduction mode as often as needed. Alternatively, set
up multiple configurations, one for each different sample introduction mode, and switch
among them when necessary.
Choosing which configuration is the active one is an easy process. See “Defining and
Managing Configurations” on page 119 in this chapter for more information.
For further discussion of sample introduction settings, see “Advanced Sample

Introduction Settings” on page 173 in this chapter.
Controlling a Sequence
Controlling a sequence includes four operations: starting, pausing, stopping, and
aborting.
Starting the Aurora analyzer manually requires a loaded sequence. Next, the operator
presses Start in the Monitor section. No further action is needed.
Running the Aurora via an external start signal requires several additional steps. First,
enable the external input signal(s) under the Built-In I/O Configuration screen of the
active configuration (see Figure 5.20 on page 123 for more information). Choose one of
the input relays to monitor for a start signal. Save those changes to the configuration.
Next, verify the physical cabling is connected properly. Finally, press Start from the

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Monitor section. This signals the Aurora analyzer to begin monitoring the external
input signals.
Pausing the analyzer during a run occurs only at certain well-defined points. Generally,
if the analyzer is in a detect or sample react state, then pausing is not allowed to avoid
inaccurate results. Otherwise, pausing is allowed. Pause the analyzer by pressing Pause
from the Monitor section. Resume normal processing by pressing Start.
Stopping a sequence is the process of finishing the sample analysis that is in process
and then stopping the instrument’s functions in an orderly fashion. Aborting a run in
progress, on the other hand, is an immediate action and results for the sample in process
are lost. The instrument is returned to the standby state as quickly as possible by an
abort signal. Abort the run in progress by pressing Abort and confirming that request.
Stopping the analyzer without losing data of the current replicate requires the operator
to first press Pause, confirm that a pause is desired, and then, once the analyzer reaches
a processing state that allows pausing, press Abort.
Adding Priority Samples

The Aurora software allows the operator to add items to a running sequence without
stopping the run. The operator decides the priority of the additional samples, as well.
Normal priority means the samples run after the other items in the sequence are
completed. High priority samples, meanwhile, process immediately after any items
currently being processed. The following procedure outlines how to insert or add
samples to a sequence.
1. From the Sequence Monitor screen, press Add/Insert Samples to open the
Add/Insert Samples dialog box depicted in Figure 5.46.
2. Select the Sample Type.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Choices include Sample, QC, Check Standard, Clean Up, Reagent Blank, and
SST (System Suitability Test).
3. Enter the desired quantity of replicates (# Reps) for each new sample.
4. Enter the quantity of samples (# of Samples), which determines how many new
rows appear in the sequence table.
5. Select a Primary method and choose optional alternates (see “Outlier Removal and
Alternate Methods” on page 163 in this chapter for more details on alternate
methods).
6. Enter a Sample ID if desired.
When selecting Use Incrementer, the sample ID is appended with a range of

numbers starting with what is specified in the Start Value field. For example, if the
Start Value is 5, the new samples are added after the fifth sample is complete.
7. Select a priority for the sample.
When adding samples to a running sequence, the option to select a priority for the
sample is available.
Select High priority to run the sample after any currently running sample is
completed. High priority samples always run first until completing all high priority
items.
Standard priority samples are run after all other samples in the sequence is
completed.
8. If using an autosampler, provide the first Vial Position of the new samples.
The other requested samples should be placed in adjacent vial positions.
9. Click OK.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.47 depicts the sample list before new samples are added, while
Figure 5.48 depicts the sample list after adding five samples.
Figure 5.47. Monitor Sequence Screen Depicting Existing Sequence
Figure 5.48. Monitor Sequence Screen After Adding Samples
In this example, note the use of the incrementer to assign unique sample IDs, and the
automatic assignment of consecutive vial positions. Also, note that because the samples

Rev. 5.0
Operation
were designated as High priority, they start processing immediately after the Aurora
completes processing of the current sample and is not pre-processing the next sample.
Select one or several rows of the sequence and press Remove Sample to delete any
unprocessed samples from the running sequence, depicted in Figure 5.49. Dark blue
color highlights the selected rows. A confirmation message box is displayed asking to
confirm the deletion of the samples from the sequence. Press Yes to confirm the
deletion of the samples from the sequence or No to cancel the deletion.
Figure 5.49. Deleting Samples from a Sequence
Monitoring Sample Results

The Aurora software provides several means to monitor analytical results. These
include the Sample Monitor screen, depicted in Figure 5.50, and Result Log Monitor
screen, depicted in Figure 5.51. ATOC software on the PC provides powerful
postprocessing capabilities.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.51. Results Log Monitor Screen
In addition, the IR signal can be viewed in real time to observe peak shape and size
qualitatively, as depicted in Figure 5.52, and the optional serial inkjet printer generates
an abbreviated, hard-copy paper report of all analytical results (see “Serial Printer
Output” on page 165 in this chapter). Finally, monitoring analytical results can occur
when the analog output signals are configured and enabled (see “Defining and

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Managing Configurations” on page 119 in this chapter).
Figure 5.52. Show Peak Graphs Dialog Box
Configuring Data Gathering and Data Transmission

The optional ATOC software suite resides on the connected PC and allows for remotely
interacting with an Aurora or with an Aurora without the optional touchscreen
interface. The ATOC software also allows for transmitting and storing data from the
Aurora on the PC.
NOTE: ATOC is an optional suite of PC software applications for centralized

management of security, auditing, and analytical data, plus reporting and
result editing. See the ATOC Software Operator’s Manual for additional
details.
To use ATOC software, configure both ends of the data pipeline between the analyzer
and the destination PC. The analyzer runs the Data Transmission Service (DTS) to
provide a flexible and secure protocol for sending data, results, and security and
auditing information to the PC database. The companion PC runs the Data Gathering
Service (DGS) to complete the data pipeline. The DTS starts automatically on the
analyzer once the operator specifies that it should be used and provides the needed
operating parameters. Likewise, the DGS runs on the Windows PC in an unobtrusive
manner, performing its work in the background. Even so, the DGS provides a
monitoring capability for laboratory operators and IT personnel to verify proper
operation and, if necessary, troubleshoot the data pipeline.
Configure the DTS using the DTS Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.53,
accessed from the System Configuration screen. Designate the IP Address or computer
Name fields for the destination PC that connects to the analyzer. Do not change the
DGS port setting without first consulting the OI Analytical Customer Support Center.
Failure to change both the DGS and DTS port settings to a matching port number

Rev. 5.0
Operation
renders the pipeline unusable. The retry interval and file check interval settings
typically require no changes. Excessive network traffic can impact the DGS,
manifesting itself typically as sluggish or slow response from the analyzer user
interface when commands are entered from the touchscreen. Increasing the time
intervals here can alleviate the impact of network traffic.
Figure 5.53. DTS Settings Dialog Box
Double-click the OI icon in the Windows taskbar, and the TOC Data Gathering Service
dialog box appears, depicted in Figure 5.54.
Figure 5.54. Accessing the TOC Data Gathering Service Dialog Box
Use Restart Service and Stop (Forced) only when advised by a trained OI Analytical
service representative; otherwise, data loss may occur. Clicking Clear Display resets
the status window without destroying any data or status information. Clicking Close
Window exits the dialog box, while the DGS continues to run in the background.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Using Customer IDs

The Customer ID field on the Sequence Editor screen, depicted in Figure 5.55, is used
for linking particular samples to specific customers. Due to space limitations, this field
is only visible when controlling an Aurora from a PC; the Customer ID field does not
appear on the analyzer’s display. Effectively using Customer IDs requires purchasing
and installing ATOC software. ATOC software’s TOC Reporter application provides the
ability to manage the list of customer IDs, as depicted in Figure 5.56, and for creating,
viewing, saving, and printing customer-specific reports, similar to the report depicted in
Figure 5.57. For more details, see the ATOC Software Operator’s Manual.
Customer ID
Field
Figure 5.55. Sequence Editor on PC, with Customer ID Field
Figure 5.56. TOC Reporter Customer Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.57. TOC Reporter Report for a Single Customer
Using Sample IDs

Sample IDs appear on both the analyzer display and on the PC screen. Sample IDs are
text fields entered by the operator. ID fields have no restrictions other than length
(30 characters). They are useful during runs for conveying information about what
exactly is being processed. In addition, ATOC software’s TOC Reporter can sort results
by sample ID. A consistent approach to creating and using sample IDs makes it easy to
group samples run on different days or via different methods, and to compare results
and note trends.
Sample IDs are entered directly by the operator in the Sequence Editor screen,
generated in the Add/Insert Samples dialog box, or selected from the list of defined
sample IDs that is managed through the Sample IDs Editor screen, depicted in

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.58.
Figure 5.58. Sample IDs Editor Screen
Outlier Removal and Alternate Methods

The Aurora’s outlier removal capability is discussed in detail in “Defining and
Managing Methods” on page 125 in this chapter. Outlier removal automatically checks
for anomalies in processing and corrects them by running additional replicates until the
operator-specified criteria are met. The analyzer runs only the additional replicates
needed to meet the criteria, but the operator can place a limit on the number of reruns.
Outlier removal is useful for automatically limiting the impact of glitches in sample
processing such as sample carryover, insufficient sample volume, and difficult-to-
oxidize samples. If the results from the original quantity of replicates are not
statistically valid, the system can run additional replicates to correct the situation.
Alternate methods, meanwhile, address the problem of sample concentrations that are
not within the range of the current calibration. For instance, if conducting TC analysis,
suppose the method in use is calibrated over a range from 1.0 ppm to 5,000 ppm. If the
system processes an unknown sample that appears to be 10,000 ppm, the system can be
configured to automatically analyze that sample again and use a method that is already
calibrated for a range of 5,000 to 25,000 ppm.
Select alternate methods in the Add/Insert Samples dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.59.
This is the interface for adding samples to a sequence, whether using the editor before
the sequence starts or if adding samples to a running sequence. In this dialog box,

Rev. 5.0
Operation
always select a primary method. Either one or two alternate methods can also be
chosen.
Figure 5.59. Add/Insert Samples Dialog Box with Alternate Method Selected
NOTE: The Aurora does not attempt to find the optimal fit among the primary and
alternate methods. Rather, it attempts to find any acceptable fit. If the
primary method is found suitable by these criteria, then no checks against
the alternates is performed. Likewise, if the first alternate meets the
criteria, then no checks against the second alternate take place. It is
possible that the calculated result X may barely fit in the range of the first
alternate while fitting comfortably in the range of the second alternate.
Even so, the first alternate is used.
The rules for applying alternate methods include the following:
1. One replicate is run with the primary method. Consider the calculated concentra-
tion for this one replicate with the primary method to be X. If X falls between the
minimum and maximum concentrations of the standards used in the primary
method, then the primary method is used for all replicates on this sample.
2. If X falls outside the range of the primary method’s standards, then the system
checks X against the concentrations of the first alternate’s standards. If X fits
between the minimum and maximum concentrations of the standards used in the
first alternate method, then that method is used for the remaining replicates.
3. If X falls outside the range of the primary method and the first alternate, then the
system checks X against the concentrations of the second alternate’s standards. If X
fits between the minimum and maximum concentrations of the standards used in
the second alternate method, then that method is used for the remaining replicates.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
4. If neither the first nor the second alternate method have a range of standards that
includes X, then the remaining replicates are run with the primary method.
Alarms, Relays, and Analog Outputs

The Aurora is capable of being remotely started or aborted. In addition, the system can
respond to an input signal and clear errors and alarms.
The Aurora can signal end-of-sample, end-of-replicate, and end-of-sequence, failed QC

checks, and alarm conditions. Also, four analog outputs and four output relays can be
configured to signal analytical results, i.e., concentration, with operator-specified
minimum and maximum ranges.
Every Aurora ships with two built-in input relays and two built-in output relays. The
optional External Expansion I/O Module provides the other four analog outputs and
four output relays.
For details on setting up these interfaces, see “Defining and Managing Configurations”
on page 119 in this chapter.
Serial Printer Output

The Aurora supports an optional serial inkjet printer. This provides a simple, low-cost
option for permanent output without the need to purchase a PC and ATOC software. The
printer may be purchased from OI Analytical (PN 322722).
From any Aurora screen, pressing Print sends the onscreen information directly to the
attached inkjet printer. This icon appears on method screens, sequence screens,
configuration screens, and also the Sample Monitor and Result Log Monitor screens.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Enable the printer for automatic output of analytical results during runs by checking
Use Attached Printer in the Basic Configuration screen, depicted in Figure 5.60.
Figure 5.60. Configuration Screen General Tab
If using a non-standard printer, adjust printer parameters in the Printer Settings dialog
box, depicted in Figure 5.61 and accessed from the System Configuration screen.
Consult the OI Analytical Customer Support Center before changing these settings.
Figure 5.61. Printer Settings Dialog Box
LIMS Interfaces
The Aurora offers laboratory operators a two-way interface to LIMS packages. Aurora
software imports sample information from LIMS via text files. In addition, output data
from the Aurora can be stored at an interval best suiting the laboratory’s needs and to

Rev. 5.0
Operation
any network folder accessible from the PC that runs the Aurora control application. The
following procedure outlines how to configure the LIMS interface.
Figure 5.62. LIMS Configuration Settings Dialog Box
1. Specify the needed parameters.
2. Choose whether the LIMS output should be Space Delimited, Tab Delimited, or
Comma Delimited.
3. Choose to enable or disable the export function via the Enable LIMS Export
checkbox.
If enabling this feature, choose the Filename for the export file.
4. Choose the Frequency of creating a new file.
Choices include create a new export file Once Per Replicate, Once Per Sample,
or Once Per Sequence.
5. Specify the location for file creation using the TOC Launchpad utility.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
a. Start the Launchpad, select the PC Applications tab, and click DGS… in the
Settings section, as depicted in Figure 5.63.
Figure 5.63. TOC Launchpad
b. Enter the name of the destination folder in the LIMS File field.
If the direct path name is known, enter the path in the DGS File field depicted
in Figure 5.64.
Figure 5.64. TOC Launchpad DGS Settings Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Operation
If the direct path is not known, press the ellipse button and navigate to the desired
folder, as depicted in Figure 5.65.
Figure 5.65. LIMS import folder selection
c. Click OK and close the Launchpad.
d. Restart the PC control application to allow the changes to take effect.
e. Enable and configure LIMS Import, and use it by pressing Import on the
Sequence Editor screen.
When enabling the import feature, be sure to specify which folder on the PC contains
the file(s) generated by the LIMS. The specified path must be a network path. Local
drives and mapped network drives cannot be used as the import path. This is because
the TOC unit itself accesses the data files directly rather than the PC, and it lacks the
capability to locate a mapped network drive. In the example shown below, the computer
named “TOC-CHECKOUT” is the same PC from which the control application runs.
However, it is not possible (nor desirable) to specify the path as C:\, because the Aurora
device cannot resolve C:\ to a meaningful location on the network.
The file format for LIMS import, depicted in Figure 5.66, has one line per sample with
values separated by commas. Each line has the following fields, in order, as explained

Rev. 5.0
Operation
in Table 5.2.
MySample1, 3,TOCLowMethod, , , 3, MyCustomerID, 0, This is my first sample
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 5.66. Sample LIMS Import Line
Table 5.2. Field parameters for LIMS importing
Max
Position Field Name Data Type Comments
Length
1 Sample ID Alphanumeric 16 Mandatory field, up to

16 alphanumeric
characters.
2 No of Number 2 Mandatory field, 1-15.
Replicates
3 Primary Alphanumeric 32 Mandatory text field,
Method case-sensitive, no date/
Name time stamp required.
4 Alternate Alphanumeric 32 Optional field.
Method 1
5 Alternate Alphanumeric 32 Optional field.
Method 2

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Table 5.2. Field parameters for LIMS importing
Max
Length
6 Sample Type Number 2 0–Sample

1–Cal Type
2–QC 1
3–QC 2
4–QC 3
5–QC 4
6–CkStd 1
7–CkStd 2
8–CkStd 3
9–CkStd 4
10–CkStd 5
11–CkStd 6
12–CkStd 7
13–CkStd 8
14–CkStd 9
15–CkStd 10
16–Reagent Blank
17–STD
18–QC Blank
19–RW
20–CLEANUP
21–SST
26–CkStd 11
27–CkStd 12
7 Customer ID Alphanumeric 16 Optional field, up to 16
alphanumeric characters.
8 Priority Number 1 0–High Priority
1–Low Priority
9 Comments Alphanumeric 32 Optional field, up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
• Blank lines are not allowed in the file.

• The fields “Alternate method 1,” “Alternate method 2,” “Customer ID,” and
“Comments” can be empty. However, one blank space has to be provided for these
fields except for the “Comments” field.
• The fields “Sample Type” and “Priority” accept numeric values. However, if any
alphanumeric text is supplied, it is interpreted as “0.”
• The value for field “Replicates” must be numeric, else the error message “Invalid
Data Format” appears.
An example line of a LIMS import file appears below:
Sample1,3,Meth1,AltMeth2, ,0,Cust#1,0,Its a Test1

Rev. 5.0
Operation
The export file format depends slightly on which output frequency is selected. In
general, the results are output one-per-line, comma-delimited, and the fields are shown
in Table 5.3:
Table 5.3. Field Parameters for LIMS Exporting
Max
Length
1 Date of String MMM DD,

Analysis YYYY format
2 Time of String HH:MM:SSPM
Analysis format
3 Sample # in Number
sequence
4 Vial Position Number
5 Number of Number
Replicates
6 Sample ID String 32
7 Sample Type String 32
8 Analytical String 4
Mode
9 Area Number Float
10 Mass Number Float
11 Concentratio Number Float
n
12 Standard Number Float
Deviation
13 Percent RSD Number Float
14 Pass/Fail String 4
status
15 Method String 64
16 Instrument String 32
ID
17 Operator String 16
User ID
• Each output string is enclosed in double quotes in all cases.

• All numbers marked as “Float” in the Comments above are output using an F12.6
format specifier.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
An example LIMS output file looks similar to the following. Spaces were added
manually between every field to aid in comprehension, and blank lines were added
between each of the three entries for the same reason.
"Aug 24, 2005","12:03:15PM", 1,1,3,"di water", "Sample", "NPOC",

1889.666667, 0.417352,139.000000, 360.613829, 19.083462, "Pass",
"NPOCLIN 25psi - Aug 12, 2005; 06-26-59 PM", "BETA3", "toc"
"Aug 24, 2005","12:29:15PM", 2,2,3, "di water", "Sample",

"NPOC", 4673.000000, 1.365880, 455.000000, 30.315013, 0.648727,
"Pass", "NPOCLIN 25psi - Aug 12, 2005; 06-26-59 PM", "BETA3",
"toc"
"Aug 24, 2005", "12:55:18PM", 3,3,3,"di water", "Sample",

"NPOC", 4025.000000, 1.145049, 381.333333, 58.796258, 1.460777,
"Pass", "NPOCLIN 25psi - Aug 12, 2005; 06-26-59 PM", "BETA3",
"toc"
Advanced Settings and Controls

The following sections provide details on some of the advanced settings and controls of
the Aurora.
Advanced Sample Introduction Settings

The Sample Introduction Configuration screen provides access to several icons, one for
each of the various sample introduction methods supported. All configurations use
these settings. Mainly, they allow tuning the system to compensate for slight changes in
tubing lengths or replacement of syringe components. Consult the OI Analytical
Customer Support Center before changing these settings. Press Config  Sample

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Intro to view this screen, as depicted in Figure 5.67.
Figure 5.67. Sample Introduction Configuration Screen
1088 Rotary Autosampler Settings
Clicking Rotary Autosampler from the Sample Introduction Configuration screen

opens the Rotary Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.68. Its settings include
the needle depth settings, stirring speed, needle washes, vial type, and set stirring.
Setting the needle depth farther down, i.e., a larger percentage of maximum depth,
allows taking more samples from a single vial. However, particulated samples pose
difficulty because of the likelihood of taking debris into the sample pathway. Set
stirring speed to suit the sample matrix and choice of stir bar. Needle washes,
meanwhile, reduce carryover at the cost of increased cycle time. The needle is washed
by repeatedly running it through a needle wash assembly built into the tower.
Specifying more replicates accomplishes more thorough washing. Enabling stirring

Rev. 5.0
Operation
turns the stir motor on for vials requiring stirring with the addition of a stir bar,
however, all other vials will be unaffected.
Figure 5.68. Rotary Autosampler Configuration Dialog Box
The sample inlet volume setting describes the volume of the tubing from the syringe
valve to the top of the needle. Open vials are required for external sparging, sample
dilutions, and auto-generation of standards.
1096+ XYZ Autosampler Settings
Clicking XYZ Autosampler from the Sample Introduction Configuration screen opens
the XYZ Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.69. The settings that may
require attention include the needle depth settings, needle washes, and vial type.
Currently, the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler supports only 40-mL vials in a single,
predefined rack arrangement. As with the rotary autosampler, setting the needle depth
farther down, i.e., a larger percentage of maximum depth, allows taking more samples
from a single vial, but particulated samples can present problems. Needle washes are
accomplished by lowering the needle into a dedicated wash station on the autosampler,
and running clean rinse water through the wash station. Specifying longer wash times
accomplishes more thorough washing.
Figure 5.69. XYZ Autosampler Configuration Dialog Box
valve to the top of the needle. Open vials are required for external sparging, sample
dilutions, and auto-generation of standards.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Sipper Settings
The Aurora offers a sipper tube mode of sample introduction, which is especially useful
for repeatedly sampling from the same vial or reservoir, as when cleaning up the system
or performing method development. Pressing Sipper from the Sample Introduction
Configuration screen opens the Sipper dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.70.
Figure 5.70. Sipper Configuration Dialog Box
Select Prompt to have the Aurora send a prompt between every sample. The prompt
pauses the run and allows for moving the sipper tube from one container to another. If
unchecked, the unit runs without pausing until the sequence is complete, requiring an
adequate supply of sample for all of the requested analyses. Furthermore, the sipper can
be flushed with acid and/or water in between every sample. This reduces interference
but does incur a processing time penalty.
loop to the end of the sipper tube.
Manual Syringe Settings
The Manual Syringe method of sample introduction is used primarily for very small
injection volumes, as when analyzing high concentration samples. Pressing Manual
Syringe from the Sample Introduction Configuration screen opens the Manual Syringe
dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.71.
Figure 5.71. Manual Syringe Configuration Dialog Box
Select Prompt to send a notice between every replicate. The prompt pauses the run and
allows for preparing the syringe. If unchecked, the operator is responsible for the
correct timing of sample injection into the system.
At-Line Autosampler Settings
The At-Line Autosampler, also known as the External Expansion I/O Module, provides
the capability for unattended sampling of several streams. The delay parameter can be
set to any time interval from one second to five minutes. This allows flows to stabilize

Rev. 5.0
Operation
prior to the first sampling of any stream. Pressing At-Line Autosampler from the
Sample Introduction Configuration screen opens the At-Line Autosampler dialog box
Figure 5.72. At-line Autosampler Configuration Dialog Box
The sample inlet volume setting describes the volume of tubing from the syringe valve
to the end of the pick-up tube on the autosampler.
Automated Startup and Shutdown

The Aurora provides optimal results when the CO2 and TNb detectors have a steady,
stable baseline. This is aided by having a steady flow of carrier gas for a period of time,
as well as stable ambient temperatures and humidity. To reduce gas consumption, the
Aurora offers a programmable shutdown featuring reduced gas flow. To avoid delays in
the laboratory after a unit has been in shutdown, the system can also automatically
wake up by restoring the normal gas flow and running clean-up samples to ensure all
sample and reagent lines are cleaned and primed. This is configured through the
Automated Startup / Shutdown dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.73 and accessed from
the System Configuration screen.
Figure 5.73. Automated Startup/Shutdown Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Operation
The analyzer is capable of automatically shutting down at a specific time of day. It can
also be configured to shut down after an operator-specified period of inactivity.
Inactivity means time since completing the last analysis. Maintenance actions and
operator input to the Aurora software do not count as inactivity.
At any time the operator chooses, the Aurora’s shutdown and wakeup functions can be
manually initiated using the following procedure.
1. From the System Configuration screen, press Automated Startup/Shutdown.
2. To enable the automatic wakeup feature, check Startup Settings.
3. Select a Wakeup Time to start the process.
4. Set the schedule that wakeup occurs.
The Occurrence field offers choices of Weekdays Only, Every Day, and Never.
5. Enter the amount of time to purge the reagent bottles.
6. Select the preferred action for cleaning the system.
Any defined method that is supported by the current configuration and physical
hardware may be selected.
The two main clean-up actions available are running clean-up replicates of the
method selected and priming the reagents. Enable each action individually. If
enabling the clean-up replicates action, specify how many replicates of the chosen
method to run per chamber.
7. Enable automatic shutdown by checking Shutdown Settings.
There are two options in this section:
• Shutdown Time – Specifies the time of day for shutdown to commence.

• Inactivity Timeout – Shuts down the system after a specific period of
inactivity. Accepts values between 1 and 12 hours.
8. Specify the desired carrier gas pressure when in gas saver mode.
The default setting of 5 psig saves approximately 80 percent of the nominal gas
usage compared to typical usage when sitting idle.
9. Specify the desire EFC pressure when in gas saver mode (if EFC installed on
TOC).
The default setting of 5 mL/min ensures a minimal amount of flow compared to a

typical usage as set in the config, preventing overuse of gases.
10. Press Wakeup Now or Shutdown Now to immediately begin the desired action.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
These options are useful, for instance, if a workday begins early, to get the analyzer
ready earlier than the typical schedule.
RW/RB Settings
From the Advanced Configuration screen, press RW/RB Settings to view the RW/RB
Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.74.
Figure 5.74. RW/RB Settings Dialog Box
The Reagent Water Weighting Factor is used to constrain or loosen the fit of the
response curve through the reagent water (RW) samples when calculating that curve
during a calibration. The larger the number specified, the more constrained the curve is
to fit directly through the average of the RW samples. Conversely, a smaller value for
this parameter allows the curve fit calculations to compute a curve that is less
constrained to the RW samples. The parameter supplied is used as a multiplier to the
weight assigned by the curve fit algorithm for the standard with the next lowest
concentration.
The default value for this parameter is 50. This fits well for the scenario where ultrapure
water is used for RW samples, and it contains approximately 20 ppb of organic carbon,
and the next lowest concentration of standard is 1 ppm C, i.e., 20 ppb times 50 equals
1 ppm. Adjust the factor here to reflect the ratio of carbon contained in the ultrapure
water used for RW samples versus the concentration of carbon in the next lowest
standard.
The Reagent Blank Fixed Volume setting is not applicable to the 1030C.
Drain Settings
From the Advanced Configuration screen, press Drain Settings to view the Drain
dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.75.The Drain dialog box is used to fine-tune the drain
step of sample processing. Typically, these settings do not need modifying. However, if
the operator notices a slow drain, increase the time spent pressurizing the reaction
chamber before opening the drain valve.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
NOTE: The Aurora 1030C analyzer does not use an acid chase. This setting has no
effect on combustion operations.
Figure 5.75. Drain Configuration Dialog Box

From the Advanced Configuration screen, press Peak Detection Settings to view the
Peak Detection Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.75.
Figure 5.76. Peak Detection Settings Dialog Box
The Aurora uses a variety of techniques to identify and integrate the peak shape
generated by the CO2 and TNb detectors. Operators have a great deal of latitude for
tuning these algorithms, even to the point of selectively enabling or disabling several
techniques for marking the end-of-peak. OI Analytical recommends operators consult
with the OI Analytical Customer Support Center before changing these settings.
See Chapter 13, “Peak Detection Settings” on page 438 for background information on
the process of finding peak start and peak end, and the impact that various parameters in
this dialog box make on the process.
Heated Zones Settings

From the Advanced Configuration screen, click Heated Zones to view the Heated Zone
dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.77. This dialog box is used to modify thermocouple
offsets and PWM (pulse wave modulation) settings.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
NOTE: These settings are set at the factory and should only be changed by
certified OI Analytical service personnel.
Figure 5.77. Heated Zones Configuration Dialog Box
The thermocouple offsets are used to correct thermocouple response to actual

temperature. These values should only be changed in the event of component or
thermocouple replacement. The PWM settings control the rate of change in temperature
for various heating elements. Increasing these values makes the heaters react more
quickly, but also raises the risk of overheating components and damaging equipment.
Detector Settings
The coefficients for both the CO2 and TNb detectors are set at the factory and are unique
to specific detectors. Changing these values usually renders the detector nonlinear in its
response. Typically, these values should only change after detector replacement.
From the Advanced Configuration screen, click CO2 Detector to view the CO2
Detector dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.78 and Figure 5.79.
Figure 5.78. Golay CO2 Detector Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Figure 5.79. SSNDIR CO2 Detector Dialog Box
From the Advanced Configuration screen, click TNb Module to access the TNb
settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.80. It provides a field for the operator to
specify the heater setpoint for the NOX converter, which is a key component of the TNb
detector system.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Syringe Pump Settings

From the Advanced Configuration screen, click Syringe Pump to view the Syringe
Pump dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.81. This dialog box manages the settings for
each of the possible syringe sizes.
Figure 5.81. Syringe Pump Configuration Dialog Box
NOTE: The syringe in use is defined as part of the basic configuration. See
“Defining and Managing Configurations” on page 119 in this chapter for
details.
The aspirate and dispense speeds are expressed as a percentage of full speed for the
syringe drive. Generally, slower aspirate speeds are preferable as they reduce bubble
formation in the sample tubing. Similarly, faster dispense speeds also reduce bubble
formation.
Factory default settings should only be changed after consulting with the OI Analytical
Customer Support Center.
Change the two general syringe settings only when a syringe drive assembly is
replaced. The Bubble Aspirate Motor Steps field directly affects the size of the bubble
that is maintained within the syringe to prevent sample cross-contamination.
Maintenance and Self-Test Functions

Most maintenance functions for the Aurora are covered in detail in Chapter 7,
“Maintenance” on page 295. Several related items are accessible from the System
Configuration screen, which are addressed in this section.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Changing Network Settings

The Aurora supports three means of connection via TCP/IP to either a standalone PC or
to a laboratory or company network:
• Static IP address
• Machine name
• Using a DHCP server
NOTE: DHCP is a protocol for using a central server to dynamically assign and
manage IP addresses.
Consult with onsite IT personnel for details on which mechanism is preferred. In

addition to the IP address and machine name fields, the two TCP ports used to provide
redundancy in communications can also be changed to fit laboratory-wide policies.
From the System Configuration screen, press Network Settings to open the Network
Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.82. The settings chosen in this section of the
configuration must match the selections made in the TOC Launchpad utility on the
controlling PC (or PCs). See the TOC 1030 Aurora-to-PC\Network Configuration
Guide for details on how to physically connect any number of Aurora analyzers to a PC
or to a network, and to properly configure network settings.
Figure 5.82. Network Settings Dialog Box
Tuning and Calibrating EFC and EPC

Go to the Maintenance screen to calibrate either the EPC or EFC. Typically, these only
require calibration when major system components are repaired or replaced, such as the
thermocouple I/O board. Chapter 7, “Maintenance” on page 295 provides more details
on the calibration process.

Rev. 5.0
Operation
From the System Configuration screen, press EPC/EFC Settings to open the EPC/EFC
Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.83. Use the settings in this dialog box to adjust
the sensitivity of the automatic diagnostics for the EPC and EFC.
Figure 5.83. EPC/EFC Settings Dialog Box
Reviewing the Instrument Log

The Run Log Monitor screen provides information about the status of the instrument
and what analytical processing has been performed. If local security and auditing is
configured and enabled, the local S&A log provides additional information. When the
Aurora is connected to a network (or directly to a PC) and S&A are managed from that
PC, then detailed logs and audit trails are stored on the PC and are available via ATOC
software.
Furthermore, the Maintenance section features an Instrument Log which stores and
displays details on much of the analyzer’s operation. See Chapter 7, “Maintenance” on
page 295 for details on the instrument log.
Calibrating the Touchscreen

The touchscreen on the Aurora physically resides on top of the color display. It is
calibrated at the factory. However, depending on operator preference and placement of
the equipment within the laboratory, some individuals may have difficulty accurately
using the touchscreen. Even when using a stylus, an excessive amount of position error
may seem apparent between the location where the stylus is “tapped” on the screen
compared to where the corresponding program response occurs. The Stylus Properties
dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.84 and only visible on the Aurora’s touchscreen,
recalibrates the touchscreen so that input positions and actual touch positions are
aligned.
Figure 5.84. Stylus Properties Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Operation
The following procedure outlines how to complete this process.
1. Press Config  System.
2. Press Stylus, which is visible only on the analyzer display.
3. Press Calibration.
4. Press Recalibrate.
5. Use a stylus to carefully touch each of the displayed cross-hairs symbols, then
touch the middle of the screen, when prompted, to complete the process.
Administrative Settings
From the System Configuration screen, press OI Administrative Settings. The
Administrative Settings dialog box, depicted in Figure 5.85, gives OI Analytical-
trained service personnel access to items that are not typically required for daily
operations, including the instrument ID and communications port settings. This dialog
box is password-protected to prevent unauthorized changes, which can result in a loss
of results data. Contact the OI Analytical Customer Support Center for assistance with
changing these settings.
Figure 5.85. OI Administrative Settings Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Operation
Recommended Settings for the Aurora 1030C

This section lists the settings for the Aurora that are recommended by OI Analytical and
serve as a basis for setting up the instrument.
Table 5.4. Recommended Sample Introduction Settings for 1030C
Sample
Concentration Acid (mL) EPC (psi) Chase
Volume (mL)
0–10 ppm 1.8 0.1 16 0.1

1–125 ppm 1.2 0.1 20 0.2
10–1,000 ppm 0.2 0.2 25 0.5
TIC Only
Acid 0.2 mL
React time 2:30
NPOC External
Acid 1.0 mL
The ideal range for combustion calibration is 5–100 µg.
For TIC only or TC-TIC, phosphoric acid may be used rather than hydrochloric acid.
For all other applications, hydrochloric acid must be used.

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 6 Aurora 1030C
Optional Equipment
This chapter contains information on the optional equipment available for the Aurora
1030C TOC Analyzer. Optional equipment includes two autosamplers, External I/O,
Total Bound Nitrogen (TNb), and Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer modules, and a
serial printer. All of these are covered in detail in the following sections. A
troubleshooting section and a list of replacement parts for each component are listed at
the end of this chapter.
Safety Information
For operator safety, pay attention to WARNING and CAUTION statements throughout
the manual and this chapter.
• A WARNING indicates a condition or possible situation that could result in

physical injury to the operator.
• A CAUTION indicates a condition or possible situation that could damage or
destroy the product or the operator’s work.
Follow warnings and precautions in this manual or on the instruments during operation,
service, and repair. Failure to follow these warnings and precautions violates the safety
design standards and intended use of the instrument. OI Analytical is not be liable for
the operator’s failure to comply with these warnings and precautions.
Safety Symbols
The following symbols may be located on the equipment listed in this chapter and
applies to all instruments.
Warning/Caution, see accompanying instruction for more

information.
Indicates a hot surface.
Indicates hazardous voltages.

Rev. 5.0
Aurora 1030C Optional Equipment
Indicates earth (ground) terminal.
Indicates the OFF position on the power switch.
Indicates the ON position on the power switch.

Rev. 5.0

The 1088 Rotary Autosampler (1088) is a vial-positioning instrument that facilitates
sample transfer from a vial to the Aurora 1030 Total Organic Carbon Analyzer
(Aurora). It assists in automated sample introduction that enables the operator to
perform other tasks while the Aurora runs. Figure 6.1 depicts the 1088 Rotary
Autosampler.
Figure 6.1. 1088 Rotary Autosampler
General Information for the 1088

The 1088 is designed to be sturdy, reliable, and easy to use. When combined with the
Aurora, the 1088 fully automates the analysis of 88 samples. It can sample from open
vials or via septum-piercing using vials capped with septa. The Aurora combined with
the 1088 allows sequential or random sampling, providing user flexibility. The 1088
uses minimal bench space because it easily docks with the Aurora.
The Aurora combined with the1088 can pre-acidify open vials and pre-purge samples
while they are in the autosampler. This feature allows TIC removal prior to sampling,
shortening analysis time by eliminating TIC analysis time.
This section explains the procedures for installing, using, and maintaining the 1088. At
the end of this chapter are sections on troubleshooting problems as well as a parts list
for the 1088.

Rev. 5.0
Specifications for the 1088
Table 6.1 lists the general specifications for the 1088 Rotary Autosampler.
Table 6.1. 1088 Rotary Autosampler General Specifications
System Dimensions 66 cm (26 in) D x 47 cm (18.5 in) W x 66 cm (26 in) H

(1088 with Aurora) Footprint: 494 in2
Dimensions 47.62 cm (18.75 in) D x 39.37 cm (15.5 in) W x 50.8 cm
(20 in)
Footprint: 494 in2
Weight 20 kg (44 lbs); 34.4 kg (76 lbs) docked with Aurora 1030C
Sample Capacity 88 vials (with standard wash and waste stations)
Sample Vial 40-mL VOA vials, (PN 296053)
Specifications Open-hole caps (PN 296075)
Teflon®-faced septa (PN 173211)
Standard Vial 40-mL VOA vials (PN 296053)
Sample Needle and septum-piercing needle: 8.345" two-hole, 316 stainless steel
Needle Sleeve needle
Short needle sleeve: 5.125", 316 stainless steel for closed-
vial mode
Optional Open Vial Open vial needle: 8.27", open end, AL-6XN super alloy
Needle and Needle needle
Sleeve Long needle sleeve: 7.4", AL-6XN super alloy for open-vial
NPOC External pre-acidification
Communications RS-485 serial port
Sample Transfer Pathway
The specifications for the sample transfer pathway are:
• 8.345" stainless steel needle with either 5.125" or 7.4" sleeve

• 1/8" O.D. x 0.045" I.D. x 17" Teflon® tubing
Environmental Requirements for the 1088
Table 6.2 lists the environmental requirements for operating the 1088 Rotary
Autosampler. In addition, ensure the installation site is free of severe temperature

Rev. 5.0
fluctuations and drafts. Data integrity may suffer if ambient temperature changes of
more than 10 °C per hour occur.
Table 6.2. Environmental Requirements for the 1088 Autosampler
Specification Optimal Range Functional Range
Indoor or Outdoor Indoor Indoor

Use
Temperature 20–30 °C (68–86 °F) 10–40 °C (50–104 °F)
Storage 5–50 °C (41–122 °F) N/A
Temperature
Relative Humidity 50–60% Max 80% up to 31 °C (88 °F)
Max 50% 32-40 °C (104 °F)
Altitude <2000m max <2000m max
Performance Specifications for the 1088
Table 6.3 lists the performance specifications for the 1088 Rotary Autosampler.
Table 6.3. 1088 Rotary Autosampler Performance Specifications
Sample Transfer ±0.3%

Accuracy
Programmable Sample and wash needle depth (0–100%)
Parameters Stirring speed
Number of needle rinses between samples
Open- or closed-vial mode
Power Requirements 115 VAC; 50/60 Hz
230 VAC; 50/60 Hz (optional)
Fuse rating: 6.3A 250VAC GDC
Maximum 1000VA (1030C)
Maximum 430VA (1030W)
Features of the 1088
• Automatically samples 88 USEPA-approved, 40-mL VOA vials.

• The Aurora docks directly on the 1088 chassis to minimize bench space
requirements.
• Programmable rinses through the Aurora provide maximum flexibility.
• Water or lightly particulated water samples transfer with no system clogging.
• Removable, lightweight sample carousel makes sample loading and unloading
easy.
• Easily configure the 1088 through the Aurora touchscreen.

Rev. 5.0
• The motorized needle drive assembly facilitates automatic sample transfer from an
open or closed vial.
• Programmable variable speed magnetic stirring ensures homogeneous insoluble
and particulated samples for sampling.
• Sample pretreatment configuration allows pre-acidification and pre-sparging of
samples to reduce analysis time.
Safety Information
The 1030 TOC meets the European Union directives for emissions and safety as noted
in the Declaration of Conformity for this instrument as tested and documented by a
certified independent laboratory.
Operator Precautions for the 1088
Warnings and precautions in this manual or on the instrument must be followed during
operation, service, and repair of the instrument. Failure to follow these warnings and
precautions violates the safety design standards and intended use of the instrument.
OI Analytical is not liable for the operator’s failure to comply with these warnings and
precautions.
Connect the 1088 to a dedicated AC power supply through a three-conductor power

cord with the third wire firmly connected to an electrical ground at the power outlet.
Any interruption of the grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective
earth terminal could cause a shock that could result in personal injury.
Any power cord used shall have the same or greater power rating as the cord supplied
with the instrument. Position the 1030 or 1030/1088 so there is easy access to the power
switch.
General Precautions for the 1088
• Disconnect the AC power cord before removing covers.

• Do not perform unauthorized modifications or substitute parts to the instrument that
are not OI Analytical original parts. Any unauthorized modifications or
substitutions void the warranty.
• Maintain a static-safe area when handling all electronic parts and assemblies. Use a
static-control wrist strap that is connected through a one mega-ohm resistor to an
appropriate earth ground. Store all electrical parts and equipment in static-
protective containers.

Rev. 5.0
Installing the 1088 Autosampler

This section covers installation of the 1088 Autosampler, listing any required materials,
unpacking and positioning information, and connecting and configuring the unit.
Required Materials for the 1088
The 1088 startup kit does not contain the waste bottle (>4 L capacity) required for
installation.
Unpacking and Positioning the 1088
Unpack the instrument(s) and check the items against the component list. If any damage
appears, notify the carrier immediately. Save all packing materials until verifying
proper component operation.
NOTE: Ship all instruments returning to OI Analytical for service or warranty

repair in the instrument’s original OI Analytical box with its packing
materials. If instruments are damaged due to improper shipping, OI
Analytical is not responsible for the cost of repairs. If no access exists to
proper shipping materials, contact the OI Analytical Order Entry
Department at (800) 336-1911 or (979) 690-1711.
NOTE: Position the waste bottle so it is level with or lower than the 1088 to allow
proper drainage.
Prepare the 1088 for installation using the following steps:
1. Remove any additional packing materials, as necessary, from the autosampler.
Save all packing materials until verifying proper autosampler operation.
2. Power off the TOC analyzer, if applicable.
3. Align the Aurora’s rubber feet with the white nylon screws on the autosampler
platform to mount the Aurora on the 1088.
4. Position the wash and waste bottles behind and to the left of the autosampler to
allow routing the wash and waste lines from the autosampler.
1088 Plumbing Connections
Once in place, the autosampler is ready for the plumbing connections.
1. Verify the autosampler is powered off.
2. Rinse and fill the wash bottle with carbon-free reagent water to ensure
cleanliness.

Rev. 5.0
3. Route the clear silicone water line from the tubing outlet on the autosampler to
the bottom of the wash bottle.
4. Route the red waste line from the tubing outlet on the autosampler to the waste
bottle or appropriate drain.
5. Verify the needle and sleeve are installed in the autosampler.
The autosampler ships with the septum-piercing needle in place. If not installed,
install the needle and appropriate sleeve (“Replacing the Needle” on page 206 and
“Replacing the Needle Sleeve” on page 206).
6. Connect the end of the sample transfer line (PN 321320) to port F of the needle
manifold.
7. Place the waste cup (PN 321290), found in the 1088 startup kit, in the center of the
carousel.
Septum Piercing or Pre-Acidification
Connect the 1/16" tubing sleeve gas transfer line from the front panel of the Aurora to
the side port of the needle manifold (see 1088 Rotary Autosampler Operator’s Manual,
Figure 2.1, “1088 Rotary Autosampler docked with Aurora 1030 TOC Analyzer,” on
page 5).
Electrical Connections for the 1088
Once in place, the autosampler is ready for the electrical and communications
connections. See Table 6.3 for information on the power requirements for the 1088
Rotary Autosampler.
1. Connect the communications cable.
Connect one end of the communications cable (PN 322310) to the COM port on the
autosampler back panel. Connect the other end of the cable to one of the Aurora
RS-485 ports on the back of the analyzer, as depicted in Figure 6.2.
2. Plug the appropriate end of the autosampler power cord into the power receptacle
on the autosampler back panel.

Rev. 5.0
3. Plug the other end into an appropriate 100-230 VAC ±10% grounded outlet.
RS-485 Port
Figure 6.2. Aurora Back Panel Electrical and Communications Connection Ports
Loading and Unloading the 1088 Carousel
The 1088 can be loaded or unloaded while idle or running.
WARNING:Do not attempt to perform any analyses without the carousel cover
installed.
CAUTION: Do not expose the carousel to ketones (acetone) or concentrated

aromatics.
Loading and Unloading the 1088 Carousel While Running
The following procedure outlines how to load or unload the 1088 carousel while the
1088 is running.
CAUTION. Do not attempt to remove the carousel unless the needle is in the up
position. If the needle is in the down position, the needle and needle drive
mechanism may be damaged.
1. Remove the carousel cover.

Rev. 5.0
2. Remove vials or insert new vials as positions are available on the carousel.
3. Replace the carousel cover when finished.
Loading and Unloading the 1088 Carousel While Idle
The following procedure outlines how to load and unload the 1088 carousel while idle.
1. Remove the carousel cover and the carousel.
2. Remove the sample vials or insert new sample vials into the carousel.
3. Replace the carousel.
4. Replace the carousel cover.
1088 Carousel Home Position
The 1088 Autosampler home position is vial position 57. When the autosampler power
is turned on, the autosampler automatically moves to the home position. A notch in the
upper vial holder on the carousel is next to vial position 57. For operator safety, the
autosampler leaves the needle in place once the carousel cover is removed. The
carousel will resume with the next sample when the cover is replaced.
If the autosampler does not move to the home position when the power is turned on,
contact the OI Analytical Customer Support Center for help at (800) 336-1911 or
(979) 690-1711.
Operating the 1088 Autosampler

Configuration, operation, and maintenance of the 1088 is controlled using the Aurora
touchscreen. The Config button and Maint button access the screens to configure the
1088 to operate with the Aurora.
The following sections provide an overview of configuring and operating the 1088
through the Aurora. For more in-depth information on configuring and operating the
1088 through the Aurora, see Chapter 4, “1088 Rotary Autosampler Configuration” on
page 75 and Chapter 5, “1088 Rotary Autosampler Settings” on page 174, respectively.
For more information on maintaining the 1088 through the Aurora, see “Maintenance
for the 1088 Autosampler” on page 203.
1088 Configuration Parameters
Configuration parameters for the 1088 are set through the General tab of the
Configuration screen. The following procedure outlines now to set the configuration
parameters for the 1088 through the Aurora.
NOTE: Verify the Active Sample Intro Device is set to Rotary Autosampler, as

Rev. 5.0
1. Press Config.
2. Press the General tab to display all configurations installed on the Aurora.
A check mark inside a circle displayed on the icon designates the active
configuration and the word “Active” is displayed in the name for the configuration,
Config Button
General Tab Check Mark

Designates
Active Device
View/Modify Make Active
Figure 6.3. General Configuration Screen with the 1088 Rotary Autosampler Active
3. Select the Rotary (1088) configuration.
If a rotary autosampler configuration does not exist, a new configuration can be

added. (See Chapter 4, “1088 Rotary Autosampler Configuration” on page 75 for
more information on adding a new configuration.) The following procedure briefly
outlines how to add a new configuration.
• Open the Default configuration.
• Select Rotary Autosampler for the Active Sample Intro Device.
• Add or edit any necessary criteria for the 1088 Rotary Autosampler.
• Press Save As... and enter a new configuration name (i.e., Rotary sampler).

Rev. 5.0
The dialog box is closed and the new configuration is listed on the Configuration
screen.
4. Press View/Modify... at the bottom of the screen to view the current configuration
of the 1088 Autosampler.
The Basic tab is displayed, as depicted in Figure 6.4.
Verify Rotary
Autosampler
is Selected.
Figure 6.4. Aurora Basic Tab 1030C Configuration Dialog Box for 1088 Rotary Autosampler
5. Verify Rotary Autosampler is selected in the Active Sample Intro Device pull-
down menu.
6. Save the configuration.
The dialog box is closed with the selected parameters for the configuration.
7. Press Make Active at the bottom of the screen, depicted in Figure 6.3.
The 1088 Rotary Autosampler is now configured and ready for use.
Programming Sampling Parameters for the 1088
Once configured, the 1088 Rotary Autosampler is ready for programming. The
following procedure outlines how to program the 1088 using the Aurora.
1. Press Config.
The General tab of the Configuration screen is displayed.

Rev. 5.0
2. Press Sample Intro.
The screen is repopulated, as depicted in Figure 6.5.
Figure 6.5. Sample Intro Screen
3. Press Rotary Autosampler.

Rev. 5.0
The Sample Intro dialog box for the Rotary Autosampler configuration is
displayed, as depicted in Figure 6.6.
Figure 6.6. Sample Intro for 1088 Rotary Autosampler Dialog Box
Table 6.4 lists and describes the fields and values for each field.
Table 6.4. Sample Intro for 1088 Rotary Autosampler Dialog Box Settings
Setting Definition
tray is 40 mL x 88 vials.
Vial Type Indicates if open or closed vials are in use.
into the vial. Typical value is 96%. Example: If the
Sample Needle Depth is set to 96%, the needle descends
96% into the vial.
This value can be optimized for the application. For
example, if the sample is particulated and the sample
requires no sediment, reduce the Sample Needle Depth.
OI Analytical recommends a setting of 70% for
particulated samples to prevent large settled particles
from clogging the needle.
vial.
Sample Stirring in A/S Determines whether the stirring motor is enabled in the
autosampler. Note: Not all vials are required to have a
stir bar.

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.4. Sample Intro for 1088 Rotary Autosampler Dialog Box Settings (Continued)
Setting Definition
Sample Stirring Speed Represents the speed a sample is stirred. Values range
from 0 (off) to 6. Higher viscosity samples or samples
with particulates generally require slower stirring
speeds.
Wash Needle at Start of Determines if needle is washed before each sample.
Sample Range is 1 to 10 washes.
Wash Needle at End of Determines if needle is washed at the end of the active
Sequence sequence. Range is 1 to 10 washes.
4. Press OK to save the configuration settings.
Preparing the Carousel
After the configuration is set and chosen, the carousel tray is loaded. The following
procedure outlines how to load the carousel.
WARNING:As a safety feature, the needle does not lower without the carousel cover
in place. Do not attempt to perform any analyses without the carousel
cover installed.
1. Place the Aurora in standby.
See Chapter 4, “Action Icons and Status Indicators” on page 39 for more
information.
2. Remove the carousel cover.
3. Lift and remove the sample carousel.
4. Remove the sample vials or insert new sample vials into position.
5. Remove the wash/waste container from the 1088 startup kit and rinse with
reagent water.
6. Place the container in the wash station position.
7. Replace the sample carousel by rotating it until it drops on the locating pin.
8. Replace the carousel cover.
Using Sequences with the 1088
The Aurora uses sequences to automate sample runs when working with the 1088.
Create, view, and edit sequences from the Sequence Editor screen. Make a sequence

Rev. 5.0
active from the Active Sequence screen. See Chapter 4, “Editor Sequence Screen” on
page 64 for more information.
Maintenance for the 1088 Autosampler

The 1088 Rotary Autosampler requires very little maintenance other than cleaning and
routine part replacements. This chapter describes cleaning, replacing, and other general
maintenance procedures for the needle drive assembly and sample line.
Maintenance Dialog Box
The Maintenance dialog box directly controls key functions for testing and diagnostic
purposes for the 1088. Press Maint to access the Maintenance screen, depicted in
Figure 6.7, and press the Rotary Autosampler icon to access the Rotary Autosampler
maintenance functions and view status indicators, as depicted Figure 6.8.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 6.8. Rotary Autosampler Maintenance Dialog Box
Table 6.5 explains the Rotary Autosampler maintenance dialog box.
Table 6.5. Rotary Autosampler Maintenance Dialog Box Settings
Option Description
Home Options include Linear, Rotary, and Needle.

Tray Controls the sample tray. Options include Retract, Extend,
and Test All.
Vial Displays the current vial position and allows for selecting a
specific vial.
Pumps Powers on or off the wash and waste pumps.
Stirrer Turns on or off the sample stirring function, as well as set the
stirring speed when on.
Needle Displays the current needle depth and allows for testing of
the needle depth to ensure proper depth before a sequence
begins.
Status Displays the status for 12 settings using red indicators.
Abort Aborts the current maintenance session without
implementing any changes.

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.5. Rotary Autosampler Maintenance Dialog Box Settings (Continued)
Option Description
Close Closes the dialog box and ends the maintenance session once
maintenance is completed.
1088 Parts Replacement Procedures
This section covers parts replacement procedures for the 1088 Autosampler. Figure 6.9
depicts the Needle Drive Assembly for the 1088 and should be referenced for the
following three sections.
Needle
O-ring
Top Port of Needle

Manifold
Needle Manifold
Side Port of Needle

O-ring
Manifold
¼"-28 Stainless
Steel Nut
Needle Sleeve
Figure 6.9. 1088 Autosampler Needle Drive Assembly

Rev. 5.0
Replacing the Sample Transfer Line
Replace the sample transfer line (PN 321320) only if it becomes damaged or
contaminated.
1. Loosen and remove the 1/8" fitting nut from the top port of the needle manifold.
2. Loosen and remove the 1/8" fitting nut on the other end of the sample transfer
line, which connects to port F on the Aurora front panel.
3. Install the new sample line by performing the above steps in reverse order.
4. Finger tighten the fitting.
Replacing the Needle
Replace the needle (PN 321323 or PN 326778) if it becomes clogged, damaged, or too
dull (septum-piercing) to perform analysis.
1. Remove the sample transfer line (PN 321320).
See “Replacing the Sample Transfer Line” on page 206.
2. Remove the needle out through the top port of the needle manifold.
Ensure the needle’s O-ring is also removed, inspected, and replaced, as needed.
3. Slide the replacement needle with O-ring through the top port of the needle
manifold.
4. Reattach the sample transfer line (PN 321320).
Replacing the Needle Sleeve
Convert from closed-vial (septum-piercing) to open-vial sampling or vice versa by

changing the needle and needle sleeve. For closed-vial, septum-piercing applications,
use the short needle sleeve (PN 321322) and septum piercing needle (PN 321323). For
applications requiring external sparging, use the open vial needle (PN 326778) and the
long needle sleeve (PN 321321). Also, replace the needle sleeve if it becomes clogged
or damaged.
NOTE: Do not overtighten the tube nut. The needle sleeve may collapse around
the needle.
NOTE: Failure to include the O-ring may result in leaks, errors, poor sample
transfer, and an inability to reproduce test results.
1. Remove the sample transfer line.
2. Loosen and remove the needle sleeve and O-ring from the needle manifold.

Rev. 5.0
The needle sleeve has an integral 5/16-28" stainless steel nut attached to the top of
the sleeve. On the top of this nut is an O-ring. Ensure this O-ring is still mounted on
the needle sleeve. Inspect the O-ring for damage.
3. Slide the needle sleeve approximately halfway down along the shaft of the needle.
4. Remove the needle and O-ring from the top of the manifold.
5. Remove the old needle sleeve.
6. Attach the new needle sleeve and O-ring onto the bottom of the needle manifold.
Ensure the O-ring is mounted onto the needle sleeve. If the O-ring is not there,
carefully remove the O-ring from the old needle sleeve and mount onto the new
needle sleeve.
8. Use a wrench to tighten ¼-turn beyond finger tight.
9. Replace the needle through the top of the needle manifold.
Ensure the O-ring is in place.
10. Reattach the sample transfer line.
Cleaning the Wash Bottle
Clean the wash bottle by rinsing thoroughly with reagent water.
Cleaning the Sample Needle
Depending on the size and consistency of particulates, it may be necessary to make sure
the septum piercing needle (PN 321323) is free from potential clogging. Particulates
can settle just inside the sampling opening at the bottom of the needle assembly. Follow
page 206, Replacing the Needle to properly remove the needle. Sonicate as needed and
inspect the needle for defects as required.

Rev. 5.0

The 1096+ XYZ Autosampler (1096+) is a liquid sample transfer instrument that
moves sample from vials to the Aurora 1030C Aurora Total Organic Carbon Analyzer
(Aurora). It provides automated sample introduction that enables the operator to
perform other tasks while the autosampler runs.
The 1096+ is designed to be sturdy, reliable, and easy to use. When combined with the
Aurora, the 1096+ fully automates the analysis of 96 samples with 12 calibration
points. It can sample from open vials or via septum-piercing using vials capped with
septa. The Aurora combined with the 1096+ allows sequential or random sampling,
providing user flexibility.
General Information for the 1096+

This section contains general information on the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler, such as
operating principle, specifications, and features. Figure 6.10 depicts the 1096+
Autosampler.
Figure 6.10. 1096+ XYZ Autosampler

Rev. 5.0
1096+ Operating Principle
The motorized positioning system of the 1096+ allows the Aurora to control the
sampling sequence as programmed by the user. After moving to the appropriate vial
position, the needle lowers into the vial, piercing the septum, if present. The sample
control system of the Aurora then transfers required sample volumes for analysis. The
Aurora can be programmed to optimize the number of needle and sample pathway
rinses at the wash station to support individual application requirements.
1096+ Specifications
Table 6.6 contains the specifications for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler, including
dimensions, weight, sample and vial information, material construction, and
communications protocols.
CAUTION: Using mismatched sample vials and sample vial racks may result in
malfunctions or sample spills. Ensure all vials meet the given
requirements.
Table 6.6. 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Specifications
Dimensions 48.2 cm (19 in) D x 52 cm (20.5 in) W x 61 cm (24 in) H

19 in D x 20.5 in W x 24 in H
Footprint: 2,506 cm2 (389.5 in2)
Weight (Base Unit) 10.5 kg (23 lbs)
Sample Capacity 96-position maximum sample capacity
24-position sample rack
4 sampler racks per tray
12-position standard rack
Sample Vial 40-mL VOA vials (PN 296053)
Standard Vial 40-mL VOA vials (PN 296053)
Sample Needle and septum-piercing needle: 8.345" two-hole, 316 stainless
Needle Sleeve steel needle
Short needle sleeve: 5.125", 316 stainless steel
Optional Open Vial Open vial needle: 8.27", open end, AL-6XN super alloy
Needle and Needle needle
Sleeve Long needle sleeve: 7.4", AL-6XN super alloy for open-
vial NPOC External pre-acidification

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.6. 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Specifications (Continued)
Construction Autosampler components: corrosion-resistant stainless

Materials steel alloys or anodized aluminum
Enclosure and base: high-strength aluminum alloy that is
chromated and finished with an epoxy powder coating
Sample flow path: PET, PFA, and 316 stainless steel
Communications One dedicated wash pump control relay
Two serial RS-485 ports
Environmental Considerations for the 1096+
Table 6.7 lists the environmental considerations, such as operating and storage
temperatures and relative humidity and altitude levels, for safely operating the 1096+
Autosampler.
Table 6.7. 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature 10 ° to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F)

Storage Temperature 5 ° to 85 °C (41 °F to 185 ° F)
Relative Humidity 10–90% non-condensing
Altitude Up to 2,000M
1096+ Requirements
Table 6.8 lists the power requirements, space requirements, and any other requirements
necessary for operating the 1096+ Autosampler.
Table 6.8. 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Requirements
Power 100–230 (±10%) VAC; 50/60 Hz; 40 W; automatic voltage

selection
Uses an external desktop power supply; input rating of
110–240 VAC, 1A; output rating of 24 VDC, 3.33 A
Space 71 cm (28 in) W x 71 cm (28 in) D x 76 cm (30 in) H
Other Reagent-grade water for rinsing

Rev. 5.0
1096+ Features
• Automates introduction of 96 samples to the Aurora with random and priority
sampling capabilities
• Sampling needles support open-vial sampling or septum-piercing from sealed vials
• Integrated needle wash station and programmable wash steps maintain system
cleanliness for consistent analytical performance
• Sample pre-treatment option allows pre-acidification and pre-sparging of samples
to reduce analysis time
• septum-piercing or open-vial sampling
• Aurora 1030 provides a built-in feature for pre-acidifying and pre-sparging
open-vial samples
1096+ Safety Information

The 1096+ XYZ Autosampler was designed and tested in accordance with recognized
safety standards and designed for indoor use. Using the instrument in a manner not
specified by the manufacturer may impair the instrument’s safety protection. If the
1096+ safety protection is compromised, disconnect the instrument from all power
sources and secure the instrument against unintended operation.
Operator Precautions
Connect the 1096+ to a dedicated AC power supply through a three-conductor power

cord with the third wire firmly connected to an electrical ground at the power outlet.
Any interruption of the grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective
earth terminal could cause a shock that could result in personal injury.
General Precautions
• Disconnect the AC power cord before removing covers.

• Arrange gas lines so they can not become kinked, punctured, or otherwise
damaged, and will not interfere with walkways.
• Do not perform unauthorized modifications or substitute parts that are not
OI Analytical original parts to the instrument. Any unauthorized modifications or
substitutions voids the warranty.
Installing the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler

The 1096+ Autosampler is designed for easy installation. For the most part, the
autosampler is installed without using tools. Remove thumbscrews with tools if
necessary, but only tighten them by hand when replacing them.

Rev. 5.0
CAUTION: Using tools such as screwdrivers or pliers to perform most installation

tasks may result in a damaged or unusable instrument.
Several tasks are required to install the autosampler:
1. Prepare for installation.
2. Unpack the unit.
3. Assemble the unit.
4. Connect the wash station.
5. Assemble the sample vial racks.
6. Establish the gas and power connections.
7. Connect the autosampler to the Aurora.
Unpacking the 1096+ Autosampler
If the autosampler is shipped or removed from storage during cold weather, allow the
packaged equipment to attain room temperature before opening and exposing to warm,
humid air. Provide four to eight hours for this purpose.
The following procedure outlines how to unpack the 1096+ Autosampler.
CAUTION: If condensation forms on or inside the autosampler, allow it to dry

thoroughly before connecting the autosampler to a power source and
operating it. Failure to do so may cause equipment damage.
NOTE: Do not throw away the factory packaging. Keep it for possible future use.
NOTE: All instruments returned to OI Analytical for service or warranty repair

must be shipped in the original box with its packing material. If
instruments become damaged due to improper shipping, OI Analytical is
not responsible for the cost of repairs. For proper shipping materials,
contact the OI Analytical Order Entry Department at (800) 673-3750 or
(979) 690-1711.
1. Inspect external packaging for damage.
Upon receipt, look for holes, tears, smashed corners, or any other outward signs of
damage from rough handling or abuse during shipment. Inspect all items during
unpacking and notify the carrier immediately of any damage.
2. Remove the packing checklist from the shipping container and check off items
against it.
Leave accessories packed until ready to install them on the autosampler.

Rev. 5.0
3. Remove the autosampler from the crate and position it in place.
Place the autosampler within 1.2 m (48") of a power outlet. Position the
autosampler so the power supply cord plug is easily accessible, is not blocked, and
the plug can be quickly disconnected if needed. The power receptacle is located on
the back of the autosampler below the power switch.
4. Place the wash bottle within 2 m (79") of the autosampler.
The autosampler uses reagent water as a rinse agent.
5. Locate a liquid waste receptacle within 2 m (79") of the autosampler.
The waste receptacle inlet should be at least 30–60 cm (12–24") lower than the
autosampler wash station outlet.
Assembling the 1096+ Autosampler
There are several steps to assembling the autosampler:
• Mounting the Z-drive assembly

• Installing the Z-drive mounting blocks
• Installing the needle and needle sleeve
• Installing the sample transfer line and sleeve gas transfer line
• Setting the Z-axis travel
WARNING:Ensure AC power is off before proceeding with the installation.

Rev. 5.0
Attach the Z-drive assembly (PN 323158) to the autosampler arm to allow movement
and function of the sample needle. Figure 6.11 illustrates the Z-drive assembly
components.
Z-axis Drive Sample Transfer Line

Cable Sheath
Needle and
Needle Sheath
Z-axis Slider
Power On LED
Needle Manifold
Y-axis Lead Screw Nut
Thumbscrews with
Bushings Y-axis Slider Block
Guide Plate
Slider Block
Guide Rail
Figure 6.11. 1096+ Z-drive Assembly
1. Position the Z-drive assembly at the free end of the autosampler arm with the
Z-drive assembly pointing up.
2. Match the y-axis slider block with the autosampler arm’s guide rails.
Match the 6 x 3-mm grooves in the y-axis slider block with the guide rails on the
autosampler arm, and slide the block along the arm tube until the holes in the block
align with the matching holes in the y-axis lead screw nut, as depicted in
Figure 6.12.

Rev. 5.0
Sample Transfer
Line
Z-axis Drive
Cable Sheath
Needle and Needle

Sheath
Needle Manifold
Z-axis Slider
Thumbscrews with
Bushings
Y-axis Slider
Block
Home Position Flag Y-axis Lead Screw

Nut
Guide Plate
Slider Block
Guide Rail
Figure 6.12. 1096+ Z-drive Assembly with Z-axis Slider
3. Secure the y-axis slider block to the y-axis lead screw nut.
Install the 12-mm nylon thumbscrews from the top (through the bushings). The
thumbscrews should only be finger-tightened, with no tools used to prevent
possible damage.
If not already installed, attach the Z-drive to the mounting blocks.
CAUTION: Ensure the front white cable (labeled “A”) goes to the left side of the
z-axis rotor (as viewed from the back of the autosampler. The rear white
cable (labeled “B”) goes to the right side of the z-axis rotor (as viewed
from the back of the autosampler). Failure to connect the cables correctly
results in autosampler malfunction.

Rev. 5.0
1. Loop the 1.5-mm O.D. PEEK® z-axis drive tubing around the bottom of the z-axis
rotor groove, as depicted in Figure 6.13.
Z-axis Drive Cable

Sheath
Z-drive Assembly
Mounting Block
Thumbscrews
Z-axis Drive Tubing
OR
1
Z-axis Rotor
Z-axis Rotor Clamp
Figure 6.13. 1096+ Autosampler Z-axis Rotor and Mounting Blocks
2. Attach the mounting blocks to the back of the autosampler chassis with the
stainless steel thumbscrews provided.
Mount the blocks with the holes to the far left-hand and far right-hand sides as
viewed from the back or the rotor will not function properly. Do not tighten the
rotor clamp at this time.

Rev. 5.0
Installing the 1096+ Needle and Needle Sleeve
The 1096+ uses a septum-piercing needle with needle sleeve. See Table 6.9 for
information on selecting the correct needle-needle sleeve combination.
Table 6.9. 1096+ Autosampler Needles and Needle Sleeves
Product PN Description Application
septum-piercing 321323 8.345" long, two All sample types, open and
Needle holes, 1/16" O.D. closed-vial applications
stainless steel
Short Needle Sleeve 321322 5.125" long, stainless closed-vial applications
steel
Long Needle Sleeve 321321 7.4" AL-6XN super open-vial applications
(optional) alloy requiring acidification
Open Vial Needle 326778 8.27" long, AL-6XN open-vial application
(optional) super alloy requiring acidification
The following procedure outlines how to install the needle and needle sleeve.
1. Install an O-ring (PN 321368) onto the top of the fitting nut attached to the needle
sleeve.
2. Insert the needle sleeve with O-ring into the bottom port of the needle manifold.
Do not use tools to tighten the fitting.
3. Install an O-ring (PN 321358) onto the needle.
4. With the needle tip pointing down, insert the needle with O-ring into the top port
of the needle manifold, and thread the needle through the needle sleeve.
Installing the 1096+ Sample Transfer and Sleeve Gas Transfer Lines
The following procedure outlines how to install the sample transfer and gas transfer
lines.
1. Attach a 1/8" fitting nut of the sample transfer line (PN 322989) to the top port of
the needle manifold. Do not use tools to tighten the fitting.
2. Connect the 1/16" tubing sleeve gas transfer line (PN 322990) from the front
panel of the Aurora to the side port of the needle manifold.
Setting the Z-axis Travel
Set the z-axis travel of the Z-drive assembly using the following steps:

Rev. 5.0
NOTE: To make fine adjustments to the sample needle x-y targeting, loosen the
nylon screw on the probe guide plate 1/8- to ¼-turn and move the guide
plate up to 0.2 mm from the original location. Be sure to tighten the nylon
screw before operating the autosampler.
1. Adjust the z-axis slider (with attached needle manifold) so the slider is approxi-
mately 3 mm below the top of z-axis drive, as depicted in Figure 6.11 on page 214.
2. Rotate the z-axis rotor, depicted in Figure 6.12 on page 215, clockwise so the rotor
stop pin is against the rotor stop.
3. Finger tighten the rotor clamp.
Ensure the PEEK pull-pull tube fully seats in the rotor clamp groove. Otherwise,
the PEEK tube can slip, resulting in no movement of the z-axis slider.
4. Manually rotate the z-axis rotor back and forth several times and check for full
unhindered movement of the z-axis slider.
5. Verify the correct placement for the home position.
Verify the sample needle clears the top of the wash station when the autosampler is
in the home position above the wash station. The autosampler arm with attached
z-axis drive can be manually moved to the wash station without damaging the
autosampler.
6. Verify the sample transfer line has slack remaining when the needle is at the
maximum downward limit.
Establishing Electrical Connections
At this point, the unit is ready for connection to an electrical power source. The
following procedure outlines how to connect the unit to a power source.
CAUTION: Use only the supplied external desktop power supply or an exact
replacement.
NOTE: Do not apply power to the power supply until ready to operate the
autosampler.
1. Connect the power supply to the autosampler.
The power receptacle is located on the back of the autosampler below the power
switch (see 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Operator’s Manual, Chapter 2, “1096+
Autosampler back view” on page 8).
2. Connect the communications cable (PN 322313) to one of the RS-485 ports on
the back of the autosampler. Connect the other end of the cable to one of the
Aurora RS-485 ports on the back of the analyzer, as depicted in Figure 6.14.

Rev. 5.0
3. Connect the line cord to the power supply.
RS-485 port
Figure 6.14. Aurora Back Panel Electrical and Communications Connection Ports
Connecting the Wash Station
The chassis-mounted wash station is located at the extreme left position in the standard
rack. Reagent water is used as the wash solution, and is pumped into the wash station
by the on-board peristaltic pump. Since the peristaltic pump inlet is at the top of the
pump and the outlet is at the bottom, the wash water flows from the bottom to the top of
the wash station. Up-flow rinsing is the most effective method for decontaminating the
needle between samples. Reversing the connections and the wash water flow reduces
the effectiveness of the wash station and can cause cross-contamination and
unsatisfactory performance. The waste solution drains from the top of the wash station
using a pumped drain, which is the standard arrangement for draining the wash station.
If using a pumped drain is not desired, use a gravity drain arrangement. This section
contains instructions for both the pumped drain and gravity drain arrangements.
Pumped Drain Arrangement
In a pumped drain arrangement, the wash solution moves through the on-board
peristaltic pump to the inlet at the bottom of the wash station. It then drains out the top

Rev. 5.0
of the wash station and into the waste container through the second channel of the
on-board peristaltic pump, as depicted in Figure 6.15.
Wash Station Two-channel Peristaltic Pump
3-mm Tygon® Tubing Channel 1

Rinse
Out In
Flow In
In 3-mm Tygon Tubing Out
Flow
3-mm Tygon Tubing Channel 2
Flow In
Out
3-mm Tygon Tubing
Waste Out
Figure 6.15. Pumped Drain Arrangement
The following procedure outlines how to connect the wash station using the pumped
drain.
1. Connect the wash water source to the on-board peristaltic pump.
Insert the 3-mm I.D. Tygon® tubing onto the inlet at the top of the pump. Use the
tubing provided for the wash uptake.
2. Cut approximately 30 cm (12") of the 3-mm I.D. Tygon tubing provided for the
wash uptake.

Rev. 5.0
3. Carefully insert one end of the tubing onto the outlet on the bottom of the
peristaltic pump.
Applying too much pressure when inserting the tubing can break the fitting. The
peristaltic pump fitting tightly grips the tubing. Use care when installing the tubing
onto the fitting.
4. Carefully insert the other end of the tubing onto the wash tube inlet at the bottom
of the wash station.
wash station fitting tightly grips the tubing. Use care when installing the tubing
onto the fitting.
5. Cut another approximately 30 cm (12") strip of 3-mm I.D. Tygon tubing for the
second channel of the peristaltic pump.
6. Carefully insert one end of the tubing onto the top outlet of the wash station.
onto the fitting.
7. Carefully insert the other end of the tubing onto the pump inlet (top of channel 2).
onto the fitting.
8. Carefully insert one end of up to 1.8 m (71") of 5-mm I.D. Tygon tubing provided
for the pump drain into the outlet for the peristaltic pump.
onto the fitting.
9. Place the other end of the tubing into the waste container.
Ensure the tubing outlet is not immersed in the waste solution. Immersing the drain
tube outlet may cause the waste solution to back up and overflow.
Gravity Drain Arrangement
In a gravity drain arrangement, the rinse solution moves through the peristaltic pump to
the inlet at the bottom of the rinse station. It then drains out the top of the rinse station

Rev. 5.0
by means of a gravity drain, as depicted in Figure 6.16.
Wash Station Two-channel Peristaltic Pump
Out Channel 1
3-mm Tygon Tubing
Rinse
In
In
Flow
3-mm Tygon Tubing Out
Flow
Figure 6.16. Gravity Drain Arrangement
The following procedure outlines how to connect the wash station using a gravity drain.
1. Connect the wash water source to the on-board peristaltic pump.
Insert the 3-mm I.D. Tygon® tubing onto the inlet at the top of the pump. Use the
tubing provided for the wash uptake.
2. Cut approximately 30 cm (12") of the 3-mm I.D. Tygon tubing provided for the
wash uptake.
3. Carefully insert one end of the tubing onto the outlet on the bottom of the
peristaltic pump.
onto the fitting.
4. Carefully insert the other end of the tubing onto the wash tube inlet at the bottom
of the wash station.
onto the fitting.
5. Carefully insert one end of up to 1.8 m (71") of 5-mm I.D. Tygon tubing provided
for the pump drain onto the outlet for the peristaltic pump.

Rev. 5.0
onto the fitting.
Ensure the waste container is at least 30–60 cm (12–24") lower than the rinse
station outlet.
6. Place the other end of the tubing into the waste container.
Ensure the tubing outlet is not immersed in the waste solution. Immersing the drain
tube outlet may cause the waste solution to back up and overflow.
Assembling and Placing Sample Vial Racks
Sample vial racks for the 1096+ Autosampler ship unassembled. No tools are required
for assembly. After assembling the sample vial racks, place them in the sample tray
before proceeding with the installation.
WARNING: Before loading or unloading any sample vial racks on the sample tray,
park the sampling arm and probe in the home position by cycling the
power off and on. The home position is the initial position when the unit
powers on. Never attempt to load, unload, or reposition a sample vial rack
or sample vial while the autosampler is operating.
NOTE: Keep at least one copy of the provided assembly instructions.
NOTE: Correctly placed sample vial racks do not move more than ±2 mm in either
a left-right or forward-backward direction. Tilted sample vials indicate an
improperly placed rack, which must be corrected before operating the
autosampler.
Assemble and position the sample vial racks using the following steps:
1. Snap the racks together as shown in the instructions included with each rack.
2. Arrange the sample racks in the autosampler.
When viewed from the autosampler front, arrange the sample vial racks on the
sample tray in the following order: rack 1 at the extreme left position, rack 2 at the
left center position, rack 3 at the right center position, and rack 4 at the extreme
right position. Figure 6.17 depicts the tray and vial numbering and arrangement for
the 1096+.

Rev. 5.0
Rev. 5.0
•
Wash S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12
surface.
Vial 1 Vial 9 Vial 17 Vial 25 Vial 33 Vial 41 Vial 49 Vial 57 Vial 65 Vial 73 Vial 81 Vial 89
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 6

Figure 6.17. Tray Numbering and Vial Placement for the 1096+ Autosampler
feet on the underside of the rack engage the locating ribs on the sample tray
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
Place the first sample vial rack at the extreme left side of the sample tray so the
224
• Place the next sample vial rack to the right of the previous rack so the feet on
the underside of the rack engage the locating ribs on the sample tray surface.
Ensure the rack is not tilted and is properly placed.
• Place the remaining two racks.
Operating Conditions for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler

To create satisfactory operating conditions in the laboratory environment, follow these
guidelines:
• Operate the 1096+ in a conventional laboratory environment where the temperature

is 10 °C to 35 °C (50 °F to 95 °F), the humidity is 20–70% non-condensing, and the
unit is not exposed to excessive flammable or corrosive materials.
• Avoid rough handling of the 1096+. If possible, do not expose the autosampler to
vibration or shock.
• Protect the autosampler from long-term exposure to condensation, corrosive
materials, solvent vapor, continual standing liquids, or large spills into the
autosampler cabinet or arm. Exposures of this type can damage the drive
mechanisms as well as the electronics.
• Observe the same general electrostatic discharge precautions as with any other
integrated circuit electronic devices. Low humidity environments, especially when
combined with static-generating materials, require maximum care.
• Avoid using the 1096+ if strong electromagnetic interference, radio frequency
interference, or radioactivity is present. Interference fields can cause erratic
operation of the autosampler. The autosampler does not function properly if the
level of radioactivity is above background.
Starting the Autosampler

The following procedure outlines how to start the 1096+ Autosampler.
CAUTION: Incorrectly defining the position count can result in sample spills and
invalid analysis results.
NOTE: Verify the Aurora passes the automatic self-test before starting the 1096+.
1. Arrange the sample vial racks to meet specific needs.
The 1096+ accommodates up to four sample vial racks of 24 positions each. See
“Assembling and Placing Sample Vial Racks” on page 223 and Figure 6.17 on
page 224 in this chapter for more information.
2. Power on the Aurora and 1096+.
3. Verify the autosampler LED power indicator is lit.
The green LED power indicator is located behind the Z-drive assembly when it is in
the home position.

Rev. 5.0
4. Ensure the autosampler is correctly defined and configured in the Aurora

software.
See “Operating the 1096+ with the Aurora” on page 226 in this chapter.
5. Ensure the wash station is properly connected.
See “Connecting the Wash Station” on page 219 for more information.
6. Purge air from the wash system.
Place the wash solution uptake tubing in the wash solution source and run the wash
solution through the wash station. Ensure no air bubbles are visible in the wash
uptake tubing before running samples with the 1096+.
Flushing the Wash Station and Flow Path

Generally, the 1096+ may be operated without flushing the wash system. Under normal
circumstances, simply drain the wash system prior to shutting down the autosampler.
However, flush the wash station and flow path during initial startup of the 1096+ after
installation to remove any contaminants that could cause interference during sample
analysis.
The following procedure outlines how to flush the wash system.
1. Insert the wash uptake tubing into a reagent water source.
2. Run the wash solution through the wash station and flow path for 5–10 minutes.
3. After flushing the wash system, proceed with the sampling sequence or drain the
wash system as part of the shutdown procedure (see “Shutting Down the
Autosampler” on page 230).
Operating the 1096+ with the Aurora

Configuration, operation, and maintenance of the 1096+ occurs using the Aurora
touchscreen. Press Config and Maint on the Aurora to access the configuration
pathways. See Chapter 4, “1096+ XYZ Autosampler Configuration” on page 76.
Configuration Parameters
1. Press Config.
2. Press the General tab to display all configurations installed on the Aurora.
A check mark inside a circle displayed on the icon designates the active
configuration and the word “Active” is displayed in the name for the configuration,

Rev. 5.0
Config Icon
General Tab
Check mark
designates
active device
View/Modify
Make Active
Figure 6.18. General Configuration Screen with XYZ Autosampler Active
3. Select the XYZ configuration.
If a XYZ autosampler configuration does not exist, a new configuration can be

added. (See Chapter 4, “1096+ XYZ Autosampler Configuration” on page 76 for
more information on adding a new configuration.) The following procedure briefly
outlines how to add a new configuration.
• Open the Default configuration.
• Select XYZ Autosampler for the Active Sample Intro Device.
• Add or edit any necessary criteria for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler.
• Press Save As... and enter a new configuration name (i.e., XYZ sampler).
The dialog box is closed and the new configuration is listed on the Configuration
screen.

Rev. 5.0
4. Press View/Modify... at the bottom of the screen to view the current configuration
of the 1096+ Autosampler.
The Basic tab is displayed, as depicted in Figure 6.19.
Verify XYZ
Autosampler
is Selected.
Figure 6.19. Basic Tab 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Configuration Screen
5. Verify XYZ Autosampler is selected in the Active Sample Intro Device pull-
down menu.
6. Save the configuration.
The dialog box is closed with the selected parameters for the configuration.
To exit the dialog box without saving any changes, press Cancel.
7. Press Make Active at the bottom of the screen, depicted in Figure 6.3.
The 1096+ XYZ Autosampler is now configured and ready for use.
Programming Sampling Parameters for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler
Once configured, the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler is ready for programming. The
following procedure outlines how to program the 1096+ using the Aurora.
1. Press Config.

Rev. 5.0
The General tab of the Configuration screen is displayed.
2. Press Sample Intro.
The screen is repopulated, as depicted in Figure 6.20.
Figure 6.20. Sample Intro Screen
3. Press XYZ Autosampler.
The Sample Intro dialog box for the XYZ Autosampler configuration is displayed,
Figure 6.21. Sample Intro Configuration for 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.10 lists and describes the fields and values for each field.
Table 6.10. Sample Intro for 1096+ XYZ Autosampler Dialog Box Settings
Setting Definition
tray is 40 mL x 24 vials x 4 rows.
Standard Tray Type The default tray size is 40 mL x 12 vials.
into the vial. Typical value is 96%. Example: If the
Sample Needle Depth is set to 96%, the needle descends
96% into the vial.
This value can be optimized for the application. For
example, if the sample is particulated and the sample
requires no sediment, reduce the Sample Needle Depth.
OI Analytical recommends a setting of 70% for
particulated samples to prevent large settled particles
from clogging the needle.
vial.
Wash Needle Depth (%) Determines the depth, in percent, of the wash needle.
The depth should be slightly lower than the Sample
Needle Depth to ensure the needle surface is rinsed after
each sample. However, the needle should not hit the
bottom of the vial.
Wash Needle at Start of Determines if needle is washed before each sample and,
Sample if so, for how long. Time is in minutes and seconds.
Wash Needle at End of Determines if needle is washed after active sequence is
Sequence completed and, if so, for how long. Time is in minutes
and seconds.
Shutting Down the Autosampler

Shut down the autosampler using the following steps:
1. Drain the wash system.
Remove the wash solution uptake tubing from the wash solution source. Let the
peristaltic pump run until all solution drains from the tube attached to the wash
station outlet.

Rev. 5.0
If the rinse solution is other than reagent water, flush the rinse system with reagent
water before shutting down the 1096+. For more information, see “Flushing the
Wash Station and Flow Path” on page 226.
2. Release the pressure shoe on the peristaltic pump.
3. Power off the 1096+ power switch.
Maintenance for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler

Routine maintenance of the 1096+ Autosampler consists of daily and weekly cleaning
of specific components. Routine maintenance also includes checking 1096+
components for leaks or other damage. Additional periodic maintenance tasks may be
required, including replacing the peristaltic pump tubing, needle, needle sleeve, wash
station tubing, and sample tray.
Maintenance Dialog Box for 1096+ Autosampler
The Maintenance dialog box directly controls 1096+ key functions for testing and
diagnostic purposes. This dialog box allows for initializing the unit, controlling the
wash pump, and moving the arm and needle.
The following procedure outlines how to maintain the 1096+ Autosampler from the
1030C Aurora.
1. Press Maint.

Rev. 5.0
The screen is repopulated with the maintenance screen, as depicted in Figure 6.22.
Figure 6.22. Aurora 1030C Maintenance Screen
2. Press XYZ Autosampler.
The XYZ Autosampler Maintenance dialog box is displayed, as depicted in

Figure 6.23.
Figure 6.23. XYZ Autosampler Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.11 explains the settings and functions on the XYZ Autosampler dialog box.
Table 6.11. XYZ Autosampler Maintenance Dialog Box Functions and Settings
Field Description
Firmware Displays the current firmware version.

Initialize Cycles the autosampler through its startup procedure.
Move to Wash Vial Sends the needle to the wash vial position.
Wash Pump On Turns on the wash pump.
Wash Pump Off Turns off the wash pump.
Move to Sample Vial Sends the needle to the designated sample vial position.
Move to Std Vial Sends the needle to the designated standard vial position.
Move to Needle Lowers the needle to the designated depth, in percent of
Depth total depth.
3. Press Close to exit the dialog box.
Cleaning the Autosampler
Clean the 1096+ both daily and weekly to prevent damage and extend its life. Clean up
and chemically neutralize spills and remove contaminants, such as abrasives, from
moving parts.
Daily External Cleaning
Use of the 1096+ often results in spills on autosampler components such as the sample
tray. Good maintenance requires cleaning the autosampler daily using the following
steps:
CAUTION: Do not allow the cleaning agent to come into contact with the lead screws.
Also, never lubricate either of the two lead screws.
NOTE: The 1096+ must be thoroughly dry before turning the power on.
1. Shut down and unplug the autosampler.
2. Wipe the sample tray, autosampler chassis, and autosampler arm using a towel
dampened with a laboratory-grade cleaning agent.
3. Repeat Step 2 using a towel dampened with reagent water to remove any
remaining contaminants.
4. Dry the sample tray, autosampler chassis, and autosampler arm using a clean,
dry towel.

Rev. 5.0
Weekly Cleaning
Although daily cleaning removes spills and contaminants from most of the autosampler
components, thoroughly clean the 1096+ once a week using the following steps:
CAUTION: Never lubricate the lead screws. The lead screw nuts are compounded with
a dry film lubricant. Oiling the lead screws causes gumming, galling, and
binding of the needle assembly.
NOTE: Pay special attention to the slider block and guide rails along the tube of
the autosampler arm.
1. Power down and unplug the autosampler.
2. Remove the sample tray.
See “Replacing the Sample Tray” on page 238.
3. Wipe loose particles off the y-axis lead screw with a dry, lint-free cloth.
The y-axis lead screw is a large metal screw located inside the autosampler arm
tubing (see Figure 6.11, “1096+ Z-drive Assembly,” on page 214).
4. Wipe the autosampler exterior and base using a towel dampened with a
laboratory-grade cleaning agent, followed by a towel dampened with reagent
water.
5. Wash the sample tray in a warm detergent solution, making sure all spills and
stains are removed.
6. Rinse the sample tray with water and then dry it.
7. Replace the sample tray on the autosampler base
See “Replacing the Sample Tray” on page 238.
Cleaning the Wash Bottle
Clean the wash bottle by rinsing thoroughly with reagent water.
Checking for Leaks
Several of the autosampler components have a limited life and wear out under normal
use including the sample probe, peristaltic pump tubing, wash station, and wash station
tubing. For more information on replacing parts, see “Replacing 1096+ Autosampler
Components” on page 235. Periodically check these components for leaks using the
following steps:

Rev. 5.0
2. Visually inspect the sample probe, peristaltic pump tubing, wash station, and
wash station tubing for leaks or signs of deterioration.
3. If a leak or other damage is detected, replace the component.
Replacing 1096+ Autosampler Components

Several 1096+ components wear out under normal use and must be replaced
periodically. Refer to Figure 6.24 for each of the following subsections.
CAUTION: Failure to replace components when they deteriorate may result in result
errors and/or cause the autosampler to malfunction.
Sample Transfer
Line
Z-axis Drive
Cable Sheath
Needle and Needle

Sheath
Needle Manifold
Z-axis Slider
Thumbscrews with
Bushings
Y-axis Slider
Block
Home Position Flag Y-axis Lead Screw

Nut
Guide Plate
Slider Block
Guide Rail
Figure 6.24. 1096+ Z-drive Assembly with Z-axis Slider

Rev. 5.0
Replacing Peristaltic Pump Tubing
The tubing for the peristaltic pump should be replaced as needed. The following
procedure outlines how to replace the tubing.
CAUTION: Replace the new tubing carefully. Applying too much force may damage
the pump or tubing.
2. Release the pressure shoe.
3. Remove the old tubing by carefully pulling or cutting it off.
4. Push the new tubing onto the mounting block fittings.
5. Reconnect the pressure shoe.
Replacing the Sample Transfer Line
The sample transfer line (PN 322989) should only be replaced if it becomes damaged or
contaminated. The following procedure outlines how to replace this tubing.
NOTE: To prevent damaging the tubing and the equipment, do not overtighten the
fittings. Use tools only if necessary to remove the fittings.
1. Loosen and remove the 1/8" fitting nut from the top of the needle manifold.
2. Loosen and remove the 1/8" fitting nut on the other end of the sample transfer
line, which connects to the Aurora front panel.
3. Install one end of the new sample transfer line on the needle manifold.
4. Install the other end of the new sample transfer line to the Aurora’s front panel.
Replacing the Needle
Replace the needle (PN 321323 or 326778) if it becomes clogged, damaged, or too dull
(septum-piercing) to perform analysis. The following procedure outlines how to replace
the needle.
2. Remove the needle and needle O-ring by sliding them through the top of the
needle manifold.
3. Slide the replacement needle and needle O-ring through the top of the needle
manifold.

Rev. 5.0
Replacing the Needle Sleeve
Convert from closed-vial (septum-piercing) to open-vial sampling or vice versa by

changing the needle and needle sleeve. For closed-vial, septum-piercing applications,
use the septum piercing needle (PN 321323) and the short needle sleeve (PN 321322).
For open-vial applications, use the open vial needle (PN 326778) and the long needle
sleeve (PN 321321). Also, replace the needle sleeve if it becomes clogged or damaged.
NOTE: Do not overtighten the tube nut, or the needle sleeve may collapse around
the needle.
NOTE: Failure to include the O-ring may result in errors, poor sample transfer,
and an inability to reproduce test results.
2. Loosen and remove the needle sleeve and O-ring from the needle manifold.
The needle sleeve has an integral 5/16-28” stainless steel nut attached to the top of
the sleeve. On the top of this nut is an O-ring. Ensure this O-ring is still mounted on
the needle sleeve.
3. Slide the needle sleeve approximately halfway down along the shaft of the needle.
4. Remove the needle and O-ring from the top of the manifold.
5. Remove the old needle sleeve.
6. Attach the new needle sleeve and O-ring onto the bottom of the needle manifold.
Ensure the O-ring is mounted onto the needle sleeve. If the O-ring is not there,
carefully remove the O-ring from the old needle sleeve and mount onto the new
needle sleeve.
8. Use a wrench to tighten ¼-turn beyond finger tight.
9. Replace the needle through the top of the needle manifold.
Ensure the O-ring is in place.
Replacing the Wash Station Tubing
NOTE: Move the autosampler arm over to prevent damage to the sample probe
while replacing the wash station tubing.

Rev. 5.0
NOTE: Apply only a linear force when removing the tubing to prevent the fittings
from breaking.
The following procedure outlines how to replace the wash station tubing.
2. Move the autosampler arm 20–30 cm away from the home position by gently
pushing it.
3. Disconnect the wash solution uptake and drain tubing.
4. Remove the wash station tube using the following steps:
• Rotate the wash station tube counterclockwise ¼ turn.
• Lift the tubing straight up to remove it from the mounting block.
5. Replace the wash station tubing by pushing the new wash station tube into the
mounting block and rotating it clockwise ¼ turn.
6. Reconnect the wash solution uptake and drain tubing.
7. Move the autosampler arm back to the home position.
Replacing the Sample Tray
Cleaning the 1096+ sample tray each week extends its life and makes frequent
replacement unnecessary. However, if the sample tray needs to be replaced, the
following procedure outlines how to do so.
NOTE: Move the autosampler arm over to prevent damage to the sample probe
while replacing the sample tray.
NOTE: If the sample tray is difficult to remove, raise the front edge higher before
sliding it forward.
2. Remove all sample vial racks.
3. Move the autosampler arm 20–30 cm away from the home position by gently
pushing it.
4. Raise the wash station tube approximately 2 cm.
5. Raise the front edge of the damaged tray at least 2.5 cm and slide it forward.
6. Install the new tray.

Rev. 5.0
7. Lower the wash station tube.
Ensure the wash station tube is positioned securely.
8. Move the autosampler arm back to the home position.
9. Replace the sample vial racks.
Cleaning the Sample Needle
Depending on the size and consistency of particulates, it may be necessary to make sure
the septum piercing needle (PN 321323) is free from potential clogging. Particulates
can settle just inside the sampling opening at the bottom of the needle assembly. Follow
page 236, Replacing the Needle to properly remove the needle. Sonicate as needed and
inspect the needle for defects as required.

Rev. 5.0
Electronic Flow Control Module

The Electronic Flow Control (EFC), depicted in Figure 6.25, module allows for
electronically controlling the flow of gases throughout the method sequence. This
option is mainly used to automatically add a precise amount of dilution gas to the purge
gas flow to permit expansion of the reportable upper concentration range
(approximately 10-fold) without the need for method modifications. This option can
also be used to minimize variability between parallel reaction chambers, for divergent
sample ranges (for example, high TIC/low TOC samples).
Figure 6.25. Optional Electronic Flow Control Module
The following procedure outlines how to install the EFC.
1. Power off the Aurora and remove the power plug from the machine.
2. Turn off the gas supply.
3. Remove the left bay cover.
4. Locate and remove the EFC blank module and tubing connections.
5. Install the EFC module.
6. Remove the black fitting and ferrule from the tubing.

Rev. 5.0
These were previously in port D of the EFC blank, as depicted in Figure 6.26.
EFC BLANK EPC MODULE
E
IN
D P
PSW
IR
IR Vent
Figure 6.26. 1030C EPC Plumbing without an EFC Installed
7. Trim the tubing end and install the new beige fitting and ferrule.
The beige fitting is PN 323600 and the ferrule is PN 317545. The existing black
fitting and ferrule are too large to fit in the available space.
8. Install the tubing with the new beige fitting and ferrule into port DET on the
EFC Module.
9. Connect the tubing with the existing beige fitting and ferrule to port 1 of the
EFC Module.
This tubing connected the EFC blank to the EPC Module.
10. Remove the end of this tubing from the EPC Module.
The EPC Module end of this tubing is connected to port E.
11. Trim the fitting and ferrule from the end of the tubing.
12. Install the end of the tubing into side A of the splitter (PN 319861).
At this point, there should be a line running from side A of the splitter to port 1 of
the EFC Module.
13. Install a fitting plug (PN A000267) into port E on the EPC Module.
14. Install the clear fitting into port IN on the EFC Module.
This fitting was previously in port P of the EFC blank and connects the EFC to the
permeation tube outlet.

Rev. 5.0
15. Cut the existing gas supply line to Port IN on the EPC Module about 5" from the
module.
16. Connect the EPC Module tubing to the splitter.
This tubing installs into side B of the splitter.
17. Connect the gas supply inlet end of the newly cut tubing into side C of the
splitter.
This allows for gas flow to both the EFC Module and the EPC Module.
When completed, these connections should be as depicted in Figure 6.27.
EFC EPC MODULE

DET
REM0VE
1 IN E
FITTING PLUG
IN
PSW
FROM PERM
TUBE OUT-SAME
A B
319861
(SPLITTER)
C
SUPPLY GAS INLET
IR
IR Vent
Figure 6.27. 1030C EFC and EPC Modules Connection Diagram
18. Connect the EFC cable.
Connect the EFC cable (PN 322196) to the EFC module. Connect the opposite
end to the J9 on the TC I/O board.
19. Turn on the gas supply.
20. Plug in the power cord and power on the Aurora.
21. Calibrate the EFC module per the on-screen instructions on the Maintenance
screen.

Rev. 5.0

The External Expansion I/O Module supports expanded input and output capability for
the 1030C data acquisition using 4-20 mA output analog signals, four additional output
signals and four additional relays for independent programmable alarms. The External
Expansion I/O Module also supports input to Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
(SCADA) system software used in many on-line or process applications.
Interfacing an Aurora to a SCADA system allows for facilities to adjust chemical usage
and optimize water treatment processes.
General Information for the External Expansion I/O Module

The External Expansion I/O Module, depicted in Figure 6.28, can be mounted onto the
Aurora 1030C, via a mounting bracket, or set near the Aurora.
Figure 6.28. External Expansion I/O Module with Mounting Bracket
The External Expansion I/O Module can be attached to the Aurora or can sit near the
unit. The module ships with the bracket installed. The following procedure outlines
how to install an External Expansion I/O Module attached to an Aurora.
1. Power off the Aurora and remove the power cord.
2. Remove the two mounting screws in the right bay cover of the Aurora.
These screws are unnecessary for the installation.
3. Place the External Expansion I/O Module with the attached mounting bracket
into place on the right bay cover.
4. Align the captive screws in the mounting bracket and tighten them through the bay
cover and into the Aurora chassis.

Rev. 5.0
5. Connect the Aurora to the External Expansion I/O Module using the external
connectors provided in the module kit.
6. Connect the power cord for the External Expansion I/O Module.
7. Connect the power cord for the Aurora and power on the unit.

Rev. 5.0
At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer Module

This module works in conjunction with the External Expansion I/O Module and
requires that module for use. The External Expansion I/O Module can be used for other
purposes, as well. However, it controls the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer
Module and is, therefore, required to operate that module. Figure 6.29 depicts the
At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer Module.
Figure 6.29. At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer Module
Items Required for Installation

The following items are required for installation of the At-Line Autosampler/Stream
Sequencer and External Expansion I/O Module.
• #2 Phillips screwdriver
Installing the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer and External

Expansion I/O Module
The following procedure outlines how to install the unit on an Aurora.
1. Unpack and inspect the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer and External

Expansion I/O Module.
Keep the packing materials until confirming the units function normally. Compare
the contents to the packing labels to ensure all items are present.

Rev. 5.0
2. Remove two screws from the right side of the Aurora 1030, as depicted in
Figure 6.30.
Remove
These
Screws
Figure 6.30. Right Side of Aurora 1030
3. Place the External Expansion I/O Module on top of the Aurora, aligning the
captive screws with the holes in the Aurora.
4. Attach the module using the captive screws on the module bracket.
5. Place the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer on top of the expansion

module.

Rev. 5.0
6. Connect the grey cable (PN 321176) to the Ext Valves port on the rear of the
External Expansion I/O Module, depicted in Figure 6.31.
RS485 Port
Power
Port
Ext Valves
Port
Figure 6.31. External Expansion I/O Module, Rear View
7. Connect the other end of the grey cable to the port on the rear of the At-Line
Autosampler/Stream Sequencer.
8. Connect the RS485 cable to one of the RS485 ports on the rear of the External
Expansion I/O Module.

Rev. 5.0
9. Connect the other end of the RS485 cable to one of the RS485 ports on the rear of
the Aurora 1030, depicted in Figure 6.32.
RS485
Ports
I2C
Port
Figure 6.32. Rear Panel of Aurora 1030
10. Connect the power cable (PN 320519) to the Power port on the rear of the
External Expansion I/O Module.
11. Connect the External Expansion I/O Module to the power source.
If the module shipped with a power cable and transformer, connect the cable to the
transformer and plug the transformer into the appropriate voltage wall outlet.
If the module shipped with an I2C cable, connect it to the I2C port on the rear of the
Aurora 1030, depicted in Figure 6.32.

Rev. 5.0
12. Connect a sample line to the 1030 port on the front of the At-Line Autosampler/
Stream Sequencer, depicted in Figure 6.33.
1030 Port
Figure 6.33. At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer, Front View
13. Connect the other end of the sample line to Port F of the syringe valve on the
Aurora 1030, depicted in Figure 6.34.
Figure 6.34. Aurora 1030 Syringe Valve, Port F

Rev. 5.0
Configuring the Aurora for the At-Line Autosampler/Stream

Sequencer and External Expansion I/O Module
Once installed and connected, the Aurora is configured to use the At-Line Autosampler/
Stream Sequencer and the External Expansion I/O Module. The following procedure
outlines how to configure the Aurora to use these modules.
1. Press Config and select the General tab.
2. Select At-Line.
3. The Configuration dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 6.35.
Figure 6.35. At-Line Autosampler Configuration Dialog Box
4. If desired, set the Analog Signal Outputs.
The External Expansion I/O Module is equipped with four user-defined 20 mA

analog outputs, one for each stream. When used, the module updates the analog
signal upon completion of each sample. During analysis, the output is held at the
last measured value for the stream. Values are set for the Range (Min) and Range
(Max) for each stream selected.
For example, the range is defined as 5 ppm to 165 ppm. The output when the
sample is measured at 85 ppm is set at 12 mA. The actual output range is 20 mA -

Rev. 5.0
4 mA = 16 mA. The measured scale is 160 ppm, or 165 ppm - 5 ppm, or

0.10 mA/ppm.
5. If desired, set the Expansion Output Relays.
The expansion module is equipped with four discrete relays (SPDT), one for each
stream. These relays are user-programmable as a Level Alarm, which can be set as
an ascending or descending alarm at a particular value. Also, the device may be
programmed to perform different actions including Abort, Prompt, or Continue
on Alarm.
6. Define the Reset Expansion Alarms After reset option.
The resetting of the alarms on the expansion module can be defined in one of four
ways: User Acknowledgement Only, End of Current Replication, End of
Current Sample, or End of Sequence.
7. Press Save to save any changes to the current named configuration, Save As to
save the configuration under a different name, or Cancel to exit without saving any
changes.
The configuration dialog box is closed.
8. Select the Sample Intro tab.
9. Select At-Line Autosampler.
The At-Line Autosampler Sample Intro Configuration dialog box is displayed, as

Figure 6.36. At-Line Sample Intro Configuration Dialog Box
10. Set the Delay Prior to Sampling (mm:sec) value.
The Delay Prior to Sampling value ensures the freshest sample possible. For use in
flow-through with cup setups, this value is set to a certain length to allow for the
sample to completely pass through the system.
11. Set the Sample Inlet Volume (mL) value.
This value should be set slightly higher than the actual volume to ensure the sample
completely clears the sample line and the isolation loop to reduce the amount of

Rev. 5.0
carryover from one sample to the next. For example, a 10 mL syringe with a 14 mL
isolation loop would need a value of 10–14 mL to ensure best sampling results.
12. Press OK.
The At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer and External Expansion I/O Module

are ready for use.
Sampling from the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer

Once connected and configured, the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer is ready
for connection of sampling lines. Possible sample lines include Rinse, S1–S3, and
QC1–QC4.
CAUTION. Sample lines to the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer can not be

greater than 3 psig. If necessary, install a pressure regulator to ensure the
lines do not exceed this pressure. If not limited to 3 psig, the valves inside
the autosampler may be damaged, resulting in failure of the autosampler.
CAUTION. Sample lines should not exceed 3 feet in length. Sample lines longer than
3 feet may result in inaccurate fluid sampling.
There are four options for setup of the autosampler, as detailed in Table 6.12.
Table 6.12. At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer Sample Line Options
Option Description
Flow-Through Sample lines are connected to the upper row of ports of the At-Line
Autosampler/Stream Sequencer interface and exit lines are connected to the
lower ports. Sample continuously flows through until a signal from the Aurora
1030 opens the valve. Sample is then drawn through the autosampler and sent
to the Aurora through the 1030 port. When the appropriate amount of sample is
collected, the valve is closed and the sample continues flowing past the valve.
Flow-Through with Sample lines are connected to the lower ports on the At-Line Autosampler/
Cup Stream Sequencer interface and lines directed to a continuous-flow reservoir
cup are connected to the upper ports of the interface. Sample continuously
flows through the lines and into the cup, where it spills over the sides of the
inner cup to drain out of the outer cup. This provides a constantly freshened
sample source. The Aurora sends a signal to shut off the valve, the appropriate
amount of sample is drawn back through the sample line connected to the upper
port, and the Aurora sends another signal to close the valve. This exception
allows for sample pressure to be 30 psig.
Deadheading Sample The lower ports of the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer interface is
Line blocked with plugs (PN A000267). The sample lines connect to the ports in the
upper row of the interface. The Aurora sends a signal to open the valve, the
appropriate amount of sample is pulled in, and the valve is closed by another
signal from the Aurora.

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.12. At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer Sample Line Options (Continued)
Option Description
Flow-By The lower ports of the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer interface are
blocked with a plug (PN A000267). A tee fitting is connected to the upper ports
of the interface. The sample line is connected to one end of the tee fitting and
the waste (or return to source) line is connected to the other end. The Aurora
sends a signal to open the valve, the appropriate amount of sample is drawn in,
and another signal is sent to close the valve.
This setup allows for the instrument to be placed farther away from the sample
source but still have a short pulling distance. Ideally, the sample line is
connected to a counter flow, such as a source line with an elbow. This
eliminates the possibility of particulate matter entering the sample line, which
could interfere with analysis or block sample lines and damage the instrument.

Rev. 5.0
Serial Inkjet Printer

OI Analytical provides an optional serial inkjet printer (PN 322722), depicted in
Figure 6.37, for quick and easy viewing of sample data. However, any Windows-
compatible serial printer can be connected to the Aurora. This section provides an
introduction and basic information for the printer. For information on troubleshooting,
repair procedures, and other topics, see the owner’s manual that is supplied with the
printer.
Figure 6.37. Optional Serial Inkjet Printer
General Information for the Serial Inkjet Printer

The serial inkjet printer is a mini printer used to print the results of sequences at the
work site.
General Specifications for the Serial Inkjet Printer
Table 6.13 lists the general specifications for the serial inkjet printer.
Table 6.13. General Specifications for Serial Inkjet Printer
Dimensions 17.2 cm (6.77 in) W x 22.6 cm (8.9 in) D x 15.2

cm (5.98 in)
Weight 2.7 kg (5.95 lbs)

Rev. 5.0
Environmental Conditions for the Serial Inkjet Printer
Table 6.14 lists the environment conditions for the Samsung SRP-500.
Table 6.14. Environmental Conditions
Temperature Operating 10 °C to 40 °C (50 °F to 104 °F)

Storage -10 °C to 60 °C (14 °F to 140 °F)
Relative Humidity Operating 10–90% non-condensing
Storage 10–90% non-condensing
Requirements for the Serial Inkjet Printer
Table 6.15 lists the power requirements for the serial inkjet printer.
Table 6.15. Power Requirements for the Serial Inkjet Printer
Power 24 VDC ±10%, 0.5 A

Power Consumption Standby: 0.3 A; Operation: 0.5 A
average, 1.5 A peak
Installing the Serial Inkjet Printer

The following procedure outlines how to install the printer.
1. Remove the printer from the packaging.
2. Set up the printer.
Follow the instructions in the printer manual to install the paper, paper guide, and
cable.
3. Connect the printer interface cable into the connector labeled “COM 2” on the
rear panel of the Aurora.
4. Plug the printer power cord into an appropriate power outlet.
The printer is ready for use with the Aurora.

Rev. 5.0
Total Bound Nitrogen (TNb) Module
The total bound nitrogen (TNb) module option for the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer
(Aurora) adds the capability of measuring total nitrogen concentration in water
samples. Total nitrogen can be measured simultaneously during NPOC and TC
analysis, or as separate function when operated in the TNb analysis mode.
Determining the amount of pollutants in water samples often involves measuring TNb
present in those solutions. TNb consists of dissolved ammonia, nitrates, nitrites, amines,
and many other substances. TNb can often provide an indicator of the pollution level in
a body of water. This application is often used for wastewater analysis such as sewage
and livestock runoff. TNb concentrations can range from the part-per-billion (ppb) level
for relatively clean water to several hundred parts-per-million (ppm) for raw sewage.
Various analysis methods have been developed to take this measurement. Recently, an
electrochemical method of detection has been introduced that can be used to measure
dissolved nitrogen when used in conjunction with a combustion analyzer. In this
combustion reaction, nitrogen that is bound in chemical compounds is converted into
NOx compounds such as nitrogen trioxide (NO3), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), and nitric
oxide (NO). This combustion reaction is generally performed at temperatures over
700 °C. This is due to the need for the combustion reaction to proceed as a smooth
ignition rather than as an explosive reaction, which can occur below this temperature.
This method is ideal for implementing on a total organic carbon (TOC) combustion
analyzer, due to use of a suitable combustion reactor. It provides the capability of
measuring both nitrogen and carbon content in samples to provide two analysis
techniques in one measurement.
Operating Principle of the TNb Module

The TNb module measures nitrogen compounds by electrochemically detecting nitric
oxide. This gas dissolves in water within the electrochemical cell in the following
reaction:
NO + 2H2O  HNO3 + 3H+ + 3e–
This reaction occurs at the sensing electrode. Nitric acid then exhibits the following
equilibrium reaction:
4HNO3  4NO2 + O2 + 2H2O
At the counter electrode, the oxygen reacts as follows:
O2 + 4H+ + 4 e–  2H2O
The presence of NO in the sample stream is measured as a potential difference between

the sensing electrode and counter electrode.

Rev. 5.0
A constant supply of moist air must be provided for the detector to function properly.
This moisture aids in maintaining the stability of the electrochemical cell’s electrolyte.
Also, moisture is required for the detection mechanism. Given that dry gases are
employed in most TOC designs, a separate supply of humidified gas must be provided.
This requirement is handled by the humidifier on the TNb module.
Features of the TNb Module

• Direct measurement of TNb concentration in samples
• Analysis performed independently, or simultaneously with NPOC and TC
measurements
• Easily installed on the Aurora chassis, requiring no additional laboratory bench
space
• Very sensitive technique for the measuring bound nitrogen that works in
conjunction with the TOC measurement
• On-board filter for the removal of SO2 interference from the sample
• Low cost relative to other popular measurement techniques
• Low maintenance; simply replace the NOx converter catalyst yearly
• Three-year life for the electrochemical cell
Specifications for the TNb Module

lists the specifications for the TNb Module, including power requirements, accuracy,
and range.
Table 6.16. General Specifications for TNb Module
Range 100 ppb–1,000 ppm

Accuracy >2% value or 1% of scale
Repeatability 3% RSD or ±25 ppb, whichever is greater
Power Supply Requirements 9 V battery, when not connected to the analyzer
Performance of the TNb Module

Performance characteristics of the TNb Module are measured by range, linearity, and
repeatability, each of which are described in detail in the following sections.
Range
The TNb module’s range for the detector alone is 0 to 5,000 ppm for NO gas. However,
this range is limited for the TNb application used with the Aurora. Due to constraints in
the catalyst and limits to conversion efficiencies inherent in the nitrogen combustion

Rev. 5.0
technique, much lower concentrations of actual sample may be analyzed. Typically, the
TNb module operates from 100 ppb to over 1,000 ppm with a suitable choice of
injection volumes. Use dilutions to analyze samples with much higher concentrations,
which extends the range of the detector indefinitely upward. This dilution can be
automatically accomplished when using OI Analytical autosamplers. Otherwise,
dilutions must be part of standard sample handling procedures.
Linearity
The detector is inherently linear in its response to NO gas. However, nitrogen

compounds are particularly prone to low combustion efficiencies, which result in losses
in linearity at higher concentrations. Also, incomplete conversion of NOx compounds to
NO can result in poor linearity performance. See “Operating Notes for the TNb
Module” on page 273 in this chapter for suggested operating conditions that enhance
linearity, and for proper injection volumes that result in a more linear result for the
samples of interest. This detector has a very wide range of detection, so care must be
taken to obtain linear results for various concentration ranges.
Repeatability
Due to the nature of TOC measurement, specifically stating the repeatability of the
instrument in meaningful terms is difficult. Given the flexibility of the Aurora, the user
has great latitude in selecting instrument parameters that yield very different values for
repeatability as measured by RSD. Using very high injection volumes for low
concentration samples can produce very good RSDs, while the same injection volume
results in very poor performance for high concentration samples. When dealing with the
different ranges of the instrument, the choice of appropriate injection volumes and other
run parameters is especially important to obtain the best results. “Operating Notes for
the TNb Module” on page 273 in this chapter guides the user through this process. The
instrument can generally provide better than 3% RSD on most sample concentrations in
the mass ranges described later. These values may increase slightly for very low
concentration samples, such as those below one ppm. For these, conservatively expect
the repeatability to be ±25 ppb for such samples.
Note that this combustion reaction may not produce 100% recovery of every type of
nitrogen-containing compound analyzed. Information on this can be found in the
European ISO/TR 11905-2 technical report to which the OI Analytical TNb module has
been tested.
TNb Module Components

Table 6.17 lists the components of the TNb Module. See “TNb Replacement Parts” on
page 291 for a list of replacement parts for the TNb.
NOTE: When storing a TNb module, the 9 V battery (PN PS-0005) must be
connected. Maintain a good battery and replace with a new battery every
six months. OI Analytical recommends leaving a battery installed in the
module even when connected to power. This helps maintain the detector

Rev. 5.0
polarization if the analyzer is unplugged for any reason. Otherwise, the

detector can lose sensitivity for a very long time until it re-polarizes.
Table 6.17. TNb Module Components
Chassis Mounting Supports the detector inside the Aurora.

Bracket
Control Board Electronic component of the TNb Module.
Detector Module Measures the total nitrogen in the sample.
Humidifier Cap Cap for the water vial with inlet and outlet
ports for the carrier gas.
Humidifier Vial Standard 40 mL vial.
Teflon Tubing 1/8" O.D. tubing for water and air lines.
Connected to the humidifier bottle, dryer,
NDIR, vent, and TNb detector.
9V Battery Provides power to the module when the
Aurora is powered down. Maintains
detector polarization of the TNb Module.
Installing the TNb Module

The following sections outline the installation process for the TNb Module. After
unpacking the unit, the mounting bracket must be installed. Then, the TNb Module and
the NOx Converter are ready for installation in the Aurora.
Unpacking the Module Kit
Inspect external packaging upon receipt for holes, tears, smashed corners, or any other
outward signs of damage from rough handling or abuse during shipment. Inspect all
items during unpacking and notify the carrier immediately of any damage. If the TNb
module was shipped or removed from storage during cold weather, allow four to eight
hours for the packaged equipment to attain room temperature before opening and
exposing to warm, humid air.
After opening the package, remove the TNb module and inspect for completeness. The
module consists of the control board and detector attached to the mounting bracket.
Component lists are included in the kit.
The TNb module consists of the control board and detector mounted on an “L”-shaped
bracket. The control board orientation is vertical and the detector is horizontal, as

Rev. 5.0
depicted in Figure 6.38 and Figure 6.39.

Detector Module
Chassis Mounting
Bracket
9 V Battery
Side Inlet Port Control Board

from Humidifier
Power Cable
Communications Ports
Bottom Ports
Figure 6.38. TNb Module’s Installed Orientation
Chassis Mounting Bracket

Outlet Port to Vent
Side Inlet Port from
the Humidifier Sample Inlet Port from
the NOx Converter
9 V Battery
Power Cable
Control Board
Communications Ports
(RS-485 Ports)
Figure 6.39. TNb Module Port Access View

Rev. 5.0
Installing the Mounting Bracket
The following procedure outlines the installation process for the TNb module’s
mounting bracket.
1. Connect the Teflon tubing.
The Teflon tubing (1/8" O.D. x 1/16" I.D. x 8" long, PN 319607) is connected via
the supplied ferrules (Tefzel®, 1/8", flangeless, PN 317545) and fittings (Tefzel, ¼-
28 x
1/8", PN 322311) to the sample inlet port.
2. Install the mounting bracket.
The mounting bracket is installed with the control board and detector attached onto
the four mounting standoffs located on the inside back wall of the Aurora chassis.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the center captured screw into the mounting
stud located on the back of the instrument.
Installing the TNb Module and NOx Converter
Once the TNb module’s mounting bracket is installed, the TNb module and the NOx
converter can be installed. The following procedure outlines the process for installing
these components.
NOTE: A constant supply of moist air must be provided for the detector to
function properly. This moisture aids in maintaining the stability of the
electrochemical cell’s electrolyte. Also, moisture is required for the
detection mechanism. Visually check the humidifier vial to ensure a
proper level of DI water. The vial should be at least one-third full with DI
water.
1. Remove the cover of the TNb option chassis located on the back of the instrument.
2. Connect the heater cartridge and thermocouple to the NOx converter body.
3. Push out the round silver plug from the back of the Aurora chassis.
4. Route the heater cartridge and thermocouple cables through the hole in the
option chassis where the round silver plug was located and into the back of the
instrument.
5. Attach two sections of Teflon tubing (1/8" O.D. x 1/16" I.D. x 15" long) to the NOx
converter fittings.
6. Route the Teflon tubes into the Aurora chassis.
7. Attach the NOx converter to the wall of the TNb option chassis.

Rev. 5.0
Use the two #6 screws provided. Make certain that the two empty holes on the
converter orient upward, as depicted in Figure 6.40.
Cable Routing Hole
NOx Converter
Fitting
Captured Screw
NOx Converter
Heater Cartridge
NOx Converter and Thermocouple
Fitting Attachment Point
TNb Option
Chassis
Figure 6.40. Installing the NOx Converter
8. Install the TNb option chassis to the Aurora.
Insert the chassis onto the three standoffs and pull down.
9. Tighten the captured screw to secure the chassis.
10. Route Teflon tubing between NDIR detector and TNb module.
Disconnect the Teflon tubing from the NDIR detector outlet (lower fitting) and
connect it to the vent outlet from the TNb module, as depicted in Figure 6.39.
11. Connect the NOx converter.
Connect one tube from the NOx converter to the NDIR detector outlet using the
supplied ferrule (PN 317545) and fitting (PN 322311).
Connect the other tube from the NOx converter to the sample inlet port of the
TNb detector using the supplied ferrule (PN 317545) and fitting (PN 322311).
Refer to Figure 6.39.
Connect the NOx heater cable (with white two-pin connector) to the NOx
converter heater output plug on the Aurora Main Control Board (PN 322078),

Rev. 5.0
Connect the thermocouple cable from the NOx converter to the thermocouple
input on the Aurora Main Control Board (PN 322078), depicted in Figure 6.41.
NOx Converter NOx Converter
Heater Output Plug Thermocouple Input
RS-485
Connectors
12 V Power Connectors
Figure 6.41. Aurora Main Control Board
12. Connect the red and black power cable.
Connect one end of the red and black power cable (PN 322339) to the 12 V power
connector of the TNb Module control board, depicted in Figure 6.39, and the
other end of the cable to the 12 V power connector on the Aurora Main Control
Board (PN 322078), depicted in Figure 6.41.
13. Connect the gray COM interface cable.
Connect one end of the cable (PN 321308) to the RS-485 port on the TNb Module,
depicted in Figure 6.39, and the other end to an open RS-485 port on the Aurora
Main Control Board (PN 322078), depicted in Figure 6.41.
14. Install the tee fitting.
This tee fitting connects the TNb Module to the EFC and optional EPC systems.
Connect a piece of clear tubing (provided) to the side arm of the provided tee
fitting (PN 319332) using the supplied ferrule (PN 317545) and fitting
(PN 322311). See Figure 6.42 for a depiction of these connections.

Rev. 5.0
Connect it into the pressure line from the pressure port of the EPC to the EFC blank
(or EPC if installed). See Figure 6.43.
To EFC Blank or EPC Restrictor Union To TNb Humidifier

Inlet
TNb Humidifier
Tee Fitting
From EPC Supply
Figure 6.42. Connecting the TNb Humidifier Tee Fitting
Pressure port
Figure 6.43. Connecting the TNb Module to the Pressure Port on the Pressure Regulator
Manifold
15. Attach the flow restrictor union to the tee fitting.
Connect the long green tube (provided in the kit) to the tee fitting using the
supplied ferrule (PN 317545) and fitting (PN 322311). Route the loose end of the

Rev. 5.0
green tube out to the front of the instrument, as depicted in Figure 6.44.
16. Connect the TNb humidifier port tubing.
This is the long clear tube provided in the kit. Use the supplied ferrule (PN 317545)
and fitting (PN 322311). Route the other end of the tube out to the front of the
instrument, as depicted in Figure 6.44.
Figure 6.44. Routing Teflon Tubing Sections to Connect to the External Humidifier
17. Connect the vial clip to the reagent bottle tray.
Install the vial clip by inserting two 6-32 screws (PN 293951) through the mounting
holes and through the vial clip (PN 263798), as depicted in Figure 6.45. Attach
each screw using a split lock washer (PN 132654).
Vial Clip
Humidifier Vial
Figure 6.45. Attaching the Humidifier Vial and Vial Clip
NOTE: A constant supply of moist air must be provided for the detector to
function properly. This moisture aids in maintaining the stability of the
electrochemical cell’s electrolyte. Also, moisture is required for the

Rev. 5.0
detection mechanism. Visually check the humidifier vial to ensure a

proper level of DI water. The vial should be at least one-third full with DI
water.
18. Assemble the humidifier vial.
• Place a silicone O-ring (PN 280198) inside the humidifier vial cap
(PN 288985). Add DI water to the vial until it is at least one-third full. Screw
the cap with the O-ring onto the 40-mL vial (PN 320930).
• Connect the green tube from the EPC side of the tee fitting to the vial cap using
the green ¼-28 fitting provided in the kit. Note that the ferrule slides back
about 5" to allow the tube to rest near the bottom of the 40-mL vial.
• Connect the clear tube from the TNb humidifier port to the other inlet on the
vial cap using the red ¼-28 fitting provided in the kit. The tube does not
protrude into the vial for this connection.
• Attach the humidifier vial to the vial clip on the reagent carrier.
NOTE: If bubbles are not present, then check the connections to ensure the
humidifier outlet port is not connected to the restrictor union.
19. Reconnect the power cable to the Aurora.
20. Power on the Aurora.
If all is connected properly, bubbles will appear in the humidifier tube.
21. Replace the instrument and TNb option covers.
Configuring the TNb Module

Once installed, the TNb Module is configured through the TNb Module icon on the
Advanced tab of the Configuration screen. The Aurora is set to use the TNb Module by
clicking the Use TNb Module check box on the Basic tab of the Configuration screen.
The following procedure outlines how to configure the TNb Module.
CAUTION: Failure to remove the Drierite dryer tube from the flow path results in loss
of NO on the Drierite, which significantly lowers sensitivity.
1. Remove the Drierite dryer tube (PN 322306) from the Aurora flow path.
a. Loosen and remove the yellow fitting from the top of the dryer tube, as indi-
cated in Figure 6.46.

Rev. 5.0
b. Loosen and remove the yellow fitting from port S, as indicated in Figure 6.46.
Figure 6.46. Removing the Drierite Dryer Tube from the Flow Path
c. Connect port D and port S together, and connect the halide scrubber tube to the
dryer tube as shown in Figure 6.47.
Figure 6.47. Drierite Dryer Tube Removed from the Flow Path
2. Prepare the TNb Module for use by selecting Use TNb Module on the Basic
Configuration screen of the active configuration.
See Chapter 4, “General Configuration Screen” on page 67 for information on

viewing the active configuration.
The TNb analysis mode is enabled in the Method Editor screen.

Rev. 5.0
In Figure 6.48, the active configuration uses the 1088 Rotary Autosampler. However,
the TNb Module can be used with any configuration including the sipper or 1096+ XYZ
Autosampler.
Figure 6.48. Enabling the TNb Module in the Basic Configuration Screen
3. Once enabled in the active configuration, create a method that uses the TNb
module.
Activating and configuring the TNb Module also activates the NOx converter. The
default temperature set point is 200 °C. This setting can be viewed, and changed if
necessary, on the TNb Module dialog box, depicted in Figure 6.49. This dialog box is
enabled by selecting TNb Module on the Advanced Configuration screen.

Rev. 5.0
Method Development for TNb Analysis

Methods for the TNb Module are created in the same manner as any carbon
measurement. However, nitrogen measurements with the TNb Module can be
conducted with carbon measurements as a simultaneous analysis, as depicted in
Figure 6.50. TNb analysis can also be performed as a standalone technique.
Select for
Simultaneous
Carbon and
Nitrogen Analyses
Click to Set TC
Reactor Temperature
Click to View
Calibration
Information
Figure 6.50. Enabling Simultaneous Carbon and Nitrogen Analyses
Press Temps… to view the Temperatures dialog box, as depicted in Figure 6.51, change
the TC/TNb Detect Temp to 720 °C, and press OK.
Figure 6.51. Temperatures Dialog Box
When creating a method for carbon measurement with additional TNb, the Calibration
dialog box displays more than one calibration tab appears, as depicted in Figure 6.52.

Rev. 5.0
Calibration standards must be set up for each analysis technique, such as TOC and TNb.
Additionally, standards must be prepared and run for each technique.
Figure 6.52. Viewing the Carbon and Nitrogen Calibration Information
As depicted in Figure 6.52, a calibration is set up with the method shown in

Figure 6.50. When loading this sequence into the active sequence, the vial sequence
displays for an autosampler run, as depicted in Figure 6.53. Note the calibrations for
TOC and TNb are set apart with carbon and nitrogen standards run separately. However,

Rev. 5.0
when the technique is used to analyze an unknown, both TOC and TNb values are given
for a measurement of a single sample.
Figure 6.53. TOC/TNb Sequence with Calibration Vial Assignment
Monitoring TNb Operation

Pressing the Show Peak Graph icon on the Monitor screen opens the Signal Graph
dialog box depicted in Figure 6.54. This dialog box displays the signal trace from either

Rev. 5.0
the CO2 or TNb detector. To monitor the TNb detector response, select TNb on the
upper right of the dialog box.
Additionally, the TNb detector value can be viewed on the detector signal indicator on
the Status Monitor screen (see Chapter 4, “Detector Signal Indicator” on page 41). The
detector signal indicator provides a real-time readout of the signal level from the
detector currently used, e.g., the CO2 or TNb detector. Pressing the indicator toggles
between the CO2 and TNb detector signals, if both are installed and configured.
From the Sample Monitor screen, choosing Show Peak Graphs… opens the Show
Peak Graphs dialog box, depicted in Figure 6.55, for displaying all peak signal traces
for the current sample. The peaks from any and all analysis modes currently running
can be overlaid by selecting the check boxes arrayed along the bottom of the dialog
box. If a check box for an analysis mode is grayed out, then that analysis mode is not
currently running.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 6.55. TNb Signal Graph
While displaying samples for simultaneous TOC, TIC, or other measurement

techniques, TNb is also included on the Show Peak Graphs dialog box. Activating or
deactivating the check boxes displays or hides the peaks corresponding to the selected
analysis mode.
Operating Notes for the TNb Module

Two things need to be considered while operating the TNb Module: Nitrogen injection
volume and TNb linearity.
Nitrogen Injection Volume Considerations
Table 6.18 provides suggested injection volumes and other guidelines for various
nitrogen concentrations when using the TNb module.
Table 6.18. Nitrogen Injection Guidelines
Suggested EPC
Concentration Nitrogen
Injection Pressure Special Adjustments
(ppm) Mass (µg)
Volume (mL) (psi)
100–1,000 0.025 2.5–25 20–25 Extend peak max detect

time to five minutes or
more. See Chapter 4,
“Peak Detection
Settings” on page 85.
10–300 0.025 0.25–7.5 20–25 —
1–80 0.1 0.1–8 16–20 —
0.1–10 0.8 0.08–8 16 —

Rev. 5.0
Analyze samples from 0.1 to 8 µg of nitrogen by varying injection volumes or dilutions.

This helps ensure that relatively little carryover occurs, due to nitrogen conversion
inefficiencies inherent in this type of analysis, and that linearity is maximized. In
Table 6.18, a 0.025-mL injection volume of a 1,000-ppm nitrogen sample yields a
nitrogen mass of 25 µg in the combustion furnace. Although this amount of nitrogen is
larger than the suggested 8 µg, good measurements can be made at this level. However,
low-level measurements can become more problematic after such a high-level
measurement, and linearities suffer above 8 µg.
Use injection volumes below 1 mL if possible. With higher injection volumes, peak
shape can become an issue and relative standard deviations (RSDs) can deteriorate.
EFC and EPC settings have the usual dilution effect on the nitrogen signal as realized
with TOC measurements. However, they have no effect upon the potential carryover
from high nitrogen mass injections. This behavior correlates entirely with the nitrogen
mass injected, which is tied to the injection volume and sample concentration.
Use very large injection volumes, e.g., 1,800 µL, for cleanups. This also holds for
carbon TOC measurements although nitrogen samples tend to require considerably
more cleanup effort. If measuring low levels of nitrogen, 1 ppm or below, make sure the
combustion system is thoroughly clean before beginning the analysis.
TNb Linearity
During the combustion process in which bound nitrogen converts to NO, some
conversion occurs to NOx compounds such as NO2. The TNb detector cannot detect
gases other than NO. OI Analytical developed the NOx converter to improve detection
efficiencies and linearity. This device reduces any NOx samples to NO, which can then
be detected.
If the linearity starts to decrease after approximately one year of operation, replace the
NOx converter packing catalyst (see “Replacing the NOx Converter Catalyst” on
page 275 in this chapter).
General TNb Module Maintenance

The TNb detector requires little maintenance to ensure peak efficiency. This
maintenance includes:

Rev. 5.0
• Ensuring the 40-mL humidifier vial, depicted in Figure 6.56, on the front of the
instrument is one-third or more full of DI water. Bubbles should be observed
coming up from the submerged Teflon tubing at all times.
Humidifier Vial
Figure 6.56. Humidifier Vial
• Replacing the 9 V battery on the TNb detector regularly. With the power on, the 9 V
battery is not used. However, if the units power goes off for more than a few hours,
the battery should be in place. In the event of an extended power termination for the
analyzer, the battery maintains polarization on the detector, making certain that it is
ready for use once the analyzer power returns.
Replacing the NOx Converter Catalyst

The NOx converter uses a catalyst to convert NOx compounds to NO for detection. This
catalyst is consumed in the process and needs to be regularly replaced to ensure peak
efficiency of the Aurora. The following procedure outlines how to replace the catalyst.
All of the necessary items are included in the catalyst replacement kit (PN 324563) sold
by OI Analytical. See “Poor Linearity” on page 290 for indications of when the catalyst
should be replaced.
WARNING:Do not attempt to access the NOx converter unless allowing the analyzer
to cool for at least 30 minutes.
NOTE: To prevent electrical shock, remove the power cable from the instrument.
1. Power off the Aurora 1030C.
2. Loosen the fastening screw on the NOx Converter cover.
The NOx converter is on the back of the unit, and the screw is located on the top of
the cover, as depicted in Figure 6.57.

Rev. 5.0
Fastening
Screw
Figure 6.57. Cover of NOx Converter
3. Remove the cover to reveal the NOx Converter.
WARNING:Allow the NOx converter to fully cool before touching it.
4. Remove the top and bottom gas fittings on the NOx Converter.
These fittings, depicted in Figure 6.58, require a 7/16" wrench.
CAUTION. Brace the NOx Converter while removing the fittings to prevent flexing
and misaligning the bracket.
Figure 6.58. Top and Bottom Gas Fittings

Rev. 5.0
5. Remove the NPT (Union) fitting from the top of the NOx Converter.
This requires a 7/16" wrench.
6. Remove the two mounting screws.
These are 7/64" Allen-head screws, and are depicted in Figure 6.59.
NOTE: The screw in the bottom right has thermal coating. Handle the screw
carefully to prevent removing this thermal coating.
NOTE: If the thermal coating comes into contact with skin, promptly remove it
with soap and water.
Mounting
Screws
Figure 6.59. Mounting Screws in Place
7. Remove the Phillips-head screw on top of the NOx converter.

Rev. 5.0
This screw, depicted in Figure 6.60, is very small. Take care not to drop or misplace
the screw.
Phillips Head
Screw
Figure 6.60. Top View of Thermocoupler and Heater
8. Gently remove the thermocoupler and heater from position.
NOTE: The thermocoupler and heater are coated with a thermal coating. Handle
these items carefully to prevent removing this thermal coating.
NOTE: If the thermal coating comes into contact with skin, promptly remove it
with soap and water.
9. Remove the quartz wool plug from the top of the block.
Use needle nose pliers or a similar tool to remove the quartz wool, as necessary.
10. Gently tap out the remaining spent catalyst.
11. Remove the quartz wool at the bottom of the block.
Use needle nose pliers or a similar tool to remove the quartz wool, as necessary.
12. Stuff 0.07 g of quartz wool at the bottom, compressing it with the end of a pen.
13. Add 1.4 g of catalyst to the block.
The catalyst should be about level with the bottom of the internal pipe threads.
14. Stuff 0.07 g of quartz wool on top of the catalyst, compressing it with the end of a
pen.

Rev. 5.0
15. Slide the heater and thermocouple back into the top of the block.
Align the tops of the heater and thermocouple with the top edge of the NOx
Converter.
16. Replace the Phillips-head screw securing the heater and thermocouple.
17. Mount the entire block back onto the Aurora.
NOTE: Ensure that the washers are on the screw before mounting.
NOTE: The screw with thermal coating must attach to the bottom right.
18. Remove the used Teflon® tape from the NPT fitting.
19. Wrap the NPT fitting with fresh Teflon tape.
20. Mount the NPT (Union) fitting to the top of the block.
21. Mount the bottom and top fittings to the NOx converter.
These fittings, depicted in Figure 6.61, require a 7/16" wrench.
CAUTION. Brace the NOx Converter while attaching the fittings to prevent flexing
and misaligning the bracket.
Figure 6.61. Top and Bottom Gas Fittings in Place

Rev. 5.0
22. Replace the cover, as depicted in Figure 6.62.
Fastening
Screw
Figure 6.62. Cover of NOx Converter
23. Tighten the fastening screw on the NOx Converter cover.
The unit is ready to be restarted.

Rev. 5.0
Aurora Flow Diagram with TNb Module

Figure 6.63 depicts the plumbing for an Aurora 1030C with a TNb Module and an EFC
Blank installed.
Figure 6.63. Aurora 1030C Plumbing with TNb Module and EFC Blank

Rev. 5.0
Figure 6.64 depicts the Aurora 1030C plumbing with the TNb and EFC Modules
installed.
Figure 6.64. Aurora 1030C Plumbing with TNb and EFC Modules
Combustion Furnace Assembly

The Combustion Furnace Assembly attaches to the rear of the Aurora and allows for the
use of combustion in methods.
The following procedure outlines how to install the Combustion Furnace Assembly.
1. Remove the combustion tube from the startup kit.
2. Pack the combustion tube according to the instructions in Chapter 7, “Packing the
Combustion Tube” on page 305.
3. Lift the access lid to the combustion furnace, depicted in Figure 6.65.

Rev. 5.0
The blue TFE combustion coil (PN 323680) should be sitting in the combustion
enclosure on top of the furnace assembly.
Access Lid
Combustion Enclosure
Combustion Coil
Figure 6.65. Accessing the Combustion Furnace
4. Insert the packed combustor into the furnace assembly.
5. Attach the free union from the combustion coil to the elbow of the combustor, as

Rev. 5.0
Combustion Cap
Combustion
Coil
Elbow
Union
Figure 6.66. Attaching the Combustion Coil
6. Attach the fitting from the P8 line from the syringe valve’s port C to the
combustion cap on top of the combustor, as depicted in Figure 6.67.
Fitting from Line

P8
Combustion
Cap
Figure 6.67. Connecting the Combustion Cap

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting Optional Equipment

This section helps in troubleshooting problems with the optional equipment for the
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer. If a problem still exists after reviewing the following
tables, or if it is not addressed, contact the OI Analytical Customer Support Center for
assistance at (800) 336-1911 or (979) 690-1711.
Troubleshooting the 1088 Autosampler

Figure 6.19 lists problems that might occur during normal operation of the 1088
Autosampler, along with possible solutions. Any maintenance that involves the interior
components of the 1088 Autosampler should be performed by OI Analytical trained
technical support personnel only. If a problem still exists after reviewing the following
chart, or if it is not addressed, contact the OI Analytical Customer Support Center for
assistance at (800) 336-1911 or (979) 690-1711.
WARNING:To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not remove the 1088
Autosampler back cover. No user-serviceable parts are located inside.
Refer servicing to qualified OI Analytical Customer Support personnel.
Table 6.19. 1088 XYZ Rotary Autosampler Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Action
Unit does not respond Unit not connected to an Connect the power
electrical outlet cord.
Blown fuse Replace the fuse.
Interface cable not Connect the interface
connected cable.
Faulty power supply Call the OI Analytical
Customer Support
Center.
Communications lost Interface cable not Connect the interface
between the 1088 and Aurora connected cable.
Samples not extracted from Leak Verify fittings are
vials or the wash station tight.
Double check O-rings
are on needle and
sleeve.
Verify needle sleeve is
tight.
Clogged needle Clean or replace the
needle.
Sample transfer and sleeve Switch the lines.
gas transfer lines reversed

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.19. 1088 XYZ Rotary Autosampler Troubleshooting Chart (Continued)
Sample leaks from the needle Leak Check for loose

to the top of the sample vial connections between
the interface tube and
the Aurora.
Slow sample transfer to the Leak Verify fittings are
Aurora tight.
Double check O-rings
are on needle and
sleeve.
Verify needle sleeve is
tight.
Rinses not performed Rinses turned off Check configuration
settings.
Needle assembly not lowering Carousel cover off or Replace the carousel
to pierce the vial interlock switch cover.
interrupted
Carousel advances to Wrong “start” sample Check configuration
unwanted positions position configured settings.
Needle not piercing the Bent needle Replace the needle.
septum center
Needle remains in wash or Carousel cover off Replace the carousel
waste station without raising cover.
Carousel wobbles Carousel not seated Manually rotate the
properly carousel until it drops
into position with the
carousel alignment
notch.
Troubleshooting the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler

Figure 6.20 lists problems that might occur during normal operation of the 1096+
Autosampler, along with possible solutions. Any maintenance that involves the interior

Rev. 5.0
components of the 1096+ Autosampler should be performed by OI Analytical trained

technical support personnel only.
Table 6.20. 1096+ Autosampler Troubleshooting Chart
Unit does not respond Unit not connected to an Connect the power
electrical outlet cord.
Blown fuse Replace the fuse.
Interface cable not Connect the interface
connected cable.
Faulty power supply Call the OI Analytical
Customer Support
Center.
Communications lost between Interface cable not Connect the interface
the 1096+ and Aurora connected cable.
Samples not extracted from Leak Visually inspect for
vials or the wash station leaks.
Clogged needle Clean or replace the
needle.
Sample transfer and sleeve Switch the lines.
gas transfer lines reversed
Sample leaks from the needle Leak Check for loose
to the top of the sample vial connections between
the interface tube and
the Aurora.

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.20. 1096+ Autosampler Troubleshooting Chart (Continued)
Slow sample transfer to the Leak Visually inspect for

Aurora leaks.
Decreased flow rate of the Increase flow rate by
peristaltic pump adjusting the
peristaltic pump shoe
until achieving the
desired wash solution
flow rate. Flip up the
spring loaded set
screw assembly to
release the pump
platen and turn
clockwise using an
Allen wrench to
increase the flow.
Return the set screw
assembly to the
operating position.
Rinses not performed Rinses turned off Check configuration
settings.
Needle does not advance; Y-axis slider block and Ensure the y-axis
Z-drive assembly makes a Z-drive assembly slider block and
loud chattering noise incorrectly installed Z-drive assembly are
installed correctly.
Damaged y-axis block Replace the y-axis
home position flag slider block.
Needle movement Remove the
obstruction obstruction.
Z-drive malfunction Replace the Z-drive
assembly.
Needle assembly not lowering Needle depth set Check configuration
to pierce the vial incorrectly settings.
Needle advances to unwanted Wrong “start” sample Check configuration
positions position configured settings.
Needle not piercing the Bent needle Replace the needle.
septum center
Autosampler needs Call the OI Analytical
calibration Customer Support
Center.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting the TNb Module

Troubleshooting the TNb Module largely consists of monitoring peak shape and
linearity and looking for a diminished TNb signal.
Poor Peak Shape
Some irregularity in peak shape may occur with the TNb Module on the Aurora, as
depicted in Figure 6.68. These irregular peak shapes are still acceptable and do not
indicate problems with the unit.
10-ppm KNO3, 800 µL 101-ppb KNO3, 800 µL

Figure 6.68. Examples of Irregular, but Acceptable, Peak Shapes
Table 6.21 lists several factors that affect peak shape.
Table 6.21. Factors Affecting Peak Shape
Factor Description
Injection Volume Large injection volumes of high concentration samples often

produce peak splitting. This is due to secondary burning of
nitrogen or carbon that is thrown clear of the quartz bed
during injection. This can often be observed during cleanup
runs following a very high-level analysis in which
considerable “sample memory” is evident. Peaks during
these cleanups are often very broad with splitting, and one or
more secondary peaks can occur. This behavior during
cleanup injections is normal. Limit very high mass samples
to small injection volumes, such as <100-µL volumes for
running samples and standards.

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.21. Factors Affecting Peak Shape
Factor Description
Carbon or Nitrogen Large injection volumes after very high mass samples often
Mass Loading result in poor peak shapes and possibly secondary peaks.
Combustion Tube During normal use, considerable residue of various salts and
Age inorganics can remain, which ultimately reduce flow, affect
the furnace’s heating efficiency, and may not allow the
catalyst to combust samples efficiently. Repack the
combustion tube as described in Chapter 7, “Packing the
Combustion Tube” on page 305.
Catalyst Efficiency A reduction of catalyst efficiency results in poor peak shapes
with secondary and possibly tertiary combustion effects
resulting in corresponding peaks. See “Replacing the NOx
Converter Catalyst” on page 275 in this chapter.
Flow Rate Flow rate usually only affects peak width and timing. For
fast flows, i.e., 600–700 mL/minute, the peak width is
relatively narrow. This sometime compresses certain peak
anomalies into a single peak, which can aid in integration of
peak areas.
Poor Linearity
Generally, analyzing samples up to and including 8 µg of injected nitrogen provide

good linearity (R2 = 0.999 or better). This does not infer that samples above this amount
cannot be run. However, the inherent inefficiency of the nitrogen combustion reaction
introduces some nonlinearity to measuring samples above approximately 8 µg.
Typically, measurements up to approximately 25 µg can be performed with reasonable
linearity (R2 = 0.995 or better). If linearity deteriorates so that analyzing sample
amounts greater than 1 µg cannot obtain R2 values of 0.999, then replace the NOx
Converter catalyst (see “Replacing the NOx Converter Catalyst” on page 275 in this
chapter).
Diminished TNb Signal
The normal lifetime for the TNb detector element is approximately three years, after
which the detector sensitivity can decrease and become unusable. If detector element
failure is suspected, perform the following procedure to determine if the TNb detector
requires replacement.
1. Ensure the signal cable is firmly attached between the detector element and the TNb
detector board.
2. If the power to the instrument has been turned off for a day or more and the TNb
battery is old, the detector may have depolarized. It takes up to three days for it to

Rev. 5.0
re-polarize and become re-usable. If this happens, replace the 9 V battery on the
board.
3. Verify the humidifier liquid is not too low. The TNb Module can function without
humidifier. However, this eventually dries the electrolyte, thereby destroying the
detector element. Make certain the 40-mL vial on the front of the instrument is at
least one-third full of DI water and that some gas flows through it as evidenced by
bubbling from the submerged Teflon tube.
Replacement Parts Lists for Optional Equipment

The following sections and tables list the replacement parts for the optional equipment
in this chapter.
TNb Replacement Parts

Table 6.22 lists the replacement parts for the TNb Detector Module, while Table 6.23
lists the replacement parts for the TNb Humidifier Assembly.
Table 6.22. TNb Detector Module
Product Unit PN
Battery, 9 V, alkaline 5/pk PS-0005
Cable, RS285, RJ12/RJ12, 6 conductor, 2 ft each 322310
Ferrule, Tefzel®, 1/8" each 317545
Fitting nut, Tefzel, 1/4"-28 x 1/8" natural each 322311
Nut, panel, 11/8" x 12 knurl CPVC each 321957
TNb detector option each 322607
TNb humidifier assembly each 322609
TNb module each 322608
TNb nitric oxide sensor replacement cell kit each 323417-T
Tubing, Teflon 1/8" O.D. x 0.062 I.D. blue ft 319607
Table 6.23. TNb Humidifier Assembly
Product Unit PN
Cap, humidifier vial each 288985
Clip, glass loop each 263798
Ferrule, Tefzel, 1/8" each 3317545

Rev. 5.0
Table 6.23. TNb Humidifier Assembly
Fitting nut, Tefzel, ¼-28 - 1/8", short, natural each 322311

O-ring, silicone, #15 each 280198
Tubing, Teflon, 1/8" O.D. x 0.062 I.D., blue ft 319607
Vial, autosampler, 40-mL VOA each 320930
1088 Rotary Autosampler Replacement Parts

Table 6.24 lists the replacement parts for the 1088 Rotary Autosampler.
Table 6.24. 1088 Rotary Autosampler Replacement Parts List
Product Unit PN
Cable, RS-485, 6 conductor, 61 cm (2 feet) each 322310

Cap assembly for wash bottle each 323585
Caps, open hole, for 40-mL VOA vials 72/pk 296079
Chassis cover, clear each 321374
Connector, gray, nipple w/ ¼ each A001264
Ferrule, Tefzel®, 1/8" flangeless each 317545
Fitting nut, PEEK®, 1/4-28, 1/8" blue flangeless each 319345
Fuse, 4 A, 5 x 20 mm, 250 V, Slo-Blo® each 291211
Manifold, needle, tower assembly each 321319
Needle drive assembly each 321238
Needle sleeve, short (septum piercing) each 321322
Needle sleeve, long (open vial)(optional) each 321321
Needle wash dual pump assembly each 321375
Needle (septum piercing) each 321323
Needle (open vial)(optional) each 326778
O-ring, 0.0705 I.D. x 0.070 thick x 0.2 O.D., Viton® each A001266
O-ring, for needle assembly and sleeve 5/pk 323416
PCF, 1088 Autosampler control each 323176
Power cord, 125 V, 10 A, North America each 116038
Power supply, 12 VDC each 320593
Rotary stage assembly each 324619
Septa, Teflon faced, for 40-mL VOA vials 50/pk 173211

Rev. 5.0
Product Unit PN
Startup kit each 321263

Stir bar, Teflon 5/pk 314013
Tray assembly each 321260
Tube assembly, sample transfer each 321320
Tube assembly, sleeve gas each 323599
Tubing, silicone, ¼" x 1/8" I.D., clear foot 179085
Tubing, TFE, 1/8", 0.062 I.D., blue foot 319607
Tubing, urethane, 1/8" x 1/16" I.D., clear foot 166224
Vial, 40 mL, VOA, with caps and septa 72/case 296053
Wash bottle, 1 L each 322444
Waste cup each 321290
1096+ XYZ Autosampler Replacement Parts

Table 6.25 lists the replacement parts for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler.
Table 6.25. 1096+ Autosampler Replacement Parts List
Product Unit PN
Arm tube assembly each 322503

Base plate each 322508
Block, wash station each 322523
Cable, carriage stepper each 322491
Cable, RS-485, 6 conductor, 7 feet each 322313
Cap assembly for wash bottle each 323585
Caps, open hole, for 40-mL VOA vials 72/pk 296079
Cover, 1096+ each 322524
Drain/pump tubing kit each 322520
Guide shaft each 322504
Home block hardware kit each 322490
Lead screw kit, x-axis each 322487
Lead screw kit, y-axis each 322486
Needle (septum piercing) each 321323

Rev. 5.0
Product Unit PN
Needle sleeve, long (open vial)(optional) each 321321

Needle sleeve, short (septum piercing) each 321322
O-ring, for needle assembly and sleeve 5/pk 323416
PCA, CPU 1096+ each 322979
PCA, daughter I/O each 322500
PCA, main each 322499
Power supply, external, 24 V each 322485
Pump motor kit each 322519
Sample needle kit each 322510
Sensor, x-axis each 322495
Sensor, y-axis each 322496
Sensor, z-axis each 322497
Startup kit each 322988
Stepper motor, x-axis each 322492
Stepper motor, y-axis each 322493
Stepper motor, z-axis each 322494
Switch/power kit each 322501
Thumbscrew kit each 322489
Tray assembly, 12 position each 322521
Tray assembly, 24 position each 322517
Tube assembly, sample transfer each 322989
Tube assembly, sleeve gas each 322990
Vial, 40 mL, VOA, with caps and septa 72/case 296053
Wash bottle, 1 L each 322444
Wash station each 322522
Z-drive assembly each 322996

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 7 Maintenance
As with all analytical instruments, the Aurora requires some maintenance during its
operational lifetime. This chapter discusses both routine and non-scheduled
maintenance of the Aurora, including general information and a suggested maintenance
schedule.
Maintaining the Aurora

Maintaining the Aurora includes cleaning, replacing parts, performing regular
diagnostic tests, and other maintenance activities.
OI Analytical recommends establishing an instrument logbook to record instrument

operation time and document periodic maintenance. Use this logbook to record results
of inspections and component replacements necessary for proper maintenance of the
Aurora.
For the most reliable Aurora performance and as a warranty condition, follow the
routine maintenance suggestions shown in Table 7.1. Consider the following items
along with the suggested schedule to ensure optimal system performance.
Table 7.1. Suggested Routine Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Item Suggested Schedule

Gas service As needed
Halide scrubber (PN 322307) 3,000 samples
Heater element As needed
Dryer tube (PN 322306) As needed
Permeation tube (PN 264119) 24,000 samples
Reagent reservoirs As needed
Syringe pump As needed
Reaction chamber As needed
Combustion Tube Every 6 months or as needed

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Exterior Maintenance
Wipe exterior surfaces with a lint-free, nonabrasive cloth to remove loose dust. Do not
use abrasive cleaners. Wipe up any spills immediately with a soft cloth dampened with
water. Wipe dry with a soft cloth. Neutralize corrosive spills immediately with an
appropriate compound.
Cleaning the Touchscreen
CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with organic solvents to clean the touchscreen.
Organic solvents may partially dissolve the display, rendering it
permanently smudged or illegible.
Clean the touchscreen using a lint-free, non-abrasive cloth and a mild, inorganic glass
cleaner. Turn off power to the Aurora to prevent the instrument from responding to
pressure on the screen.
Maintaining the Acid Reagent Bottle

NOTE: Ensure a sustaining purge rate is always present in the reagent bottle.
Periodically monitor the volume of acid reagent in the acid reagent bottle on the side of
the Aurora according to the number of analyses and volume of reagent used per sample.
Add reagent to keep the bottle from being completely emptied. See Chapter 3,
“Reagents” on page 29 for preparing the reagent to add to this bottle.
Maintaining the Rinse Bottles

NOTE: Make sure a sustaining purge rate is always present in the rinse bottle.
Periodically monitor the volume of the rinse reservoir on the side of the Aurora
according to the number of analyses. Maintain reagent water for system rinses. Clean
the rinse bottle approximately every two weeks to avoid bacterial or algal growth.
Checking Gas Service

Gas consumption is listed in Chapter 1, “Gas” on page 4. Standard 13,790 kPa (2,000-
psi) gas cylinders hold over 5,700 L (200 cubic feet), which should last at least 260
hours of operation. Periodically check cylinder gas pressure to confirm sufficient gas is
present for planned operations.
Sanitation Procedures
The following sections provide information on sanitation procedures for the Aurora
1030C, the 1088 Rotary Autosampler, and the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Sanitation Procedure for the Aurora
To prevent biological growth in DI water containers and tubing, perform the following
steps regularly, approximately every four to six weeks.
NOTE: Commercially available household bleach is an effective and economical

source of the 6% sodium hypochlorite solution.
1. Confirm the analyzer is not running any sequences and is in standby.
2. Press Maint  Syringe Pump.
The Syringe Pump dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 7.1.
Figure 7.1. Syringe Pump Maintenance Dialog Box
3. Place the syringe water line and sample sipper tube lines into a 100-mL container
of 6% sodium hypochlorite solution.
4. Under Manual Prime, select Prime All.
5. Press Prime.
Press Prime three more times to thoroughly flush the 6% sodium hypochlorite
solution through the tubing and valve ports.
6. Allow the solution to remain in the system for approximately five minutes.
7. Place the remaining 6% sodium hypochlorite solution into the DI Water bottle.
8. Rinse the DI Water bottle thoroughly with the 6% sodium hypochlorite solution,
allowing it to sit for approximately five minutes.
9. Discard the remaining 6% sodium hypochlorite solution.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
10. Thoroughly rinse the DI Water bottle with fresh DI water.
11. Flush the 6% sodium hypochlorite solution from the analyzer:
• Place the syringe water line and sample sipper tube lines into a 100-mL
container of DI water.
• Press Prime three times to thoroughly flush the 6% sodium hypochlorite
solution from the tubing and valve ports.
12. Return the syringe and sample sipper tube lines to their original configurations.
13. Press Prime once.
The analyzer is now ready to return to operation.
Sanitation Procedure for the 1088 Rotary Autosampler
The following procedure helps control biological growth in the 1088 Rotary
Autosampler and should be performed 4–6 weeks.

source of this solution.
2. Place the sampler wash water silicone tubing into a 100-mL container of
6% sodium hypochlorite solution.
3. Press Maint  Rotary Autosampler.
The Rotary Autosampler dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 7.2.
4. Under Pumps, turn On the Waste pump.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
5. Turn On the Wash pump for approximately 10 seconds to allow the solution to
flow completely through the needle wash pathways.
6. Turn Off the Wash pump.
7. Turn Off the Waste pump.
8. Allow solution to remain in the system for approximately five minutes.
9. Place the 6% sodium hypochlorite solution into the sampler wash water
reservoir.
10. Thoroughly rinse the wash water reservoir with the 6% sodium hypochlorite
solution.
11. Allow the solution to remain in the reservoir for approximately five minutes.
12. Thoroughly flush the wash water reservoir with fresh DI water.
13. Flush the 6% sodium hypochlorite solution from the autosampler:
a. Place the sampler wash water silicone tubing into a 100-mL container of DI
water.
b. Turn On the Waste pump.
c. Turn On the Wash pump for approximately 30 seconds to thoroughly flush the
6% sodium hypochlorite solution from the needle wash pathways.
d. Turn Off the Wash pump.
e. Allow the waste pump to run an additional 15 seconds.
f. Turn Off the Waste pump.
14. Return the sampler wash water silicone tubing to its reservoir.
The autosampler is now ready to return to operation.
The following procedure helps control biological growth in the 1096+ XYZ
Autosampler and should be performed 4–6 weeks.

source of this solution.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
2. Place the sampler wash water silicone tubing into a 100-mL container of
6% sodium hypochlorite solution.
3. Press Maint  XYZ Autosampler.
The XYZ Autosampler dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 7.3.
Figure 7.3. XYZ Autosampler Maintenance Dialog Box
4. Fill the DI water reservoir with 6% sodium hypochlorite solution.
5. Press Wash Pump On.
Allow 30 seconds for the sodium hypochlorite solution to work completely through
the needle pathways.
6. Press Wash Pump Off.
7. Allow the 6% sodium hypochlorite solution to remain in the autosampler for

approximately five minutes.
8. Empty and discard the remaining 6% sodium hypochlorite solution from the DI
water reservoir.
9. Empty and discard the solution in the wash vial.
10. Thoroughly rinse the DI water reservoir and wash vial with fresh DI water.
11. Fill the DI water reservoir and wash vial with fresh DI water.
12. Place the wash vial in its holder.
13. Place the DI water reservoir in its holder.
14. Press Wash Pump On.
Cycle the fresh DI water through the autosampler for approximately 3 minutes.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
15. Press Initialize.
The autosampler is ready for use.
Interior Maintenance
The following maintenance procedures involve changing or upgrading specific Aurora
interior components. Only the following outlined procedures are authorized by
OI Analytical for customer maintenance.
WARNING:Turn off power and unplug the Aurora before performing any interior
maintenance.
WARNING:Any other procedures involving the Aurora interior components should

only be performed by OI Analytical-trained Customer Support personnel.
For easy maintenance, the plumbing tubing is color coded, as explained in Table 7.2.
Table 7.2. Chemical Feed and Drain Tubing Color Coding
Color Function
Red Acid
Clear Rins3/4eturn/Gas
Black Drain
Yellow Gas
Checking the NDIR Offset

For Golay Detector
CAUTION: Do not make adjustments to the GAIN potentiometer, which affects the
NDIR detector linearity.
CAUTION: If the NDIR baseline cannot be adjusted to the desired range, problems
other than zero offset are likely. See Chapter 8, “Troubleshooting” on
page 345.
NOTE: If the system is a 1030D, or Dual (Wet/Combustion) unit, do not adjust the
baseline in Combustion mode. The baseline should only be adjusted in
Wet Oxidation mode. The baseline may be higher for combustion, but will
not affect linearity.
The NDIR detector offset (baseline) fluctuates up or down during periods of nonuse.
This is due to factors such as operating temperature or purity of gases. However, under
routine operating conditions, the baseline reading should be set between 1,500 and

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
3,000 for optimum range and linear response. Check this adjustment after every 100
hours of operation (corresponding to gas service maintenance).
For Solid State NDIR
No offset adjustment is required. Under routine operating conditions, the baseline

reading should be set between 1,700 and 2,300 for optimum range and linear response.
If value is outside normal operating range, go to Maintenance on the 1030 and select
NDIR. Press Auto-Zero.
Figure 7.4. NDIR Auto-Zero
Checking NDIR Linearization

All NDIR detectors produce a nonlinear response, and in the case of the Aurora, the
output response is corrected algebraically.
The detector in the Aurora has been linearized over a range of 0–240 µg C and should
remain linearized indefinitely. However, quality assurance practices and proper
maintenance procedures should include routine linearity checks.
If suspecting a linearity problem, contact the OI Analytical Customer Support Center at

(800) 336-1911 or (979) 690-1711 for assistance.
This section describes procedures for setting and testing certain mechanical
components for proper operation if replaced during nonscheduled maintenance
(troubleshooting).
Maintaining the Permeation Tube
A gas permeation tube connects the sample manifold to the NDIR detector. The gas
permeation tube is a coaxial tube set containing a hydrophilic membrane designed to
selectively remove water vapor from mixed gas streams. When an intermittently wet

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
gas stream flows through the inner tube while a dry gas purges the shell in a
countercurrent fashion, water vapor molecules diffuse across the walls of the tubing.
The ion membrane is chemically resistant to most gases and liquids. However, the
drying capacity may decrease if the membrane becomes contaminated with nonvolatile
liquids or salts. Replace the permeation tube annually as preventive maintenance.
WARNING:Turn off power and unplug the Aurora before performing any interior
maintenance.
Properly installing the permeation tube is critical to the accurate performance of the
Aurora. The end fittings on the dryer tube should not be rotated during maintenance or
installation of the permeation tube. Twisting the membrane on the dryer tube can result
in poor flow and counter flow of the gases through the system and prevent proper
drying of the gas going to the NDIR detector. This results in poor results and
problematic IR counts.
To prevent these problems, take off one section at a time to verify the correct fittings are
going to the proper points on the permeation tube. Exercise caution to ensure the tube
doesn’t rotate. Only the fittings from the 1030C should be rotated.
The following procedure outlines how to replace the permeation tube.
1. Remove the cover on the pneumatics, or left, side of the Aurora.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
The permeation tube is sitting on the outside of the syringe pump, as depicted in
Figure 7.5.
Permeation
Tube
Figure 7.5. Permeation Tube
2. Turning only the fittings from the 1030C, remove a flow and counter flow fitting
from one side of the old permeation tube.
3. Attach the removed fittings to the new tube.
Ensure the fitting is firmly attached to the tube.
4. Repeat using the other side.
5. Measure flows from the IR vent on the front and purge line on the back of the
Aurora, respectively, to ensure proper flow rates.
6. If necessary, calibrate gas flows for the Aurora.
See “EPC Calibration” on page 339 and “EFC Calibration” on page 340.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Packing the Combustion Tube

The following procedure outlines how to pack the combustion tube.
CAUTION: Pack the combustion tube precisely as described to ensure proper

operation of the analyzer. Failure to follow these instructions can result in
poor instrument performance.
NOTE: The combustion tube is shipped empty and must be packed and installed
before operating the 1030 Combustion Analyzer.
1. Remove the empty combustion tube (PN 321268), depicted in Figure 7.6, from
the startup kit.
Figure 7.6. Empty Combustion Tube
2. Using a funnel, pour the quartz chips (PN 323880) into the large neck side of the
combustion tube until 1" in depth (from the bottom) is filled on the right side and
3.40" is filled on the left side, as depicted in Figure 7.7.
NOTE: Tilt the tube to the side and shake lightly to move the quartz to the 1"
mark.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
3.4"
1"
Figure 7.7. Packing the Quartz Chips
3. Using a funnel, pour the catalyst (PN 323882) into the small neck side of the
combustion tube until the catalyst fills to 1.40" from the top, as depicted in
Figure 7.8.
NOTE: Lightly tap the tube on the bottom to ensure all the catalyst has settled
before proceeding to the next step.
1.4"
Catalyst
Quartz Chips
Figure 7.8. Packing with Catalyst
NOTE: For optimal performance, the wool should be loosely packed. Packing the
wool too tightly may negatively impact performance.
4. Install 0.4" of quartz wool (PN 144501) into the small neck side of the combustion
tube on top of the catalyst, as depicted in Figure 7.9.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Use small amounts of wool to feed into the neck and then use a piece of Teflon®
tubing or a similar tool to pack the wool.
1.0"
0.4"
Quartz Wool
Catalyst
Quartz Chips
Figure 7.9. Packing with Quartz Wool
5. Install 1" of quartz chips (PN 323880) into the small neck side of the combustion
tube on top of the quartz wool, as depicted in Figure 7.10.
1"
Quartz Chips
Quartz Wool
Catalyst
Figure 7.10. Packing with Quartz Chips
6. To complete packing of the combustion tube, install the Hi-temp zirconia beads
into the small neck side of the combustion tube on top of the quartz chips to fill the
neck of the combustion tube, as depicted in Figure 7.11.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Zirconia Beads
Quartz Chips
Quartz Wool
Catalyst
Quartz Chips
Figure 7.11. Packing with Zirconia Beads
7. After properly packing the combustion tube, install the Viton® tubing assembly, as
depicted in Figure 7.12:
NOTE: The elbow must be parallel to the ground.
NOTE: Use pliers to loosen and refasten the clamps.
a. Position one clamp at the base of the neck.
b. Slide the Viton® tubing on the neck so that the glass end of the elbow touches
the glass end of the neck.
c. Fasten the clamp to the tubing.
Viton Tubing
Figure 7.12. Positioning the Viton Tubing Assembly

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
8. To complete the combustion tube assembly, install the injection assembly as

Combustion
Cap
Elbow
Figure 7.13. Installing the Injection Assembly
CAUTION: To prevent breaking the combustion tube, do not overtighten the nuts on
the combustion cap.
a. Place the nut (PN 224675) around the neck of the combustion tube.
b. Place the Teflon ferrule (PN 321698) around the neck inside the nut (the wider
part of the ferrule down).
c. Screw on the combustion cap (PN 322939) using the two wrenches provided in
the startup kit.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
d. Place the injection insert (PN 324565) inside the hole on the combustion cap to
complete the combustion tube assembly, as depicted in Figure 7.14.
Figure 7.14. Final Combustion Tube Assembly
Installing the Combustion Tube

The following procedure outlines how to install the combustion tube assembly into the
Aurora 1030C.
1. Lift the rear lid at the back of the instrument on the combustion furnace assembly.
2. Slide the combustion tube assembly into the furnace opening as shown in
Figure 7.15.
Figure 7.15. Inserting the Combustion Tube
3. Position the combustion tube so the neck points to the body of the unit and the
quartz side of the tube is in contact with the thermocouple, as depicted in
Figure 7.16.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Figure 7.16. Positioning of Packed Combustion Tube
4. Place packing around the glass exposed above the combustion assembly and around
the neck of the combustion chamber as shown in Figure 7.17.
It is not necessary to use all the packing provided.
CAUTION: To avoid serious damage to the Aurora, do not cover the Viton tubing or
the combustion cap with the packing.
Figure 7.17. Packing around the Combustion Tube
5. Attach the condensation line as shown in Figure 7.18.
The condensation line must attach to the bar against the unit and lay on at least two
of the rests in the chamber.
NOTE: Do not crimp either end of the tubing.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Figure 7.18. Final Assembly
6. Attach the injection fitting to the cap.
7. Allow the temperature to stabilize at operating temperature for at least 30 minutes

prior to running any samples. Also, verify the baseline has stabilized to a nominal
level.
8. Once the furnace temperature has stabilized and the system has conditioned
overnight (running cleanup operations overnight), re-tighten the 18 mm stainless
steel nut and the combustion cap; the TFE ferrule will expand and need to be re-
tightened.
NOTE: This will only need to be done once after a new tube has been installed.
9. Re-tighten the elbow-to-condensation line fittings, the fitting into the combustion
cap, and the condensation line to yellow line union.
10. Re-attach the combustion lid to complete the combustion tube packing and
installation.
11. Perform leak check(s) on chamber 1 and chamber 2 (if present) according to the
instructions in the manual.
12. Verify gas flow at the detector vent.
Using oxygen with a pressure of 20 psi, the flow for Chamber 1 should be 80 ±5
mL/min; the flow for Chamber 2 should be 85 ±5 mL/min.
General Combustion Tube Maintenance
After installation, it is important to follow good maintenance of the combustion tube by

checking flows on a regular basis, particularly when running samples of high
particulate or salt content. Flows should be checked daily to make sure they don’t
deviate from the initial flow rate as described in step 12 of Installing a Combustion
Tube. If the flow deviates greater than 20% of the initial flow rate, power down the
1030C and let the combustion tube cool. Remove the tube for inspection. If the tube
appears clogged or spent, remove materials and repack accordingly.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
NOTE: Some combustion tubes may require full replacement of all materials. For
combustion tubes that run seawater or other high salt materials, the quartz
chip side can often be removed of the devitrified quartz chips and replaced
with fresh quartz. This minimizes the complete repacking of the
combustion tube.
TIC Reaction Chamber

The TIC reaction chamber shouldn’t need changing with normal use. However, it may
be broken or require replacing for some other reason. The following procedure outlines
how to change the reaction chamber should it become necessary.
WARNING:Turn off power to the Aurora.
CAUTION: Before changing any sample handling components, ensure no sequences

are running.
Tools Required
The following tools are necessary for changing the reaction chamber:
• open end 1/2" wrench

• open end 11/8" wrench (PN 227975)
• open end 1" wrench (PN 319602)
Procedure
1. Ensure no analyzing sequences are running and turn off power to the Aurora.
2. Remove the black drain line from the bottom of the reaction chamber.
Figure 7.19 depicts the various components of the reaction chamber assembly.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
No tools are needed for the drain line, as the fittings are fingertight.
Gas Line (Yellow) 1/2" Nut

Metal Clip Reaction Chamber Cap
18-mm Nut
Reaction Chamber (Glass)

Sample Inlet Line
Metal Clip
Drain Line
Figure 7.19. TOC Reaction Chamber Assembly
3. Remove the clear sample inlet line from the side of the reaction chamber.
4. Remove the yellow gas line from the top of the reaction chamber cap.
5. Using the 1/2" wrench, loosen the 1/2" nut that holds the heater element to the top
of the gray cap fitting.
Figure 7.20 depicts the reaction chamber cap, the heater element cable, and the nut.
Heater
Element
Cable
1/2" Nut
Reaction Chamber
Cap (Gray)
Figure 7.20. Reaction Chamber Cap

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
6. Pull the sample heater element out through the top of the reaction chamber.
7. Remove the reaction chamber from the two metal clips that hold it to the front
bulkhead.
One clip is at the top holding the gray cap fitting and one clip holds the glass
chamber. Refer to Figure 7.19.
8. Using the 1" wrench and 11/8" wrench, loosen the reaction chamber cap and
18-mm nut from the glass part of the chamber.
9. Attach the nut, ferrule (PN 321698), and cap to the replacement chamber and
tighten with the wrenches.
10. Replace the chamber following steps 1–8 in reverse order.
11. Align the lower tip of the sample heater element with the black horizontal line
marked near the lower tapered part of the chamber, as depicted in Figure 7.21.
Reaction Chamber
Heater Element
Marker Line (Black)
Figure 7.21. Heater Element Proper Positioning
Replacing the Sample Heater

The following procedure outlines how to change the sample heater on the Aurora.
There are two possible heaters in place: a glass heater (PN 324081) and a stainless steel
heater (PN 322857). The stainless steel heater was phased out in favor of the glass
heater. OI Analytical recommends that all stainless steel heaters on Auroras be replaced
with glass heaters.
Tools Needed
• 1/2" open end wrench

• 1" wrench (PN 319602)
• QQ/ew" open-end wrench
• #2 Phillips
Instructions
WARNING:Turn off power to the Aurora to avoid electrical shock while working
inside the sample handling module.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
NOTE: Upon completion of installation of the new heater, OI Analytical strongly

recommends running Sample Cleanups on the TOC analyzer until a
sufficient background level is established.
WARNING:Verify the instrument is powered off and unplugged before proceeding.
1. Turn the power off and unplug the instrument.
2. Remove the pneumatic bay cover (left side).
3. Remove the existing stainless steel (PN 322857) or glass (PN 324081) heater.
a. Remove the appropriate electrical connections.
In Figure 7.22, the heater #1 connectors are on the right.
Heater 1 Electrical
Connections
Figure 7.22. Electrical Connections for Heater 1
b. Remove the QQ/ew" nut (on an 8-32 screw used to mount the loop), depicted
in Figure 7.23.
Figure 7.23. Ring Terminal Connections
c. Detach the ring terminal from the mounting screw.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
d. Disconnect the plumbing from the reaction vessel.
e. Carefully remove the sample chamber from its upper spring clip, as shown in
Figure 7.24.
Upper Clip for

Sample Chamber
Lower Clip for

Sample Chamber
Figure 7.24. Inserting the New Glass Heater
f. Loosen the nut on top of the reaction vessel with a 1/2" wrench while holding
the mount with a 1" wrench, as depicted in Figure 7.25 (1" wrench not shown).
Figure 7.25. Loosening the Nut on the Reaction Vessel Cap
g. Remove the heater from the top of the reaction chamber mount.
NOTE: The ferrule (PN 175978 for metal-style heaters or PN 224337 for glass-
style heaters) will either stay attached to the sample heater or stay
positioned in the head piece. Be certain to remove the ferrule from metal
heaters as the inner diameter is not congruent with the new heater.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
h. Going into the unit, remove the leads and the sample heater by passing them
through the hole and grommet.
It may be necessary to remove the grommet prior to removing the sample

heater.
4. Remove the rubber grommet from the hole in the bulkhead where the heater leads
pass through.
5. Split the rubber grommet, as depicted in Figure 7.26.
6. Carefully, insert the new glass heater through the hole from
inside the unit as shown in Figure 7.27.
Figure 7.26. Splitting
Note how the sample chamber has been removed from the Rubber Grommet
its upper spring clip.
Figure 7.27. Routing Heater through Chassis
7. Slide the heater nut (PN 178574) and a 6-mm TFE ferrule (PN 224337) onto the
heater from the glass end, as depicted in Figure 7.28.
Figure 7.28. Attach the Heater Nut and TFE Ferrule

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
8. Insert the glass heater into the top of the reaction chamber mount, as depicted in
Figure 7.29.
CAUTION: Insert the heater carefully to prevent chipping the internal fins of the
condensation tower section of the sample chamber.
Figure 7.29. Inserting the Glass Heater
9. Position the sample heater:
CAUTION: To prevent breaking the reaction chamber vessel and to fully optimize the
heating capability of the reaction chamber, ensure the heater is properly
positioned inside the chamber. Insert the heater to the bottom of the
chamber, then lift the heater slightly so that the end of the heater is
between the bottom of the chamber and the black line of the chamber
vessel.
• For Aurora 1030 instruments manufactured in 2007 and before, position the tip
of the glass sample heater at the mark on the sample chamber, as depicted in
Figure 7.30.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Figure 7.30. Heater Installed in Sample Chamber
• For Aurora 1030 instruments manufactured after 2007, the mark is higher on
the reaction vessel; position the tip of the glass sample heater directly between
the line and the bottom of the sample chamber (allowing 2-3 mm clearance
from resting at the bottom).
10. Secure the glass heater using a 6-mm ferrule (PN 224337) so that the heater is
positioned as shown in Figure 7.31.
Figure 7.31. Securing the Glass Heater
11. As shown in Figure 7.32, tighten the nut with a 1/2" wrench, as depicted in
Figure 7.32, while holding the mount with a 1" wrench (not pictured).

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Figure 7.32. Tightening the Nut
12. Reposition the sample chamber in the upper spring clip.
13. Install the split rubber grommet from step 5 over the braid.
14. Work the grommet into the hole in the front of the chassis, as depicted in
Figure 7.33.
A small flat screwdriver may be used with caution to avoid pressing too firmly
against the braided cable.
Figure 7.33. Mounting the Grommet
15. Connect any plumbing that has been disconnected.
16. Attach the ring terminal to the 8-32 mounting screw as shown in Figure 7.34.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Figure 7.34. Attaching the Ring Terminal
17. Attach the QQ/ew" nut to the mounting screw as shown in Figure 7.34. Be certain
that the nut is securely tightened on the bolt.
NOTE: Failure to tighten the nut securely can lead to heater error messages and
improper operation of the heater.
18. Make the appropriate electrical connections.
The heater #1 connectors (both thermocouple and heater power) are on the right in
Figure 7.35, while the heater #2 connectors are on the left.
2 1
Figure 7.35. Making Electrical Connections
19. Finalize installation by performing the following steps:
a. Re-install the pneumatic bay cover (left side).
b. Supply power.
c. With the glass heaters, the heater offset should typically be kept at the same set-
ting as with the ¼" metal heaters. If required, the procedure outlined in “Cali-
brating the Glass Heater” on page 323 can be used to recalibrate the heater.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Please note that the procedure requires the use of a calibrated external thermo-
couple.
Calibrating the Glass Heater

The following procedure outlines how to calibrate the glass heater.
NOTE: Upon completion of installation of the new heater, OI Analytical strongly

recommends running Sample Cleanups on the TOC analyzer until a
sufficient background level is established.
1. Inject approximately 10 mL of water into the chamber that needs calibrated

(Chamber 1 or Chamber 2) using a syringe.
2. Press Config  Advanced  Heated Zones.
The Heated Zones configuration dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 7.36.
Figure 7.36. Heated Zones Configuration Dialog Box
3. Set the PWMPctStandby (%) to 99%.This setting drives the heaters at a rate
similar to analyzing samples.
4. Enter 10 for the Chamber 1 offset (or the Chamber 2 offset).
5. Press OK.
6. Attach 1" of an external thermocouple end lengthwise to the narrowest part of

Chamber 1 (or Chamber 2) with lightweight Scotch tape.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
NOTE: Make sure no air space is available around the thermocouple or the
temperature will read lower than normal.
7. Press Maint  Heaters, Valves, Fans.
The Heaters, Valves, Fans configuration dialog box is displayed, as depicted in

Figure 7.37.
Figure 7.37. Heaters, Valves, Fans Maintenance Dialog Box
8. Set the Chamber 1 (or Chamber 2) temperature to 98 °C.
9. Press Set Now.
10. Monitor the temperature with the external thermocouple.
a. Once the temperature stabilizes, in about 3-4 minutes, verify the temperature is
96–99 °C.
— If the reading is high, return to the Config  Advanced  Heated Zones

screen and raise the offset for that chamber by 1 degree.
— If the reading is low return to the Config  Advanced  Heated Zones
screen and lower the offset for that chamber by 1 degree.
b. After changing the offset, return to the Maint  Heaters, Valves, Fans screen
and press Set Now to apply the new offset(s). Repeat this process until the
proper heater offset is achieved.
c. Reset the temperature to 70 °C.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
d. Press Set Now.
NOTE: If the heater is 0 °C offset, the heater should be replaced.
12. Set the Standby Heating Rate from 99% to 70%.
Maintenance Screen
The Maintenance screen contains diagnostic and maintenance tools and is depicted in
Figure 7.38.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance

If the system is using the optional 1088 Rotary Autosampler, press Maint  Rotary
Autosampler to access the Rotary Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 7.39, to
test the autosampler’s functionality.
Press Extend to move the tray partially out to access sample vials and press Retract to
return the tray back inside the autosampler housing. To change the vial position, press
Vial# and select a vial number. Press Move To Sample Vial to complete the action. The
sample tray rotates to the selected vial and the Current Vial number then displays.
NOTE: To change the speed of the stirrer, the stirrer MUST be turned off, a value
entered, and the stirrer turned on again. Otherwise, the change in speed
does NOT take effect.
The stirrer motor speed can be set to a wide range of settings. However, the practical
range is 3–6. Settings of 1, 2, or 3 may not provide enough voltage for the
electromagnetic armature to “catch” the stirrer spindle. Settings higher than 6 provide
too much voltage and the electromagnetic armature spins too rapidly for the spindle. OI
Analytical recommends settings of 4, 5, or 6 for most applications. Higher settings will
cause the stirrer spindle to spin faster, possibly resulting in more particulate matter
rising in the sample and clogging the needle. Slower speeds may not keep the sample
adequately stirred.
Needle depth is a percent of the vial depth. The needle reaches the bottom of the vial at
100 percent. If the sample contains sediments, select a number less than 100 to avoid
obstruction problems.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance

If the system is using the optional 1096+ XYZ Autosampler, Press Maint  XYZ
Autosampler to access the XYZ Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 7.40, and
to test the component’s functionality.
Figure 7.40. XYZ Autosampler Maintenance Dialog Box

If the system is using the External Expansion I/O Module, also known as the At-Line
Autosampler, press Maint  Ext. I/O & At-Line Autosampler to access the Ext. I/O
& At-Line Autosampler dialog box, depicted in Figure 7.41, and test the component’s
functionality.
Figure 7.41. Ext. I/O & At-Line Autosampler Maintenance Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Syringe Pump
Press Maint  Syringe Pump to access the Syringe Pump dialog box, depicted in
Figure 7.42, and to test the component’s functionality.
Figure 7.42. Syringe Pump Maintenance Dialog Box
Ports A–H allow for manually operating the valve by pressing the letter for the selected
valve under Syringe Valve Control. Table 7.3 lists the corresponding component and
the tubing color for each valve.
Table 7.3. Valve Connections (A–H)
Port Connection Fitting Color
A External sparge PEEK® tan

B TIC Chamber Black
C TC Chamber PEEK tan
D None N/A
E Acid Red
F Sample Blue
G Waste Black
H DI water PEEK tan
Select Syringe Pump Position (to move up or down) by pressing with the stylus inside
the number box next to Desired Position after taking note of the Current Position (see
Figure 7.42). Select numbers on the popup keypad within the scale of 0 to 48,000. The
syringe is completely up at 0 and completely down at 48,000. Table 7.4 lists the syringe
volumes and the steps corresponding with each volume. For example, with the standard

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
default syringe size of 2.5 mL, the steps required for a volume of 2.0 mL, the step
setting required is 38,400.
Table 7.4. Syringe Pump Step Settings
Syringe Size Steps
0.5 mL 9600
1.0 mL 19,200
1.5 mL 28,800
2.0 mL 38,400
2.5 mL 48,000
Changing the Syringe
The operator may change the syringe size as necessary or replace an existing syringe.
Recalibrate the syringe every time it is changed for any reason.
WARNING:Ensure all tubing is connected or routed to proper vessels. Testing the

syringe pump may cause acid or other liquid to discharge from loose
tubing.
1. From the Syringe Pump dialog box, press Change Syringe.
The Change Syringe dialog box appears, as depicted in Figure 7.43.
Figure 7.43. Syringe Pump Change Syringe Dialog Box
2. Press Start to begin the process.
3. When “pause” appears in the field next to step 5, press Start.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
The Syringe Pump Change Syringe message box depicted in Figure 7.44 is
displayed.
Figure 7.44. Syringe Pump Change Syringe Message Box
4. Remove the fitting from port A1 on the valve.
5. Temporarily attach a 12" or longer length of tubing from port A1 to a waste bottle.
6. Calibrate the syringe “Home” position by pressing the lower button on the face of
the syringe drive, as depicted in Figure 7.45.
CAUTION: Do not force the thumb wheel to move.
7. Using the thumb wheel at the base of the

syringe drive, adjust the plunger until it
just makes contact with the top of the Upper Button
syringe barrel.
8. Press the upper button on the face of the

syringe drive to save the calibration. Lower Button
9. Press Next to continue.
10. Remove the temporary waste tubing Thumb Wheel

from port A1 and replace the original
connection.
Figure 7.45. Syringe Calibration Controls
11. Press Next to close the Change Syringe
message box and advance to the final step “Prime Syringe/Loop remove Air.”
12. When priming completes and no air is in the loop or syringe, press Close.
Heaters, Valves, and Fans

Press Maint  Heaters, Valves, Fans to access the Heaters, Valves, Fans dialog box
depicted in Figure 7.46 and to test the functionality of each component. A manual drain
may also be initiated to clear the fluid lines of residual materials or if residual materials

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
remain in the TIC or TOC reaction chamber. Figure 7.47 depicts the Heaters, Valves,
Fans dialog box showing the progress of a manual drain.
Figure 7.46. Heater, Valves, Fans Dialog Box
Figure 7.47. Heaters, Valves, Fans Dialog Box Displaying Progress of Manual Drain

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
System Information
Press Maint  System Information to access the System Information dialog box
depicted in Figure 7.48. Instrument and system information such as firmware versions
and serial numbers display in this dialog box.
Figure 7.48. System Information Dialog Box
System Counters
Press Maint  System Counters to access the System Counters dialog box depicted in
Figure 7.49. It provides a list of all the system features and the number of times each
feature was used since it was reset. The system counters track system use and monitor
when a component needs replacing. Any combination of these counters can be reset as
desired by clicking in the box next to the counter name and pressing Reset Selected
Counter(s).
Figure 7.49. System Counters Dialog Box, I/O Relays Tab
The System Counters dialog box has a series of tabs across the top corresponding to
different functions of the Aurora. Pressing a tab displays counters relevant to that
function. The tabs are:

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
• Run Setup
• Samples
• Cal/QC
• A/S
• I/O Relays
• Users
• Files
Files is a listing of files stored on the Aurora that contain data from sample analysis.
This tab, unlike the others, contains two options: Copy Selected Files to CF Card and
Remove Selected Files. These options allow for transferring selected files to a
CompactFlash® removeable media card and deleting the files from the analyzer,
respectively.
Diagnostic Tests
The Aurora allows the operator to initiate diagnostic tests to verify the system is ready
to perform analyses. Press Maint  Diagnostic Tests to access the Diagnostic Test
dialog box, depicted in Figure 7.50.
Figure 7.50. Diagnostic Test Dialog Box
Press Self Test ... to begin the self-diagnostic test or press Close to exit the dialog box
without conducting the test.
Self Test
Operators need to observe the Aurora’s regular operation and verify the instrument is
performing optimally and as expected. Press Self Test... to access the Self Test dialog
box, depicted in Figure 7.51. The diagnostic test checks all built-in components, as well
as any optional devices installed on the unit. The dialog box displays the status of the
component the last time the diagnostic test was performed and, when the test is
complete, the current status of the component. At the bottom of the dialog box is two
fields listing the last date and time the test was performed as well as the status from that
test.
If any component fails the diagnostic test, the field for it is tinted red and the item is
listed as “Failed”, as depicted in Figure 7.52. A failed component does not necessarily
result in the failure of the Aurora itself. That result depends on which component failed.
Components such as one of the autosamplers, for example, might fail a diagnostic test
while the Aurora itself passes, which results in a pass for diagnostic test.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
The diagnostic test can be aborted at any point during the test by pressing Abort.
Results of the diagnostic test can be printed by the optional printer or through any PC
connected to the Aurora.
Figure 7.51. Diagnostic Tests Self Test Dialog Box
Figure 7.52. Self Test Results Showing Failed Component

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Instrument Logs
Instrument logs store and display a variety of information, including maintenance
history, operator information including events and comments, OI Service log, and
others. This section describes each of these, as well as how to work with log entries.
Working with Log Entries
The following procedure outlines how to display a log and its entries.
1. Press Maint  Instrument Log to display the Instrument Log dialog box depicted
in Figure 7.53.
Figure 7.53. Instrument Log Dialog Box
The Instrument Log dialog box allows access to several instrument logs:
• Maintenance History Log

• Operator Log
• OI Service Personnel Log
2. Select the log to display.
a. Select the log type from the Filter Entries drop-down menu.
b. Select the date range from the Display data from field.
Dates can be entered in two ways: through the calendar from the drop-down
menu or by entering a date directly into the field.
The calendar shows the current date with a red circle and the months are cycled
backwards and forwards via the arrows at the top of the calendar. Select a date
by pressing on it.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
c. Press Display.
The log entries for the selected type of log during the date range specified are
displayed.
Maintenance History Log
The following procedure outlines how to enter data into the Maintenance History Log.
1. Press Maint  Instrument Log.
The Mainenance: Instrument Log dialog box is displayed, as depicted in

Figure 7.53.
2. Press Maintenance History Log.
The Instrument Log: Add Entry dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 7.54.
Figure 7.54. Instrument Log: Add Entry Dialog Box
3. Select an entry Type from the drop-down menu.
Categories include General, Changed Reagents, Changed Carrier Gas,

Replaced AS Needle, or Replaced Syringe Assembly.
4. Activate the virtual keyboard for typing entries.
Press the stylus in the large box below the Performed By field to open the virtual
keyboard.
The keyboard may be used in alphabetical or standard typewriter configuration by

pressing the grey Alphabetical or QWERTY key on the bottom row.
5. Type the log entry.
6. Press Exit to close the keyboard.
7. Save the log entry by pressing Add.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
The Instrument Log: Add Entry dialog box is closed.
8. View log entries by pressing Display.
9. Press Clear All to remove log entries.
Operator Log
The following procedure outlines how to enter data into the Operator Log.
The Maintenance: Instrument Log dialog box is displayed, as depicted in

Figure 7.55.
Figure 7.55. Operator Log Dialog Box
2. Press Operator Log.
The Instrument Log: Add Entry dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 7.56.
Figure 7.56. Instrument Log: Add Entry Dialog Box

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
3. Enter information using the virtual keyboard.
4. Press Add to save the entry.
The data is saved into the Operator Log.
The following procedure outlines how to view data in the Operator Log.
The Maintenance: Instrument Log dialog box is displayed as depicted in

Figure 7.53.
2. Select the date or date range of data from the Display data from drop-down
menus.
3. Select Operator Log from the Filter Entries drop-down menu.
4. Press Display.
The operator log data for the selected date range is displayed.
OI Service Personnel Log
Press Maint, Instrument Log  OI Service Personnel Log to display the Password
Authentication dialog box, depicted in Figure 7.57. Enter the password and press OK.
Figure 7.57. Password Authentication Dialog Box
Log Maintenance:
Press Maint  Instrument Log  Log Maintenance... to display the Log

Maintenance dialog box, depicted in Figure 7.58.
Figure 7.58. Log Maintenance Dialog Box
The Log Maintenance dialog box shows the number of maximum log entry limit values.
The operator may change the maximum number of entries each log allows. Enter a new
limit by pressing the stylus in the number field to open the popup numerical keyboard.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Make new entry limits using the stylus and press OK to save. The system updates the
number of log entries allowed. Press Exit to close the keyboard.
EPC Calibration
This procedure calibrates the EPC from 0 to 25 psi. The EPC Calibration dialog box
steps through each part of the procedure and prompts for the next action. To calibrate
the EPC, a calibrated pressure gauge is required. An appropriate gauge (PN 323690) is
available separately or included as part of the optional TOC Validation Equipment Kit
(PN 323700). To purchase the kit or the pressure gauge, contact OI Analytical
Customer Support.
NOTE: To prevent the Aurora from entering gas saver mode, ensure the automated
shutdown is disabled under the System tab on the Configuration screen
prior to starting this procedure.
1. Remove the left bay cover from the Aurora.
2. Check all the fittings to ensure they are finger tight.
3. Press Maint to open the Maintenance screen.
4. Press EPC Calibration.
The EPC Calibration dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 7.59.
Figure 7.59. EPC Calibration Dialog Box
5. Press Start.
6. Turn off the Vented Ball Valve at the rear of the instrument. If not present, turn off
gas valve, loosen the gas fitting with a 7/16" wrench and remove the line from the
gas inlet port.
7. Press Next.
8. Remove the fitting from port E on the rear of the EPC.
9. Connect a calibrated pressure gauge to port E of the EPC.
10. Press Next.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
The system begins calibrating the EPC to 0 psi, which is a two-step process taking
approximately 1 minute.
11. Turn the Vented Ball Valve ON, OR reconnect the gas supply to the gas inlet port,
tighten with a 7/16" wrench, and turn on the gas valve.
12. Press Next.
The system begins calibrating the EPC to 25 psig, which is a two-step process
taking approximately 1 minute.
13. Input the pressure as indicated on the calibrated pressure gauge connected to port
E.
14. Press Next.
The system records the calibrated pressure and prompts for the desired validation
pressure.
15. Enter 20 psi.
16. Press Next.
17. Verify the calibrated pressure gauge reads 20 psi.
If the calibrated pressure gauge reads 20 psi, continue to the next step. If not,
18. Press Next.
The dialog box repopulates to show the Validation of Pressure Readings, indicating
the Pressure Reading and the Pressure Setpoint.
19. Press Next.
20. Disconnect the calibrated pressure gauge from port E on the EPC and reconnect the
fitting.
21. Press Next.
The dialog box repopulates to indicate the calibration process is complete.
22. Press Exit.
The EPC is calibrated and ready for use.
EFC Calibration
The Electronic Flow Control module allows for electronically controlling the flow of
gases throughout the method sequence. This option is mainly used to automatically add

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
a precise amount of dilution gas to the purge gas flow to permit expansion of the
reportable upper concentration range (approximately 10-fold) without the need for
method modifications. This option can also be used to minimize variability between
parallel reaction chambers, for divergent sample ranges (for example, high TIC/low
TOC samples).
This procedure calibrates the EFC from 100 to 850 mL/minute. The EFC Calibration
dialog box steps through each part of the procedure and prompts for the next action. To
calibrate the EFC, a calibrated flow meter is required. An appropriate meter
(PN 320438) is available separately or included as part of the optional TOC Validation
Equipment Kit (PN 323700). To purchase the kit or the flow meter, contact OI
Analytical Customer Support.
1. Press Maint.
2. Press EFC Calibration.
The EFC Calibration dialog box is displayed, as depicted Figure 7.60.
Figure 7.60. EFC Calibration Dialog Box
3. Connect a calibrated flow meter to the IR vent on the front of the Aurora.
4. Select the desired gas from the drop-down menu.
Options are N2/O2 or He.
To calibrate for Helium, the Helium Support Kit (PN 324662) is required to
properly calibrate the EFC. For more information on calibrating for Helium, see the
documentation included with the Helium Support Kit.
5. Press Start.
The system begins calibrating the EFC to 100 mL/min.
6. Enter the Input Flow shown on the calibrated flow meter.
7. Press Next.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
10. Press Next.
11. Enter the desired Validation Flow Set Point.
OI Analytical recommends a flow set point of 150 mL/min.
12. Press Next.
The dialog box repopulates to show the Validation of flow readings.
13. Press Exit.
The EFC is calibrated and ready for use.
NDIR
The Aurora allows the operator to monitor and self-correct any issues with the SSNDIR
(functions are not available for the Golay detector). The Firmware Revision follows teh
current detector coding. The Current Signal box follows the current baseline of the
instrument.
The baseline can be re-established at any time through the manual command to Auto-
Zero Detector. The detector will set the baseline temporarily to 2500 while the Aurora
goes through a 4 minute calibration routine. When the calibration stops, the baseline
will shift to 2000.

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance
Figure 7.61. NDIR Auto-Zero
Should the instrument have no gas flow or gas that has not completely purged the
detector of atmospheric air during the calibration, the baseline will shift dramatically
down. It is advised to wait 10 minutes and then auto-zero the detector again.
All other functions on the screen are disabled at this time.
Solids
See 1030S Solids Manual for proper use.
Solids/CRDS
See iTOC/CRDS Manual for proper use.

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides a list of the most common troubles that may occur when using the
Aurora 1030C and their most probable causes and corresponding corrective actions.
The probable causes of each symptom appear in order of increasing seriousness. Before
using this guide, become thoroughly familiar with the operation and maintenance
information contained in previous chapters. The Aurora offers system diagnostic
features to help troubleshoot any hardware or system problems that may occur.
System Performance Symptoms

Table 8.1 lists the system performance symptoms for troubleshooting the Aurora.
Table 8.1. System Performance Symptoms
No response No gas flow Check gas source.

Using wrong reagents See Chapter 3, “Reagents” on page 29.
Non-reproducible Sample volume not Check for correct isolation loop size
response for both constant selection.
TIC and TOC Check the isolation loop for bubbles.
Inspect the syringe for leaks or wear.
See Chapter 7, “Maintenance” on
page 295.
Contaminated digestion Cycle the analysis mode with extended
vessel digestion time. See Chapter 7,
“Sanitation Procedures” on page 296.
Insufficient react times Extend react times.
for high TIC samples Increase acid level.
Insufficient acid to Increase acid volume.
completely liberate CO2 Check acid volume. See Chapter 7,
“Maintaining the Acid Reagent Bottle”
on page 296. 2
Leak in system Perform a visual inspection for leaks.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Table 8.1. System Performance Symptoms (Continued)
Non-linear NDIR baseline set too Adjust the NDIR offset to 2,500–3,000
response for TIC high in standby. (For the 1030D, this only
and TOC applies when in Wet Oxidation mode.)
NOTE: The new solid-state NDIR
will auto-adjust to 2,000
2–3 minutes after
powering on the unit.
Blanks not properly Run blanks.
determined or entered
Carbon mass exceeds See Table 13.2 in Chapter 13, “Sample
linear detector range Size” on page 452 for sample volume
selection parameters. Reduce sample
size or dilute the sample.
NDIR not properly Confirm linearity following NDIR
linearized linearization. See Chapter 7, “Checking
NDIR Linearization” on page 302.
Zero values show Improper blank value Properly clean the DI reservoir and
or print (too high) lines using NaOH (see Chapter 7,
“Sanitation Procedure for the Aurora”
on page 297).
Rerun blanks.
Uncalibrated method Run calibration.
Low response for Inaccurate high blank Properly clean the DI reservoir and
both TIC and values for TOC lines using NaOH (see Chapter 7,
TOC “Sanitation Procedure for the Aurora”
on page 297).
Run blanks.
Inaccurate low See Chapter 5, “Calibrating the
calibration Aurora” on page 139.
Inaccurate high sample Enter proper sample volumes. See
volume entered Chapter 5, “Recommended Settings for
the Aurora 1030C” on page 187.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Low response for Restriction in sample Remove restrictions in the system.

TIC with normal gas lines
or reproducible
response for TOC Insufficient acid Increase acid volume.
addition to completely
liberate CO2
Insufficient TIC react Extend TIC react time.
time
Improper acid reagent Confirm using the correct solution. See
Chapter 3, “Reagents” on page 29.
Tubing not submerged Check the tubing position.
in the acid bottle or too
close to the purge gas
line
TIC mass exceeds See Chapter 13, “Sample Size” on
linear range detector page 452 for sample volume selection
parameters. Reduce sample size or
dilute sample.
Acid and oxidant in Switch bottles.
wrong bottles
Leaking acid line Check fittings for the acid line.
Low response for Insufficient acid to Increase acid volume.
TIC with high completely liberate CO2
response for TOC
Insufficient react time Extend react time.
for high TIC samples
No acid addition Verify the acid line to the reservoir is
connected and check the tubing
position.
Low response for Incomplete oxidation, Extend detect time.
TOC with normal insufficient detection Verify furnace temperature is correct.
response for TIC time
TOC mass exceeds See Chapter 13, “Sample Size” on
linear range of detector page 452 for sample volume selection
parameters.
Combustion furnace not Check the sample temperature.
heating

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Low TOC Leak in combustion Perform leak check.

response, high tube or fittings Replace combustion tube, as needed.
TIC response
High response for Low blank values for Run blanks with the same water used to
TIC and TOC TIC and TOC prepare standards.
High response factor Recalibrate the Aurora.
System contamination Visually inspect all surfaces that
contact the sample and clean as needed
with hot water.
Perform the sanitation routine. See
Chapter 7, “Sanitation Procedures” on
page 296.
High TIC blanks CO2 in acid Confirm the reagent bottle is purging.
Purge CO2 from acid.
CO2 in purge gas Install an Ascarite scrubber
(PN 169145) or use higher-quality gas.
High TOC blanks Combustion tube Perform cleanup operations.
contaminated
CO2 in purge gas Install an Ascarite scrubber
(PN 169145) or use higher-quality gas.
Organic carbon in acid Replace with low-TOC acid.
Wrong values for Consider all possible Test solutions for high TIC blanks and
TC-only analysis TIC or TOC blank high TOC blanks when in TC mode.
problems if system is in
TC mode
Baseline shift CO2 prematurely Call OI Analytical Technical Support
during the react reaching the IR. for further assistance.
phase of TIC
resulting in the
peak at detect
starting higher
than original
baseline.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Aurora does not Aurora not plugged into Check the power and cord connection.
power up. an appropriate line
voltage
Blown fuse Check the power breaker to power
outlet. Reset if tripped.
Check the A/C power control board
fuses and replace if blown.
Similar size Both RW and RB use RW takes the water from the DI water
peaks for the the sample volume plus reservoir in order to study the
reagent water and chase. background of the water used in the
reagent blank system. Ensure the source of the DI
seen during water is of the utmost purity before
combustion. running the Aurora. Also, ensure the DI
water reservoir is absolutely clean (see
Chapter 7, “Sanitation Procedure for
the Aurora” on page 297).
System Component Symptoms

Table 8.2 lists some symptoms caused by system components.
Table 8.2. System Component Symptoms
Sample does not Incorrect line volume Enter correct values.

properly aspirate entered
into the Aurora
from the sample Obstruction in the Remove and inspect the sample needle
bottle or sample needle. for blockage, i.e., septum particles,
autosampler particulated sample, etc.
Incorrect syringe size Enter correct value.
entered
Sample line not Check that the sample line connections
properly tightened are fingertight.
Obstruction in the Remove and inspect the sample tubing
sample sipper tube for blockage, i.e., septum particles,
particulated sample, etc. Clip
approximately 0.5" from the end of the
tubing to remove possible blockages.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Table 8.2. System Component Symptoms (Continued)
NDIR baseline Contaminated NDIR Contact the OI Analytical Customer

zero too high sample cell Support Department.
(greater than
8,000 with no Gross CO2 Change the gas cylinder. Use gas with
adjustment) contamination in gas. greater than 99.98% purity.
Slow or sluggish Insufficient transfer gas Verify the gas flow rate.
sample transfer flow.
during TC
sample inject Restriction in sample Inspect the end of tubing at the
inject line injection cap. Trim the end of tubing if
crimped. Replace the ferrule.
Restriction at injection Allow the reactor assembly to cool.
needle Remove the combustion tube assembly
and injector cap. Inspect, clean, or
replace the injector needle.
Restriction in the Repack or replace the combustion tube.
combustion tube See Chapter 7, “Packing the
packing Combustion Tube” on page 305.
Restriction in the Locate and repair the source of the
remainder of flow restriction.
pathway
Sample too viscuous Dilute sample and reanalyze.
Drierite® No counter flow on the Ensure sufficient permeation tube
indicator tube permeation tube sweep gas flow.
turning pink If gas flow is sufficient, replace the
permeation tube.
Flow is running in line Switch sweep gas inlet and outlet.
and not by counter flow
Double peaks on Incorrect sample See Chapter 13, “Sample Size” on
a single injection volume, injection page 452 for proper sample injection
speed, or detect flow conditions.
rate (pressure)
Sample has substances As long as reproducibility is constant,
that are easy and this should not be a problem.
difficult to oxidize
SSNDIR gives Software is reading a There is no problem with the NDIR.
pressure error setting that is no longer Simply go to the Advanced Settings in
required. the Config and open the CO2 Detector.
Change the high alarm to a greater PSI
setting.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Table 8.2. System Component Symptoms (Continued)
Receive EPC Some early versions of Check flow on the EFC. If flow is not
error with no software diagnose the performing to specifications, a sensor
EPC problems EFC as an EPC error. could have gone out. Disconnect the
EFC and call technical support.
Sequence aborts System not responding Software previous to v1.4.2 does not
during the to new temperature allow for temperature drop prior to
Reagent Blank given. heating during a reagent blank. As a
result, the heater times out and cools
off before detect. Software needs to be
upgraded to v1.4.2 to alleviate the
issue.
TOC Issues and Comments

Table 8.3 lists some of the issues and comments related to TOC analysis.
Table 8.3. TOC Issues and Comments
Issue Comment
How long does the Data Transfer Since the DGS on the PC is passive, it
Service (DTS) or Data Gathering does not do anything proactively.
Service (DGS) try to communicate However, the DTS on the device tries to
with each other once that make a connection each time the device is
communication is nonexistent? powered up. If the connection attempt
fails, a warning appears. The system tends
to run slower if the DTS is enabled, but
not working. Turn off the DTS if it is not
going to be used, since the system keeps
the files while waiting for the next
connection to the DGS.
Can problems occur if the DTS or The system runs slower; no other adverse
DGS fails while running, for example, consequences usually occur. If the
if the laptop or PC were disconnected connection is lost for too long, i.e., for too
during a run? many samples, the device could run out of
storage capacity.
How much backlog can the DTS or The DTS continues to store data until it
DGS handle? runs out of disk space. Typically, this
should be a few hundred replicates
(usually enough for a full tray of vials).
How much information or data can the The Run Log stores the most recent 300
Run Log store? entries. Then it deletes the oldest entries
on a first-in-first-out basis.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Table 8.3. TOC Issues and Comments (Continued)
Issue Comment
What do the different symbols on the The blue “i” represents an informational
Run Log mean? message, such as a sequence was loaded
or started. The yellow “!” means a
warning message, such as the DTS/DGS
failed to connect. The red “x” indicates an
error message, such as a hardware
component failed to perform its task when
first asked.
NOTE: The occurrence of a warning

or error does not mean the
system did not complete the
task.
Can an online system be set up to By adding the External I/O module and
automatically take samples or perform the At-Line Autosampler, the system can
a calibration? be configured to automatically calibrate
and sample from different streams.
Can a multiport input/bypass be The At-Line Autosampler contains eight
installed and configured? ports: four QC sample ports to take
samples from incoming streams, three
predefined calibration ports, and one rinse
port. The system can automatically switch
between calibrating and sampling without
reconfiguring the manifold.
Check sample concentrations were A high check standard concentration
high, but still in the pass/fail range. directly results from the calibration curve
Why is this occurring? fit. Using the unconstrained RW improves
this significantly in most cases.
A leak occurred from the autosampler Currently, the instrument has no check-
water source for washing the needle, valve to prevent water from leaking from
because the hose was positioned the needle tower if the rinse bottle is
higher than the container. Beside raised above the height of the needle
repositioning the container, how can tower, causing siphoning. Take care when
this be prevented? positioning the rinse reservoir.

Rev. 5.0
Troubleshooting
Table 8.3. TOC Issues and Comments (Continued)
Issue Comment
When adding a sample to the sequence The system cannot replace a vial within
after a run started (sipper mode), the the sequence, as in adding sample into
sample was prioritized and set to insert vial position 3 to be run in sequence 1, 2,
in vial position 3. The sequence table “3,” 4, etc. The user can only add as a
attached it to the bottom of the list and “high” priority sample, which places it at
indicated it was going to run in vial the top of the sequence that has not yet
position 3. It did not run the sample run, or “normal” priority, which puts it at
until all other samples were finished, the bottom of the sequence. The system
even though it was listed in vial only follows the order of the sequence,
position 3. Why did this occur? not the order of the vials.

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 9 Flow Diagrams
This chapter contains flow diagrams for the various modes of the 1030C. Each mode
includes a description of the mode and a step-by-step explanation of what the 1030C is
doing for that step. These descriptions correspond to the flow diagrams that follow.
1030C Basic Diagrams

This section contains flow diagrams for the various modes of the 1030C. Each mode
includes a description of the mode and a step-by-step explanation of what the 1030C is
doing for that step. These descriptions correspond to the flow diagrams that follow.
This section includes two diagrams: first depicting the configuration of the 1030C with
the standard Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) module, as well as the optional
Electronic Flow Control (EFC) module installed, while the second depicts the 1030C
with the optional Total Bound Nitrogen (TNb) module installed, as well.

Rev. 5.0
Rev. 5.0
1030C - Combustion- TIC/NPOC Mode
Syringe with Loop and Custom Rotary Valve Manifold NDIR
Includes EPC (standard) and EFC (optional)
Basic Diagram
Pres EFC
Flow
Gas Inlet Sensor Module Sensor
w/5um filter
EFC
(EPC) 1000
PLUG Valve
(VSO)
(VSO)
Valve States
B B B
0 1 2
Ch1 Drn A0= 100
Sample
Ch1 Flow A1= 100
(from sipper or A/S) 250 T
100 Perm
Ch1 Sel A2= Needle Tube
POC
Ch2 Drn A3= Sleeve
(optional)
Ch2 Flow A4=
T
Ch2 Sel A5= A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Syringe=
c c Reagent
Syringe Port= Purge
Purge B0=
Sample
Ch1 CAR B1= Sparge A1 A4

N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
Ch2 CAR B2= c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent Vent
the optional EFC Module installed.
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
A0 A3
Drain Condensation
Coil
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Acid
Figure 9.1. 1030C TIC/NPOC Mode with EPC and EFC Basic Diagram
TC Furnace
Flow Diagrams
Figure 9.1 depicts the basic flow for the 1030C in TIC/NPOC mode with the EPC and
355
Rev. 5.0
1030C - Combustion- TIC/NPOC Mode - V5
Syringe with Loop and Custom Rotary Valve Manifold
Includes EPC (standard) and NO EFC NDIR
Pres
Basic Diagram Gas Inlet Sensor
w/5um filter
(EPC) 10
(VSO)
B B B
Valve States 0 1 2
100
Sample
100
Ch1 Drn A0= (from sipper or A/S) 250 T
100 Perm
Ch1 Flow A1= Needle Tube
POC
Sleeve
Ch1 Sel A2= (optional)
T
Ch2 Drn A3=

Ch2 Flow A4= A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch2 Sel A5= c c Reagent
Syringe= Purge
Sample
Syringe Port= Sparge
A1 A4
Purge B0=
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
Expansion
c c

Dryer
Ch1 CAR B1= Volume

Scrubber
and no EFC Module installed.
Ch2 CAR B2= Vent Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
A0 A3
Drain Condensation
Coil
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Acid
Figure 9.2. 1030C TIC/NPOC Mode with EPC Only Basic Diagram
TC Furnace
Flow Diagrams
Figure 9.2 depicts the basic flow of the 1030C in TIC/NPOC mode with only the EPC
356
Flow Diagrams
1030C Prime Mode

The following figures illustrate the flow of gases, sample, acid, and rinse water through
the 1030C during Prime mode. Each figure illustrates the actions performed by the
1030C and the flow of materials during that step of the mode. The following procedure
outlines the process.
1. Rinse water is aspirated.
2. Rinse water is dispensed to waste.
3. A bubble is aspirated.
4. Acid is aspirated.
5. Acid is dispensed to waste.
7. Sample is aspirated.
8. Sample is dispensed to waste.

Rev. 5.0
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
1030C - Combustion- Prime Mode
Includes EPC (standard), EFC (optional), & TNb (optional) Humidifier NDIR
Prime - Rinse Water Diagram 1

30
Pres EFC
Flow
w/5um filter
Valve States
EFC
(EPC) 1000
Valve
(VSO)
Ch1 Drn A0=Off (VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On B B B

0 1 2
Ch1 Sel A2=Off
100
Ch2 Drn A3=Off Sample
100
100 Perm
Ch2 Flow A4=On
Needle Tube
Ch2 Sel A5=On POC
Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe=ASP
T
Syringe Port=H
A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Purge B0=Off
Ch1 CAR B1=On c c Reagent
Purge

Ch2 CAR B2=On
Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
with an EPC, and the EFC and TNb Modules are installed.
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
A0 A3
Figure 9.3. 1030C Aspriating Rinse Water

Drain
Quartz Pt Condensation
Bed Bed Coil
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Acid Orange = sample
Purple = acid
TC Furnace Red = gas
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.3 depicts the 1030C aspirating rinse water. Note that the 1030C is equipped
Flow Diagrams
358
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime - Rinse Dispense Diagram 2

30
Pres EFC
Flow
Valve States w/5um filter
EFC
(EPC) 1000
Ch1 Drn A0=Off Valve
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On
B B B
Ch1 Sel A2=Off 0 1 2
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
100
Ch2 Flow A4=On (from sipper or A/S) 250 T
100 Perm
Ch2 Sel A5=On Needle Tube
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Figure 9.4 depicts the 1030C dispensing rinse water to waste.
A0 A3
Drain
Bed Bed Coil
Figure 9.4. 1030C Dispensing Rinse Water to Waste

Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Purple = acid
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
359
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime – Aspirate Bubble Diagram 3

30
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On
B B B
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=A
T
Purge B0=On A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Figure 9.5 depicts the 1030C aspirating a bubble.
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Figure 9.5. 1030C Aspirating a Bubble

A0 A3
Drain
Bed Bed Coil
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Purple = acid
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
360
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime – Aspirate Acid Diagram 4

30
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On
B B B
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=E
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Figure 9.6 depicts the 1030C aspirating acid.
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
Figure 9.6. 1030C Aspirating Acid

N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
A0 A3
Drain
Bed Bed Coil
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Purple = acid
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
361
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime - Acid to Waste Diagram 5

30
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On
B B B
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
Figure 9.7 depicts the 1030C dispensing the acid to waste.
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
A0 A3
Figure 9.7. 1030C Dispensing Acid to Waste

Drain
Bed Bed Coil
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Purple = acid
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
362
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime – Aspirate Bubble Diagram 6

30
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On
B B B
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=A
T
Purge B0=On A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O

A0 A3
Drain
Bed Bed Coil
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Purple = acid
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
363
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime – Aspirate Sample Diagram 7

30
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On
B B B
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=F
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Figure 9.9 depicts the 1030C aspirating sample.
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Figure 9.9. 1030C Aspirating Sample

A0 A3
Drain
Bed Bed Coil
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Purple = acid
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
364
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime - Sample to Waste Diagram 8

30
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On
B B B
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
Figure 9.10 depicts the 1030C dispensing sample to waste.
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
A0 A3
Drain
Figure 9.10. 1030C Dispensing Sample to Waste

Bed Bed Coil
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Purple = acid
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
365
Flow Diagrams
1030C TIC/NPOC Mode

the 1030C during the TIC/NPOC mode. Each figure illustrates the actions performed by
the 1030C and the flow of materials during that step of the mode. The following
procedure outlines the process.
1. The sample is prepared by aspirating a bubble in the sample from port A.
2. Acid is aspirated.
3. Sample is aspirated.
4. Acid is again aspirated, sandwiching the sample between acids.
5. The TIC is injected into the reaction chamber.
6. The TIC React is completed.
7. The TIC Detect is completed.
8. A bubble is aspirated from port A, as defined in the Configuration screen.
9. The prime sample is reclaimed.
10. The excess reclaimed sample is dispensed to the waste receptacle.
12. The reclaimed sample is aspirated.
13. The sample is injected into the furnace and the NPOC detector.
14. The drain is pressurized for sending sample through.
16. Acid is aspirated to use as a chase through the drain.
17. The waste is drained off and an acid chase is sent behind it through the drain.
18. The condenser is drained to waste.

Rev. 5.0
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Sample Prep Aspirate Bubble Diagram 1

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=On Bypass Scrubber/Dryer
B B B If Equiped with
Ch1 Sel A2=Off 0 1 2 TNB Det
from port A.
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100

Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=A
T
Purge B0=On A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid
Figure 9.11. 1030C TIC/NPOC Mode Sample Prep Aspirate Bubble

Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.11 depicts the 1030C in TIC/NPOC mode aspirating a bubble in the sample
Flow Diagrams
367
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Sample Prep Aspirate Acid Diagram 2

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=E
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Figure 9.12 depicts the 1030C as acid is aspirated.
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Figure 9.12. 1030C in TIC/NPOC Mode Sample Prep Aspirate Acid

Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
368
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Sample Prep Aspirate Sample Diagram 3

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=F
T
Purge B0=On A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Figure 9.13 depicts the 1030C as sample is aspirated.
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Figure 9.13. 1030C in TIC/NPOC Mode Sample Prep Aspirate Sample

Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
369
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Sample Prep Aspirate Acid 2 Diagram 4

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
between acids.

100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=E
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Figure 9.14. 1030C in TIC/NPOC Mode Second Aspiration of Acid

Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.14 depicts the 1030C as acid is again aspirated, sandwiching the sample
Flow Diagrams
370
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
TIC Inject Diagram 5

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
Ch2 Sel A5=Off Needle Tube
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=B
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.15 depicts the 1030C as the TIC is injected into the reaction chamber.
Figure 9.15. 1030C in TIC/NPOC Mode Injecting TIC into Reaction Chamber
Flow Diagrams
371
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
TIC React Diagram 6

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Flow A1=Off Bypass Scrubber/Dryer
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
Figure 9.16 depicts the 1030C while in TIC React mode.
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Figure 9.16. 1030C in TIC/NPOC in TIC React Mode

Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
372
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
TIC Detect Diagram 7

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch1 Sel A2=On 0 1 2 TNB Det
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
Ch2 Sel A5=Off Needle Tube
POC
Syringe=HOME Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=Off
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
Figure 9.17 depicts the 1030C while in TIC Detect mode.
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
Figure 9.17. 1030C in TIC Detect Mode

A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
373
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Aspirate Bubble Diagram 8

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=A
T
Purge B0=On A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=Off
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Figure 9.18 depicts the 1030C aspirating a bubble from port A.
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Figure 9.18. 1030C Aspirating a Bubble from Port A

Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
374
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Prime Reclaim Sample Diagram 9

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=B
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=Off
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Figure 9.19 depicts the 1030C reclaiming prime sample.
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Figure 9.19. 1030C in TIC/NPOC Mode Prime Reclaim Sample

Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
375
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Dispense Excess Reclaim to Waste Diagram 10

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
receptacle.

Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=Off
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Figure 9.20. 1030C Dispensing Excess Reclaim Sample to Waste

Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
Figure 9.20 depicts the 1030C as it dispenses the excess reclaimed sample to the waste
376
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Aspirate Bubble Diagram 11

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
method.

Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=A
T
Purge B0=On A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=Off
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation

A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.21 depicts the 1030C in TIC/NPOC mode showing the aspirate bubble
Flow Diagrams
377
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Aspirate Reclaim Sample Diagram 12

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=B
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=Off
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Figure 9.22 depicts the 1030C aspirating the reclaimed sample.
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Figure 9.22. 1030C Aspirating Reclaimed Sample

Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
378
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Inject Sample to Furnace/NPOC Detect Diagram 13

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
detector.

Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=C
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=Off
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.23. 1030C Injecting Reclaimed Sample into Furnace and NPOC Detector
Flow Diagrams
Figure 9.23 depicts the 1030C injecting reclaimed sample into the furnace and NPOC
379
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Drain Pressurize Diagram 14

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Figure 9.24 depicts the 1030C pressurizing drain.
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Figure 9.24. 1030C Pressurizing the Drain

Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
380
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Acid Chase Aspirate Bubble Diagram 15

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=A
T
Purge B0=On A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation

A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Flow Diagrams
381
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Acid Chase Aspirate Acid Diagram 16

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=ASP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=E
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Figure 9.26. 1030C Aspirating an Acid Chase for the Drain

Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.26 depicts the 1030C aspirating an acid chase to send through the drain.
Flow Diagrams
382
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Drain w/ Acid Chase Diagram 17

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
chase.
Ch1 Drn A0=On Valve

(VSO)
(VSO)
Ch2 Drn A3=Off 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=DISP Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=B
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
Figure 9.27. 1030C Sending Waste and an Acid Chase Through the Drain
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.27 depicts the 1030C sending waste through the drain, followed by an acid
Flow Diagrams
383
Rev. 5.0
TNB
Det
Condenser Drain Diagram 18

30
Gauge Port
Pres EFC
Flow
EFC
(EPC) 1000
(VSO)
(VSO)
sequence.
Ch2 Drn A3=On 100
Sample
Ch2 Flow A4=On 100
100 Perm
POC
Syringe=HOME Sleeve
(optional)
Syringe Port=G
T
Purge B0=Off A2 A5
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Ch1 CAR B1=On
c c Reagent
Ch2 CAR B2=On Purge

Sample
Sparge A1 A4
N
C
N
N
C
N
O
O
Loop
c c Expansion
Dryer
Scrubber
Volume
Vent
Syringe
Fill Bypass H A
G B
L
F C
Chamber
E D #1
Condensor
Chamber
Syringe
Waste
Rinse
Water
c c
N
C
N
O
N
C
N
O
Condensation
A0 A3 Coil
Drain
Quartz Pt
Bed Bed
Figure 9.28. 1030C Draining the Condenser to Waste

Color Legend
Blue = rinse water
Orange = sample
Acid Purple = acid
Red = gas
TC Furnace
Yellow = CO2
Figure 9.28 depicts the 1030C draining the condenser to waste at the end of the
Flow Diagrams
384
Flow Diagrams
1030C Solid State NDIR Detector Flow Diagrams

the 1030C while using the new Solid State NDIR (SSNDIR) detector. Note that this
detector includes an additional purge gas line used to clear the SSNDIR after detection
is completed. These diagrams consist of one flow diagram with the optional EFC
module installed in the 1030C and one diagram with the EFC Blank installed.

Rev. 5.0
Flow Diagrams
Figure 9.29 depicts the 1030C with the new SSNDIR and the optional EFC Module
installed.
Figure 9.29. 1030C Flow with SSNDIR and EFC

Rev. 5.0
Flow Diagrams
Figure 9.30 depicts the flow of the 1030C with the new SSNDIR and the EFC Blank
installed.
Figure 9.30. 1030C Flow with SSNDIR and EFC Blank

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 10 Assembly
Drawings
This chapter contains assembly drawings of the Aurora 1030C, with tables containing
parts information corresponding to the drawings. Each table contains a description of
the listed part, the quantity required, and part number(s).
Figure 10.1. Electronics Module 1
Table 10.1. Electronics Module 1 Parts List
Quantity
Item PN Description Order PN
Required
- 322114 1030 full electronics module with display 1 322114

11 242941 Line filter, 6A, quick connect 1 242941
21 324575 Power supply, 12 VDC 1 324575

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Table 10.1. Electronics Module 1 Parts List (Continued)
Quantity
Required
31 321086 Display bezel 1 032086

7 323126 PIC main board 1 323126

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Figure 10.2. Electronics Module 2
Table 10.2. Electronics Module 2 Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322114 1030 full electronics module with display 1 322114

18 328097-V1.4.2 Kit, Windows CE, SOM processor board, V1.4.2 1 328097-V1.4.2
replacement kit
26 328099 Display replacement kit SOM 1 328099

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
12

30

28

27

24

32

31

35

34

29

33

36

5 6 8
25

19

20

Figure 10.3. Aurora 1030C Sample Handling Module, PN 322112
Table 10.3. Aurora 1030C Sample Handling Module Parts List
Quantity
Required
5 124420 Union fitting, bulkhead, brass 1 124420

6 169723 Union fitting, bulkhead, stainless steel, 1/8" tube 1 169723
8 323447 Purge fitting assembly 1 323447
12 324200 Circuit board, TC/IO 1 324200
19 322309 Power supply, 110/240 VAC, 24 VDC, 150 W 1 322309

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Table 10.3. Aurora 1030C Sample Handling Module Parts List
Quantity
Required
20 322308 Axial fan assembly, 12 VDC 1 322308

24 322665 EFC blank manifold assembly 1 322665
25 322667 Drain manifold assembly 1 322667
27 322215 Select manifold assembly 1 323995
28 323922 Assembly, EPC gas manifold 1030 1 323922
29 324474 Syringe pump assembly with valve 1 324474
30 322139 or High-volume or low-volume spindle assembly 1 322139 or
322933 322933
31 322307 Halide scrubber assembly with fittings 1 322307
32 322306 Drierite drier assembly with fittings 1 322306
33 322302 TOC 1030 reaction chamber 1 322302
34 322947 Combustion condensate chamber assembly 1 322947
35 324555 NDIR linearized detector (Old-Golay) 1 322455
35 325007 Solid state (SSD) NDIR linearized detector (New) 1 325007
36 264119 Permeation tube assembly, 96" 1 264119

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
REF
Each valve includes:

1 Gasket (PN 326481)
2 Screws (PN 326127)
1
REF x 4
8 x REF
Figure 10.4. Select Manifold Assembly
Table 10.4. Select Manifold Assembly Parts List
Order Part
Item Part Number Description Quantity
Number
- 322215 Select manifold assembly 1 322215

1 322212 TIC/TOC select manifold 1 322212
2 326129 Valve, 3 Way 12V ISOL 1030 Drain & Select 4 326129
3 321957 Panel nut 1 1/8" x 12 knurled CPVC 1 321957
4 323611 Fitting adapter, ¼-28 to 1/16 hose 2 324007
- 326481 Gasket, Valve 1030 Drain & Select/Solids 1 per valve 326481
- 326127 Screw, Socket Head SS 2-56 x 1/2" 2 per valve 326127

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
REF X 4
Each valve includes:

1 Gasket (PN 326481)
2 Screws (PN 326127)
2 X2
REF X 2
1
Figure 10.5. Drain Manifold Assembly
Table 10.5. Drain Manifold Assembly Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322667 Drain manifold assembly 1 322667

1 322666 Drain manifold 1 322666
2 326129 Valve–3 way 12V ISOL 1030 Drain & Select 2 326129
3 321957 Panel nut 1 1/8" x 12 knurl CPVC 1 321957
- 326481 Gasket–Valve 1030 Drain & Select/Solids 1 per valve 326481
- 326127 Screw–Socket Head SS 2– 56 x 1/2 2 per valve 326127

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
2 x2
Figure 10.6. Reaction Chamber
Table 10.6. Reaction Chamber Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322302 TOC 1030 reaction chamber 1 322302

1 322856 TIC/TOC reactor chamber 1 322856
2 324084 FTNG-NUT CPVC 1/4"-28 x 1/8" RV 2 324084
3 321743 TFE ferrule, 18 mm 1 321743 (10 pk)
4 224675 Stainless steel nut, 18 mm knurled female 1 224675

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Table 10.6. Reaction Chamber Parts List (Continued)
Quantity
Required
5 321256 TIC/TOC upper chamber manifold 1 321256

6 178574 Stainless steel nut, 1/4" male 1 178574
7 224337 TFE tube ferrule, 6 mm 1 224337
8 325855 Tube– 1/16" x .040 ID Flared 1030 1 325855

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Figure 10.7. Combustion Condensate Chamber Assembly
Table 10.7. Combustion Condensate Chamber Assembly
Quantity
Required
- 322947 Combustion condensation chamber assembly 1 322947

1 323043 Tube, condensate chamber, combustion 1 323043
2 324084 FTNG-NUT CPVC 1/4" -28 x 1/8" PV 1 324084 (5 pk)
3 321743 TFE ferrule, 18 mm 1 321743 (5 pk)

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Table 10.7. Combustion Condensate Chamber Assembly
Quantity
Required

5 321256 TIC/TOC upper chamber manifold 1 321256
6 178574 Stainless steel nut, 1/4" male 1 178574
7 302257 TFE ferrule, reducing, 1/4" x 1/8" 1 323917 (5 pk)

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings

4
2
3
Figure 10.8. Isolation Loop High-Volume Spindle Assembly
Table 10.8. Isolation Loop High-Volume Spindle Assembly Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322139 Isolation loop high-volume spindle assembly 1 322139

2 319734 TFE tubing, 1/8" 0.08 I.D., blue 14.58 ft 319734
3 319345 PEEK fitting nut, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, blue 2 323904 (5 pk)
4 317545 Tefzel fitting, 1/8" flangeless 1 323903 (5 pk)

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings

3
4
2
Figure 10.9. Isolation Loop Low-Volume Spindle Assembly
Table 10.9. Isolation Loop Low-Volume Spindle Assembly Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322933 Isolation loop low-volume spindle assembly 1 322933

2 319345 PEEK fitting nut, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, blue 2 323904 (5 pk)
3 317545 Tefzel fitting, 1/8" flangeless 1 323903 (5 pk)
4 319606 TFE tubing 1/8" 0.062 I.D., green 6.41 ft 319606

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
1
2
Figure 10.10. Syringe Pump and Valve
Table 10.10. Syringe Pump and Valve Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322219 Syringe pump assembly with valve 1 322219

1 322220 Syringe pump assembly, no valve 1 322220
2 322221 Eight-port syringe pump valve 1 322221

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
6
2
5
4
Figure 10.11. Halide Scrubber Assembly
Table 10.11. Halide Scrubber Assembly Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322307 Halide scrubber assembly with fittings 1 322307

2 321971 Fitting, endcap, 5/16"-24 to 1/4"-28 2 321971
4 110957 Fiberglass wool, 3.5 grams 0.2 gram 110957
5 265223 Copper shot, small, 100 gram 20 gram 265223
6 166430 Plug fitting, nylon, 1/4"-28 2 166430

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
6
2
5
4
Figure 10.12. Drierite Assembly
Table 10.12. Drierite Assembly Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322306 Drierite drier assembly with fittings 1 322306

2 321971 Fitting, endcap 5/16"-24 to 1/4"-28 2 321971
4 110957 Fiberglass wool, 3.5 grams 0.2 110957
5 320449 Drierite indicating, 1 lb bottle, small, 100 gram 0.05 lb 320449
6 166430 Plug fitting, nylon, 1/4"-28 2 166430

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Figure 10.13. NDIR Detector
Table 10.13. NDIR Detector Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 324555 NDIR linearized detector (Old-Golay) 1 324555

- 325007 Solid state (SSD) NDIR linearized detector (New) 1 325007
4 116731 O-ring, EPR 568-018 2 116731
15 322278 NDIR path, gold plated (Contact OI Analytical 1 322278
service)

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
5
6
3
Figure 10.14. External Expansion I/O Module
Table 10.14. External Expansion I/O Module Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322785 External input/output module 1 322785

3 322844 Input/output expansion board 1 322844
5 321131 Cable, not ready, LED, red 4 321131
6 321130 Cable, power on, LED, green 9 321130

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
8
2
Figure 10.15. Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module
Table 10.15. Autocalibration/Stream Sequener Module Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322314 Autocalibration/Stream sequencer sampler assembly 1 322314

2 322330 Autocalibration/Stream sequencer valve manifold 1 322330
assembly
8 322190 Autocalibration/Stream sequencer sampler board 1 322190

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
1
($&+9$/9(,1&/8'(6,1',9,'8$/
6($/,1**$6.(76
21(3,(&(*$6.(7'(6,*1
86('21/$7(581,76
2 [
Figure 10.16. Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module Manifold
Table 10.16. Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module Manifold Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 322330 Autocalibration/Stream sequencer valve manifold 1 322330

assembly
1 322415 Autocalibration/Stream sequencer manifold / gasket 1 322415
assembly
2 321908 Valve, three-way, isolation, 12 V 8 321908

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
25

27

26

24

23

22

Figure 10.17. Combustion Module 1
Table 10.17. Combustion Module 1 Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 323577 Combustion tube packing kit, 680 °C (packing 1 323577

materials only, combustion tube not included)
- 323881 Combustion tube kit (includes 321268, 323577, 1 323881
321698, 324028, and 324565)

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Table 10.17. Combustion Module 1 Parts List (Continued)
Quantity
Required
22 321268 Combustion tube, quartz, divided 1 321268

23 323680 Coil, combustion option 1 323680
25 322939 Combustion cap 1 322939
26 321698 TFE ferrule, 15% GLS 18 mm 1 321698
27 324565 Injector insert, 0.02 I.D. x 2.25" 1 323684

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
1
11

17
2
4
Figure 10.18. Combustion Module 2
Table 10.18. Combustion Module 2 Parts List
Quantity
Required
1 322379 Furnace, assembly 1030 TOC 1 322739

2 253336 Relay, 3-32 VDC/120–240, 25 A 1 253336
4 322378 Fan assembly, 1030 combustion 1 322378
11 322380 Combustion furnace sensor 1 322380
17 322198 Cable, 1030 combustion option 1 322198

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
6
5
8
9
7
Figure 10.19. Combustion Tube
Table 10.19. Combustion Tube Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 323577 Combustion tube packing kit, 680 °C (packing 1 323577

materials only, combustion tube not included)
- 323881 Combustion tube kit (includes 321268, 323577, 1 323881
321698, 324028, and 324565)
5 321268 Combustion tube, quartz, divided 1 321268
6 323683 Tube elbow, quartz 1 323683
7 322950 Tubing, Viton, 5/16" x 1/2" O.D. 1.5" 322950
8 281121 Platinum 80 mesh, 1.0" square 1 281121
9 295816 Hose clamp, 1/2" red 1 323668 (5 pk)

Rev. 5.0
Assembly Drawings
Table 10.19. Combustion Tube Parts List
Quantity
Required
- 324028 Quartz elbow tube assembly (includes 281121, 1 324028

295816, 322950, and 323683)

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 11 Replacement
Parts
This chapter lists the part numbers for replacement parts and support items for the
Aurora 1030W (wet oxidation mode), Aurora 1030C (combustion mode), and Aurora
1030D (dual mode) TOC Analyzers and their associated options.
Aurora TOC Analyzer Parts

Table 11.1 lists the parts assemblies, unit capacity, and part numbers.
Table 11.1. Assemblies
Product Unit PN
1030 full electronics module with display each 322114

At-line manifold gasket assembly each 322415
At-line sampler assembly each 322314
At-line valve manifold assembly each 322330
Axial fan assembly, 12 VDC each 322308
Circuit board, TC/IO circuit board each 324200
Front cover assembly each 322935
Drain manifold assembly each 322667
Drierite drier assembly with fittings each 322306
EFC module option kit each 324570
EFC blank manifold assembly each 322665
EPC module assembly with fittings each 323922
External input/output module assembly each 323025
External input/output option each 322785
Front cover assembly, plastic each 322935
Halide scrubber assembly with fittings each 322307
High volume spindle assembly each 322139
Input/output expansion board each 322844
Kit - 1030 Sample heater each 325406

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Table 11.1. Assemblies (Continued)
Product Unit PN
Low volume spindle assembly each 322933

Module, TOC 1030C each 322113
Module, TOC 1030W each 322112
Permeation tube assembly each 264119
PIC main board each 323126
Power supply, 110/220 V, 24 VDC, 150 W each 322309
Power supply, 12 VDC each 320593
Purge fitting assembly each 323447
Quartz tube, elbow assembly, 1030C (includes each 324028
281121, 295816, 322950, and 323683)
Reagent cap for 1-L reagent bottle, with O-ring and each 322450
fitting
Select manifold assembly each 323995
Speaker assembly each 321464
TNb detector option kit each 324033
TNb humidifier assembly each 322609
TNb module each 322608
TNb nitric oxide sensor replacement cell kit, tested each 323417-T
(includes 321305, 321306, 323417-A, and PS-0005)
TNb catalyst replacement kit each 324563
TOC 1030 reaction chamber each 322302
Vent plug tube assembly each 248864
Table 11.2 lists the cables and part numbers for the Aurora.
Table 11.2. Cables
Product Unit PN
Cable assembly, serial printer, COM 3 each 321142

Cable, 1030 combustion option each 322198
Cable, 40P 2 mm IDC rib 28" each 321132
Cable, AC filter/main PCA each 320650

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Table 11.2. Cables
Product Unit PN
Cable, AC in filter/ground each 320648

Cable, SOM to LCD panel each 328351
Cable, EPC assembly to TC I/O PCA each 322312
Cable, interface, electronic to pneumatic each 320640
Cable, WIN CE to main each 321007
Cable, main power supply PCA each 320649
Cable, not ready LED red each 321131
Cable, power entry MOD DPST each 321492
Cable, power entry to filter each 321491
Cable, power on, LED green each 321130
Cable, power supply, DC main PCA each 320642
Cable, RS 485, RJ12/RJ12, six conductor, 2 ft each 322310
Cable, RS 485, RJ12/RJ12, six conductor, 7 ft each 322313
Cable, touchscreen each 326037
Chamber 1 cable harness each 322217
Chamber 2 cable harness each 322218
Detector board cable, five-pin, Fuji each 308320
Kit, Cable/PCA, Syringe Drive each 324134
LAN cable, network crossover, 10 ft each 321901
Power cord, 125 V, 10 A, American each 116038
Syringe drive cable each 322192
Table 11.3 lists the ferrules, fittings, and tubing, along with parts numbers and units
included for each part number, used the Aurora.
Table 11.3. Ferrules, Fittings, and Tubing
Product Unit PN
Adapter fitting, brass/nickel, 1/8" each 196600

Cap screw, stainless steel, 8-32, 3/4" each 144311
CPVC adapter fitting, 1/4"-28 x 1/4"-28 each 322769

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Table 11.3. Ferrules, Fittings, and Tubing (Continued)
Product Unit PN
Ferrule, TFE, 15% GLS 18 mm each 321698

Ferrule, TFE, 18 mm 10/pk 321743
Ferrule, TFE, reducing, 1/4" x 1/8" 5/pk 323917
Fitting-Adapter Restrictor/Check Valve w/O-ring each 326800
Fitting-Assembly Pair 105 ML Restrictor/Duckbill each 326780
Fitting-Assembly 105 ML Restrictor/Duckbill each 326784
Fitting nut, clear, poly. 1/4"-28 1/8", flangeless 5/pk 323916
Fitting nut, CPVC 1/4"–28 x 1/8" RV each 324084
Fitting nut, female, brass, 1/8" each 128108
Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless each 319343
Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless 5/pk 323907
Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, blue 5/pk 323904
Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, green 5/pk 323914
Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, red 5/pk 323910
Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8", flangeless, yellow 5/pk 323912
Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/16" black 5/pk 323905
Fitting nut, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, black 5/pk 323909
Fitting nut, Tefzel, 1/4"-28 x 1/8" natural each 322311
Fitting, endcap, 5/16"-24 to 1/4"-28 each 321971
Fitting, Luer-Lok™, male, 1/16" polypropylene 10/pk A001769
Fitting, polypropylene, 1/16" tee 5/pk 323997
Fitting, 1/4"-28 1/16" hose barb 5/pk 324007
Grommet, rubber each 114538
Hose clamp, 4–6" each 322225
Hose clamp, 1/2" red (order for 295816) 5/pk 323668
Leak plug splitter, reagent each 322931
Nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 x 0.076 each A000261
Nut, stainless steel, 1/4" male each 178574

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Product Unit PN
Nylon plug, 1/4-28 5/pk 323911

O-ring, #15 S70 each 280198
O-ring, EPR, 560-018 each 116731
O-ring, Viton, 0.20 x 0.07 10/pk A002671
Plug fitting, nylon, 1/4"-28 each 166430
Plug, Tefzel, 1/8" flangeless 5/pk 323903
Plug, Tefzel, 1/4"-28 each A000267
Pushlock splitter, 1/8", 3-way each 319861
Pushlock splitter, 1/8", 4-way fitting cross each 325105
Restrictor-Flow 105CCM @20 PSI 1% Long (Pair) each 326132
Restrictor-Flow 105CCM @20 PSI 5% Long each 326904
Restrictor-Flow 280/250CCM N2/O2 @20 PSI 5% each 326643
Taper fitting, bulkhead, 1/16" each A383-0302-00
TFE tubing 1/8" 0.03 I.D. ft 112300
TFE tubing, 1/8" 0.08 I.D., blue ft 319734
Tube 1030 EPC Carrier Chamber 1 or 2 each 327402
Tube ferrule, TFE, 6 mm each 224337
Tube–1/16” O.D. x .040 I.D. Flared 1030 each 325855
Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.03 I.D., red ft 319333
Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.03 wall ft 147901
Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., black ft 319293
Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., blue ft 319607
Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., green ft 319606
Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., red ft 319328
Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., yellow ft 319329
Tubing, TFE, 1/16" 0.031 I.D. ft 145591
Tubing, urethane 1/8" O.D., red ft 282848
Tubing, Viton, 1.5", Combustion tube ft 324139

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Product Unit PN
Tubing, Viton, 1/2" ft 324139

Union fitting, bulkhead, brass each 124420
Union fitting, bulkhead, brass/nickel, 1/8" each 225565
Union fitting, bulkhead, stainless steel, 1/8" tube each 169723
Union fitting, female/female, 1/4"-28 polypropylene 5/pk 323908
Union fitting, stainless steel, 4 mm x 1/8" 5/pk 323906
Valve, Brass Vented Ball each 325577
Valve-Check Pair (Duckbill) each 326798
Valve-Needle 1/4-28 1/8 tube PEEK Black each 326786
Washer, TFE, .210DIA x .070 ID each 323689
Table 11.4 lists miscellaneous items used in the 1030 that are not covered in other
tables.
Table 11.4. Miscellaneous
Product Unit PN
1030 User interface software, 1030C operator’s manual, each 323421

1030W operator’s manual, 1088 Rotary Autosampler
operator’s manual, 1096+ XYZ Autosampler operator’s
manual, on CD
Aurora 1030C and 1030W operator’s manual and each 323421
software on CD
1030C Startup kit each 322272
1030C Accessory kit each 324285
1030W Accessory kit each 323058
1088 Rotary Autosampler operator’s manual each 323421
1096+ XYZ Autosampler operator’s manual each 323421
At-line sampler board each 322190
Axial flow fan, 3.15 sq 1.25", 12V, 30 CFM each 322795
Ball stud, 6-32 female, 0.421" H each 321907
Battery, 9 V, alkaline 5/pk PS-0005
Bottle cap, 24-400 Kel-F each 288985

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Table 11.4. Miscellaneous (Continued)
Product Unit PN
Clip fitting each A303-0709-00

Coil, combustion option each 323680
Combustion cap each 322939
Combustion furnace cover each 322098
Combustion furnace lid cover each 322099
Combustion furnace sensor each 322380
Combustion furnace sleeve each 322895
Combustion tube, quartz divided each 321268
Combustion tube packing kit, 680 °C each 323577
Combustion tube kit (includes 321268, 323577, 321698, each 323881
and 324565)
Component clip each 264-901
Conditioned catalyst 10 g 323882
Copper shot, small, for 1030 TOC 100 g 265223
Cover, main each 321251
Display bezel each 321086
Display replacement kit SOM each 328099
Drain manifold each 322666
Drierite, indicating, 1-lb bottle each 320449
Electronics bezel cover each 322044
External TIC sparge kit each 326785
Fiberglass wool, 3.5 grams each 110957
Funnel 9.9 mm O.D. each 286989
Fuse, 3.15A 5mm x 20mm each 257329
Fuse, 6.3A, Slo-Blo®, 20 mm each 249177
Clip, glass, loop each 263798
Bottle, HDPE wide mouth, 1 oz. each 145608
Injector insert, 0.02 I.D. x 2.25" each 324565
Instrument cover, electronics side each 321654

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Product Unit PN
IR detector controller board each 312283

Line filter, 6A, quick connect each 242941
NDIR linearized detector (NEW) each 325007
NDIR linearized detector (OLD) each 324555
One-year preventive maintenance program kit, 1030C each 323268
One-year preventive maintenance program kit, 1030D each 323269
One-year preventative maintenance program kit, 1030W each 323267
Nut, panel, 1 1/8" x 12 knurl CPVC each 321957
Platinum 80 mesh, 1.0" square each 281121
Pressure transducer each 320670
Quartz, crushed, coarse 12 g 323880
Quartz wool fiber 3.5 g 144501
Reagent bottle, 1 L each 322444
Reagent bottle, 1 L, accessory kit, for 1030C each 324285
Reagent bottle, 1 L, accessory kit, for 1030D each 324293
Reagent bottle, 1 L, accessory kit, for 1030W each 324279
Reagent rack each 321295
Relay, 3–32 VDC/120–240, 25 A each 253336
Sparger wrench, 11/8" open end each 227975
Cap screw, stainless steel, 4-40 3/8" each 183319
Nut, stainless steel, 18 mm, knurled, female each 224675
TIC/TOC reactor chamber each 322856
TIC/TOC select manifold each 322212
TIC/TOC upper chamber manifold each 321256

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Product Unit PN
TNb nitric oxide replacement cell kit, tested (includes each 323417-T
321305, 321306, 323417-A, and PS-0005)
TOC install kit each 250605
Touchscreen stylus each 321585
Tube, condensate chamber, combustion each 323043
Vial, 40-mL each 320930
Windows CE, SOM processor board replacement kit, each 328097-
V1.4.2 V1.4.2
Wrench 1" open end each 319602
Table 11.5 lists the valves and syringe pumps in the Aurora, along with part numbers.
Table 11.5. Valves and Syringe Pumps
Product Unit PN
Syringe pump valve, eight-port each 322221

Syringe pump assembly with valve each 324474
Syringe pump assembly, no valve each 322220
Syringe, 1.0 mL for syringe pump each 322790
Valve, 3-way 12V ISOL 1030 Drain and Select each 326129
Part Number Lookup Table

Table 11.6 lists the parts by part number.
Table 11.6. Part Number Lookup
PN Product Unit
264-901 Component clip each

110957 Fiberglass wool, 3.5 grams each

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
Table 11.6. Part Number Lookup (Continued)
PN Product Unit
112300 TFE tubing 1/8" 0.03 I.D. ft

114538 Grommet, rubber each
116038 Power cord, 125 V, 10 A, American each
116731 O-ring, EPR, 560-018 each
124420 Union fitting, bulkhead, brass each
128108 Fitting nut, female, brass, 1/8" each
144311 Cap screw, stainless steel, 8-32, 3/4" each
144501 Quartz wool fiber 3.5 g
145591 Tubing, TFE, 1/16" 0.031 I.D. ft
145608 Bottle, HDPE wide mouth, 1 oz. each
147901 Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.03 wall ft
166430 Plug fitting, nylon, 1/4"-28 each
169723 Union fitting, bulkhead, stainless steel, 1/8" tube each
178574 Nut, stainless steel, 1/4" male each
183319 Cap screw, stainless steel, 4-40 3/8" each
196600 Adapter fitting, brass/nickel, 1/8" each
224337 Tube ferrule, TFE, 6 mm each
224675 Nut, stainless steel, 18 mm, knurled, female each
225565 Union fitting, bulkhead, brass/nickel, 1/8" each
227975 Sparger wrench, 11/8" open end each
242941 Line filter, 6A, quick connect each
248864 Vent plug tube assembly each
249177 Fuse, 6.3A, Slo-Blo®, 20 mm each
250605 TOC install kit each

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
PN Product Unit
253336 Relay, 3–32 VDC/120–240, 25 A each

257329 Fuse, 3.15A 5mm x 20mm each
263798 Clip, glass, loop each
264119 Permeation tube assembly each
265223 Copper shot, small, for 1030 TOC 100 g
280198 O-ring, #15 S70 each
281121 Platinum 80 mesh, 1.0" square each
282848 Tubing, urethane 1/8" O.D., red ft
286989 Funnel 9.9 mm O.D. each
288985 Bottle cap, 24-400 Kel-F each
308320 Detector board cable, five-pin, Fuji each
312283 IR detector controller board each
319293 Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., black ft
319328 Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., red ft
319329 Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., yellow ft
319333 Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.03 I.D., red ft
319343 Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless each
319602 Wrench 1" open end each
319606 Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., green ft
319607 Tubing, TFE, 1/8" 0.062 I.D., blue ft
319734 TFE tubing, 1/8" 0.08 I.D., blue ft
319861 Pushlock splitter, 1/8" 3-way each
320449 Drierite, indicating, 1-lb bottle each
320593 Power supply, 12 VDC each
320640 Cable, interface, electronic to pneumatic each
320642 Cable, power supply, DC main PCA each
320648 Cable, AC in filter/ground each
320649 Cable, main power supply PCA each

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
PN Product Unit
320650 Cable, AC filter/main PCA each

320670 Pressure transducer each
320930 Vial, 40-mL each
321007 Cable, WIN CE to main each
321086 Display bezel each
321130 Cable, power on, LED green each
321131 Cable, not ready LED red each
321132 Cable, 40P 2 mm IDC rib 28" each
321142 Cable assembly, serial printer, COM 3 each
321251 Cover, main each
321256 TIC/TOC upper chamber manifold each
321268 Combustion tube, quartz divided each
321295 Reagent rack each
321464 Speaker assembly each
321491 Cable, power entry to filter each
321492 Cable, power entry MOD DPST each
321585 Touchscreen stylus each
321654 Instrument cover, electronics side each
321698 Ferrule, TFE, 15% GLS 18 mm each
321743 Ferrule, TFE, 18 mm 10/pk
321901 LAN cable, network crossover, 10 ft each
321907 Ball stud, 6-32 female, 0.421" H each
321957 Nut, panel, 1 1/8" x 12 knurl CPVC each
321971 Fitting, endcap, 5/16"-24 to 1/4"-28 each
322044 Electronics bezel cover each
322098 Combustion furnace cover each
322099 Combustion furnace lid cover each
322112 Module, TOC 1030W each

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
PN Product Unit
322113 Module, TOC 1030C each

322114 1030 full electronics module with display each
322139 High volume spindle assembly each
322190 At-line sampler board each
322192 Syringe drive cable each
322198 Cable, 1030 combustion option each
322212 TIC/TOC select manifold each
322217 Chamber 1 cable harness each
322218 Chamber 2 cable harness each
322220 Syringe pump assembly, no valve each
322221 Syringe pump valve, eight-port each
322225 Hose clamp, 4–6" each
322272 1030C Startup kit each
322302 TOC 1030 reaction chamber each
322306 Drierite drier assembly with fittings each
322307 Halide scrubber assembly with fittings each
322308 Axial fan assembly, 12 VDC each
322309 Power supply, 110/220 V, 24 VDC, 150 W each
322310 Cable, RS 485, RJ12/RJ12, six conductor, 2 ft each
322311 Fitting nut, Tefzel, 1/4"-28 x 1/8" natural each
322312 Cable, EPC assembly to TC I/O PCA each
322313 Cable, RS 485, RJ12/RJ12, six conductor, 7 ft each
322314 At-line sampler assembly each
322330 At-line valve manifold assembly each
322380 Combustion furnace sensor each
322415 At-line manifold gasket assembly each
322444 Reagent bottle, 1 L each
322450 Reagent cap for 1-L reagent bottle, with O-ring and each
fitting

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
PN Product Unit
322608 TNb module each

322609 TNb humidifier assembly each
322665 EFC blank manifold assembly each
322666 Drain manifold each
322667 Drain manifold assembly each
322769 CPVC adapter fitting, 1/4"-28 x 1/4"-28 each
322785 External input/output option each
322790 Syringe, 1.0 mL for syringe pump each
322795 Axial flow fan, 3.15 sq 1.25", 12V, 30 CFM each
322844 Input/output expansion board each
322856 TIC/TOC reactor chamber each
322895 Combustion furnace sleeve each
322931 Leak plug splitter, reagent each
322933 Low volume spindle assembly each
322935 Front cover assembly each
322935 Front cover assembly, plastic each
322939 Combustion cap each
323025 External input/output module assembly each
323043 Tube, condensate chamber, combustion each
323058 1030W Accessory kit each
323126 PIC main board each
323267 One-year preventative maintenance program kit, each
1030W
323268 One-year preventive maintenance program kit, 1030C each
323269 One-year preventive maintenance program kit, 1030D each

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
PN Product Unit
323417-T TNb nitric oxide sensor replacement cell kit, tested each
(includes 321305, 321306, 323417-A, and PS-0005)
323421 1030 User interface software, 1030C operator’s each
manual, 1030W operator’s manual, 1088 Rotary
Autosampler operator’s manual, 1096+ XYZ
Autosampler operator’s manual, on CD
323421 1088 Rotary Autosampler operator’s manual each
323421 1096+ XYZ Autosampler operator’s manual each
323421 Aurora 1030C and 1030W operator’s manual and each
software on CD
323447 Purge fitting assembly each
323577 Combustion tube, packed, 680 °C kit each
323668 Hose clamp, 1/2" red (order for 295816) 5/pk
323680 Coil, combustion option each
323689 Washer, TFE, .210DIA x .070 ID each
323880 Quartz, crushed, coarse 12 g
323881 Kit, Combustion Tube (includes 321268, each
323577,321698, and 324565)
323882 Conditioned catalyst 10 g
323903 Plug, Tefzel, 1/8" flangeless 5/pk
323904 Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, blue 5/pk
323905 Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/16" black 5/pk
323906 Union fitting, stainless steel, 4 mm x 1/8" 5/pk
323907 Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless 5/pk
323908 Union fitting, female/female, 1/4"-28 polypropylene 5/pk
323909 Fitting nut, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, black 5/pk
323910 Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, red 5/pk
323911 Nylon plug, 1/4-28 5/pk
323912 Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8", flangeless, yellow 5/pk
323914 Fitting nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 1/8" flangeless, green 5/pk

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
PN Product Unit
323417-T TNb nitric oxide replacement cell kit, tested (includes each
321305, 321306, 323417-A, and PS-0005)
323916 Fitting nut, clear, poly. 1/4"-28 1/8", flangeless 5/pk
323917 Ferrule, TFE, reducing, 1/4" x 1/8" 5/pk
323922 EPC module assembly with fittings each
323995 Select manifold assembly each
323997 Fitting, polypropylene, 1/16" tee 5/pk
324007 Fitting, 1/4"-28 1/16" hose barb 5/pk
324028 Quartz tube, elbow assembly, 1030C (includes each
281121, 295816, 322950, and 323683)
324033 TNb detector option kit each
324084 Fitting nut CPVC 1/4"-28x 1/8" RV each
324134 Kit, Cable/PCA, Syringe Drive each
324139 Tubing, Viton, 1.5", Combustion tube ft
324200 Circuit board, TC/IO circuit board each
324279 Reagent bottle, 1 L, accessory kit, for 1030W each
324285 1030C Accessory kit each
324285 Reagent bottle, 1 L, accessory kit, for 1030C each
324293 Reagent bottle, 1 L, accessory kit, for 1030D each
324474 Syringe pump assembly with valve each
324555 NDIR linearized detector (OLD) each
324563 TNb catalyst replacement kit each
324565 Injector insert, 0.02 I.D. x 2.25" each
324570 EFC module option kit each
325007 NDIR linearized detector (NEW) each
325105 Pushlock splitter, 1/8", 4-way fitting cross each
325406 Kit - Sample Glass Heater each
325577 Valve, Brass Vented Ball each
325855 Tube 1/16" x .040 I.D. Flared 1030 each

Rev. 5.0
Replacement Parts
PN Product Unit
326037 Cable, touchscreen each

326127 Screw–Socket Head SS 2–56 x 1/2" each
326129 Valve 3 way ISOL 1030 Drain & Select each
326132 Restrictor-Flow 105CCM @20 PSI 1% Long (Paid) each
326481 Gasket–Valve 1030 Drain & Select/Solids each
326643 Restrictor-Flow 280/250CCM N2/O2 @20 PSI 5% each
326780 Fitting-Assembly Pair 105 ML Restrictor/Duckbill each
326784 Fitting Assembly 105 ML Restrictor/Duckbill each
326785 External TIC sparge kit each
326786 Valve-Needle 1/4-28 1/8 tube PEEK Black each
326798 Valve-Check Pair (Duckbill) each
326800 Fitting Adapter Restrictor/Check Valve w/O-ring each
326904 Restrictor-Flow 105CCM @20 PSI 5% Long each
327402 Tube-1030 EPC Carrier Chamber 1 or 2 each
328097 Windows CE, SOM processor board replacement kit, each
V1.2.3
328099 Display replacement kit SOM each
328351 Cable, SOM to LCD Panel each
A000261 Nut, PEEK, 1/4"-28 x 0.076 each
A000267 Plug, Tefzel, 1/4"-28 each
A001769 Fitting, Luer-Lok™, male, 1/16" polypropylene 10/pk
A002671 O-ring, Viton, 0.20 x 0.07 10/pk
A303-0709-00 Clip fitting each
A383-0302-00 Taper fitting, bulkhead, 1/16" each
PS-0005 Battery, 9 V, alkaline 5/pk

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 12 Local Security
and Auditing Details
Table 12.1 lists the software functions that are available for each type of login. Key to
table:
• ? indicates that accessing this function is permitted.

• ? indicates that accessing this function is NOT allowed.
Table 12.1. Security Settings
Security
Software Function
Admin Sr. User User Operator Guest
Monitor navigation icon ? ? ? ? ?
Start ? ? ? ? ?
Hold ? ? ? ? ?
Abort ? ? ? ? ?
Reset Alarms ? ? ? ? ?
Graph (opens Signal Graph ? ? ? ? ?
dialog)
Status - Signal Graph ? ? ? ? ?
Status tab ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence tab ? ? ? ? ?
Load Active Sequence… (opens ? ? ? ? ?
new window)
Add / Insert Sample (s)… ? ? ? ? ?
(opens new window)
Remove Sample ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Load Active ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence
Sequence - Add / Insert Samples ? ? ? ? ?
Sample tab ? ? ? ? ?
Show Peak Graphs… (opens ? ? ? ? ?
new window)
Sample - Show Peak Graphs ? ? ? ? ?
Results Log tab ? ? ? ? ?
Calibration tab ? ? ? ? ?
Run Log tab ? ? ? ? ?
Clear Log ? ? ? ? ?
Refresh Log ? ? ? ? ?

Rev. 5.0
Local Security and Auditing Details
Table 12.1. Security Settings (Continued)
Security
Software Function
Editor navigation icon ? ? ? ? ?
Method tab ? ? ? ? ?
Method - New ? ? ? ? ?
Method - Open… ? ? ? ? ?
Method - Save ? ? ? ? ?
Method - Save As… ? ? ? ? ?
Method - Delete ? ? ? ? ?
Method - React / Detect Times ? ? ? ? ?
Method - React / Detect ? ? ? ? ?
Temperatures
Method - Calibration ? ? ? ? ?
Method - Calibration - Pass / ? ? ? ? ?
Fail Criteria
Sequence tab ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - New ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Open… ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Save ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Save As… ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Delete ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Add ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Remove ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Add / Insert Samples ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Import Samples ? ? ? ? ?
Sequence - Method Selection ? ? ? ? ?
Sample IDs tab ? ? ? ? ?
Sample IDs - Add ? ? ? ? ?
Sample IDs - Save ? ? ? ? ?
Sample IDs - Remove ? ? ? ? ?
Config navigation icon ? ? ? ? ?
General tab ? ? ? ? ?
Config - choose Config (icon)… ? ? ? ? ?
Config - Add… ? ? ? ? ?
Config - View / Modify… ? ? ? ? ?
Config - Delete… ? ? ? ? ?
Config - Make Active ? ? ? ? ?
Config General - Default or ? ? ? ? ?
User Specified Config

Rev. 5.0
Security
Software Function
User Specified Config - Basic
User Specified Config - Alarms
& Relays
User Specified Config - Data
Output
Config Sample Intro ? ? ? ? ?
Manual Syringe (Icon)…(opens ? ? ? ? ?
new dialog)
Sample Intro - Rotary Auto ? ? ? ? ?
Sampler
Sample Intro - XYZ Auto ? ? ? ? ?
Sampler
Sample Intro - Sipper ? ? ? ? ?
Sample Intro - At-Line ? ? ? ? ?
Autosampler
Sample Intro - Manual Syringe ? ? ? ? ?
Advanced tab ? ? ? ? ?
Advanced - Syringe Pump ? ? ? ? ?
Advanced - CO2 Detector ? ? ? ? ?
Advanced - TNb Module ? ? ? ? ?
Advanced - CO2 Trap ? ? ? ? ?
Advanced - Heated Zones ? ? ? ? ?
System tab ? ? ? ? ?
System - Automated Startup / ? ? ? ? ?
Shutdown
System - Reminders ? ? ? ? ?
System - LIMS Settings ? ? ? ? ?
System - Preferences ? ? ? ? ?
System - Set Date / Time ? ? ? ? ?
System - Network Settings ? ? ? ? ?
System - Power Save Options ? ? ? ? ?
Maint navigation icon ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - Rotary Autosampler ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - XYZ Autosampler ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - At-Line Autosampler ? ? ? ? ?

Rev. 5.0
Security
Software Function
Maint - Syringe Pump ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - TNb Module ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - C02 Trap ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - Heaters, Valves, Fans ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - System Information ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - System Counters ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - Diagnostic Tests ? ? ? ? ?
Maint - Instrument Log ? ? ? ? ?
S & A navigation icon ? ? ? ? ?
S & A - Local User Settings ? ? ? ? ?
S & A - Local Audit Settings ? ? ? ? ?
S & A - Local Audit Log ? ? ? ? ?
Switch User ? ? ? ? ?
• ? indicates that accessing this function is permitted.

• ? indicates that accessing this function is NOT allowed.
Table 12.2 lists the audit settings for the three audit types. Key to table:
• ? indicates changes to the field/screen are not to be tracked at all

• ? indicates that changes are to be tracked as follows:
— Minimal: a change to the screen has occurred is logged, but without field-
level specifics.
— Moderate: All changed field values on a screen are logged (old value and
new value), but without user-specified reason notes.
— Full: All changed field values on a screen are logged (old value and new
value), and the user is prompted for a reason on each screen with changes.
• N/A indicates that change-tracking is not applicable. Typically, this means that an
icon was pushed or a screen was accessed is not tracked; just the changes.
Table 12.2. Audit Settings
Audit
Software Function
Full Moderate Minimal
Start ? ? ?
Hold ? ? ?

Rev. 5.0
Table 12.2. Audit Settings (Continued)
Audit
Software Function
Abort ? ? ?
Reset Alarms ? ? ?
Remove Sample ? ? ?
Sequence - Load Active Sequence ? ? ?
Sequence - Add / Insert Samples ? ? ?
Result Log - Clear Log ? ? ?
Method - New ? ? ?
Method - Open… ? ? ?
Method - Save ? ? ?
Method - Save As… ? ? ?
Method - Delete ? ? ?
Method - React / Detect Times ? ? ?
Method - React / Detect Temperatures ? ? ?
Method - Calibration ? ? ?
Method - Calibration - Pass / Fail Criteria ? ? ?
Sequence - New ? ? ?
Sequence - Open… ? ? ?
Sequence - Save ? ? ?
Sequence - Save As… ? ? ?
Sequence - Delete ? ? ?
Sample IDs - Add ? ? ?
Sample IDs - Save ? ? ?
Sample IDs - Remove ? ? ?
Config - choose Config (icon)… ? ? ?
Config - Add…(opens new dialog) ? ? ?
Config - View / Modify… ? ? ?
Config - Delete… ? ? ?
Config - Make Active ? ? ?
General - Default or User Specified Config - ? ? ?
Basic
Alarms & Relays
Data Output
Sample Intro - Rotary Auto Sampler ? ? ?
Sample Intro - XYZ Auto Sampler ? ? ?
Sample Intro - Sipper ? ? ?

Rev. 5.0
Table 12.2. Audit Settings (Continued)
Audit
Software Function
Sample Intro - At-Line Autosampler ? ? ?
Sample Intro - Manual Syringe ? ? ?
Advanced - Syringe Pump ? ? ?
Advanced - CO2 Detector ? ? ?
Advanced - TNb Module ? ? ?
Advanced - CO2 Trap ? ? ?
Advanced - Heated Zones ? ? ?
System - Automated Startup / Shutdown ? ? ?
System - Reminders ? ? ?
System - LIMS Settings ? ? ?
System - Preferences ? ? ?
System - Set Date / Time ? ? ?
System - Network Settings ? ? ?
System - Power Save Options ? ? ?
Maint - Rotary Autosampler ? ? ?
Maint - XYZ Autosampler ? ? ?
Maint - At-Line Autosampler ? ? ?
Maint - Syringe Pump ? ? ?
Maint - TNb Module ? ? ?
Maint - C02 Trap ? ? ?
Maint - Heaters, Valves, Fans ? ? ?
Maint - System Information ? ? ?
Maint - System Counters ? ? ?
Maint - Diagnostic Tests ? ? ?
Maint - Instrument Log ? ? ?
S & A - Local User Settings ? ? ?
S & A - Local Audit Settings ? ? ?
S & A - Local Audit Log ? ? ?
Switch User ? ? ?
• ? indicates changes to the field/screen are not to be tracked at all

• ? indicates that changes are to be tracked as follows:
— Minimal: a change to the screen has occurred is logged, but without field-
level specifics.
— Moderate: All changed field values on a screen are logged (old value and
new value), but without user-specified reason notes.

Rev. 5.0
— Full: All changed field values on a screen are logged (old value and new
value), and the user is prompted for a reason on each screen with changes.
• N/A indicates that change-tracking is not applicable. Typically, this means that an
icon was pushed or a screen was accessed is not tracked; just the changes.

Rev. 5.0

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 13 Advanced User
Features
This chapter covers several features of the Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer that are for the
advanced user.

This section covers peak detection settings, including information on detecting a peak,
finding the peak maximum and setting the parameters for it, and setting parameters for
the peak start and peak end. It also includes several examples of incorrect peaks for
various conditions.
Detecting a Peak
Peak detection parameters are divided into three main categories: peak maximum,
peak-start, and peak-end parameters, as depicted in Figure 13.1. To properly detect a
peak, these parameters must be set correctly. Suitable defaults have been provided in
the Aurora software, but these settings may be overridden to further fine-tune the peak
detection process.
Figure 13.1. Peak Detection Parameters

Rev. 5.0
Advanced User Features
Peak maximum parameters bracket the region in time where the maximum of the peak
may be found. Peak maximum parameters are set in the Peak Detection Settings dialog
box, depicted in Figure 13.2 and accessed from the Advanced tab in the Configuration
section. In the Peak Detection Settings dialog box, set appropriate Peak-Max Window
Start and Peak-Max Window End values so that the peak maximum always occurs
within this window.
Figure 13.2. Peak Detection Settings Dialog Box
Peak-start parameters specify under what conditions the start of a peak may be found.
To determine a peak start, set conditions for three parameters: Peak-Start Minimum,
Peak-Start D1V (1st Derivative) Threshold, and Noise Peak-to-Peak.
Peak end parameters define several possible conditions when finding the end of the
peak. The end of the peak is considered found when any one of these conditions are
met.
To find a peak, the peak maximum must first be identified. The peak start is found by
working backward from the peak maximum. The start of a peak determines the peak
baseline. Moving forward from the peak maximum, this baseline value is used with the
peak maximum to determine the end of the peak. Once the peak start and peak end are
identified, the peak area (in counts) is calculated and displayed.

Rev. 5.0
Finding the Peak Maximum

The peak maximum is found by searching for the largest (highest) signal value within
the data window defined by Peak-Max Window Start and Peak-Max Window End, as
depicted in Figure 13.3. This search does not begin until the Peak-Max Window End
value is reached.
Figure 13.3. Peak-Maximum Parameters
Peak-Max Window Start defines the earliest point in time to look for the peak
maximum. Although typically set near the start of the peak window (i.e., Peak-Max
Window Start = 10 or less), this value can be set further into the peak data window to
help reject false peak maximum values that may occur before the true peak maximum.
Peak-Max Window End defines the last point in time to look for the peak maximum.
For the highest sample analysis throughput, set the Peak-Max Window End time as
small as possible, i.e., as close to the time where the peak maximum is typically found,
since the system does not end the detect state until the Peak-Max Window End time is
reached. However, the true peak maximum may be missed if the Peak-Max Window
End is set too early, and unpredictable peak results may occur.
Peak-Max Window End can be affected by the method’s React/Detect Times, set in the
React/Detect Times dialog box, depicted in Figure 13.4. If the Peak-Max Window End
time is not encountered prior to the end of the Max Detect time, as defined in the

Rev. 5.0
method’s React/Detect Times dialog box, then the system automatically triggers on the
Max Detect time to look for the peak maximum.
Once the peak maximum is found, the system then begins to look for the peak start.
Setting the Peak Maximum Parameters

Several factors should be considered when setting the peak maximum parameters.
These factors include: type of analysis (wet-chemical oxidation or combustion), the
Max Detect times, the pressure of the EPC, and if an EFC is employed in the method.
Consider all of these factors when setting the Peak-Max Window End value. Typically,
the best way to find what settings to use is to run the default settings and determine
what changes to make to the settings that work best for the particular sample matrix.
After making the changes to the method, the peak graphs give a clear indication of
where the peak maximum is occurring, so the Peak-Max Window End can be adjusted,
if necessary.
Figure 13.5 depicts peaks with improper parameters set. In Example 1, the Peak-Max
Window End value was set too low and the window ended before the peak was
completed.
In Example 2, the Peak-Max Window Start value was set too high and the peak
occurred before the detect window opened.

Rev. 5.0
In Example 3, the Peak-Max Window End value was set too high and a significant
amount of time passed after the peak occurred. While this setting does ensure the peak
is detected, it adversely affects production time by keeping the Aurora engaged in a
single operation. As long as the Max Detect time hasn’t passed, the Aurora will keep
searching for the peak-maximum until the Peak-Max Window End value is reached,
even if the peak occurred much earlier.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 13.5. Examples of Peaks with Incorrect Peak Maximum Parameters

Rev. 5.0
Since the search for the peak maximum does not begin until after encountering the
Peak-Max Window End (or Max Detect) time, set a Peak-Max Window End time so
that it always occurs beyond the time when the peak maximum takes place. Setting a
longer Peak-Max Window End ensures the true peak maximum is found. The only
downside to setting a longer Peak-Max Window End is that it dictates the minimum
time the system remains in the detect state, which results in lower sample throughput.
Always set the Max Detect times in the method’s React/Detect Times dialog box to a
time that is longer than the Peak-Max Window End. The system still works properly if
the Max Detect is less than the Peak-Max Window End, but it may result in early
termination of very wide peaks.
Typically, the Peak-Max Window End value is set for between 90 and 180 seconds. For
most wet chemical oxidation TOC analyses, the 90-second window works well, since
most wet chemical analysis peaks reach their maximum at around 40–60 seconds.
However, for combustion analysis, the peaks become delayed by the expansion volume
tubing by as much as 45–50 seconds. Therefore, set the Peak-Max Window End much
longer, since the peak maximum shifts by at least that same amount of time.
Also, these default times are based on an EPC pressure of 20 psi, which results in
approximately 100 mL/minute of carrier flow. If increasing the EPC pressure, the flow
increases and the peak emerges sooner, allowing the Peak-Max Window End to be
shorter. However, if decreasing the EPC pressure, the flow decreases and the peak
emerges later, requiring a longer Peak-Max Window End setting.
Additionally, any additional EFC flow (specified in the method calibration) also alters
the time when the peak maximum occurs.

Rev. 5.0
Setting the Peak Start Parameters

Peak start parameters include: Peak-Start Minimum, Peak Start D1V (first derivative)
Threshold, and Noise Peak-to-Peak, depicted in Figure 13.6.
Figure 13.6. Peak Start Parameters
Set Peak-Start Minimum to the earliest data point in the buffer (in seconds) that can be
potentially considered as a peak start, working back from the peak maximum.
Peak Start D1V Threshold specifies the threshold value to use when looking for the
peak start. This value uses the slope of the first derivative of the peak, working back
from the peak maximum. The smaller the threshold value, the earlier in time the peak
start is found. The larger the threshold value, the closer to the peak maximum the peak
start is found. A larger Peak Start D1V Threshold value results in slightly reduced area
counts for the peak, but tend to reject noise better for smaller peaks.
The Noise Peak-to-Peak value provides an estimate of the average noise of the detector
baseline. It is used as a factor in selecting the exact peak start, and is also used as a
factor in determining the peak end using the Return-to-Noise Multiplier.
The peak start is determined by first finding the peak maximum within the detection
window, and then working back toward the start of the window, searching for the point
that the peak’s first derivative crosses the Peak Start D1V Threshold. If the threshold is
not reached before encountering the Peak-Start Minimum value, then this value is used
as the peak start. In either case, this is the preliminary peak start. Half of the Noise
Peak-to-Peak value is added to this preliminary value, and the next actual data point

Rev. 5.0
found to be below that value is assigned as the true peak start. This peak start value also
serves as the value used for the peak baseline, which is used to calculate the peak height
and subsequent return-to-baseline percentages.
Figure 13.7 depicts three examples of peaks with incorrect peak start parameters. In
Example 1, one of three conditions exist: the Peak Start Minimum was set too high;
Peak D1V Threshold was set too high; or, the Noise Peak-to-Peak was set too high.
In Example 2, there are two possible conditions: incorrect peak start settings or CO2
from the sample may be escaping during React. In this case, the solution is to lower the
React temperature. In the former condition, there are three possible conditions for the
incorrect peak start settings: Peak Start Minimum is set too low; Peak D1V Threshold is
set too low; or, the Noise Peak-to-Peak is set too low.
In Example 3, poor Peak Shape caused the Peak Start D1V Threshold to trigger
prematurely, resulting in the incorrect identification of the Peak Start. This condition
could be caused by the method settings for the sample matrix or flow and/or pressure
instabilities during Detect.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 13.7. Examples of Peaks with Incorrect Peak Start Parameters

Rev. 5.0
Finding the Peak End

Once the peak maximum, peak start, and peak baseline are found, the peak end can be
determined by one of the following means: Return-to-Baseline, Return-to-Noise,
D1V = 0, Scale Peak-Width At 80%, or Max Detect time. Figure 13.8 depicts the point
at which each of these are used.
Figure 13.8. Peak End Parameters
Return-to-Baseline forces a peak to return from the peak maximum to within a

specified percentage of the peak baseline. The larger the percentage, the closer the peak
must return to the baseline before the peak terminates. Typically, the default setting of
99% ensures the most consistent and complete peak area.
Return-to-Noise forces a peak to return from the peak maximum to within a specified
multiple of the baseline noise. The noise value is defined by Noise Peak-to-Peak. The
return value is determined by multiplying Noise Peak-to-Peak by the Return-to-Noise-
Multiplier, then adding that value to the Peak Baseline value.
D1V = 0 looks for changes in the slope at the tail of the peak to determine if the peak
should be terminated. If the first derivative reaches a slope of zero, for at least the
number of points specified in the Cutoff Counter Value For End-Of-Peak field in the
Peak Detection Settings dialog box, then the peak is terminated. The first derivative test
is only valid after the peak has already returned to baseline at least the amount specified
by the Minimum Return-to-Baseline value. That ensures imperfect peaks (i.e., split
peaks, etc.) do not terminate early before capturing the full area attributable to the peak.

Rev. 5.0
Scale Peak-Width At 80% forces a peak to terminate when it has extensive tailing
relative to the peak width. The peak width is calculated between the time at the peak
maximum to the time the peak reaches 80% of the return to baseline. This time is then
multiplied by the Scale Peak-Width At 80% factor to determine how long to allow the
peak to continue from the time the peak maximum is found.
Configure these Peak End parameters in the Peak Detection Settings dialog box,
depicted in Figure 13.2. The software automatically terminates the detect state as soon
as any one of these set conditions are met.
If no other peak end criteria has been triggered by the time the Max Detect Time
expires, the peak automatically terminates. If another suitable peak end is not found,
then the last point at the Max Detect Time is the peak end.
Figure 13.9 depicts three examples of peaks with incorrect Peak End settings. Example
1 lists four possible conditions: Return-to-Baseline percentage is set too high; Scale
Peak Width value is set too high; Return-to-Noise Multiplier is set too high; or, Noise
Peak-to-Peak value is set too high.
Example 2 lists four possible conditions: Return-to-Noise Multiplier is set too low or
turned off; Noise Peak-to-Peak value is set too low; Return-to-Baseline percentage is
set too high or turned off; or, Scale Peak Width value is set too high.
Example 3 lists the possible cause as poor Peak Shape which caused the Peak End to be
incorrectly identified due to a low setting for the Minimum Return-to-Baseline value
for the 1st Derivative. This results in peaks with secondary peaks or with shoulders to
terminate prematurely. The resolution for this is to increase the Minimum
Return-to-Baseline value, or to disable the 1st Derivative feature for the Peak End.

Rev. 5.0
Figure 13.9. Examples of Peaks with Incorrect Peak End Parameters

Rev. 5.0
Method Development
This section covers development of methods for testing sample. It provides some
guidelines, discusses variables in methods, method verification techniques, and
calibrations.
Guidelines
The Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer provides a wide choice of modes for developing
methods: TIC only, NPOC only, TIC & NPOC, TC, and TOC (TC–TIC). Chapter 1,
“Definitions” on page 9 explains the processes related to these modes to help choose
the best mode for each analysis.
Variables
The goal of method development is to achieve the highest possible sample recovery in
the shortest possible analysis time. Selecting the proper mode is the first step in
developing a sound method, but many other variables can significantly affect sample
recovery, both programmable and non-programmable. Non-programmable factors
include NDIR offset, room temperature, humidity, and reagent, gas, and sample purity.
The programmable factors, which control the analytical operation, are summarized in
Table 13.1 and described in detail in the following sections.
Table 13.1. Method Development Variables
Factor Controlled By Effect User Interface
Carrier gas EPC Determines dilution reactor factor of CO2 Editor  Method
flow rate produced during oxidation
Sample size Syringe Provides carbon mass to generate CO2 Editor  Method
Gas dilution EFC (optional Provides additional dilution of CO2 from Editor  Method
added component) oxidation to ensure proper concentration to  Calibration
the NDIR detector
Temperatures Heating rod Changes rate of reaction Editor  Method
 Temperatures
Times WinCE software Changes the react or detect times to allow Editor  Method
more CO2 production and detection  Times
Reagents Syringe Provides acid and/or persulfate for required Editor  Method
reaction
Carrier Gas Flow Rate
The carrier gas flow is determined by pressure through a fixed orifice and controlled by
the Electronic Pressure Control (EPC). It controls the reactor flow and can be useful in
optimizing range. The EPC default setting is 20 psi, but a specialized pressure (15 to

Rev. 5.0
30 psi) may be defined in the method. This pressure range results in a flow rate range of
about 75 to 150 mL/minute. These values were chosen to ensure optimal instrument
performance. Increasing the pressure lowers the CO2 concentration. Thus, deviating
from the default setting can be useful when working with high carbon samples with
peak heights exceeding 56,000 on the peak graph. Conversely, when working with low
concentrations, lowering the pressure raises the CO2 concentration and optimizes
recovery.
Sample Size
Sample size should be adjusted so that the sample contains optimum carbon
concentrations for accurate and precise detection. The carbon range desired for the
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer is 0.02–240 µg.
Syringe volume controls the ability of the instrument to deliver accurate sample sizes.
Choosing the proper syringe for the sample size is key in optimizing operation. The
following chart shows the relationship between syringe volume and working
capabilities. The 2.5-mL syringe is standard on the Aurora 1030C. Table 13.2 lists the
syringe sizes and their associated criteria.
Table 13.2. Syringe Size Parameters
Inject
Volume Range
(mL)
Syringe Loop
Volume Volume
Maximum Minimum
(mL) (mL)
Maximum
/Minimum Mass Conc. Mass Conc.
(µg) (ppm) (µg) (ppm)
5 4.000 240.000 60.000 0.020 0.005 Small

0.100 240.000 2,400.000 0.020 0.200
2.5 2.000 240.000 120.000 0.020 0.010 Small
(standard
size) 0.025 240.000 9,600.000 0.020 0.800
1.0 0.800 240.000 300.000 0.020 0.025 Small

0.010 240.000 24,000.000 0.020 2.000
Gas Dilution
The Aurora can oxidize more CO2 than the NDIR detector is able to process. Special
care must be taken, through syringe and sample size selection, to control the amount of
CO2 injected. Additionally, the optional Electronic Flow Control (EFC) gas dilution
system provides options not previously available for method development.

Rev. 5.0
For example, the maximum sample concentration on an Aurora configured with a

2.5-mL syringe is 9600 ppm. Addition of the EFC allows the CO2 generated to be
diluted an additional 10:1 before reaching the NDIR detector. In this way, an Aurora
configured with a 25-mL syringe and EFC has a maximum concentration capability of
96,000 ppm, while maintaining the ability to reach 2 ppb.
Same-sample single-aliquot analysis of samples containing high TIC (3,000 ppm) and
low TOC (<1 ppm TOC), as is often found in alkaline water, is nearly impossible using
previous detection limits. With the Aurora, a 1-mL sample can be processed using EFC
dilution for TIC but not for TOC analysis. This selective dilution allows difficult
samples to be accurately analyzed.
The EFC may also be used to confirm sample recovery. A higher flow rate should dilute
the sample and result in a lower return. If raising the EFC setting results in an equal or
higher concentration of CO2, the sample concentration needs to be lowered. Either
change the sample size or continue raising the EFC setting until the sample reading
drops, indicating the unit has detected the peak of the concentration curve.
Temperatures
The default settings for Aurora temperatures are 680 °C for TC and 70 °C for TIC.
Temperatures below 680 °C result in incomplete oxidation, while temperatures above
680 °C increase the degradation of the catalyst and quartz chips in the furnace.
Lowering the temperature below 70 °C for TIC also greatly slows the reaction, and
raising the temperature very high introduces the risk of TOC contamination in the TIC
peak. Changing the temperatures from the defaults is a finely balanced and very
constrained way of optimizing performance, but fine-tuning the temperatures may help
recovery with some samples.
Times
Reaction time parameters achieve the most significant changes to sample recovery. If
recovery is dramatically less than expected or a peak looks truncated, the react or detect
times may need adjusting. The react time is the time between reagent addition to the
sample and when the sample is purged and sent to the NDIR detector. If the sample has
a high concentration or is slow to react, not all of the carbon may have enough time to
convert to CO2 before the sample is purged. Both the TIC and TOC react times may be
changed separately. The detect time is the length of time that the line from the reaction
chamber is placed in line with the NDIR detector. If the sample is highly concentrated,
the unit may not have enough time to cycle all of the CO2 through the NDIR detector,
and the detect time needs to be lengthened. Extending this time has no effect on the
minimum detect time. TIC and TOC detect times may be changed separately.
Reagents and Acid
The reagent volumes may need to be changed for certain samples. Basic samples with a
pH of 9 or higher may not allow complete conversion of TIC to CO2 when the default
volume of acid is added. To convert to TIC, the pH must be 2 or lower.

Rev. 5.0
When the pH level is questionable, samples should be manually tested by adding the
default acid volumes to a representative sample volume and reading the pH. Acid may
be increased in 100-µL increments and the sample retested for pH until it reaches the
desired pH. Increase the acid volume to the volume determined in testing.
In low ppb analysis, large amounts of acid may not be required and may add
background organics if used. Use the same manual testing approach to optimize acid
injection volumes for low-level analysis and reduce the volume of acid required to
reach a pH of 2. In addition, consider reducing the concentration of the acid in the low
TOC applications. In the case of acid-preserved samples, there may be no need to add
additional acid. Set the acid volume to 0.
When the default acid volume of 100 µL is added to basic samples with a pH of 9 or
higher, TIC cannot completely convert to CO2. To completely convert TIC, the pH of
the sample must be 2 or lower. Acid must be added in 100-µL increments and the
sample tested with pH paper until it reaches the desired pH.
Method Verification Techniques

Several different techniques can be used to ensure a method is detecting all the carbon
in a sample. Use verification techniques whenever a large increase in concentration is
expected or a new method is created for a sample in an unknown range. The following
include helpful hints for testing a method.
Serial Dilution
Serial dilution tests if the sample is too concentrated for the NDIR detector to process
the amount of carbon extracted. Dilute the sample on a set ratio and check that the unit
returns a linear response. If the response curve is flat for the first few sample dilutions
and then begins to curve downward, the sample is too concentrated. Dilute the sample
and try again.
Matrix Spike Recovery
The matrix spike recovery test ensures that the unit’s measurements are accurate. First,
run the sample and record the results. Then, add a known standard to the sample and
run the sample again. The response should be equal to the concentration of the sample
plus the addition of the standard. If not, the method may not be detecting all of the
carbon or the unit needs recalibration.
TOC Method and Calibration Definition

This outline provides the details required to define a method and calibration
requirements for an Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer. The unit must be properly installed,
and the operator must be familiar with the basic operation of the analyzer.
The Aurora ensures good laboratory practices are maintained regarding method,
calibrations, and data by maintaining the calibration subordinate to the method. Once a

Rev. 5.0
method is calibrated, no changes are allowed to method parameters that could impact
data results. A method can be updated with changed or additional method requirements;
however, the method must then be renamed and requires a new calibration. A method
can be saved with the same name, but a date is added to the name to differentiate
versions.
Procedure
1. Log on to the Aurora.
2. Press Editor  Method.
3. Press one of the following choices:
• Open to select an existing method that requires only minor adjustments.
• New to create a new method based on the default method.
4. Determine the desired operational mode.
Select the desired mode from the Mode pull-down list.
NOTE: The SST sample type feature is available with the TIC/NPOC mode, NPOC
only, and TOC (TC - TIC).
5. Determine sample size.
The sample size used for analysis has a direct effect on the sensitivity of the
instrument and must be selected to optimize the analysis range for the application.
The Aurora 1030C meets the LOD requirements of USP<643> (0.05 ppm C) in the
default configuration using a 2.5-mL syringe.
For selecting the proper sample size in the TC sample mode, the combined volumes
of acid plus sample must be less than or equal to the syringe volume minus 0.250
mL.
For non-TC modes, the combined volumes of acid plus sample must be less than or
equal to the syringe volume minus 0.250 mL.
For available carbon mass, the carbon mass available to the IR must be maintained
between 0.02–240 µg and can be calculated by multiplying sample concentration
by sample size. For example: 10 mg/L C x 1.0 mL = 10 µg C. See Table 13.3.
Table 13.3. Concentration Ranges and Syringe Selections
Concentration Range Sample Size Syringe Size
0.100 ppm to 50 ppm 0.8 mL 2.5 mL

1 ppm to 240 ppm 0.4 mL 2.5 mL

Rev. 5.0
Table 13.3. Concentration Ranges and Syringe Selections (Continued)
Concentration Range Sample Size Syringe Size
100 ppm to 3,000 ppm* 0.100 ml 2.5 mL

1,000 ppm to 30,000 ppm* 0.010 mL 2.5 mL
* Requires optional EFC module for this range.
NOTE: Parts per million (ppm) and mg/L are equivalent.
NOTE: The standard 2.5-mL syringe performs adequately for most applications
throughout the system’s operating range.
a. Determine the desired working range
b. Enter the appropriate Sample Volume for the range.
6. Determine the TIC removal option.
When the user selects the NPOC only mode, the option for internal or external
sparging is made available.
a. Choose Internal from the Sparging pull-down list.
Internal sparging is available with no additional hardware and reduces error

from the sample dilution effect of the acid in the vial. For internal sparging, the
user must specify the acid volume.
NOTE: The default acid volume is 0.10 mL for internal sparging. The addition of acid
must be sufficient to reduce the sample pH below 2 to achieve complete
dissociation of inorganic compounds.
b. Choose External from the pull-down list if an autosampler is connected.
External sparging reduces analysis time by performing acidification and

sparging of inorganic carbon directly in the sample vial. This function is
available for NPOC only mode and when an autosampler is connected. For
external sparging, the user must specify the Acid Volume and Sparge Time.
NOTE: The default acid volume is 1 mL for external sparging. The addition of acid
must be sufficient to reduce the sample pH below 2 to achieve complete
dissociation of inorganic compounds. The pre-acid volume is for NPOC
External only.
NOTE: The default sparge time is two minutes for internal and external sparge. The
time allowed must be sufficient to achieve complete removal of the CO2
generated by dissociation of inorganic compounds.

Rev. 5.0
7. Enter the desired acid volume.
8. Enter the desired sparge time.
Sparge time is set only for external sparging.
9. Enter the outlier removal criteria.
See the description for outlier removal criteria in Chapter 5, “Defining and
Managing Methods” on page 126.
10. Optimize the reactor flow.
IR gas concentrations may be optimized for each method by selecting the

appropriate Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) settings. The overall effect of
varying the EPC pressure is to increase or decrease IR sensitivity.
• The lower the pressure, the lower the flow of carrier gas and less dilution of the
analytical gas.
• The higher the pressure, the higher the flow rate, which decreases the IR
sensitivity by diluting the analytical gas.
See Table 13.4 for default recommendations.
Table 13.4. Reactor Flow Default Recommendations
Concentration Range Sample Size Syringe Size EPC Setting
0.100 ppm to 2 ppm 1.5mL 2.5mL 15 psi

0.100 ppm to 25 ppm 1.0 mL 2.5 mL 20 psi
1 ppm to 125 ppm 0.4 mL 2.5 mL 20 psi
100 ppm to 3,000 ppm * 0.100 mL 2.5 mL 25 psi
1,000 ppm to 30,000 ppm * 0.010 mL 2.5 mL 28 psi
* Requires optional EFC module for this range.
Enter the desired EPC setting.
11. Set the drain time.
The drain time default is 15 seconds, which meets most application requirements.
In the event that sample matrix (large volumes, high viscosity, or particulates)
makes an extended drain time necessary, this time may be increased. Enter the
desired drain setting.
12. Select Automatic Dilution, if desired.

Rev. 5.0
The system is capable of automatic dilution of samples (up to 1,000:1) or

calculating the results using the manual dilution factor.
13. Program the rinse requirements.
Rinses should be programmed in the method on a per-replicate or per-sample basis

to prevent sample carryover.
14. Select the React and Detect times.
The React and Max Detect times for both TIC and TOC are set by the following
steps.
a. Press Times.
b. Enter the desired TIC React time.
TIC reaction times vary by sample matrix and need optimizing for certain
matrices. Water with low inorganic content, ultrapure water, and RO water
require no (0:00) reaction time. Samples with higher concentrations of
inorganic carbon and high pH may require up to 10-minute reaction times for
complete removal. Two-minute reaction times are recommended.
c. Enter the desired TIC Max Detect time.
TIC Max Detect time is the maximum time allowed by the instrument for a
peak to be completed after the reaction time. The three-minute default is
appropriate for most applications.
d. Enter the desired TC Max Detect time.
TOC Max Detect time is the maximum time allowed by the instrument for a
peak to be completed after the reaction time. The three-minute default is
appropriate for most applications.
e. Click OK.
15. Set the React and Detect Temperatures.
This sets the React and Detect Temperatures for TIC. The Detect Temperature for
TC/TNb is also set here.
a. Press Temps.
b. Enter the desired TIC React Temperature.
c. Enter the desired TIC Detect Temperature.

Rev. 5.0
TIC React and Detect temperatures are typically set for 70 °C. This
temperature supports the dissociation process without providing enough heat to
oxidize organics. The default TIC React and Detect temperatures are 70 °C.
d. Enter the desired TC/TNb Detect Temp.
TC detection temperature is typically set at 680 °C (720 °C for TNb).
e. Press OK.
16. Define the calibration.
a. Press Calibration.
b. Select the Primary Analysis Mode.
When a mode with multiple measurements is selected, this selection determines

which measurement is the most critical.
c. Set the number of calibration curves.
A single calibration curve, selected for the Primary Analysis Mode, can be
selected for use in all analyses, or individual calibration curves for each
analysis can be selected.
• Select Use for all CO2 modes to use one calibration curve for all analyses.
When selected, only a calibration definition for the primary analysis can be
entered.
• Ensure Use for all CO2 modes is not selected to use individual calibration
curves for each analysis. When not selected, a calibration definition for
each analysis must be entered.
NOTE: This choice is also the basis for the decision logic for alternate methods in a
sequence and the output criteria when the I/O Expansion module is installed.
17. Define the calibration curve, manual standards.
NOTE: The Aurora supports calibration curves of 2 to as many as 12 calibration

points, 1 of which may be reagent water (RW). Note the relationship of the
variance to the dynamic range selected. The broader the range of the
calibration, the more variance is introduced at the low end of the calibration
curve. Limiting the range of the calibration minimizes the low end variance.
NOTE: If RW is included in the calibration curve, the user has a choice to subtract the
RW value or the offset from check standard on the calibration page by
selecting the appropriate option.

Rev. 5.0
For calibration ranges of 10 ppm or less, OI Analytical recommends including RW

in the calibration curve. Any offset due to the RW background in samples of
10 ppm and higher should be negligible.
a. Enter the RW criteria.
• To include RW in the calibration, enter the number of replicates to be

analyzed for the calibration under “reps” on the RW row.
• Enter zero (0) if not including the RW.
b. Enter the desired calibration points and the number of replicates to be run.
NOTE: A 9-mL sample size may allow four replicates from a 40-mL vial if each vial
is completely filled and the instrument is properly optimized. The use of three
replicates is recommended for the calibration.
c. Enter the number of reagent blanks.
18. Enter the EFC criteria, if installed.
If the EFC is installed, it is controlled by the method. To enable the EFC, select
Use EFC. Enter the desired Total Flow with EFC.
19. To enable calibration pass/fail criteria, select Enable Calibration Pass/Fail for
Primary Mode.
20. Enter the Pass/Fail criteria.
21. Enter a name for the new method.
Return to the main Method tab and:
a. Press Save As.
b. Enter a descriptive name for the method.
The name should describe its purpose. For example, a method requiring
running TIC/NPOC only up to 5 ppm, could be
“TIC_ NPOC 5 ppm.”
c. Press OK.
When a printer is installed with the Aurora, clicking the print icon prints a copy of
the method’s settings.

Rev. 5.0
Sequence Development
This outline provides details and instructions for creating and loading a sequence for
the Aurora. The unit must be properly installed, and the operator must be familiar with
the basic operation of the analyzer.
Every sequence requires at least one created method and calibration before samples can
be added. Samples may be added and deleted from the active sequence at any time
without changing the name of the sequence.
Procedure
1. Log on to the Aurora.
2. Press Editor  Sequence.
3. Press one of the following choices:
• Open selects an existing sequence to modify when only minor adjustments are
to be made.
• New creates an entirely new sequence.
4. Press Add/Insert to add samples.
5. Select the Sample Type.
The following sample types are available:
• Cal runs the calibration created in the method.
• Clean up runs a pre-programmed cleanup sequence.
• SST loads the system suitability sequence.
• Ckstd runs a sample for a check standard test. The unit calculates the data,
subtracting the value of the RW blank, which includes the reagent blank. The
check standard test compares the sample value to predetermined values.
• QC runs a sample similarly to the Ckstd. It calculates the data subtracting the
value of a QC blank, which includes the reagent blank. A QC blank should be
run with it.
• Reagent blank determines the amount of carbon contributed from the reagents.
This value is subtracted from each sample.
• QC Blank runs a sample to determine the amount of carbon contributed from

reagents and the DI water vial.

Rev. 5.0
6. Select the number of replicates (1–15) for the sample.
7. Enter the number of samples, if several different samples use the same parameters.
8. Select the method(s).
Select a Primary method. This is the method that the unit uses to run the sample. If
desired, select alternate methods. If more than one method is entered, the unit uses
the primary method first. If the sample falls outside the calibration range of the
primary method, it uses an alternate method to ensure more accurate readings.
9. Enter a sample name.
This may be one of the following:
• A descriptive name that is easily found in the sample list.
• The Sample ID for the desired sample. If the sample is run often, create an ID
in the Sample IDs Editor screen, where it is easily accessible for insertion into
any sequence. If the ID is already created, press the ellipses to display a list of
Sample IDs.
Alternatively, a sample can be named by checking Use Incrementer. This

automatically appends all sample names created on this Add/Insert Samples dialog
box with sequenced numbers.
• Enter the Start Value for the numbers. The sequenced list can start with any
preselected number.
10. Enter the Customer ID and Comments if desired.
NOTE: Normal or priority status are assigned only when adding samples to the active
sequence, not during a new sequence development.
NOTE: When adding samples to the active sequence, the autosampler position where
the vial is inserted must be selected.
11. Choose the mode.
The default is to append additional samples to the end of a sequence. However, if

the sample should be inserted in the middle of a sequence, highlight the sample that
should be below it, and then select Insert above selected line.
12. Press OK.

Rev. 5.0
Naming and Loading the Sequence

Once a sequence is created, it needs to be named and loaded prior to use.
1. Press Save As.
2. Enter a name for the sequence.
The name should describe its purpose.
3. When the printer is installed, the operator may press the print icon to print a copy of
the method settings.
4. To load the sequence, press Monitor  Sequence.
5. Press Load Active Sequence.
A list of available sequences appears.
6. Select the desired sequence.
7. Press Load.
8. Press Start to start the sequence after the samples are ready.
Dilution per Vial

When there is a need to dilute an individual sample or show the true value of a diluted
sample, it is possible to program this into the sample sequence prior to loading as an
active sequence. If the desire is to automatically dilute the sample, in the comments
section of the sequence being created write ADIL=x, where x is the desired value of
dilution. Thus, ADIL=2 dilutes a sample by half. The value can be set between 2 and
100. The sample will be diluted in the reaction vessel as opposed to using a vial space

Rev. 5.0
in the autosampler rack. See Figure 13.10 for an example in a sequence. The value
shown as a resulting concentration will be the expected undiluted value.
Figure 13.10. Dilution by ADIL
NOTE: A sample cannot be diluted below 0.100 mL due to preserving sample

consistency.
If the desire is to show the final result after a sample has been manually diluted, then
use the term MDIL=x, where x is the value of the dilution. See Figure 13.11 for an

Rev. 5.0
example. MDIL will multiply the dilution value and project the concentration to a value
based on the calibration results.
Figure 13.11. Dilution by MDIL
In the comments section of the ATOC report, ADIL=2, for example, will be shown,
demonstrating that the dilution has occurred for that sample.
Instrument Calibration: Linear Regression

A linear regression is used to establish calibration curves for analytical analysis. The
curve establishes a mathematical relationship between the instrumental response and
the amount or concentration of the sample analyzed. A number of factors need
consideration when establishing this curve. The accuracy of the original standards used
for the analysis is perhaps most important. Mathematical considerations must also be
examined to properly use a calibration curve for analysis of unknown samples.
For the Aurora, a number of options can be set that affect the calibration curve
established for a given set of standards. These options have dramatic effects on the
overall linearity and ultimate utility of the calibration for various types of analyses.
For example, the linear regression can be calculated using a weighted or unweighted
curve fit. The principal difference in these calculations is the number of times that an
individual data point is calculated in the curve. For the Aurora, a weighted regression
provides much higher weighting for samples with lower concentrations. For a set of

Rev. 5.0
standards where the lowest concentration is 1 ppm and the highest is 1,000 ppm, the
1-ppm analysis results become weighted by a factor of 1,000, while the 1,000-ppm
results have a weight of one. This makes the analysis perform as if 1,000 samples of the
1-ppm standard were run, while only one sample of the 1,000-ppm standard was
included. This weighting ensures the lower end of the calibration provides a more
accurate representation of the instrumental response vs. concentration ratio, or response
factor, for lower-level samples. As a result, low-level unknowns become more
accurately analyzed, while accuracy at the upper end of the curve is sacrificed.
Contrast this with the situation where the calibration curve is unweighted. In this case,
each data point receives equal weight. However, in practice, due to the potentially large
values of the higher-level standards, the overall linearity of a set of standards becomes
skewed to improve fit at the upper end of the curve.
This is illustrated by the following example: If a set of standards contains 1-ppm and
1,000-ppm standards, all linear regression fits search for the best curve to minimize
total deviation from the curve for each of the given data points. This deviation is the
sum of the deviations of all points constituting the calibration standards. The curve is
adjusted to minimize this deviation. This holds for all curve fits, whether weighted or
unweighted. For the example with 1-ppm and 1,000-ppm standards, 1% deviations
from the curve from each of these samples yield deviations of 0.01 ppm and 10 ppm
respectively. Therefore, the regression routine preferentially tries to reduce the
deviation of the 1,000-ppm standard over the 1-ppm standard. Note that weighting the
regression multiplies the overall deviation for the lower-end standards, thus increasing
their contribution to the optimized deviation. This results in unweighted regression fits
being better for samples with higher concentrations.
One other factor must be considered when using weighted linear regression. Often, a
calibration scheme includes a zero point, which is often reagent water or other solvent
used to dissolve the analyte of interest. The instrument usually has a very low response
for this value, as would be expected. For samples with a low background response, such
as water in the TOC analysis, the zero measurement is heavily influenced by
instrumental noise. This results in poor reproducibility, as the zero point is below the
limit of quantification of the instrument. This becomes problematic since this point is
used in the linear regression, and its overall deviation is used to determine the final
curve fit. This can result in serious errors when used in low-level measurements.
One method that helps mitigate this situation is using some level of outlier reduction in
the sample analysis. This process looks at the results from multiple measurements and
reduces the data set to minimize the relative standard deviation of the chosen set. The
user specifies the number of points desired in the sample set, the desired relative
standard deviation, and the number of additional measurements that may be made to
supplement the data set if necessary. This helps reduce the overall deviation in the zero
data points that are included in the linear regression fit. With this procedure, the zero
point becomes practical to use in low-level analysis.
Consider one additional factor when using weighted regression on samples that include
zero measurements. Data weights are often determined by the ratio of the highest
concentration standard to that of the standard of interest. For a set of standards
containing 0-, 1-, 10-, and 100-ppm samples, the weight might be 100 (100/1) for the

Rev. 5.0
1-ppm standard, 10 (100/10) for the 10-ppm standard and 1 (100/100) for the highest
standard. However, the weight cannot be established in this manner for the zero point
since 100/0 is undefined. This forces the user to select an arbitrary weight for the zero
point.
The following factors should be considered when selecting the weight for the zero
point. If very good zero measurements with relatively low RSDs are available,
including a high weight for the zero point may be practical. For this example, use 100
for the weight as was used for the 1-ppm standard. However, when measuring zero
points that are much less dependable with relatively high RSDs, reduce the weight to a
value of 10 or 1.
For an instrument with a sampling range of 0 to 1,000 ppm, consider a number of

general guidelines and factors with different types of analyses:
• Very low range - For a very low range of samples such as 0–5 ppm with a large
number of samples below 1 ppm, use a weighted regression with heavy emphasis
on the zero points. This emphasis comes from the assumption that for
measurements at this level, the zero point must be very near quantification. This
would require either a high level of confidence in the zero point measurement or
some outlier rejection.
• Typical low range - If running samples in the range of 0–10 ppm with near equal
or random incidence of samples across this range, run an unweighted regression
with light emphasis on the zero point. This establishes greater accuracy across the
entire range of the analysis. Strong outlier rejection on the zero point would be very
helpful for this range.
• Mid range - For samples ranging from 0–100 ppm, the selection of a weighted or
unweighted regression depends on the concentration expected for most of the
samples. If running a drinking water TOC application where most samples are
10 ppm or lower, a weighted regression becomes necessary since accuracy at the
low end is desired. Otherwise, use an unweighted fit since it gives a much better
curve fit than the weighted version and has better accuracy at the upper end of the
range. Note the zero point should be weighted fairly lightly here.
• High range - For samples that cover the entire range of this hypothetical
instrument from 0–1,000 ppm, an unweighted regression is required. If choosing a
weighted regression, expect a fair amount of error on the upper end of the range due
to the emphasis on the lower end. This is not always true but is typical. A very light
weight on the zero point would be appropriate since the instrument is running in a
way that probably is not optimal for measurement in the lower end of the range.
• All ranges - In combustion TOC particularly, be careful to consider the “carbon-

memory” effect commonly observed when running samples at the same time with
very high and low concentrations. In wide ranges, this carryover effect can have a
dramatic impact on the low ends of the resulting calibration curves.
For weighted linear regression measurements:

Rev. 5.0
• One should have good confidence in the low-end performance of the instrument.
• Appropriate weights should be chosen for the zero point depending upon one’s
confidence in the accuracy of this zero measurement.
• Use strong outlier rejection on the zero point to ensure that the lack of repeatability
of the zero point does not have a detrimental effect on the overall linearity and
resulting accuracy of the calibration.
• For a system with poor repeatability and high RSDs, expect poorer linearity values.
• Expect less accurate high-level performance (due to weighting on the low end).
• Low-level performance is improved and typically provides more accurate low-level
results.
• R2 values tend to be lower due to the poorer fit for the upper end.
For an unweighted regression:
• Expect poorer low-level performance as the upper level is more heavily weighted.
• Good repeatability and RSDs for sample replicates are required for good linearity
(some outlier removal use may be beneficial).
• This method has generally better R2 values than with a weighted regression.
• Unweighted regressions tend to perform better for higher-level samples.
Finally, for the best accuracy, use short calibration ranges if possible (best across one to
two orders of magnitude). Measurement accuracy improves greatly if samples are
pre-qualified into high, low, and mid ranges. If the samples are truly unknown, then
perform a qualification run to determine the range to run the instrument. Although most
instruments can be calibrated across their entire dynamic range, avoid using the entire
range since linearity suffers, and overall accuracy is sacrificed for all samples. Shorter
calibration ranges allow the user to optimize instrument conditions for each range in
question.
Aurora 1030 Calibration Calculations

The Aurora calculates a calibration curve by using either weighted or unweighted
regression.
Calibration Curve
Table 13.5 lists the terms used in calculating a calibration curve.
Table 13.5. Calibration Curve Terms and Definitions
Term Definition
Area (obs) Area obtained by integration of the linearized NDIR detector

response for a specific standard
Area (std) contribution to the observed area due to the carbon in the calibration
standard
Area (rw) contribution to the observed area due to the carbon in the reagent
water sample

Rev. 5.0
Table 13.5. Calibration Curve Terms and Definitions
Term Definition
Mass (inj) the total mass of carbon in a calibration standard

Mass (std) the mass of carbon quantitatively added into the calibration standard
Mass (rw) the mass of carbon inherently present in a reagent water sample
Further, the following equations apply:
Area (obs) = Area (std) + Area (rw)
Mass (inj) = Mass (std) + Mass (rw)
Area
y = mx + y0
Mass
Where yo is the Areaoffset.
Standard Deviation and Relative Standard Deviation

xi = ith individual sample of n replicates at specific level (or ith aliquot from same
sample)
x = mean of samples
S = standard deviation
RSD = relative standard deviation
x = Sx i  n

2
 xi – x 
S = ----------------------------
n–1

Rev. 5.0
Rewrite for computational purposes:

2 2
x – nx
i
S = ---------------------------
n–1
n n 2
   
 n x 2 –  x 

 1
 i 
  1 
  i
S = -------------------------------------------------
nn – 1
StdDev
RSD = 100   ----------------- %
 mean 
Linear Regression Using Weighted Least Squares

Since the data set used in constructing a calibration curve in general crosses several
orders of magnitude, weighting is used to give equivalent importance to the data
throughout the data range.
Assign weights (Wi) to each standard such that:
W i =  1  mass(std i 
For the case where a reagent water blank is included within the calibration curve, a
weight is extrapolated to be inversely proportional to the amount of carbon present in
reagent water.
For reagent water (mass = 0.0 standard),
w Reagent Water = w lowest standard  RW factor
where the RWfactor is the reagent water weighting factor (typically 50).
For reagent water (mass nominally is zero standard), a weight proportional to a 20 ppb
standard is used. Relative to a 1.00-ppm standard being the lowest standard and also
being assigned a weight of 1, the reagent water standard would be assigned a weight of
50.
Summations for weighted response:
a =
  w  mass  i i
i

Rev. 5.0
b =
 w  i
i
c =
  w  mass  mass 
i i i
i
d =   w  area  i i
i
e =
  w  area  mass 
i i i
i
For the form area = m  mass + yo (where area = y , and mass = x ), m and yo are given by
the following equations:
2
m =  b  e – a  d    b  c – a , and
2
y 0 = Area offset =  d  c – a  e    b  c – a  =  d – m  a   b
Response Factor
RF = Relative Response Factor
RF =  1  m   1 000   cnts  Kcnt 
Mass of Sample
Mass sample = RF  Area sample   Kcnts sec  +  y o  m 
Ideally, (yo/m) should correspond to the mass of carbon (mg) in the reagent water
sample. In general this is not found due to the variability in peak integration and carbon
contribution within the reagent water (i.e., the trace level of carbon present in the water
used to prepare the standards, and the ‘reagent water’ standard).
Area Peak (cnt•sec) – Area Reagent Blank (cnt•sec)

-  RF
Mass sample = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- is an equivalent form.
1000  cnt  Kcnts 
Check Standards
The check standards calculation uses one of two user-selected forms: a) the Mass offset
or b) the reagent water area.

Rev. 5.0
a) Using the Massoffset, the carbon mass for check standard replicate is calculated as:
Mass =  Area  RF  + Mass offset
where: Mass offset =  –1    RF  y o 
Or equivalently: Mass =  Area – Area offset   RF
b) Using the reagent water area (area calculated for the reagent water standard during
the calibration), the carbon mass for a check standard replicate is calculated as:
Mass =  Area – Area Reagent Water   RF

Rev. 5.0
Chapter 14 Upgrade
Procedures
This chapter lists several upgrade options for the Aurora 1030C. Among others, basic
Aurora 1030C units can be upgraded to dual units (combining both combustion and
wet-oxidation modes in one unit) and a basic, one-chamber unit to a parallel unit
(adding a second reaction chamber to a 1030W). Further, parallel units can be upgraded
to a dual unit, as needed.
Upgrading a 1030W Single Chamber Unit to a Combustion Mode

Dual Unit
The dual-mode configuration of an Aurora 1030C or 1030W allows it to be upgraded to
have both combustion and wet-oxidation modes available. The following procedure
outlines how to upgrade an Aurora 1030W to a dual unit (i.e., add the combustion mode
capability). The kit required to do this is PN 323403.
WARNING:Turn off power and unplug the Aurora before proceeding.
1. Press Config  Next Boot Option and select Combustion.
2. Turn off power to the Aurora and unplug the power cord.
3. Turn off the gas supply to the instrument.
5. Remove the metal insert plug located on the rear panel below the combustion
option label.
6. Remove the cover and top lid from the combustion assembly and set aside.
7. Attach the combustion assembly on the rear chassis, as depicted in Figure 14.1.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
First align the four slots on the combustion chassis with PEM nuts on the chassis,
then slide the assembly downward to lock it into place. Tighten the setscrew to
secure the assembly.
Furnace
Assembly Set
Screw
Figure 14.1. Furnace Assembly Mounted on Aurora
8. Connect the furnace thermocouple to the TC outlet -TC/IO PCA (J17), located at
the top left of the combustion chassis, as depicted in Figure 14.2.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
If present, remove the jumper before attempting to plug in the cable.
Figure 14.2. Connecting Furnace Thermocouple to J17 TC Outlet on TC/IO Board
9. Route the fan and furnace cable assemblies inside the chassis cut-out.
10. Connect the fan cable to J12 on the TC/IO board.
11. Connect the furnace cable to the required voltage per operation.
For 110 V, connect to J32. For 220 V, connect to J33. See Figure 14.3 for a photo of
these jumpers.
J32 for
110 VDC
J33 for
220 VDC
Figure 14.3. Connecting Furnace Assembly Power Cable

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
12. Remove the combustion tube from the startup kit and pack it according to the
instructions in Chapter 7, “Packing the Combustion Tube” on page 305.
13. Install the combustion tube according to the instructions in Chapter 7, “Installing
the Combustion Tube” on page 310.
14. Install the combustion cap with the 18-mm fitting and 18-mm TFE ferrule.
Tighten with wrenches provided in the startup kit.
NOTE: Do not install the injector at this time.
15. Install the #6 x 3/8 standoff (PN A000810) in place of the lower tube clip. Use the
top PEM nut position, as depicted in Figure 14.4.
#6 Standoff in the
Top Position
Figure 14.4. #6 Standoff Installed in Top PEM Nut Position
16. Attach the ½" clip (PN 323679) onto the #6 standoff using a #6 screw
(PN 207621) with #6 lock washer (PN 132654), as depicted in Figure 14.5.
1/2" Tube Clip

Installed
Figure 14.5. Half-Inch Tube Clip Installed

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
17. Attach the condensate chamber (PN 322947) into the tube clips in the chamber 2
position, as depicted in Figure 14.6.
Figure 14.6. Condensate Chamber in Place

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
18. Insert the tube assembly (PN 323979) through the top of the condensate chamber,
stopping about halfway down the chamber, as depicted in Figure 14.7.
Tube half-way down

condensate chamber.
Figure 14.7. Tube Placement in Condensate Chamber
19. Tighten the fitting on the top of the condensate chamber.
20. Route the other end of the tube assembly through the HTR 2 grommet and back
through the opening for the combustion option.
21. Replace the grommet in the HTR 2 hole.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
22. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323980) to syringe valve port C, as depicted in
Figure 14.8.
Figure 14.8. Tubing Assembly Connected to Syringe Valve Port C
23. Route the tubing assembly from syringe valve port C to the combustion
chamber.
This tubing assembly is routed through the opening above the valve and back
through the combustion option opening in the rear of the chassis.
NOTE: Leave this tubing assembly disconnected until the furnace temperature is
calibrated.
24. Connect a tube assembly (PN 323981) to the side port of the condensate
chamber and route through the grommet hole, as depicted in Figure 14.9, to
connect it to the expansion tube (PN 323978).

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
Figure 14.9. Tubing Assembly Connected to Side Port of Condensate Chamber and Routed to
Expansion Tube
NOTE: The expansion tube can be placed on the floor of the chassis or attached
with a clip (PN 321905) on the side of the syringe housing.
25. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323981) from the condensate chamber to the
expansion tube.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
26. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323982) to the bottom fitting of the condensate
chamber and to drain valve port 2, as depicted in Figure 14.10.
Figure 14.10. Condensate Chamber Connected to Drain Port 2
27. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323983) to the select manifold port 2 and route
through the HTR 2 grommet, as depicted in Figure 14.11.
Figure 14.11. Select Manifold Port 2 Tubing Assembly Routed to Expansion Tube

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
28. Connect the tube assembly from select manifold port 2 to the other end of the
expansion tube (PN 323978).
29. For combustion, install the green low-volume spindle (PN 322933) in place of the
current blue high-volume spindle (PN 322139).
a. Disconnect the fittings at the S1 and S2 ports on the syringe valve.
b. Remove the screw in the center hole.
c. Remove the high-volume spindle and place the low-volume spindle in it’s
stead.
d. Replace the screw in the center hole.
e. Connect the fitting on the outer edge of the spindle to S2 on the syringe valve.
f. Connect the other fitting to S1 on the syringe valve.
30. Install the furnace cover and leave the lid open.
31. For units without EFC:
a. disconnect the tube assembly (PN 324045) between the EPC port E and the
EFC blank top port at the EFC blank.
b. Install a Union fitting (PN 166274) to the tube assembly.
c. Insert a plug (A000267) into the open end of the Union fitting.
d. Insert a plug (A000267) into the open top port of the EFC blank.
For units with EFC, no other modifications are needed.
32. Connect the power cord and turn on power to the instrument.
33. Press Maint  Heaters, Valves, Fans and set the furnace temperature to 680 °C.
34. Install the external thermocouple (PN 319617) into the center port on the
combustion cap to where the tip makes contact with the quartz chips.
For the optimal setting, it may be necessary to bury the tip of the thermocouple in
the quartz chips.
35. Connect the thermocouple to the thermocouple meter.
36. Once the temperature reaches 680 °C on the Aurora’s screen, view the
thermocouple meter’s reading.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
If the thermocouple meter’s temperature reading does not match the instrument
temperature:
a. Press Config  Advanced  Heaters and enter the value difference between
the two readings as the new heater offset.
b. Press Maint  Heaters and select Set Now.
37. Verify the display temperature is within 5 °C of the actual temperature. If not,
continue temperature calibration.
WARNING:The thermocouple is hot. Use care when removing.
38. Once the temperature has been set, record the thermocouple (TC) offset value.
39. Power off the unit.
40. Install the injector (PN 323584) from the startup kit into the combustion cap, as
Figure 14.12. Inserting Injector into Combustion Cap

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
41. Install the tube assembly (PN 323980) into the combustion cap, as depicted in
Figure 14.13.
18-mm
Fitting Nuts
Combustion
Union Cap
Fittings
Figure 14.13. Combustion Cap with Syringe Valve Port C Tubing Assembly Connected
42. After all plumbing connections have been made, close the furnace lid and turn on
power to the instrument.
NOTE: Once the heater stabilizes, retighten the 18-mm fitting nuts, combustion
cap, and union fittings depicted in Figure 14.13. The conditioning for the
TFE ferrule usually takes 4–8 hours.
NOTE: Be sure to enter the new syringe volume in the system configuration.
43. Install the 2.5-mL syringe from the upgrade kit.
a. Remove the screw from the syringe shaft.
b. Press Maint  Syringe Pump.
c. Set the desired position to 10,000.
d. Unscrew the syringe and set aside.
e. Verify the TFE washer is still in place in the valve.
f. Install the 2.5-mL syringe into the valve and tighten.
g. Set the position to 0.
h. Reconnect the syringe shaft and tighten.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
44. Align the syringe drive.
NOTE: Do not overtighten the syringe drive thumbwheel control to prevent

damaging the mechanism.
a. Press the bottom button on the left side of

the syringe drive, as depicted in
Figure 14.14.
b. Rotate the thumbwheel on the bottom of

the syringe drive to the left until the
syringe drive is snug.
c. Press the top button to complete the pro-

cess.
NOTE: To convert to wet oxidation mode,

follow the instructions in
“Converting from Combustion to
Wet Oxidation Mode” on page 487
in this chapter.
Configuring the EPC and Select

Manifold for Combustion Analysis
The following procedure outlines how to
configure the EPC and Select Manifold for
operation in combustion mode.
Figure 14.14. Syringe Drive Controls

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
1. On the select manifold, remove the 1/8" red tubing from the splitter between
ports V1 and V2, depicted in Figure 14.15.
Figure 14.15. Select Manifold Tubing Splitter
2. Remove both smaller tube assemblies from both fitting barbs.
3. Reconnect the 1/8" red tube to the V1 fitting barb.
4. Remove the fitting barb from port V2.
5. Remove the tube assembly between syringe valve port B1 and EPC port 2 (not
needed for combustion analysis).
6. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323991) to EPC port 2. Route the tubing through
the chassis hole at the top left, and connect to the tee fitting (PN 323999).
7. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323992) to syringe valve port B1. Route the
tubing through the chassis to the tee fitting.
NOTE: Before connecting the tube assembly, install the TFE washer (PN 323689),
install the fitting duckbill (PN 323608), then install the tube assembly
from B1.
8. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323993) to select manifold port V2 and connect
to the tee fitting.
10. Turn on power to the instrument.
11. Check the plumbing for leaks.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
Converting from Combustion to Wet Oxidation Mode

The following procedure outlines how to convert an Aurora 1030D from combustion to
wet oxidation mode.
1. Press Config  System.
2. Press Next Boot Option and select Wet Chemical.
3. Turn off power to the instrument.
4. Turn off gas to the instrument.
6. Disconnect the tube assembly at port B1 of the syringe valve.
7. Disconnect the tube assembly at EPC port 2.
8. Use the fitting union (PN A000263) to connect both tube assemblies together.
9. Install the tube assembly (PN 324044) between the syringe valve port B1 and
EPC port 2.
10. For units without EFC, install the tube assembly (PN 324045) between the EPC
port E and the EFC blank top port at the EFC blank.
14. Verify flows and install the left bay cover.
15. Press Config  General.
16. Select the active configuration for the analysis.
Ensure only chamber 1 is selected.
NOTE: If using a large syringe, remove the low-volume spindle and install the
high-volume spindle (PN 322139).
17. If needed, remove the syringe and install the desired syringe for proper sample
delivery.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
Upgrading a Single Chamber Unit to a Parallel Chamber Unit

The following procedure outlines how to change a single chamber Aurora 1030W to a
dual chamber unit. This requires the purchase of the parallel upgrade kit, PN 323066.
1. Power off the Aurora and remove the power cord.
4. Install two clips (PN 264901) on the chamber 2 location using four #6 screws
(PN 207621) and four #6 lock washers (PN 132654), as depicted in Figure 14.16.
Figure 14.16. Combustion Tube Clips Installed

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
5. Install the reaction chamber (PN 322302) in the chamber 2 location, per the
chamber 1 configuration, as depicted in Figure 14.17.
Figure 14.17. Second Combustion Tube Installed
6. Remove the rubber grommet from the HTR 2 hole in right front of the chassis.
7. Split one side of the rubber grommet.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
8. Insert the heater cartridge assembly (PN 322857) from inside of the chassis
through the HTR 2 hole as far as possible, as depicted in Figure 14.18.
Figure 14.18. Routing Heater Through Chassis
CAUTION: Ensure the heater does not touch the glass after installation. If the heater
touches the glass when operating, the glass could break.
9. Insert the heater cartridge down into the combustion chamber fitting until the
end of the cartridge is level with the black indicator mark on the reactor, as

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
Figure 14.19. Correct Depth of Heater in Combustion Chamber
10. Tighten the fitting nut on top of the combustion chamber to secure the heater in
place.
11. Pull the remaining slack of the heater cartridge harness back inside the chassis.
12. Slip the split grommet around the heater cable.
13. Insert the grommet back into the HTR 2 hole in the front chassis.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
14. Connect the HTR 2 power to J15 (HTR 2) on the TC/IO board, as depicted in
Figure 14.20.
Figure 14.20. Heater Connection to J15 on TC/IO Board
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the jumper from the connection prior to
connecting the thermocouple.
15. Connect the thermocouple to J6 on the TC/IO board, as depicted in Figure 14.21.
Figure 14.21. Thermocouple Connection to J6 on TC/IO Board

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the Aurora, ensure the shield cable is positioned
away from circuit boards.
16. Route the shield cable over the select manifold and connect to the ground stud
with the other shield cable from HTR 1, as depicted in Figure 14.22.
Figure 14.22. Heater Shield Cable Connected to Ground Stud
17. Secure the cables with the nut.
18. Remove the plug in syringe valve port C.
19. Install the P8 tube assembly to syringe valve port C, as depicted in Figure 14.23.
Figure 14.23. P8 Tube Assembly Connected to Syringe Valve Port C

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
20. Insert the other end into the side port of the reactor until it is level with the black
indicator mark, as depicted in Figure 14.24.
Figure 14.24. P8 Tube from Syringe Valve Port C in Combustion Chamber
21. Tighten all fittings.
22. Remove the plug from port 2 of the Drain valve at the bottom of the unit.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
23. Install the P15 tube assembly to the drain valve port 2 and to the bottom union
fitting on the reactor, as depicted in Figure 14.25.
Figure 14.25. Bottom of Combustion Chamber Connected to Drain Valve Port 2
25. Remove the plug from Port 2 of the select manifold.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
26. Install the P16 tube assembly to the select manifold and to the side port on the
chamber 2 manifold, as depicted in Figure 14.26.
Figure 14.26. Side Port of Combustion Chamber Cap Connected to Select Manifold Port 2
Calibrating the Heater

Once installed, calibrate the heater with the following procedure.
1. To calibrate the new heater, inject approximately 10-mL of water into chamber 2
using the syringe.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
The Heated Zones dialog box is displayed, as depicted in Figure 14.27.
Figure 14.27. Heated Zones Dialog Box
3. Enter 10 for the Chamber 2 offset.
4. Set PWMStandby (%) from 70% to 99%.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Maint  Heaters, Valves, Fans.
7. Set chamber 2 temp to 98.
8. Press Set Now.
9. Remove the P8 tube assembly from the reactor side port.
10. Install the external thermocouple (PN 208314) into the reactor, about half way
down into the solution without touching the heater cartridge.
11. Monitor the temperature with the external meter.
12. Once the temperatures stabilizes, verify the temperature is 96 °–98 °C.
If the reading is low, lower the offset.
If the reading is high, raise the offset.
13. After changing the offset, press Set Now for Chamber 2 temp to set the new offset.
14. Once the heater offset is achieved, reset the temperature to 70 °C.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
15. Press Set Now.
16. Press Config  Advanced  Heated Zones.
17. Reset the PWMStandby (%) to 70%.
18. Press OK.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
Converting a 1030W Parallel Unit to a Combustion Mode Dual Unit

The following procedure outlines how to convert a parallel Aurora 1030W to a Aurora
1030D Combustion-Wet Oxidation TOC Analyzer.
1. Set the Aurora to Combustion for Next Boot Option.
a. Press Config and select Next Boot Option.
b. Select Combustion.
2. Turn off power to the Aurora and unplug the power cord.
5. Locate and unplug the chamber 2 heater from J15 on the TC/IO board, as
Figure 14.28. Unplugging Heater from J15 on TC/IO Board

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
6. Locate and unplug the thermocouple from J6 on the TC/IO Board, as depicted in
Figure 14.29.
Figure 14.29. Unplugging Thermocouple from J6 on TC/IO Board
7. Remove the shield cable from the ground stud, as depicted in Figure 14.30, and
replace and tighten the fitting nut.
Figure 14.30. Shield Cable on Ground Stud
8. Remove the tube assembly from the side port of reaction chamber 2 and
disconnect the tube assembly from syringe valve port C, as depicted in

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
Figure 14.31. It will not be needed.
Figure 14.31. Removing P8 Tube Assembly from Syringe Valve Port C

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
9. Disconnect the P15 tube assembly connecting port 2 on the drain valve to
reaction chamber 2, as depicted in Figure 14.32. It will not be needed.
Figure 14.32. P15 Tube Assembly Connecting Drain Valve Port 2 to Reaction Chamber 2
10. Disconnect the tube assembly at the select manifold port 2, as depicted in
Figure 14.33.
Select
Manifold
Port V2
Figure 14.33. Tube Assembly at Select Manifold Port V2

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
11. Remove the heater in reaction chamber 2 from the unit.
a. Remove the grommet from the HTR 2 hole in the chassis.
b. Loosen the nut securing the heater in the top of reaction chamber 2.
c. Remove the heater cartridge from reaction chamber 2.
d. Remove the heater cable from the grommet.
e. Slide the heater through the HTR 2 hole.
12. After all tube assemblies have been disconnected from chamber 2, remove the
chamber from both clips and set it aside. It will not be needed.
13. Remove the bottom clip on the chassis for chamber 2, as depicted in Figure 14.34.
It will not be needed.
Remove this
clip.
Figure 14.34. Reaction Chamber Tube Clips
14. Remove the metal insert plug located on the rear panel below the combustion
option label.
15. Remove the cover and top lid from the combustion assembly.
Set them aside for later use.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
16. Attach the combustion assembly on the rear chassis, as depicted in Figure 14.35.
First align the four slots on the combustion chassis with PEM nuts on the chassis,
then slide the assembly downward to lock it into place. Tighten the setscrew to
secure the assembly.
Furnace
Assembly Set
Screw
Figure 14.35. Furnace Assembly Mounted on Aurora
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the jumper from the connection prior to
connecting the thermocouple.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
17. Connect the furnace thermocouple to the TC outlet -TC/IO PCA (J17), located at
the top left of the combustion chassis, as depicted in Figure 14.36.
Figure 14.36. Connecting Furnace Thermocouple to J17 TC Outlet on TC/IO Board
18. Route the fan and furnace cable assemblies inside the chassis cut-out.
19. Connect the fan cable to J12 on the TC/IO board.
20. Connect the furnace cable to the required voltage per operation.
For 110 V, connect to J32. For 220 V, connect to J33. See Figure 14.37 for a photo
of these jumpers.
J32 for
110 VDC
J33 for
220 VDC
Figure 14.37. Connecting Furnace Assembly Power Cable

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
21. Remove the combustion tube from the startup kit and pack it according to the
instructions in Chapter 7, “Packing the Combustion Tube” on page 305.
22. Install the combustion tube according to the instructions in Chapter 7, “Installing
the Combustion Tube” on page 310.
23. Install the combustion cap with the 18-mm fitting and 18-mm TFE ferrule.
Tighten with wrenches provided in the startup kit.
Do not install the injector at this time.
24. Install the #6 x 3/8 standoff (PN A000810) in place of the lower tube clip. Use the
top PEM nut position, as depicted in Figure 14.38.
#6 Standoff in the
Top Position
Figure 14.38. #6 Standoff Installed in Top PEM Nut Position
25. Attach the ½" clip (PN 323679) onto the #6 standoff using a #6 screw (PN
207621) with #6 lock washer (PN 132654), as depicted in Figure 14.39.
1/2" Tube Clip

Installed
Figure 14.39. Half-Inch Tube Clip Installed

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
26. Attach the condensate chamber (PN 322947) into the tube clips in the chamber 2
position, as depicted in Figure 14.40.
Figure 14.40. Condensate Chamber in Place

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
27. Insert the tube assembly (PN 323979) through the top of the condensate chamber,
stopping about halfway down the chamber, as depicted in Figure 14.41.
Tube half-way down

condensate chamber.
Figure 14.41. Tube Placement in Condensate Chamber
28. Tighten the fitting on the top of the condensate chamber.
29. Route the other end of the tube assembly through the HTR 2 grommet and back
through the opening for the combustion option.
30. Replace the grommet in the HTR 2 hole.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
31. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323980) to syringe valve port C, as depicted in
Figure 14.42.
Figure 14.42. Tubing Assembly Connected to Syringe Valve Port C
32. Route the tubing assembly from syringe valve port C to the combustion
chamber.
This tubing assembly is routed through the opening above the valve and back
through the combustion option opening in the rear of the chassis.
Leave it disconnected until the furnace temperature is calibrated.
33. Connect a tube assembly (PN 323981) to the side port of the condensate
chamber and route through the grommet hole, as depicted in Figure 14.43, to
connect it to the expansion tube (PN 323978).

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
Figure 14.43. Tubing Assembly Connected to Side Port of Condensate Chamber and Routed to
Expansion Tube
NOTE: The expansion tube can be placed on the floor of the chassis or attached
with a clip (PN 321905) on the side of the syringe housing.
34. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323981) from the condensate chamber to the
expansion tube.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
35. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323982) to the bottom fitting of the condensate
chamber and to drain valve port 2, as depicted in Figure 14.44.
Figure 14.44. Condensate Chamber Connected to Drain Port 2
36. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323983) to the select manifold port 2 and route
through the HTR 2 grommet, as depicted in Figure 14.45.
Figure 14.45. Select Manifold Port 2 Tubing Assembly Routed to Expansion Tube

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
37. Connect the tube assembly from select manifold port 2 to the other end of the
expansion tube (PN 323978).
38. For combustion, install the green low-volume spindle (PN 322933) in place of the
current blue high-volume spindle (PN 322139).
a. Disconnect the fittings at the S1 and S2 ports on the syringe valve.
b. Remove the screw in the center hole.
c. Remove the high-volume spindle and place the low-volume spindle in its
stead.
d. Replace the screw in the center hole.
e. Connect the fitting on the outer edge of the spindle to S2 on the syringe valve.
f. Connect the other fitting to S1 on the syringe valve.
39. Install the furnace cover and leave the lid open.
40. For units without EFC:
a. disconnect the tube assembly (PN 324045) between the EPC port E and the
EFC blank top port at the EFC blank.
b. Install a Union fitting (PN 166274) to the tube assembly.
c. Insert a plug (A000267) into the open end of the Union fitting.
d. Insert a plug (A000267) into the open top port of the EFC blank.
41. Connect the power cord and turn on power to the instrument.
42. Press Maint  Heaters, Valves, Fans and set the furnace temperature to 680 °C.
43. Install the external thermocouple (PN 319617) into the center port on the
combustion cap to where the tip makes contact with the quartz chips.
For the optimal setting, it may be necessary to bury the tip of the thermocouple in
the quartz chips.
44. Connect the thermocouple to the thermocouple meter.
45. Once the temperature reaches 680 °C on the Aurora’s screen, view the
thermocouple meter’s reading.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
If the thermocouple meter’s temperature reading does not match the instrument
temperature:
a. Press Config  Advanced  Heaters and enter the value difference between
the two readings as the new heater offset.
b. Press Maint  Heaters and select Set Now.
46. Verify the display temperature is within 5 °C of the actual temperature. If not,
continue temperature calibration.
WARNING:The thermocouple is hot. Use care when removing.
47. Once the temperature has been set, record the thermocouple (TC) offset value.
48. Turn off power to the unit.
49. Install the injector (PN 324565) from the startup kit into the combustion cap,
Figure 14.46. Installing Injector into Combustion Cap

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
50. Install the tube assembly (PN 323980) into the combustion cap, as depicted in
Figure 14.47.
18-mm
Fitting Nuts
Combustion
Union Cap
Fittings
Figure 14.47. Combustion Cap with Syringe Valve Port C Tubing Assembly Connected
51. After all plumbing connections have been made, close the furnace lid and turn on
power to the instrument.
NOTE: Once the heater stabilizes, retighten the 18-mm fitting nuts, combustion
cap, and union fittings depicted in Figure 14.13. The conditioning for the
TFE ferrule usually takes 4–8 hours.
NOTE: Be sure to enter the new syringe volume in the system configuration.
52. Install the 2.5-mL syringe from the upgrade kit.
a. Remove the screw from the syringe shaft.
b. Press Maint  Syringe Pump.
c. Set the desired position to 10,000.
d. Unscrew the syringe and set aside.
e. Verify the TFE washer is still in place in the valve.
f. Install the 2.5-mL syringe into the valve and tighten.
g. Set the desired position to 0.
h. Reconnect the syringe shaft and tighten.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
NOTE: To convert to wet oxidation mode, follow the instructions in “Converting

from Combustion to Wet Oxidation Mode” on page 487 in this chapter.
Configuring the EPC and Select Manifold

Once the Aurora is converted to a 1030D, the EPC and the select manifold must be
configured. The following procedure outlines the how to do this.
1. On the select manifold, remove the 1/8" red tubing from the splitter between
ports V1 and V2, depicted in Figure 14.48.
Figure 14.48. Tubing Splitter Between Select Manifold Ports V1 and V2
2. Remove both smaller tube assemblies from both fitting barbs.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
3. Reconnect the 1/8" red tube to the V1 fitting barb, as depicted in Figure 14.49.
Figure 14.49. Single Tube Connected to Select Manifold Port V1
4. Remove the fitting barb from port V2.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
5. Remove the tube assembly between syringe valve port B1 and EPC port 2,
depicted in Figure 14.50, as it is not needed for combustion analysis.
Select Manifold Port 2
Syringe Port B1
Figure 14.50. Disconnecting Tube Assembly Between Select Manifold and Syringe Valve
6. Connect the new tube assembly (PN 323991) to EPC port 2.

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
7. Route the tubing through the chassis hole at the top left, as depicted in
Figure 14.51.
Figure 14.51. Tube Assembly Connected to EPC Port 2 and Routed to Tee Fitting
8. Connect the tube assembly from the EPC port 2 to the tee fitting (PN 323999), as
Figure 14.52. Tubing Assembly from EPC Port 2 Connected to Tee Fitting

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
9. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323992) to syringe valve port B1, as depicted in
Figure 14.53.
Figure 14.53. Tube Assembly Connected to Syringe Valve Port B1 and Routed to Tee Fitting
10. Route the tubing through the chassis.
NOTE: Before connecting the tube assembly from syringe valve port B1, install
the TFE washer (PN 323689), install the fitting duckbill (PN 323608).

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
11. Connect the tubing assembly from syringe valve port B1 to the tee fitting, as
Tubing Assembly from Syringe Valve

port B1, showing TFE washer installed.
Figure 14.54. Tubing Assembly from Syringe Valve Port B1 Connected to Tee Fitting

Rev. 5.0
Upgrade Procedures
12. Connect the tube assembly (PN 323993) to select manifold port V2 and connect
to the tee fitting, as depicted in Figure 14.55.
Tubing Assembly from Red Tubing to

Tee Fitting to Select Select Manifold
Manifold Port V2 Port V1
Figure 14.55. Tubing Assembly from Tee Fitting to Select Manifold Port V2

Rev. 5.0
Table of Contents
Notice .......................................................................................................................... ii
Limited Warranty ....................................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1: Introduction.................................................................................. 1
System Design..............................................................................................................1
Features ........................................................................................................................1
Specifications ...............................................................................................................2
Principal Applications ...........................................................................................2
General Specifications ...........................................................................................3
Performance Specifications ...................................................................................3
Power and Gas Requirements................................................................................4
Computer Requirements ........................................................................................4
Options...................................................................................................................5
Safety Information........................................................................................................5
Operator Precautions ............................................................................................6
General Precautions ...............................................................................................6
Chemical Precautions ............................................................................................6
Compressed Gas Cylinders Precautions ................................................................7
Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................7
Operating Parameters ...................................................................................................8
Hardware Configuration ........................................................................................8
Analysis Method....................................................................................................8
Sample Processing Sequence.................................................................................8
Definitions....................................................................................................................9
Analytical Procedures..........................................................................................11
Chapter 2: Instrument Components ........................................................... 15
Aurora TOC Analyzer................................................................................................15
Front View ...........................................................................................................15
Aurora Side Views...............................................................................................19
Total Bound Nitrogen (TNb) Module ..................................................................22
Autosamplers .......................................................................................................23
1088 Rotary Autosampler ............................................................................... 23
1096+ XYZ Autosampler ................................................................................ 24
Autocalibration/Stream Sequencer Module.........................................................25
Chapter 3: Installation.................................................................................. 28
General Information ...................................................................................................28
Internal and External Options..............................................................................28
User-Supplied Materials ......................................................................................28
Reagents...............................................................................................................29
Installing the Basic Unit.............................................................................................29
Network Installation...................................................................................................32
Removing Instrument Covers.....................................................................................32
Optional Components.................................................................................................33
Chapter 4: Aurora User Interface ................................................................ 34
Starting the Instrument ...............................................................................................34
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents v

Rev. 5.0
Powering Up and Logging On to the Aurora.......................................................34
Entering Data Using the Virtual Keyboards ..............................................................35
Virtual Keyboards................................................................................................36
Using the Virtual Keyboards ...............................................................................36
Navigating the User Interface ....................................................................................36
Sections ......................................................................................................................38
Monitor Section ...................................................................................................38
Monitor Section Tabs ...................................................................................... 39
Action Icons and Status Indicators .................................................................. 39
Monitor Section Action Icons ......................................................................40
Detector Signal Indicator .............................................................................41
Status Indicators ...........................................................................................41
Show Peak Graph .........................................................................................42
Alarms ..........................................................................................................43
Status Monitor Screen ..................................................................................... 44
Sequence Progress Status Indicators ............................................................44
Times Status Indicator ..................................................................................45
Current State Status Indicator ......................................................................45
Dial Gauges ..................................................................................................46
Monitor Sequence Tab .................................................................................... 47
Sample Monitor Screen ................................................................................... 48
Result Log Screen ........................................................................................... 49
Calibration Screen ........................................................................................... 50
Run Log Screen ............................................................................................... 51
Editor Section ......................................................................................................52
Editor Method Screen...................................................................................... 52
Primary Analysis Mode Section ...................................................................55
Remaining Calibration Dialog Box Sections ...............................................58
Calibration Pass/Fail Criteria Settings .........................................................61
Saving a Method.............................................................................................. 62
Deleting a Method ........................................................................................... 62
Editor Sequence Screen................................................................................... 63
Editor Sample IDs Screen ............................................................................... 66
Configuration Section..........................................................................................66
General Configuration Screen ......................................................................... 67
Adding a Configuration ................................................................................68
Basic Tab ......................................................................................................69
Built-In I/O ...................................................................................................71
External I/O ..................................................................................................72
Sample Intro Screen.............................................................................................74
1088 Rotary Autosampler Configuration ........................................................ 75
1096+ XYZ Autosampler Configuration ........................................................ 76
Sipper Configuration ....................................................................................... 77
Manual Syringe Configuration ........................................................................ 78
At-Line Autosampler Configuration ............................................................... 78
Advanced Configuration Screen..........................................................................79
Syringe Pump Settings .................................................................................... 80
CO2 Detector Settings ..................................................................................... 82
Solid State NDIR Detector ...........................................................................83
TNb Module..................................................................................................... 83
Heated Zones ................................................................................................... 84
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents vi

Rev. 5.0
Peak Detection Settings................................................................................... 85
Peak-Start Detection Parameters ..................................................................87
Peak-End Detection Parameters ...................................................................87
Peak Rejection Parameters ...........................................................................87
Drain Settings .................................................................................................. 87
RW/RB Settings .............................................................................................. 87
Reagent Water Weighting Factor .................................................................88
Reagent Blank Fixed Volume (mL) .............................................................88
System Configuration Screen ..............................................................................89
Automated Startup / Shutdown Settings ......................................................... 89
Reminders Settings.......................................................................................... 91
LIMS Settings.................................................................................................. 92
Preferences ...................................................................................................... 93
Next Boot Option ............................................................................................ 94
Network Settings ............................................................................................. 95
Set Date and Time ........................................................................................... 95
Stylus ............................................................................................................... 96
DTS Settings.................................................................................................... 97
OI Administrative Access ............................................................................... 97
EPC/EFC Settings ........................................................................................... 98
Printer Settings ................................................................................................ 98
CSV Settings ................................................................................................... 99
Maintenance Section............................................................................................99
Security and Auditing Section ...........................................................................100
Local User Settings ....................................................................................... 101
Local Audit Settings ...................................................................................... 101
Local Audit Log ............................................................................................ 102
Switch User Section...........................................................................................102
Chapter 5: Operation.................................................................................. 104
Starting the Aurora ...................................................................................................104
Powering Up and Logging On...........................................................................104
Entering Data Using the Virtual Keyboard .......................................................106
Monitoring Aurora Operation............................................................................106
Sequence Monitor Screen.............................................................................. 107
Sample Monitor Screen ................................................................................. 108
Result Log Monitor Screen ........................................................................... 111
Run Log Monitor Screen ............................................................................... 111
Signal Graph.................................................................................................. 112
Standalone Versus Networked Operation..........................................................113
Setting Up Local Users and Security Settings...................................................114
Switching Users .................................................................................................118
Preparing the Aurora for Sample Processing ...........................................................119
Defining and Managing Configurations ............................................................119
General Configuration Screen ....................................................................... 120
Basic Configuration Screen........................................................................... 121
Built-In I/O Configuration Screen................................................................. 123
External Expansion I/O Configuration Screen .............................................. 124
Defining and Managing Methods ......................................................................126
Setting Up Calibration of a New Method...................................................... 134
Defining and Managing Sequences ...................................................................134
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents vii

Rev. 5.0
Adding Samples to a Sequence ..................................................................... 135
Inserting Samples in the Middle of an Existing Sequence ............................ 137
Running Clean-up Samples ...............................................................................139
Calibrating the Aurora..............................................................................................140
Selecting the Primary Analysis Mode ...............................................................140
Setting Flow Rates for Gas Dilution..................................................................142
Configuring Calibration Calculations................................................................145
Auto-Generation of Standards ...........................................................................147
Defining Pass/Fail Criteria ................................................................................148
Reviewing and Modifying Calibrations.............................................................149
Processing Samples with the Aurora........................................................................153
Loading an Active Sequence .............................................................................153
Configuring Sample Introduction ......................................................................154
Controlling a Sequence......................................................................................154
Adding Priority Samples....................................................................................155
Monitoring Sample Results ...............................................................................158
Configuring Data Gathering and Data Transmission ........................................160
Using Customer IDs ..........................................................................................162
Using Sample IDs ..............................................................................................163
Outlier Removal and Alternate Methods...........................................................164
Alarms, Relays, and Analog Outputs ................................................................166
Serial Printer Output ..........................................................................................166
LIMS Interfaces .................................................................................................167
Advanced Settings and Controls ..............................................................................174
Advanced Sample Introduction Settings ...........................................................174
1088 Rotary Autosampler Settings................................................................ 175
1096+ XYZ Autosampler Settings ................................................................ 176
Sipper Settings............................................................................................... 176
Manual Syringe Settings ............................................................................... 177
At-Line Autosampler Settings....................................................................... 177
Automated Startup and Shutdown .....................................................................178
RW/RB Settings.................................................................................................179
Drain Settings ....................................................................................................180
Peak Detection Settings .....................................................................................181
Heated Zones Settings .......................................................................................181
Detector Settings................................................................................................182
Syringe Pump Settings.......................................................................................183
Maintenance and Self-Test Functions ......................................................................184
Changing Network Settings...............................................................................184
Tuning and Calibrating EFC and EPC...............................................................185
Reviewing the Instrument Log ..........................................................................185
Calibrating the Touchscreen ..............................................................................186
Administrative Settings .....................................................................................186
Recommended Settings for the Aurora 1030C ........................................................187
Chapter 6: Aurora 1030C Optional Equipment ........................................ 188
Safety Information....................................................................................................188
Safety Symbols ..................................................................................................188
General Information for the 1088 ......................................................................190
Specifications for the 1088............................................................................ 191
Sample Transfer Pathway.............................................................................. 191
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents viii

Rev. 5.0
Environmental Requirements for the 1088 ................................................... 191
Performance Specifications for the 1088 ...................................................... 192
Features of the 1088 ...................................................................................... 192
Safety Information .............................................................................................193
Operator Precautions for the 1088................................................................. 193
General Precautions for the 1088 .................................................................. 193
Installing the 1088 Autosampler........................................................................194
Required Materials for the 1088.................................................................... 194
Unpacking and Positioning the 1088............................................................. 194
1088 Plumbing Connections ......................................................................... 194
Septum Piercing or Pre-Acidification ........................................................... 195
Electrical Connections for the 1088 .............................................................. 195
Loading and Unloading the 1088 Carousel ................................................... 196
Loading and Unloading the 1088 Carousel While Running ......................196
Loading and Unloading the 1088 Carousel While Idle ..............................197
1088 Carousel Home Position ....................................................................... 197
Operating the 1088 Autosampler.......................................................................197
1088 Configuration Parameters..................................................................... 197
Programming Sampling Parameters for the 1088 ......................................... 199
Preparing the Carousel .................................................................................. 202
Using Sequences with the 1088..................................................................... 202
Maintenance for the 1088 Autosampler ............................................................203
Maintenance Dialog Box............................................................................... 203
1088 Parts Replacement Procedures ............................................................. 205
Replacing the Sample Transfer Line ..........................................................206
Replacing the Needle .................................................................................206
Replacing the Needle Sleeve ......................................................................206
Cleaning the Wash Bottle.............................................................................. 207
General Information for the 1096+....................................................................208
1096+ Operating Principle ............................................................................ 209
1096+ Specifications ..................................................................................... 209
Environmental Considerations for the 1096+ ............................................... 210
1096+ Requirements...................................................................................... 210
1096+ Features...................................................................................................210
1096+ Safety Information..................................................................................211
Operator Precautions ..................................................................................... 211
General Precautions....................................................................................... 211
Installing the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler ............................................................211
Unpacking the 1096+ Autosampler............................................................... 212
Assembling the 1096+ Autosampler ............................................................. 213
Installing the 1096+ Needle and Needle Sleeve ........................................217
Installing the 1096+ Sample Transfer and Sleeve Gas Transfer Lines ......217
Setting the Z-axis Travel ............................................................................217
Establishing Electrical Connections .............................................................. 218
Connecting the Wash Station ........................................................................ 219
Pumped Drain Arrangement ......................................................................219
Gravity Drain Arrangement .......................................................................222
Assembling and Placing Sample Vial Racks ................................................ 223
Operating Conditions for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler ...................................225
Starting the Autosampler ...................................................................................225
Flushing the Wash Station and Flow Path.........................................................226
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents ix

Rev. 5.0
Operating the 1096+ with the Aurora................................................................226
Configuration Parameters.............................................................................. 226
Programming Sampling Parameters for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler ........ 228
Shutting Down the Autosampler .......................................................................230
Maintenance for the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler .................................................231
Maintenance Dialog Box for 1096+ Autosampler ........................................ 231
Cleaning the Autosampler ............................................................................. 233
Daily External Cleaning .............................................................................233
Weekly Cleaning ........................................................................................234
Cleaning the Wash Bottle.............................................................................. 234
Checking for Leaks ....................................................................................... 234
Replacing 1096+ Autosampler Components .....................................................235
Replacing Peristaltic Pump Tubing ............................................................... 236
Replacing the Sample Transfer Line ............................................................. 236
Replacing the Needle..................................................................................... 236
Replacing the Needle Sleeve ......................................................................... 237
Replacing the Wash Station Tubing .............................................................. 237
Replacing the Sample Tray ........................................................................... 238
General Information for the External Expansion I/O Module...........................243
Items Required for Installation ..........................................................................245
Installing the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer and External Expansion I/
O Module..................................................................................................................245
Configuring the Aurora for the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer and Ex-
ternal Expansion I/O Module ...................................................................................250
Sampling from the At-Line Autosampler/Stream Sequencer............................252
General Information for the Serial Inkjet Printer ..............................................254
General Specifications for the Serial Inkjet Printer....................................... 254
Environmental Conditions for the Serial Inkjet Printer................................. 255
Requirements for the Serial Inkjet Printer..................................................... 255
Installing the Serial Inkjet Printer......................................................................255
Operating Principle of the TNb Module ............................................................256
Features of the TNb Module ..............................................................................257
Specifications for the TNb Module ....................................................................257
Performance of the TNb Module .......................................................................257
Range............................................................................................................. 257
Linearity ........................................................................................................ 258
Repeatability.................................................................................................. 258
TNb Module Components ..................................................................................258
Installing the TNb Module .................................................................................259
Unpacking the Module Kit ............................................................................ 259
Installing the Mounting Bracket.................................................................... 261
Installing the TNb Module and NOx Converter ............................................. 261
Configuring the TNb Module.............................................................................266
Method Development for TNb Analysis ............................................................269
Monitoring TNb Operation ................................................................................271
Operating Notes for the TNb Module................................................................273
Nitrogen Injection Volume Considerations................................................... 273
TNb Linearity................................................................................................. 274
General TNb Module Maintenance ...................................................................274
Replacing the NOx Converter Catalyst ..............................................................275
Aurora Flow Diagram with TNb Module ..........................................................281
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents x

Rev. 5.0
Combustion Furnace Assembly ...............................................................................282
Troubleshooting Optional Equipment......................................................................285
Troubleshooting the 1088 Autosampler ............................................................285
Troubleshooting the 1096+ XYZ Autosampler.................................................286
Troubleshooting the TNb Module......................................................................289
Poor Peak Shape ............................................................................................ 289
Poor Linearity................................................................................................ 290
Diminished TNb Signal ................................................................................. 290
Replacement Parts Lists for Optional Equipment ....................................................291
TNb Replacement Parts......................................................................................291
1088 Rotary Autosampler Replacement Parts...................................................292
1096+ XYZ Autosampler Replacement Parts ...................................................293
Chapter 7: Maintenance ............................................................................. 295
Maintaining the Aurora ............................................................................................295
Exterior Maintenance ...............................................................................................296
Cleaning the Touchscreen..................................................................................296
Maintaining the Acid Reagent Bottle ................................................................296
Maintaining the Rinse Bottles ...........................................................................296
Checking Gas Service........................................................................................296
Sanitation Procedures ........................................................................................296
Sanitation Procedure for the Aurora.............................................................. 297
Sanitation Procedure for the 1088 Rotary Autosampler ............................... 298
1096+ XYZ Autosampler .............................................................................. 299
Interior Maintenance ................................................................................................301
Checking the NDIR Offset ................................................................................301
Checking NDIR Linearization...........................................................................302
Maintaining the Permeation Tube ................................................................. 302
Packing the Combustion Tube...........................................................................304
Installing the Combustion Tube.........................................................................309
TIC Reaction Chamber ......................................................................................311
Tools Required .............................................................................................. 312
Procedure....................................................................................................... 312
Replacing the Sample Heater.............................................................................314
Tools Needed................................................................................................. 314
Instructions .................................................................................................... 314
Calibrating the Glass Heater..............................................................................321
Maintenance Screen .................................................................................................324
1088 Rotary Autosampler..................................................................................324
1096+ XYZ Autosampler ..................................................................................325
External Expansion I/O Module ........................................................................325
Syringe Pump.....................................................................................................326
Changing the Syringe .................................................................................... 327
Heaters, Valves, and Fans..................................................................................329
System Information ...........................................................................................330
System Counters ................................................................................................330
Diagnostic Tests.................................................................................................332
Self Test......................................................................................................... 332
Instrument Logs .................................................................................................333
Working with Log Entries ............................................................................. 334
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents xi

Rev. 5.0
Maintenance History Log .............................................................................. 335
Operator Log ................................................................................................. 336
OI Service Personnel Log.............................................................................. 337
EPC Calibration .................................................................................................338
EFC Calibration .................................................................................................339
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 342
System Performance Symptoms...............................................................................342
System Component Symptoms ................................................................................346
TOC Issues and Comments ......................................................................................348
Chapter 9: Flow Diagrams ......................................................................... 350
1030C Basic Diagrams.............................................................................................350
1030C Prime Mode ..................................................................................................353
1030C TIC/NPOC Mode..........................................................................................362
1030C Solid State NDIR Detector Flow Diagrams .................................................381
Chapter 10: Assembly Drawings............................................................... 384
Chapter 11: Replacement Parts ................................................................ 409
Aurora TOC Analyzer Parts.....................................................................................409
Part Number Lookup Table......................................................................................417
Chapter 12: Local Security and Auditing Details .................................... 426
Chapter 13: Advanced User Features....................................................... 434
Peak Detection Settings............................................................................................434
Detecting a Peak ................................................................................................434
Setting the Peak Maximum Parameters.............................................................437
Finding the Peak End.........................................................................................443
Method Development...............................................................................................446
Guidelines ..........................................................................................................446
Variables ............................................................................................................446
Carrier Gas Flow Rate ................................................................................... 446
Sample Size ................................................................................................... 447
Gas Dilution .................................................................................................. 447
Temperatures ................................................................................................. 448
Times ............................................................................................................. 448
Reagents and Acid......................................................................................... 448
Method Verification Techniques .......................................................................449
Serial Dilution ............................................................................................... 449
Matrix Spike Recovery.................................................................................. 449
TOC Method and Calibration Definition...........................................................449
Procedure....................................................................................................... 450
Sequence Development ............................................................................................456
Procedure ...........................................................................................................456
Instrument Calibration: Linear Regression ..............................................................458
Aurora 1030 Calibration Calculations......................................................................461
Calibration Curve...............................................................................................461
Standard Deviation and Relative Standard Deviation .......................................462
Linear Regression Using Weighted Least Squares............................................463
Response Factor ............................................................................................ 464
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents xii

Rev. 5.0
Mass of Sample ............................................................................................. 464
Check Standards ............................................................................................ 464
Chapter 14: Upgrade Procedures ............................................................. 466
Upgrading a 1030W Single Chamber Unit to a Combustion Mode Dual Unit........466
Configuring the EPC and Select Manifold for Combustion Analysis...............478
Calibrating the Heater........................................................................................489
Configuring the EPC and Select Manifold ........................................................508
Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Table of Contents xiii

Rev. 5.0

1030 Manualc

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1030 Manualc

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aurora 1030 Combustion

TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual

No part of this document may be reproduced, photocopied, or translated to another

Rev. 5.0 — August 2016

Ascarite is a registered trademark of Arthur H. Thomas Company.

OI Analytical Part Number 322704

THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,

Any service requests or questions should be directed to the OI Analytical Customer

• Determines TOC quantitatively in water, wastewater, chemical solutions, reagents,

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 1

• Sample-wetted parts consist entirely of inert materials to minimize carbon

• ASTM D7573 DIN/ISO8425/CEN EN 1484

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 2

Table 1.1. General Specifications for Aurora 1030C

Dimensions 43 cm (17 in) H x 46 cm (18 in) W x 61 cm (24 in)

Table 1.2. Performance Specifications for the Aurora 1030C

Analysis Modes NPOC internal

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 3

Table 1.2. Performance Specifications for the Aurora 1030C (Continued)

Power and Gas Requirements

Table 1.3. Power and Gas Requirements for Aurora 1030CW

Power 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Table 1.4. Computer Requirements for Aurora 1030C

Parameter Minimum Spec Recommended Spec

Computer type any Windows compatible Business-class workstation

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 4

Table 1.4. Computer Requirements for Aurora 1030C (Continued)

Parameter Minimum Spec Recommended Spec

Operating system * Windows 2000 Pro or Windows XP Pro or

A second NIC may be utilized to connect a 1030 TOC to the PC while

NOTE 3: If no RS-232 port is available, a USB-to-serial adapter may be used if

• 1088 Rotary Autosampler

These components are discussed in detail in Chapter 6, “Aurora 1030C Optional

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 5

• WARNING indicates a condition or possible situation that could result in physical

• CAUTION indicates a condition or possible situation that could damage or destroy

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 6

Any interruption of the grounding conductor or disconnection of the protective earth

• Disconnect the AC power cord before removing any covers.

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 7

Compressed Gas Cylinders Precautions

Warning/Caution, see accompanying instruction for more

Indicates a hot surface.

Indicates hazardous voltages.

Indicates earth (ground) terminal.

Indicates the OFF position on the power switch.

Indicates the ON position on the power switch.

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 8

Sample Processing Sequence

Total Carbon (TC)

Total Inorganic Carbon (TIC) Total Organic Carbon (TOC)

Dissolved Bicarbonate Carbonate Nonpurgeable Purgeable

Figure 1.1. Total Carbon Breakdown

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 9

Table 1.5. Carbon Definitions

Equation 1.1. TC = TOC + TIC

TIC The inorganic carbon in a water sample is an uncomplicated parameter.

DOC Dissolved organic carbon is determined by analyzing aqueous samples

Aurora 1030C TOC Analyzer Operator’s Manual: Chapter 1 10

RW Reagent water blank is the response of the analyzer to the carbon

Equation 1.3. NPOC = DOC + SOC

When compared to TOC, NPOC is missing the organic carbon in water

Equation 1.4. TOC = POC + NPOC